Nissan 2021 ROGUE SPORT SL FWD XTRONIC CVT® User Manual

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

2021 ROGUE SPORT

OWNER’S MANUAL

and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

WARNING

Operating, servicing and main-

taining a passenger vehicle or

off-highway motor vehicle can

expose you to chemicals in-

cluding engine exhaust, carbon

monoxide, phthalates, and

lead, which are known to the

State of California to cause

cancer and birth defects or

other reproductive harm. To

minimize exposure, avoid

breathing exhaust, do not idle

the engine except as neces-

sary, service your vehicle in a

well-ventilated area and wear

gloves or wash your hands

frequently when servicing your

vehicle. For more information

go to www.P65Warnings.ca.

gov/passenger-vehicle.

This manual was prepared to help you

understand the operation and mainte-

nance of your vehicle so that you may

enjoy many miles of driving pleasure.

Please read through this manual before

operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Book-

let explains details about the warranties

covering your vehicle. Additionally, a

separate Customer Care/Lemon Law

Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to

resolve any concerns you may have

with your vehicle, as well as clarify your

rights under your state’s lemon law.

In addition to factory installed options,

your vehicle may also be equipped with

additional accessories installed by NISSAN

or by your NISSAN dealer prior to delivery.

It is important that you familiarize your-

self with all disclosures, warnings, cau-

tions and instructions concerning proper

use of such accessories prior to operating

the vehicle and/or accessory. It is recom-

mended you see a NISSAN dealer for

details concerning the particular acces-

sories with which your vehicle is

equipped.

Your NISSAN dealer knows your vehicle

best. When you require any service or

have any questions, we will be glad to

assist you with the extensive resources

available to us.

READ FIRST — THEN DRIVE SAFELY

Before driving your vehicle, read your

Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure

familiarity with controls and maintenance

requirements, assisting you in the safe

operation of your vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION

REMINDERS!

Follow these important driving rules

to help ensure a safe and comforta-

ble trip for you and your passengers!

. NEVER drive under the influence

of alcohol or drugs.

. ALWAYS observe posted speed

limits and never drive too fast

for conditions.

. ALWAYS give your full attention to

driving and avoid using vehicle

features or taking other actions

that could distract you.

. ALWAYS use your seat belts and

appropriate child restraint sys-

tems. Pre-teen children should

be seated in the rear seat.

. ALWAYS provide information

about the proper use of vehicle

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION

65 WARNING

Foreword

safety features to all occupants

of the vehicle.

. ALWAYS review this Owner’s Man-

ual for important safety informa-

tion.

On-pavement and off-road

driving

This vehicle will handle and maneuver

differently from an ordinary passenger

car because it has a higher center of

gravity. As with other vehicles with

features of this type, failure to operate

this vehicle correctly may result in loss

of control or an accident. Be sure to

read “Avoiding collision and rollover”

and “Driving safety precautions” in the

“5. Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHI-

CLE

This vehicle should not be modified.

Modification could affect its perfor-

mance, safety or durability, and may

even violate governmental regula-

tions. In addition, damage or perfor-

mance problems resulting from

modification may not be covered un-

der NISSAN warranties.

WARNING

Installing an aftermarket On-Board

Diagnostic (OBD) plug-in device that

uses the port during normal driving,

for example remote insurance com-

pany monitoring, remote vehicle di-

agnostics, telematics or engine

reprogramming, may cause interfer-

ence or damage to vehicle systems.

We do not recommend or endorse

the use of any aftermarket OBD

plug-in devices, unless specifically

approved by NISSAN. The vehicle

warranty may not cover damage

caused by any aftermarket plug-in

device.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

This manual includes information for all

features and equipment available on

this model. Features and equipment in

your vehicle may vary depending on

model, trim level, options selected, or-

der, date of production, region or avail-

ability. Therefore, you may find

information about features or equip-

ment that are not included or installed

on your vehicle.

All information, specifications and illustra-

tions in this manual are those in effect at

the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the

right to change specifications, perfor-

mance, design or component suppliers

without notice and without obligation.

From time to time, NISSAN may update

or revise this manual to provide Owners

with the most accurate information cur-

rently available. Please carefully read and

retain with this manual all revision up-

dates sent to you by NISSAN to ensure

you have access to accurate and up-to-

date information regarding your vehicle.

Current versions of vehicle Owner’s Man-

uals and any updates can also be found in

the Owner section of the NISSAN website

at https://owners.nissanusa.com/now-

ners/navigation/manualsGuide. If you

have questions concerning any informa-

tion in your Owner’s Manual, contact

NISSAN Consumer Affairs. See the NISSAN

CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM page in this

Owner’s Manual for contact information.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT

THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this

manual. They are used in the following

ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence

of a hazard that could cause death or

serious personal injury. To avoid or

reduce the risk, the procedures must

be followed precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence

of a hazard that could cause minor

or moderate personal injury or da-

mage to your vehicle. To avoid or

reduce the risk, the procedures must

be followed carefully.

SIC0697

If you see the symbol above, it means “Do

not do this” or “Do not let this happen”.

If you see a symbol similar to those above

in an illustration, it means the arrow

points to the front of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to

those above indicate movement or ac-

tion.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to

those above call attention to an item in

the illustration.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVI-

SORY

Some vehicle parts, such as lithium

batteries, may contain perchlorate ma-

terial. The following advisory is pro-

vided: “Perchlorate Material - special

handling may apply, see www.dtsc.ca.

gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”

Manual may be reproduced or stored in a

retrieval system, or transmitted in any

form, or by any means, electronic, me-

chanical, photocopying, recording or

otherwise, without the prior written per-

mission of Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.

NISSAN CARES ...

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your

NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and

service needs.

However, if there is something that your

NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or

you would like to provide NISSAN directly

with comments or questions, please con-

tact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Depart-

ment using our toll-free number:

For U.S. customers

1-800-NISSAN-1

(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers

1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will

ask for the following information:

. Your name, address, and telephone

number

. Vehicle identification number (at-

tached to the top of the instrument

panel on the driver’s side)

. Date of purchase

. Current odometer reading

. Your NISSAN dealer’s name

. Your comments or questions

You can write to NISSAN with the infor-

mation at:

For U.S. customers

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

or via e-mail at:

nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa.

com

For Canadian customers

Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

or via e-mail at:

information.centre@nissancana-

da.com

If you prefer, visit us at:

www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers)

www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN

and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN

vehicle.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

Illustrated table of contents

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint

system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone

systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Do-it-yourself

Maintenance and schedules

Technical and consumer information

Table of

Contents

Index

0 Illustrated table of contents

Seats, seat belts and Supplemental Restraint

System (SRS) ..................................................................................... 0-2

Exterior front .................................................................................... 0-3

Exterior rear ...................................................................................... 0-4

Passenger compartment ....................................................... 0-5

Cockpit .................................................................................................. 0-6

Instrument panel ......................................................................... 0-7

Meters and gauges .................................................................... 0-8

Engine compartment ............................................................... 0-9

MR20DD engine model .................................................. 0-9

Warning and indicator lights ........................................... 0-10

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

WAA0116X

1. Supplemental front-impact air bags

(P.1-42)

2. Occupant classification sensors (weight

sensors) (P.1-42)

3. Seat belts (P.1-12)

4. Head restraints (P.1-8)

5. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bags (P.1-42)

6. Driver and front passenger supplemental

knee air bags (P.1-42)

7. Front seats (P.1-4)

8. Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bags (P.1-42)

9. Seat belt pretensioner (P.1-60)

10. Rear seats (P.1-7)

— Child restraints (P.1-21)

11. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system (for rear seats) (P.1-24)

12. Child restraint anchor point (for top tether

strap) (P.1-37)

13. Rear outboard seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bags (P.1-42)

SEATS, SEAT BELTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL

RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

WAA0115X

1. Hood (P.3-25)

2. Windshield wiper and washer

— Switch operation (P.2-48)

— Window washer fluid (P.8-10)

3. Front camera* (P.2-43, P.5-35, P.5-40,

P.5-64, P.5-97)

4. Moonroof* (P.2-78)

5. Power windows (P.2-76)

6. Side turn signal light* (P.2-58)

7. Front view camera* (P.4-10)

8. Headlights and turn signal lights (P.2-52)

9. Fog lights* (P.2-59)

10. Tires

— Wheels and tires (P.8-29, P.10-7)

— Flat tire (P.6-3)

— Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) (P.2-14, P.5-5)

11. Outside mirrors (P.3-33)

12. Side view camera* (P.4-10)

13. Doors

— Keys (P.3-2)

— Door locks (P.3-5)

— Intelligent Key system* (P.3-11)

— Remote keyless entry system* (P.3-7)

— Security system (P.2-45)

— Remote engine start* (P.3-23)

*: if so equipped

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

EXTERIOR FRONT

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

WAA0053X

1. Rear window defroster (P.2-51)

2. Rear window wiper and washer

— Switch operation (P.2-50)

— Window washer fluid (P.8-10)

3. High-mounted stop light (P.8-25)

4. Antenna (P.4-34)

5. Roof rack* (P.2-75)

6. Rear sonar

— Rear Sonar System (RSS) (P.5-136)

— Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) (P.5-116)

7. Liftgate (P.3-26)

— Intelligent Key system* (P.3-11)

— Remote keyless entry system* (P.3-7)

— Rear view camera* (P.4-2, P.4-10)

8. Rear combination light (P.8-25)

9. Fuel-filler door (P.3-28)

— Fuel information (P.10-3)

10. Child safety rear door locks (P.3-7)

*: if so equipped

EXTERIOR REAR

JVC1067X

1. Inside mirror (P.3-32)

— HomeLink® Universal Transceiver*

(P.2-83)

2. Sunglasses holder (P.2-72)

3. Map lights (P.2-81)

— Microphone**

4. Moonroof switch* (P.2-78)

5. Emergency Call (SOS) button* (P.2-67)

6. Sun visors (P.3-31)

7. Room light (P.2-82)

8. Rear armrest* (P.1-8)

— Rear cup holders (P.2-69)

9. Door armrest

— Power window switch (P.2-76)

— Power door lock switch (P.3-6)

— Outside rearview mirror remote control

switch (driver’s side) (P.3-33)

10. Front cup holders (P.2-69)

11. Heated seat switch* (P.2-60)

12. Console box (P.2-71)

— Power outlet (P.2-65)

— USB (Universal Serial Bus) charging

connector (P.2-66)

13. Cargo area

— Storage* (P.2-69)

— Luggage hooks (P.2-73)

— Parcel shelf* (P.2-73)

— Spare tire* (P.6-3)

— Emergency tire puncture repair kit*

(P.6-3)

— Cargo light (P.2-83)

*: if so equipped

**: Refer to the separate NissanConnect®

Owner’s Manual (if so equipped).

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

WAA0118X

1. Instrument brightness control (P.2-9)

2. TRIP RESET switch (P.2-6)

3. Headlight and turn signal switch (P.2-52)/

Fog light switch* (P.2-59)

4. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left

side)

— Audio control**

— Vehicle information display control

(P.2-20)

5. Steering wheel (P.3-30)

— Horn (P.2-59)

6. Wiper and washer switch (P.2-48)

7. Hazard indicator flasher switch (P.6-2)

8. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right

side)

— Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)

(P.5-40)

— Cruise control switches* (P.5-62)

— ProPILOT assist* (P.5-64)

— Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys-

tem**

— Voice Recognition system switch**

— Siri® Eyes Free**

9. Shift lever

— Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) (P.5-20)

— Manual Transmission (MT) (P.5-25)

10. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch

(P.2-62)

11. Heated steering wheel switch* (P.2-59)

12. Parking brake (Pedal type) (P.5-27)

13. Intelligent 4x4 LOCK switch* (P.2-63)

14. Steering assist switch* (models with Pro-

PILOT assist) (P.2-62, P.5-64) or Dynamic

driver assistance switch* (models without

ProPILOT assist) (P.2-61, P.5-40)

15. SPORT mode switch* (P.5-32)

16. ECO switch (P.5-32)

17. Push-button ignition switch (model with

Intelligent Key system) (P.5-14)

18. Ignition switch (model without Intelligent

Key system) (P.5-12)

19. Parking brake (Switch type) (P.5-27)

20. Automatic brake hold switch* (P.5-29)

*: if so equipped

**: See the separate NissanConnect® Own-

er’s Manual (if so equipped).

COCKPIT

WAA0119X

1. Side ventilator (P.4-25)

2. Meters and gauges (P.2-5)/Clock (P.2-42)

3. Center ventilator (P.4-25)

4. Audio system** or navigation system**

— RearView Monitor* (P.4-2)

— Intelligent Around View® Monitor*

(P.4-10)

— Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys-

tem**

5. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P.1-42)

6. Fuse box cover (P.8-20)

7. Fuel-filler door release handle (P.3-28)

8. Hood release handle (P.3-25)

9. Steering wheel lock lever (P.3-30)

10. Driver’s front-impact air bag (P.1-42)/Horn

(P.2-59)

11. Driver supplemental knee air bag (P.1-42)

12. Heater/air conditioner control (P.4-26)

13. Auxiliary input jack** and USB connection

port**

14. Power outlet (P.2-65)

15. Defroster switch (P.2-51)

16. Front passenger supplemental knee air

bag (P.1-42)

17. Glove box (P.2-71)

*: if so equipped

**: See the separate NissanConnect® Own-

er’s Manual (if so equipped).

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

INSTRUMENT PANEL

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

JVC0581X

1. Tachometer (P.2-7)

2. Warning/indicator lights (P.2-10)

3. Vehicle information display (P.2-19)

— Odometer/twin trip odometer (P.2-6)

4. Speedometer (P.2-6)

5. Engine coolant temperature gauge (P.2-7)

6. Fuel gauge (P.2-8)

METERS AND GAUGES

WAA0211X

MR20DD ENGINE MODEL

1. Engine coolant reservoir (P.8-5)

2. Engine oil filler cap (P.8-6)

3. Brake and clutch* fluid reservoir (P.8-9)

4. Air cleaner (P.8-15)

5. Window washer fluid reservoir (P.8-10)

6. Drive belt (P.8-13)

7. Engine oil dipstick (P.8-6)

8. Battery (P.8-11)

9. Fuse/fusible link box (P.8-18)

*: For Manual Transmission (MT) Model

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

Red light Name

Page

Brake warning light

2-11

Charge warning light

2-12

Electronic parking brake

indicator light (if so

equipped)

2-12

Master warning light

2-12

Seat belt warning light and

chime

2-12

Security indicator light

2-13

Supplemental air bag

warning light

2-13

Yellow

light

Name

Page

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK

indicator light (if so

equipped)

2-13

Anti-lock Braking System

(ABS) warning light

2-13

Automatic Emergency

Braking (AEB) system

warning light

2-14

Electric power steering

warning light

2-14

Electronic parking brake

warning light (if so

equipped)

2-14

Low tire pressure warning

light

2-14

Master warning light

2-16

Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL)

2-16

Rear Automatic Braking

(RAB) system warning light

2-17

Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) off indicator light

2-17

Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) warning light

2-17

Other

light

Name

Page

Automatic brake hold indi-

cator light (green) (if so

equipped)

2-17

Automatic brake hold indi-

cator light (white) (if so

equipped)

2-17

Exterior light indicator

2-18

Front fog light indicator

light (if so equipped)

2-18

High beam assist indicator

light

2-18

High beam indicator light

2-18

Turn signal/hazard indica-

tor lights

2-18

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

1 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supple-
mental restraint system
Seats ....................................................................................................... 1-3
Front seats .................................................................................. 1-4
Rear seats .................................................................................... 1-7
Armrest (if so equipped) ................................................... 1-8
Head restraints/headrests .................................................... 1-8
Adjustable head
restraint/headrest components ................................ 1-9
Non-adjustable head
restraint/headrest components ................................ 1-9
Remove ....................................................................................... 1-10
Install............................................................................................. 1-10
Adjust............................................................................................ 1-10
Seat belts ......................................................................................... 1-12
Precautions on seat belt usage .............................. 1-12
Seat belt warning light and chime ....................... 1-14
Pregnant women ................................................................ 1-15
Injured persons ..................................................................... 1-15
Three-point type seat belt with retractor ...... 1-15
Seat belt extenders ........................................................... 1-18
Seat belt maintenance ................................................... 1-18
Child safety ..................................................................................... 1-19
Infants .......................................................................................... 1-19
Small children ........................................................................ 1-20
Larger children ...................................................................... 1-20
Child restraints ........................................................................... 1-21
Precautions on child restraints ............................. 1-22
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(LATCH) system .................................................................. 1-24
Rear-facing child restraint installation
using LATCH ......................................................................... 1-26
Rear-facing child restraint installation using
the seat belts ....................................................................... 1-28
Forward-facing child restraint installation
using LATCH ......................................................................... 1-31
Forward-facing child restraint installation
using the seat belts ........................................................ 1-34
Booster seats....................................................................... 1-38
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ..................... 1-42
Precautions on SRS ........................................................ 1-42
NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats) ........................................................................... 1-48
Driver and front passenger supplemental
knee air bag .......................................................................... 1-57
Front and rear outboard seat-mounted
side-impact supplemental air bag and roof-
mounted curtain side-impact and rollover
supplemental air bag systems .............................. 1-59
Seat belts with pretensioners (front and
rear outboard seats) ...................................................... 1-60

Supplemental air bag warning labels ................ 1-61

Supplemental air bag warning light .................... 1-62

Repair and replacement procedure .................. 1-63

SSS0133

WARNING

. Do not ride in a moving vehicle

when the seatback is reclined.

This can be dangerous. The

shoulder belt will not be against

your body. In an accident, you

could be thrown into it and re-

ceive neck or other serious inju-

ries. You could also slide under

the lap belt and receive serious

internal injuries.

. For the most effective protection

when the vehicle is in motion, the

seat should be upright. Always sit

well back and upright in the seat

with both feet on the floor and

adjust the seat properly. See

“Precautions on seat belt usage”

(P.1-12).

. After adjustment, gently rock in

the seat to make sure it is se-

curely locked.

. Do not leave children unattended

inside the vehicle. They could

unknowingly activate switches

or controls. Unattended children

could become involved in serious

accidents.

. To help avoid risk of injury or

death through unintended opera-

tion of the vehicle and/or its

systems, do not leave children,

people who require the assis-

tance of others or pets unat-

tended in your vehicle.

Additionally, the temperature in-

side a closed vehicle on a warm

day can quickly become high

enough to cause a significant risk

of injury or death to people and

pets.

. Do not adjust the driver’s seat

while driving so full attention may

be given to vehicle operation. The

seat may move suddenly and

could cause loss of control of

the vehicle.

. The seatback should not be re-

clined any more than needed for

comfort. Seat belts are most ef-

fective when the passenger sits

well back and straight up in the

seat. If the seatback is reclined,

the risk of sliding under the lap

belt and being injured is in-

creased.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

SEATS

1-4 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

CAUTION

When adjusting the seat positions,

be sure not to contact any moving

parts to avoid possible injuries and/

or damage.

JVR0332X

FRONT SEATS

Front manual seat adjustment

Forward and backward:

1. Pull up the adjusting lever

2. Slide the seat to the desired position.

3. Release the adjusting lever to lock the

seat in position.

Reclining:

1. Pull up the adjusting lever

2. Tilt the seatback to the desired posi-

tion.

3. Release the adjusting lever to lock the

seatback in position.

The reclining feature allows the adjust-

ment of the seatback for occupants of

different sizes to help obtain the proper

seat belt fit. (See “Seat belts” (P.1-12).)

The seatback may be reclined to allow

occupants to rest when the vehicle is

parked.

JVR0333X

Seat lifter (if so equipped):

Pull up or push down the adjusting lever

to adjust the seat height until the desired

position is achieved.

Front power seat adjustment

Operating tips:

. The power seat motor has an auto-

reset overload protection circuit. If the

motor stops during the seat adjust-

ment, wait 30 seconds, then reacti-

vate the switch.

. To avoid discharge of the battery, do

not operate the power seats for a long

period of time when the engine is not

running.

See “Memory Seat” (P.3-34).

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

1-6 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

JVR0334X

Forward and backward:

Move forward or backward the adjusting

switch

to the desired position.

Reclining:

Move forward or backward the adjusting

switch

to the desired position.

The reclining feature allows the adjust-

ment of the seatback for occupants of

different sizes to help obtain the proper

seat belt fit. (See “Seat belts” (P.1-12).)

The seatback may be reclined to allow

occupants to rest when the vehicle is

parked.

JVR0119X

Seat lifter (if so equipped):

Move the switch as shown to adjust the

seat height until the desired position is

achieved.

SSS1053

Lumbar support (if so equipped):

The lumbar support feature provides low-

er back support to the driver.

Push the switch as shown to adjust the

seat lumbar area until the desired posi-

tion is achieved.

JVR0467X

REAR SEATS

Folding

1. Pull up the lever and fold the seatback

flat.

2. To return the seats to a seating

position, push up on the seatback

until it latches in place.

WARNING

. Never allow anyone to ride in the

cargo area or on the rear seats

when they are in the fold-down

position. Use of these areas by

passengers without proper re-

straints could result in serious

injury in an accident or sudden

stop.

. Do not fold down the rear seats

when occupants are in the rear

seat area or any cargo is on the

rear seats.

. Properly secure all cargo to help

prevent it from sliding or shifting.

Do not place cargo higher than

the seatbacks.

. When returning the seatbacks to

the upright position, be certain

they are completely secured in

the latched position. If they are

not completely secured, passen-

gers may be injured in an acci-

dent or sudden stop.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

1-8 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

JVR0327X

Rear seats

ARMREST (if so equipped)

Pull the armrest down as shown.

WARNING

Head restraint/headrest supplement

the other vehicle safety systems.

They may provide additional protec-

tion against injury in certain rear end

collisions. Adjustable head re-

straints/headrests must be adjusted

properly, as specified in this section.

Check the adjustment after someone

else uses the seat. Do not attach

anything to the head restraint/head-

rest stalks or remove the head re-

straint/headrest. Do not use the seat

if the head restraint/headrest has

been removed. If the head restraint/

headrest was removed, reinstall and

properly adjust the head restraint/

headrest before an occupant uses

the seating position. Failure to follow

these instructions can reduce the

effectiveness of the head restraint/

headrest. This may increase the risk

of serious injury or death in a colli-

sion.

JVR0530X

The illustration shows the seating posi-

tions equipped with head restraint/head-

rest.

Indicates the seating position is

equipped with a head restraint.

Indicates the seating position is

equipped with a headrest.

+ Indicates the seating position is not

equipped with a head restraint or head-

rest.

. Your vehicle is equipped with a head

restraint/headrest that may be inte-

grated, adjustable or non-adjustable.

. Adjustable head restraints/headrests

have multiple notches along the stalk

to lock them in a desired adjustment

HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS

position.

. The non-adjustable head restraints/

headrests have a single locking notch

to secure them to the seat frame.

. Proper Adjustment:

— For the adjustable type, align the

head restraint/headrest so the

center of your ear is approximately

level with the center of the head

restraint/headrest.

— If your ear position is still higher

than the recommended alignment,

place the head restraint/headrest

at the highest position.

. If the head restraint/headrest has

been removed, ensure that it is re-

installed and locked in place before

riding in that designated seating posi-

tion.

SSS0992

ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/

HEADREST COMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Multiple notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

JVR0203X

NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD RE-

STRAINT/HEADREST COMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Single notch

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

1-10 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS1037

REMOVE

Use the following procedure to remove

the head restraint/headrest.

1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to

the highest position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the head restraint/headrest

from the seat.

4. Store the head restraint/headrest

properly in a secure place so it is not

loose in the vehicle.

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head

restraint/headrest before an occu-

pant uses the seating position.

SSS1038

INSTALL

1. Align the head restraint/headrest

stalks with the holes in the seat. Make

sure that the head restraint/headrest

is facing the correct direction. The

stalk with the adjustment notch

must be installed in the hole with the

lock knob

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push

the head restraint/headrest down.

3. Properly adjust the head restraint/

headrest before an occupant uses

the seating position.

SSS0997

ADJUST

For adjustable head restraint/headrest

Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the

center is level with the center of your ears.

If your ear position is still higher than the

recommended alignment, place the head

restraint/headrest at the highest posi-

tion.

JVR0259X

For non-adjustable head restraint/

headrest

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is

positioned so the lock knob is engaged in

the notch before riding in that designated

seating position.

SSS0993

Raise

To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull

it up.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is

positioned so the lock knob is engaged in

the notch before riding in that designated

seating position.

SSS0994

Lower

To lower, push and hold the lock knob

and push the head restraint/headrest

down.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is

positioned so the lock knob is engaged in

the notch before riding in that designated

seating position.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

1-12 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE

If you are wearing your seat belt properly

adjusted, and you are sitting upright and

well back in your seat with both feet on

the floor, your chances of being injured or

killed in an accident and/or the severity of

injury may be greatly reduced. NISSAN

strongly encourages you and all of your

passengers to buckle up every time you

drive, even if your seating position in-

cludes a supplemental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian pro-

vinces or territories specify that seat

belts be worn at all times when a

vehicle is being driven.

SSS0136

SSS0134

SEAT BELTS

SSS0016

SSS0014

WARNING

. Every person who drives or rides

in this vehicle should use a seat

belt at all times. Children should

be properly restrained in the rear

seat and, if appropriate, in a child

restraint.

. The seat belt should be properly

adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to

do so may reduce the effective-

ness of the entire restraint sys-

tem and increase the chance or

severity of injury in an accident.

Serious injury or death can occur

if the seat belt is not worn prop-

erly.

. Always route the shoulder belt

over your shoulder and across

your chest. Never put the belt

behind your back, under your

arm or across your neck. The belt

should be away from your face

and neck, but not falling off your

shoulder.

. Position the lap belt as low and

snug as possible AROUND THE

HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. A lap belt

worn too high could increase the

risk of internal injuries in an

accident.

. Be sure the seat belt tongue is

securely fastened to the proper

buckle.

. Do not wear the seat belt inside

out or twisted. Doing so may

reduce its effectiveness.

. Do not allow more than one

person to use the same seat belt.

. Never carry more people in the

vehicle than there are seat belts.

. If the seat belt warning light

glows continuously while the

ignition is turned ON with all

doors closed and all seat belts

fastened, it may indicate a mal-

function in the system. Have the

system checked. It is recom-

mended you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

. No changes should be made to

the seat belt system. For exam-

ple, do not modify the seat belt,

add material, or install devices

that may change the seat belt

routing or tension. Doing so may

affect the operation of the seat

belt system. Modifying or tam-

pering with the seat belt system

may result in serious personal

injury.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

1-14 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

. Once a seat belt pretensioner has

activated, it cannot be reused and

must be replaced together with

the retractor. It is recommended

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

. All seat belt assemblies, including

retractors and attaching hard-

ware, should be inspected after

any collision. It is recommended

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service. NISSAN recommends that

all seat belt assemblies in use

during a collision be replaced

unless the collision was minor

and the belts show no damage

and continue to operate properly.

Seat belt assemblies not in use

during a collision should also be

inspected and replaced if either

damage or improper operation is

noted.

. All child restraints and attaching

hardware should be inspected

after any collision. Always follow

the restraint manufacturer’s in-

spection instructions and repla-

cement recommendations. The

child restraints should be re-

placed if they are damaged.

JVR0575X

SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT AND

CHIME

The driver and front passenger seats are

equipped with an enhanced seat belt

reminder function. If your vehicle is

equipped with an enhanced seat belt

reminder function, a visual and audible

alert will operate if a driver or front

passenger seat belt is unbuckled at

speeds of approximately 10 MPH (15

km/h) or more under the following con-

ditions:

. If the driver seat belt is not fastened.

. The front passenger’s seat belt is not

fastened and the seat is occupied by a

passenger for 7 seconds after the

ignition switch is placed in the ON

position.

. The front passenger’s seat belt is not

fastened and objects or external force

on the passenger seat change the

seat belt reminder classification to

“occupied”.

The seat belt warning light will flash

under the conditions shown above until

the necessary seat belt is securely fas-

tened.

A warning chime will sound for approxi-

mately 95 seconds or until one of the

following conditions is met:

. The unbuckled front passenger’s seat

belt is securely fastened.

. The seat belt reminder function in the

front passenger seat no longer de-

tects that the front passenger seat is

occupied.

. The ignition switch is turned off.

The below situations could result in the

seat belt warning light being illuminated

and the chime sounding, even with no

occupant present in the passenger seat:

. Heavy objects placed on the seat.

. Someone pushing or pulling on the

front passenger seat.

. An object placed under the front

passenger seat.

. An object placed between the seat

cushion and center console or be-

tween the seat cushion and the door.

. An object hanging on the seat or

placed in the seatback pocket (If so

equipped).

. A child restraint or other object press-

ing against the rear of the seatback.

PREGNANT WOMEN

NISSAN recommends that pregnant wo-

men use seat belts. The seat belt should

be worn snug, and always position the lap

belt as low as possible around the hips,

not the waist. Place the shoulder belt over

your shoulder and across your chest.

Never put the lap/shoulder belt over your

abdominal area. Contact your doctor for

specific recommendations.

INJURED PERSONS

NISSAN recommends that injured persons

use seat belts, depending on the injury.

Check with your doctor for specific re-

commendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT

WITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

. Every person who drives or rides

in this vehicle should use a seat

belt at all times. Children should

be in the rear seats and in an

appropriate restraint.

. Do not ride in a moving vehicle

when the seatback is reclined.

This can be dangerous. The

shoulder belt will not be against

your body. In an accident, you

could be thrown into it and re-

ceive neck or other serious inju-

ries. You could also slide under

the lap belt and receive serious

internal injuries.

. For the most effective protection

when the vehicle is in motion, the

seat should be upright. Always sit

well back and upright in the seat

with both feet on the floor and

adjust the seat belt properly.

. Do not allow children to play with

the seat belts. Most seating posi-

tions are equipped with Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR)

mode seat belts. If the seat belt

becomes wrapped around a

child’s neck with the ALR mode

activated, the child can be ser-

iously injured or killed if the seat

belt retracts and becomes tight.

This can occur even if the vehicle

is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt

to release the child. If the seat

belt can not be unbuckled or is

already unbuckled, release the

child by cutting the seat belt with

a suitable tool (such as a knife or

scissors) to release the seat belt.

Fastening the seat belts

1. Adjust the seat. (See “Seats” (P.1-3).)

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

1-16 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

JVR0572X

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the

retractor and insert the tongue into

the buckle

until you hear and feel

the latch engage.

The retractor is designed to lock

during a sudden stop or on im-

pact. A slow pulling motion per-

mits the belt to move and allows

you some freedom of movement

in the seat.

If the seat belt cannot be pulled

from its fully retracted position,

firmly pull the belt and release it.

Then smoothly pull the belt out of

the retractor.

JVR0573X

3. Position the lap belt portion low and

snug on the hips

as shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward

the retractor to take up extra slack

Be sure the shoulder belt is routed

over your shoulder and across your

chest.

The three-point seat belts in the front

passenger seat and the rear seating

positions have two modes of operation:

. Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

. Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

mode allows the seat belt to extend and

retract to allow the driver and passengers

some freedom of movement in the seat.

The ELR locks the seat belt when the

vehicle slows down rapidly or during

certain impacts.

The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

mode (child restraint mode) locks the

seat belt for child restraint installation.

When ALR mode is activated the seat belt

cannot be extended again until the seat

belt tongue is detached from the buckle

and fully retracted. The seat belt returns

to the ELR mode after the seat belt fully

retracts. For additional information, see

“Child restraints” (P.1-21).

The ALR mode should be used only for

child restraint installation. During nor-

mal seat belt use by an occupant, the

ALR mode should not be activated. If it

is activated, it may cause uncomforta-

ble seat belt tension.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be

certain that seatbacks are comple-

tely secured in the latched position.

If they are not completely secured,

passengers may be injured in an

accident or sudden stop.

JVR0574X

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the seat belt, push the

button on the buckle

. The seat belt

automatically retracts.

Checking seat belt operation

Seat belt retractors are designed to lock

seat belt movement by two separate

methods:

. When the belt is pulled quickly from

the retractor.

. When the vehicle slows down rapidly.

To increase your confidence in the seat

belts, check the operation as follows:

. Grasp the shoulder belt and pull for-

ward quickly. The retractor should

lock and restrict further belt move-

ment.

If the retractor does not lock during this

check, get the system checked. It is

recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service, or to learn more about

seat belt operation.

SSS0351A

Shoulder belt height adjustment

(for front seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should

be adjusted to the position best for you.

(See “Precautions on seat belt usage” (P.1-

12).)

To adjust, pull the adjustment button

and then move the shoulder belt anchor

to the desired position

, so that the belt

passes over the center of the shoulder.

The belt should be away from your face

and neck, but not falling off of your

shoulder. Release the adjustment button

to lock the shoulder belt anchor into

position.

The range of height adjustment of the

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

1-18 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

shoulder belt may vary depending on the

model.

WARNING

. After adjustment, release the ad-

justment button and try to move

the shoulder belt anchor up and

down to make sure it is securely

fixed in position.

. The shoulder belt anchor height

should be adjusted to the posi-

tion best for you. Failure to do so

may reduce the effectiveness of

the entire restraint system and

increase the chance or severity of

injury in an accident.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position,

it is not possible to properly fit the lap/

shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender

that is compatible with the installed seat

belts is available that can be purchased.

The extender adds approximately 8 in

(200 mm) of length and may be used for

either the driver or front passenger seat-

ing position. It is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for assistance with pur-

chasing an extender if an extender is

required.

WARNING

. It is recommended that only

NISSAN seat belt extenders, made

by the same company which

made the original equipment seat

belts, be used with NISSAN seat

belts.

. Adults and children who can use

the standard seat belt should not

use an extender. Such unneces-

sary use could result in serious

personal injury in the event of an

accident.

. Never use seat belt extenders to

install child restraints. If the child

restraint is not secured properly,

the child could be seriously in-

jured or killed in a collision or a

sudden stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

. To clean the seat belt webbing, apply

a mild soap solution or any solution

recommended for cleaning upholstery

or carpets. Then wipe with a cloth and

allow the seat belts to dry in the

shade. Do not allow the seat belts to

retract until they are completely dry.

. If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt

guide of the seat belt anchors, the

seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the

shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry

cloth.

. Periodically check to see that the

seat belt and the metal components,

such as buckles, tongues, retractors,

flexible wires and anchors, work prop-

erly. If loose parts, deterioration, cuts

or other damage on the webbing is

found, the entire seat belt assembly

should be replaced.

WARNING

Do not allow children to play with the

seat belts. Most seating positions are

equipped with Automatic Locking

Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If

the seat belt becomes wrapped

around a child’s neck with the ALR

mode activated, the child can be

seriously injured or killed if the seat

belt retracts and becomes tight. This

can occur even if the vehicle is

parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to

release the child. If the seat belt can

not be unbuckled or is already un-

buckled, release the child by cutting

the seat belt with a suitable tool

(such as a knife or scissors) to

release the seat belt.

Children need adults to help protect

them.

They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in

this manual, child safety information is

available from many other sources, in-

cluding doctors, teachers, government

traffic safety offices, and community or-

ganizations. Every child is different, so be

sure to learn the best way to transport

your child.

There are three basic types of child

restraint systems:

. Rear-facing child restraint

. Forward-facing child restraint

. Booster seat

The proper restraint depends on the

child’s size. Generally, infants up to about

1 year and less than 20 lbs (9 kg) should

be placed in rear-facing child restraints.

Forward-facing child restraints are avail-

able for children who outgrow rear-facing

child restraints and are at least 1 year old.

Booster seats are used to help position a

vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who

can no longer use a forward-facing child

restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special

protection. The vehicle’s seat belts

may not fit them properly. The

shoulder belt may come too close

to the face or neck. The lap belt may

not fit over their small hip bones. In

an accident, an improperly fitting

seat belt could cause serious or fatal

injury. Always use appropriate child

restraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require the use of approved

child restraints for infants and small

children. See “Child restraints” (P.1-21).

A child restraint may be secured in the

vehicle by using either the LATCH (Lower

Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system

or with the vehicle seat belt. See “Child

restraints” (P.1-21) for more information.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens

and children be restrained in the rear

seat. Studies show that children are

safer when properly restrained in the

rear seat than in the front seat.

This is especially important because

your vehicle has a supplemental re-

straint system (Air bag system) for the

front passenger. See “Supplemental

Restraint System (SRS)” (P.1-42).

INFANTS

Infants up to at least 1 year old should be

placed in a rear-facing child restraint.

NISSAN recommends that infants be

placed in child restraints that comply with

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dards. You should choose a child restraint

that fits your vehicle and always follow

the manufacturer’s instructions for instal-

lation and use.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

CHILD SAFETY

1-20 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SMALL CHILDREN

Children that are over 1 year old and

weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg) should remain

in a rear-facing child restraint as long as

possible up to the height or weight limit

of the child restraint. Children who out-

grow the height or weight limit of the

rear-facing child restraint and are at least

1 year old should be secured in a forward-

facing child restraint with a harness. Refer

to the manufacturer’s instructions for

minimum and maximum weight and

height recommendations. NISSAN recom-

mends that small children be placed in

child restraints that comply with Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Cana-

dian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You

should choose a child restraint that fits

your vehicle and always follow the man-

ufacturer’s instructions for installation

and use.

LARGER CHILDREN

Children should remain in a forward-

facing child restraint with a harness until

they reach the maximum height or

weight limit allowed by the child restraint

manufacturer.

Once a child outgrows the height or

weight limit of the harness-equipped

forward-facing child restraint, NISSAN

recommends that the child be placed in

a commercially available booster seat to

obtain proper seat belt fit. For a seat belt

to fit properly, the booster seat should

raise the child so that the shoulder belt is

properly positioned across the chest and

the top, middle portion of the shoulder.

The shoulder belt should not cross the

neck or face and should not fall off the

shoulder. The lap belt should lie snugly

across the lower hips or upper thighs, not

the abdomen.

A booster seat can only be used in

seating positions that have a three-point

type seat belt. The booster seat should fit

the vehicle seat and have a label certify-

ing that it complies with Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

A booster seat should be used until the

child can pass the seat belt fit test below:

. Are the child’s back and hips against

the vehicle seatback?

. Is the child able to sit without slouch-

ing?

. Do the child’s knees bend easily over

the front edge of the seat with feet flat

on the floor?

. Can the child safely wear the seat belt

(lap belt low and snug across the hips

and shoulder belt across mid-chest

and shoulder)?

. Is the child able to use the properly

adjusted head restraint/headrest?

. Will the child be able to stay in position

for the entire ride?

JVR0473X

If you answered no to any of these

questions, the child should remain in a

booster seat using a three-point type

seat belt.

NOTE:

Laws in some communities may follow

different guidelines. Check local and

state regulations to confirm your child

is using the correct restraint system

before traveling.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on

any seat and do not allow a child in

the cargo area. The child could be

seriously injured or killed in a sudden

stop or collision.

SSS0099

SSS0100

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

CHILD RESTRAINTS

1-22 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RE-

STRAINTS

WARNING

. Failure to follow the warnings

and instructions for proper use

and installation of child restraints

could result in serious injury or

death of a child or other passen-

gers in a sudden stop or collision:

— The child restraint must be

used and installed properly.

Always follow all of the child

restraint manufacturer’s in-

structions for installation and

use.

— Infants and children should

never be held on anyone’s

lap. Even the strongest adult

cannot resist the forces of a

collision.

— Do not put a seat belt around

both a child and another pas-

senger.

— NISSAN recommends that all

child restraints be installed in

the rear seat. Studies show

that children are safer when

properly restrained in the rear

seat than in the front seat. If

you must install a forward-

facing child restraint in the

front seat, see “Forward-fa-

cing child restraint installation

using the seat belts” (P.1-34).

— Even with the NISSAN Ad-

vanced Air Bag System, never

install a rear-facing child re-

straint in the front seat. An

inflating air bag could ser-

iously injure or kill a child. A

rear-facing child restraint

must only be used in the rear

seat.

— Be sure to purchase a child

restraint that will fit the child

and vehicle. Some child re-

straints may not fit properly

in your vehicle.

— Child restraint anchorages are

designed to withstand only

those loads imposed by cor-

rectly fitted child restraints.

Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach

adult seat belts, or other

items or equipment to the

vehicle. Doing so could da-

mage the child restraint an-

chorages. The child restraint

will not be properly installed

using the damaged ancho-

rage, and a child could be

seriously injured or killed in a

collision.

— Never use the anchor points

for adult seat belts or har-

nesses.

— A child restraint with a top

tether strap should not be

used in the front passenger

seat.

— Keep seatbacks as upright as

possible after fitting the child

restraint.

— Infants and children should

always be placed in an appro-

priate child restraint while in

the vehicle.

. When the child restraint is not in

use, keep it secured with the

LATCH system or a seat belt. In a

sudden stop or collision, loose

objects can injure occupants or

damage the vehicle.

CAUTION

A child restraint in a closed vehicle

can become very hot. Check the

seating surface and buckles before

placing a child in the child restraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universal

child restraint anchor system, referred to

as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and

Tethers for CHildren) system. Some child

restraints include rigid or webbing-

mounted attachments that can be con-

nected to these anchors.

For details, see “Lower Anchors and

Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) system”

(P.1-24).

If you do not have a LATCH compatible

child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can

be used.

Several manufacturers offer child re-

straints for infants and small children of

various sizes. When selecting any child

restraint, keep the following points in

mind:

. Choose only a restraint with a label

certifying that it complies with Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dard 213.

. Check the child restraint in your

vehicle to be sure it is compatible with

the vehicle’s seat and seat belt sys-

tem.

. If the child restraint is compatible with

your vehicle, place your child in the

child restraint and check the various

adjustments to be sure the child

restraint is compatible with your child.

Choose a child restraint that is de-

signed for your child’s height and

weight. Always follow all recom-

mended procedures.

. If the combined weight of the child

and child restraint is less than 65 lbs

(29.5 kg), you may use either the

LATCH anchors or the seat belt to

install the child restraint (not both at

the same time).

. If the combined weight of the child

and child restraint is greater than 65

lbs (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt

(not the lower anchors) to install the

child restraint.

. Be sure to follow the child restraint

manufacturer’s instructions for instal-

lation.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces

or territories require that infants and

small children be restrained in an ap-

proved child restraint at all times while

the vehicle is being operated. Canadian

law requires the top tether strap on

forward-facing child restraints be se-

cured to the designated anchor point

on the vehicle.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

1-24 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

JVR0555X

LATCH system anchor location

Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren (LATCH) SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with special

anchor points that are used with LATCH

system compatible child restraints. This

system may also be referred to as the

ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. With

this system, you do not have to use a

vehicle seat belt to secure the child

restraint unless the combined weight of

the child and child restraint exceeds 65

lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the

child and child restraint is greater than 65

lbs (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt

(not the lower anchors) to install the child

restraint. Be sure to follow the child

restraint manufacturer’s instructions for

installation.

CAUTION

Store the loose LATCH covers (for

example, in the console box) where

they will not get damaged to avoid

losing them. (See “Console box” (P.2-

71).)

LATCH lower anchor

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use and in-

stallation of child restraints could

result in serious injury or death of a

child or other passengers in a sud-

den stop or collision:

. Attach LATCH system compatible

child restraints only at the loca-

tions shown in the illustration.

. Do not secure a child restraint in

the center rear seating position

using the LATCH lower anchors.

The child restraint will not be

secured properly.

. Inspect the lower anchors by in-

serting your fingers into the low-

er anchor area. Feel to make sure

there are no obstructions over

the anchors such as seat belt

webbing or seat cushion material.

The child restraint will not be

secured properly if the lower

anchors are obstructed.

. Child restraint anchorages are

designed to withstand only those

loads imposed by correctly fitted

child restraints. Under no circum-

stances are they to be used to

attach adult seat belts, or other

items or equipment to the vehi-

cle. Doing so could damage the

child restraint anchorages. The

child restraint will not be properly

installed using the damaged an-

chorage, and a child could be

seriously injured or killed in a

collision.

LATCH lower anchor location

The LATCH lower anchor points are

provided to install child restraints in the

rear outboard seating positions only. Do

not attempt to install a child restraint in

the center seating position using the

LATCH lower anchors.

JVR0556X

LATCH lower anchor cover removal

The LATCH lower anchor points are

located under covers labelled ISOFIX at

the bottom of the rear outboard seat

cushions. To access a LATCH lower an-

chor point, insert your finger into the

cover and pull the cover off.

SSS0643

LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

Installing child restraint LATCH

lower anchor attachments

LATCH compatible child restraints include

two rigid or webbing-mounted attach-

ments that can be connected to two

anchors located at certain seating posi-

tions in your vehicle. With this system, you

do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to

secure the child restraint. Check your

child restraint for a label stating that it is

compatible with LATCH. This information

may also be in the instructions provided

by the child restraint manufacturer.

SSS0644

LATCH rigid attachment

When installing a child restraint, carefully

read and follow the instructions in this

manual and those supplied with the child

restraint.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

1-26 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Top tether anchor

WARNING

Properly secure cargo and do not

allow it to contact the top tether

strap when it is attached to the top

tether anchor. Cargo that is not

properly secured or cargo that con-

tacts the top tether strap may da-

mage the top tether strap during a

collision. If the parcel shelf (if so

equipped) contacts the top tether

strap when it is attached to the top

tether anchor, remove the parcel

shelf from the vehicle or secure it

on the cargo floor below its attach-

ment location. If the parcel shelf is

not removed, it may damage the top

tether strap during a collision. Your

child could be seriously injured or

killed in a collision if the child re-

straint top tether strap is damaged.

WAB0058X

Top tether anchor point locations

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child

restraints. Under no circumstances

are they to be used to attach adult

seat belts, or other items or equip-

ment to the vehicle. Doing so could

damage the child restraint an-

chorages. The child restraint will not

be properly installed using the da-

maged anchorage, and a child could

be seriously injured or killed in a

collision.

Anchor points are located on the back

side of the seatbacks.

If a child restraint has a top tether strap, it

must be used when installing with the

LATCH lower anchor attachments or seat

belts.

If you have any questions when instal-

ling a top tether strap child restraint on

the rear seat, it is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING LATCH

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the

“Child safety” and “Child restraints” sec-

tions before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the

combined weight of the child and the

child restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If

the combined weight of the child and the

child restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5

kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the

lower anchors) to install the child re-

straint. Be sure to follow the child re-

straint manufacturer’s instructions for

installation.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing

child restraint using the LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint man-

ufacturer’s instructions.

SSS0648

Rear-facing web-mounted — step 2

2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-

tachments to the LATCH lower an-

chors. Check to make sure the LATCH

attachment is properly attached to

the lower anchors.

SSS0649

Rear-facing rigid-mounted — step 2

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

1-28 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0639

Rear-facing — step 3

3. For child restraints that are equipped

with webbing-mounted attachments,

remove any additional slack from the

anchor attachments. Press downward

and rearward firmly in the center of

the child restraint with your hand to

compress the vehicle seat cushion

and seatback while tightening the

webbing of the anchor attachments.

SSS0650

Rear-facing — step 4

4. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push

it from side to side while holding the

child restraint near the LATCH attach-

ment path. The child restraint should

not move more than 1 inch (25 mm),

from side to side. Try to tug it forward

and check to see if the LATCH attach-

ment holds the restraint in place. If the

restraint is not secure, tighten the

LATCH attachment as necessary, or

put the restraint in another seat and

test it again. You may need to try a

different child restraint or try installing

by using the vehicle seat belt (if

applicable). Not all child restraints fit

in all types of vehicles.

5. Check to make sure the child restraint

is properly secured prior to each use. If

the child restraint is loose, repeat

steps 1 through 4.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT

BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must

be used when installing a child re-

straint. Failure to use the ALR mode

will result in the child restraint not

being properly secured. The restraint

could tip over or be loose and cause

injury to a child in a sudden stop or

collision.

SSS0100

Rear-facing — step 1

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the

“Child safety” (P.1-19) and “Child restraints”

(P.1-21) before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the

combined weight of the child and the

child restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If

the combined weight of the child and the

child restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5

kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the

lower anchors) to install the child re-

straint. Be sure to follow the child re-

straint manufacturer’s instructions for

installation.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing

child restraint using the vehicle seat belts

in the rear seats:

1. Child restraints for infants must be

used in the rear-facing direction and

therefore must not be used in the

front seat. Position the child restraint

on the seat. Always follow the re-

straint manufacturer’s instructions.

SSS0654

Rear-facing — step 2

2. Route the seat belt tongue through

the child restraint and insert it into the

buckle until you hear and feel the

latch engage. Be sure to follow the

child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for belt routing.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

1-30 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0655

Rear-facing — step 3

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is

fully extended. At this time, the seat

belt retractor is in the Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child

restraint mode). It reverts to the

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

mode when the seat belt is fully

retracted.

SSS0656

Rear-facing — step 4

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up

on the shoulder belt to remove any

slack in the belt.

SSS0657

Rear-facing — step 5

5. Remove any additional slack from the

seat belt; press downward and rear-

ward firmly in the center of the child

restraint to compress the vehicle seat

cushion and seatback while pulling up

on the seat belt.

SSS0658

Rear-facing — step 6

6. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push

it from side to side while holding the

child restraint near the seat belt path.

The child restraint should not move

more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to

side. Try to tug it forward and check to

see if the belt holds the restraint in

place. If the restraint is not secure,

tighten the seat belt as necessary, or

put the restraint in another seat and

test it again. You may need to try a

different child restraint. Not all child

restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure that the child

restraint is properly secured prior to

each use. If the seat belt is not locked,

repeat steps 1 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and

the seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode

(child restraint mode) is canceled.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD RE-

STRAINT INSTALLATION USING

LATCH

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the

“Child safety” and “Child restraints” sec-

tions before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the

combined weight of the child and the

child restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If

the combined weight of the child and the

child restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5

kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the

lower anchors) to install the child re-

straint. Be sure to follow the child re-

straint manufacturer’s instructions for

installation.

Follow these steps to install a forward-

facing child restraint using the LATCH

system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint man-

ufacturer’s instructions.

SSS0645

Forward-facing web-mounted — step 2

2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-

tachments to the LATCH lower an-

chors. Check to make sure the LATCH

attachment is properly attached to

the lower anchors.

If the child restraint is equipped with a

top tether strap, route the top tether

strap and secure the tether strap to

the tether anchor point. See “Installing

top tether strap” (P.1-33). Do not install

child restraints that require the use of

a top tether strap in seating positions

that do not have a top tether anchor.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

1-32 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0646

Forward-facing rigid-mounted — step 2

3. The back of the child restraint should

be secured against the vehicle seat-

back.

If necessary, adjust or remove the

head restraint to obtain the correct

child restraint fit. If the head restraint

is removed, store it in a secure place.

Be sure to reinstall the head re-

straint when the child restraint is

removed. See “Head restraints/head-

rests” (P.1-8) for head restraint adjust-

ment information.

If the seating position does not have a

head restraint and it is interfering with

the proper child restraint fit, try an-

other seating position or a different

child restraint.

SSS0647

Forward-facing — step 4

4. For child restraints that are equipped

with webbing-mounted attachments,

remove any additional slack from the

anchor attachments. Press downward

and rearward firmly in the center of

the child restraint with your knee to

compress the vehicle seat cushion

and seatback while tightening the

webbing of the anchor attachments.

5. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to

remove any slack.

SSS0638

Forward-facing — step 6

6. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push

it from side to side while holding the

child restraint near the LATCH attach-

ment path. The child restraint should

not move more than 1 inch (25 mm),

from side to side. Try to tug it forward

and check to see if the LATCH attach-

ment holds the restraint in place. If the

restraint is not secure, tighten the

LATCH attachment as necessary, or

put the restraint in another seat and

test it again. You may need to try a

different child restraint. Not all child

restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure the child restraint

is properly secured prior to each use. If

the child restraint is loose, repeat

steps 1 through 6.

WAB0058X

Installing top tether strap

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child

restraints. Under no circumstances

are they to be used to attach adult

seat belts, or other items or equip-

ment to the vehicle. Doing so could

damage the child restraint an-

chorages. The child restraint will not

be properly installed using the da-

maged anchorage, and a child could

be seriously injured or killed in a

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

1-34 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

collision.

The child restraint top tether strap must

be used when installing the child restraint

with the LATCH lower anchor attach-

ments.

First, secure the child restraint with the

LATCH lower anchors (rear outboard

seating positions only).

1. Remove the head restraint and store it

in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the head restraint when the child

restraint is removed.

See “Head restraints/headrests” (P.1-8)

for head restraint adjustment, re-

moval and installation information.

2. Position the top tether strap as

shown.

3. Secure the top tether strap to the

tether anchor point as shown.

4. Refer to the appropriate child restraint

installation procedure steps in this

section before tightening the tether

strap.

If you have any questions when instal-

ling a top tether strap, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD RE-

STRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE

SEAT BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must

be used when installing a child re-

straint. Failure to use the ALR mode

will result in the child restraint not

being properly secured. The restraint

could tip over or be loose and cause

injury to a child in a sudden stop or

collision. Also, it can change the

operation of the front passenger air

bag. See “Front passenger air bag

and status light” (P.1-50).

SSS0640

Forward-facing (front passenger seat) — step 1

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the

“Child safety” and “Child restraints” sec-

tions before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the

combined weight of the child and the

child restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If

the combined weight of the child and the

child restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5

kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the

lower anchors) to install the child re-

straint. Be sure to follow the child re-

straint manufacturer’s instructions for

installation.

Follow these steps to install a forward-

facing child restraint using the vehicle

seat belt in the rear seats or in the front

passenger seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint in

the front seat, it should be placed in

a forward-facing direction only.

Move the seat to the rearmost posi-

tion. Child restraints for infants must

be used in the rear-facing direction

and, therefore, must not be used in

the front seat.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint man-

ufacturer’s instructions.

The back of the child restraint should

be secured against the vehicle seat-

back.

If necessary, adjust or remove the

head restraint to obtain the correct

child restraint fit. If the head restraint

is removed, store it in a secure place.

Be sure to reinstall the head re-

straint when the child restraint is

removed. See “Head restraints/head-

rests” (P.1-8) for head restraint adjust-

ment, removal and installation

information.

If the seating position does not have

an adjustable head restraint and it is

interfering with the proper child re-

straint fit, try another seating position

or a different child restraint.

SSS0360B

Forward-facing — step 3

3. Route the seat belt tongue through

the child restraint and insert it into the

buckle until you hear and feel the

latch engage. Be sure to follow the

child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for belt routing.

If the child restraint is equipped with a

top tether strap, route the top tether

strap and secure the tether strap to

the tether anchor point (rear seat

installation only). See “Installing top

tether strap” (P.1-37). Do not install

child restraints that require the use

of a top tether strap in seating posi-

tions that do not have a top tether

anchor.

SSS0651

Forward-facing — step 4

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is

fully extended. At this time, the seat

belt retractor is in the Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child

restraint mode). It reverts to Emer-

gency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode

when the seat belt is fully retracted.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

1-36 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0652

Forward-facing — step 5

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up

on the shoulder belt to remove any

slack in the belt.

SSS0653

Forward-facing — step 6

6. Remove any additional slack from the

seat belt; press downward and rear-

ward firmly in the center of the child

restraint with your knee to compress

the vehicle seat cushion and seatback

while pulling up on the seat belt.

7. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to

remove any slack.

SSS0641

Forward-facing — step 8

8. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push

it from side to side while holding the

child restraint near the seat belt path.

The child restraint should not move

more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to

side. Try to tug it forward and check to

see if the belt holds the restraint in

place. If the restraint is not secure,

tighten the seat belt as necessary, or

put the restraint in another seat and

test it again. You may need to try a

different child restraint. Not all child

restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

9. Check to make sure the child restraint

is properly secured prior to each use. If

the seat belt is not locked, repeat

steps 2 through 8.

SSS0676

Forward-facing — step 10

10. If the child restraint is installed in the

front passenger seat, place the igni-

tion switch in the ON position. The

front passenger air bag status light

should illuminate. If this light is not

illuminated, see “Front passenger air

bag and status light” (P.1-50). Move

the child restraint to another seating

position. Have the system checked. It

is recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

After the child restraint is removed and

the seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR

mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.

WAB0058X

Installing top tether strap

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child

restraints. Under no circumstances

are they to be used to attach adult

seat belts, or other items or equip-

ment to the vehicle. Doing so could

damage the child restraint an-

chorages. The child restraint will not

be properly installed using the da-

maged anchorage, and a child could

be seriously injured or killed in a

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

1-38 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

collision.

The child restraint top tether strap must

be used when installing the child restraint

with the seat belts.

First, secure the child restraint with the

seat belt.

1. Remove the head restraint and store it

in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the head restraint when the child

restraint is removed.

See “Head restraints/headrests” (P.1-8)

for head restraint adjustment, re-

moval and installation information.

2. Position the top tether strap as

shown.

3. Secure the top tether strap to the

tether anchor point as shown.

4. Refer to the appropriate child restraint

installation procedure steps in this

section before tightening the tether

strap.

If you have any questions when instal-

ling a top tether strap, it is recom-

mended you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

BOOSTER SEATS

Precautions on booster seats

WARNING

If a booster seat and seat belt are not

used properly, the risk of a child

being injured or killed in a sudden

stop or collision greatly increases:

. Make sure the shoulder portion of

the belt is away from the child’s

face and neck and the lap portion

of the belt does not cross the

stomach.

. Make sure the shoulder belt is not

behind the child or under the

child’s arm.

. A booster seat must only be

installed in a seating position that

has a lap/shoulder belt.

Booster seats of various sizes are offered

by several manufacturers. When selecting

any booster seat, keep the following

points in mind:

. Choose only a booster seat with a

label certifying that it complies with

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard

213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard 213.

. Check the booster seat in your vehicle

to be sure it is compatible with the

vehicle’s seat and seat belt system.

LRS0453

LRS0455

. Make sure the child’s head will be

properly supported by the booster

seat or vehicle seat. The seatback

must be at or above the center of

the child’s ears. For example, if a low

back booster seat

is chosen, the

vehicle seatback must be at or above

the center of the child’s ears. If the

seatback is lower than the center of

the child’s ears, a high back booster

seat

should be used.

. If the booster seat is compatible with

your vehicle, place your child in the

booster seat and check the various

adjustments to be sure the booster

seat is compatible with your child.

Always follow all recommended pro-

cedures.

LRS0464

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces

or territories require that infants and

small children be restrained in an ap-

proved child restraint at all times while

the vehicle is being operated.

The instructions in this section apply to

booster seat installation in the rear seats

or the front passenger seat.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

1-40 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Booster seat installation

WARNING

To avoid injury to child, do not use

the lap/shoulder belt Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when

using a booster seat with the seat

belts.

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the

“Child safety”, “Child restraints” and “Boos-

ter seats” sections earlier in this section

before installing a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a booster

seat in the rear seat or in the front

passenger seat:

SSS0640

1. If you must install a booster seat in

the front seat, move the seat to the

rearmost position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat.

Only place it in a forward-facing

direction. Always follow the booster

seat manufacturer’s instructions.

LRS0454

Front passenger position

3. The booster seat should be positioned

on the vehicle seat so that it is stable.

If necessary, adjust or remove the

head restraint to obtain the correct

booster seat fit. If the head restraint is

removed, store it in a secure place. Be

sure to reinstall the head restraint

when the booster seat is removed.

See “Head restraints/headrests” (P.1-8)

for head restraint adjustment, re-

moval and installation information.

If the seating position does not have a

head restraint and it is interfering with

the proper booster seat fit, try another

seating position or a different booster

seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat

belt low and snug on the child’s hips.

Be sure to follow the booster seat

manufacturer’s instructions for ad-

justing the seat belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the

seat belt toward the retractor to take

up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder

belt is positioned across the top,

middle portion of the child’s shoulder.

Be sure to follow the booster seat

manufacturer’s instructions for ad-

justing the seat belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and

instructions for properly fastening a

seat belt shown in “Seat belts” (P.1-12).

SSS0676

7. If the booster seat is installed in the

front passenger seat, place the igni-

tion switch in the ON position. The

front passenger air bag status light

may or may not illuminate de-

pending on the size of the child and

the type of booster seat used. See

“Front passenger air bag and status

light” (P.1-50).

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

1-42 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

PRECAUTIONS ON SRS

This SRS section contains important in-

formation concerning the following sys-

tems:

. Driver and front passenger supple-

mental front-impact air bag (NISSAN

Advanced Air Bag System)

. Driver and front passenger supple-

mental knee air bag

. Front seat-mounted side-impact sup-

plemental air bag

. Rear outboard seat-mounted side-

impact supplemental air bag

. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

and rollover supplemental air bag

. Seat belt with pretensioner (front and

rear outboard seats)

Supplemental front-impact air bag sys-

tem: The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-

tem can help cushion the impact force to

the head and chest of the driver and front

passenger in certain frontal collisions.

Driver and front passenger supplemen-

tal knee air bag system: This system can

help cushion the impact force to the

driver’s and front passenger’s knees in

certain collisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impact sup-

plemental air bag system: This system

can help cushion the impact force to the

chest and pelvic area of the driver and

front passenger in certain side impact

collisions. The side air bag is designed to

inflate on the side where the vehicle is

impacted.

Rear outboard seat-mounted side-im-

pact supplemental air bag system: This

system can help cushion the impact force

to the chest area of the rear outboard

seat passengers in certain side-impact

collisions. The side air bags are designed

to inflate on the side where the vehicle is

impacted.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag system:

This system can help cushion the impact

force to the heads of occupants in front

and rear outboard seating positions in

certain side impact or rollover collisions.

In a side-impact, the curtain air bags are

designed to inflate on the side where the

vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, the

curtain air bags on both sides are de-

signed to inflate. Under both side-impact

and rollover situations, the curtain air

bags will remain inflated for a short

period of time.

These supplemental restraint systems are

designed to supplement the crash pro-

tection provided by the driver, passenger

and rear outboard seat belts and are not

a substitute for them. Seat belts should

always be correctly worn and the occu-

pant seated a suitable distance away

from the steering wheel, instrument pa-

nel and door finishers. (See “Seat belts”

(P.1-12) for instructions and precautions

on seat belt usage.)

The supplemental air bags operate only

when the ignition switch is in the ON or

START position.

After the ignition is placed in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag

warning light illuminates. The supple-

mental air bag warning light will turn

off after about 7 seconds if the systems

are operational.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

SSS0131

SSS0132

WARNING

. The front air bags ordinarily will

not inflate in the event of a side

impact, rear impact, rollover, or

lower severity frontal collision.

Always wear your seat belts to

help reduce the risk or severity of

injury in various kinds of acci-

dents.

. The front passenger air bag and

front passenger knee air bag will

not inflate if the front passenger

air bag status light is lit. See

“Front passenger air bag and

status light” (P.1-50).

. The seat belts and the front air

bags are most effective when you

are sitting well back and upright

in the seat with both feet on the

floor. The front air bags inflate

with great force. Even with the

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System,

if you are unrestrained, leaning

forward, sitting sideways or out

of position in any way, you are at

greater risk of injury or death in a

crash. You may also receive ser-

ious or fatal injuries from the

front air bag if you are up against

it when it inflates. Always sit back

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

1-44 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

against the seatback and as far-

away as practical from the steer-

ing wheel or instrument panel.

Always use the seat belts.

. The driver and front passenger

seat belt buckles are equipped

with sensors that detect if the

seat belts are fastened. The Ad-

vanced Air Bag System monitors

the severity of a collision and seat

belt usage then inflates the air

bags as needed. Failure to prop-

erly wear seat belts can increase

the risk or severity of injury in an

accident.

. The front passenger seat is

equipped with occupant classifi-

cation sensors (weight sensors)

that turn the front passenger air

bag and front passenger knee air

bag OFF under some conditions.

These sensors are only used in

this seat. Failure to be properly

seated and wearing the seat belt

can increase the risk or severity

of injury in an accident. See

“Front passenger air bag and

status light” (P.1-50).

. Keep hands on the outside of the

steering wheel. Placing them in-

side the steering wheel rim could

increase the risk that they are

injured if the front air bag in-

flates.

SSS0007

SSS0006

SSS0008

SSS0009

SSS0099

SSS0100

WARNING

. Never let children ride unrest-

rained or extend their hands or

face out of the window. Do not

attempt to hold them in your lap

or arms. Some examples of dan-

gerous riding positions are

shown in the illustrations.

. Children may be severely injured

or killed when the front air bags,

side air bags or curtain air bags

inflate if they are not properly

restrained. Pre-teens and chil-

dren should be properly re-

strained in the rear seat, if

possible.

. Even with the NISSAN Advanced

Air Bag System, never install a

rear-facing child restraint in the

front seat. An inflating front air

bag could seriously injure or kill

your child. See “Child restraints”

(P.1-21) for details.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

1-46 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0059A

Do not lean against doors or windows.

SSS0188A

SSS0140

SSS0162

SSS0159

WARNING

Front and rear outboard seat-

mounted side-impact supplemental

air bags and roof-mounted curtain

side-impact and rollover supplemen-

tal air bags:

. The side air bags ordinarily will

not inflate in the event of a

frontal impact, rear impact, roll-

over or lower severity side colli-

sion. Always wear your seat belts

to help reduce the risk or severity

of injury in various kinds of acci-

dents.

. The curtain air bags ordinarily will

not inflate in the event of a front

impact, rear impact, or lower

severity side collision. Always

wear your seat belts to help

reduce the risk or severity of

injury in various kinds of acci-

dents.

. The seat belts, the side air bags

and curtain air bags are most

effective when you are sitting

well back and upright in the seat.

The side air bags and curtain air

bags inflate with great force. Do

not allow anyone to place their

hand, leg or face near the side air

bags on the side of the seatback

of the front and rear seat or near

the side roof rails. Do not allow

anyone sitting in the front seats

or rear outboard seats to extend

their hand out of the window or

lean against the door. Some ex-

amples of dangerous riding posi-

tions are shown in the previous

illustrations.

. When sitting in the rear seat, do

not hold onto the seatback of the

front seat. If the side air bag

inflates, you may be seriously

injured. Be especially careful with

children, who should always be

properly restrained. Some exam-

ples of dangerous riding posi-

tions are shown in the

illustrations.

. Do not use seat covers on the

front and rear seatbacks. They

may interfere with side air bag

inflation.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

1-48 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WAB0046X

1. Supplemental front-impact air bag mod-

ules (NISSAN Advanced Air Bags)

2. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

3. Occupant classification sensors (weight

sensors)

4. Occupant classification system control

unit

5. Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag modules

6. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag inflators

7. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag modules

8. Crash zone sensor

9. Driver and front passenger supplemental

knee air bags

10. Front door pressure sensors (driver’s side

shown; front passenger side similar)

11. Lap outer pretensioners

12. Seat belt with pretensioners (front seats)

13. Satellite sensors

14. Rear outboard seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag modules

15. Seat belt with pretensioners (rear out-

board seats)

NISSAN ADVANCED AIR BAG SYS-

TEM (front seats)

WARNING

To ensure proper operation of the

passenger’s Advanced Air Bag sys-

tem, please observe the following

items.

. Do not allow a passenger in the

rear seat to push or pull on the

seatback pocket.

. Do not place heavy loads heavier

than 9.1 lbs (4 kg) on the seat-

back, head restraint or in the

seatback pocket.

. Make sure nothing is pressing

against the rear of the seatback,

such as a child restraint installed

in the rear seat or an object

stored on the floor.

. Make sure that there is no object

placed under the front passenger

seat.

. Make sure that there is no object

placed between the seat cushion

and center console or between

the seat cushion and the door.

. Be sure that the front passenger

seat does not contact the rear

seat, instrument panel, etc., or the

head restraint does not contact

the roof.

. Do not position the front passen-

ger seat so it contacts the rear

seat. If the front seat does con-

tact the rear seat, the air bag

system may determine a sensor

malfunction has occurred and the

front passenger air bag status

light may illuminate and the sup-

plemental air bag warning light

may flash.

. If a forward facing child restraint

is installed in the front passenger

seat, do not position the front

passenger seat so the child re-

straint contacts the instrument

panel. If the child restraint does

contact the instrument panel, the

system may determine the seat is

occupied and the passenger air

bag and front passenger knee air

bag may deploy in a collision.

Also the front passenger air bag

status light may not illuminate.

See “Child restraints” (P.1-21) for

information about installing and

using child restraints.

. Confirm the operating condition

with the front passenger air bag

status light.

. If you notice that the front pas-

senger air bag status light is not

operating as described in this

section, it is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer to check the

passenger seat Advanced Air Bag

System.

. Until you have confirmed with

your dealer that your passenger

seat Advanced Air Bag is working

properly, position the occupants

in the rear seating positions.

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN

Advanced Air Bag System for the driver

and front passenger seats. This system is

designed to meet certification require-

ments under U.S. regulations. It is also

permitted in Canada. All of the informa-

tion, cautions and warnings in this

manual apply and must be followed.

The driver supplemental front-impact air

bag is located in the center of the

steering wheel. The passenger supple-

mental front-impact air bag is mounted in

the instrument panel above the glove

box. The front air bags are designed to

inflate in higher severity frontal collisions,

although they may inflate if the forces in

another type of collision are similar to

those of a higher severity frontal impact.

They may not inflate in certain frontal

collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is

not always an indication of proper front

air bag operation.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has

dual stage air bag inflators. The system

monitors information from the Air bag

Control Unit (ACU), seat belt buckle sen-

sors and the occupant classification sen-

sors (weight sensors). Inflator operation is

based on the severity of a collision and

seat belt usage for the driver. For the

front passenger, the occupant classifica-

tion sensors are also monitored. Based on

information from the sensors, only one

front air bag may inflate in a crash,

depending on the crash severity and

whether the front occupants are belted

or unbelted. Additionally, the front pas-

senger air bag and front passenger knee

air bag may be automatically turned OFF

under some conditions, depending on the

information provided by the occupant

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

1-50 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

classification sensors. If the front passen-

ger air bag and front passenger knee air

bag are OFF, the front passenger air bag

status light will be illuminated. (See “Front

passenger air bag and status light” (P.1-

50) for further details.) One front air bag

inflating does not indicate improper per-

formance of the system.

If you have any questions about your air

bag system, it is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer to obtain information

about the system. If you are considering

modification of your vehicle due to a

disability, you may also contact NISSAN.

Contact information is contained in the

front of this Owner’s Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud

noise may be heard, followed by release

of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and

does not indicate a fire. Care should be

taken not to inhale it, as it may cause

irritation and choking. Those with a

history of a breathing condition should

get fresh air promptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat

belts, help to cushion the impact force on

the head and chest of the front occu-

pants. They can help save lives and

reduce serious injuries. However, an in-

flating front air bag may cause facial

abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags,

other than the driver’s and front passen-

ger’s knee air bags, do not provide

restraint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat

belts should be correctly worn and the

driver and passenger seated upright as

far as practical away from the steering

wheel or instrument panel. The front air

bags inflate quickly in order to help

protect the front occupants. Because of

this, the force of the front air bag inflating

can increase the risk of injury if the

occupant is too close to, or is against,

the air bag module during inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a

collision.

The front air bags operate only when

the ignition switch is in the ON position.

After the ignition is placed in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag

warning light illuminates. The supple-

mental air bag warning light will turn

off after about 7 seconds if the system

is operational.

SSS0676

Front passenger air bag status light

Front passenger air bag and status

light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag and

front passenger knee air bag are

designed to automatically turn OFF

under some conditions. Read this

section carefully to learn how it

operates. Proper use of the seat,

seat belt and child restraints is ne-

cessary for most effective protec-

tion. Failure to follow all

instructions in this manual concern-

ing the use of seats, seat belts and

child restraints can increase the risk

or severity of injury in an accident.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

1-52 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Status light:

The front passenger seat is equipped with occupant classification sensors (weight sensors) that turn the front passenger air bag and

front passenger knee air bag on or off depending on the weight applied to the front passenger seat. The status of the front

passenger air bag and front passenger knee air bag (ON or OFF) is indicated by the front passenger air bag status light

which is

located on the instrument panel. After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the front passenger air bag status light

illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off or remains illuminate depending on the front passenger seat occupied status. The

light operates as follows:

CONDITION DESCRIPTION

PASSENGER AIR BAG

INDICATOR LIGHT (

)

FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG AND

FRONT PASSENGER KNEE AIR BAG

STATUS

Empty Empty front passenger seat ON (illuminated)

INHIBITED

Nobody/Somebody

Bag or Child or Child Restraint or

Small Adult in front passenger seat

ON (illuminated)

INHIBITED

Adult Adult in the front passenger seat OFF (dark)

ACTIVATED

In addition to the above, certain objects placed on the front passenger seat may also cause the light to operate as described above

depending on their weight.

For additional information related to the normal operation and troubleshooting of this occupant classification sensor system, please

refer to “Normal operation” (P.1-54) and “Troubleshooting” (P.1-55) in this section.

Front passenger air bag:

The front passenger air bag is designed

to automatically turn OFF when the

vehicle is operated under some condi-

tions as described below as permitted by

U.S. regulations. If the front passenger air

bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a crash. The

driver air bag and other air bags in your

vehicle are not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help

reduce the risk of injury or death from an

inflating air bag to certain front passen-

ger seat occupants, such as children, by

requiring the air bag to be automatically

turned OFF.

The occupant classification sensors

(weight sensors) are on the seat cushion

frame under the front passenger seat and

are designed to detect an occupant and

objects on the seat. For example, if a child

is in the front passenger seat, the Ad-

vanced Air Bag System is designed to turn

the passenger air bag OFF in accordance

with the regulations. Also, if a child

restraint of the type specified in the

regulations is on the seat, the occupant

classification sensors can detect it and

cause the air bag to turn OFF.

Front passenger seat adult occupants

who are properly seated and using the

seat belt as outlined in this manual

should not cause the passenger air bag

and front passenger knee air bag to be

automatically turned OFF. For small

adults it may be turned OFF, however, if

the occupant does not sit in the seat

properly (for example, by not sitting up-

right, by sitting on an edge of the seat, or

by otherwise being out of position), this

could cause the sensors to turn the air

bag OFF. Always be sure to be seated and

wearing the seat belt properly for the

most effective protection by the seat belt

and supplemental air bag.

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and

children be properly restrained in a rear

seat. NISSAN also recommends that ap-

propriate child restraints and booster

seats be properly installed in a rear seat.

If this is not possible, the occupant

classification sensors are designed to

operate as described above to turn the

front passenger air bag and front pas-

senger knee air bag OFF for specified

child restraints. Failing to properly secure

child restraints and to use the Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child re-

straint mode) may allow the restraint to

tip or move in an accident or sudden stop.

This can also result in the passenger air

bag and front passenger knee air bag

inflating in a crash instead of being OFF.

(See “Child restraints” (P.1-21) for proper

use and installation.)

If the front passenger seat is not occu-

pied, the passenger air bag and front

passenger knee air bag are designed not

to inflate in a crash. However, heavy

objects placed on the seat could result

in air bag inflation, because of the object

being detected by the occupant classifi-

cation sensors. Other conditions could

also result in air bag inflation, such as if a

child is standing on the seat, or if two

children are on the seat, contrary to the

instructions in this manual. Always be

sure that you and all vehicle occupants

are seated and restrained properly.

Using the front passenger air bag status

light, you can monitor when the front

passenger air bag and front passenger

knee air bag are automatically turned

OFF.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the

front passenger air bag status light is

illuminated (indicating that the front pas-

senger air bag and front passenger knee

air bag are OFF), it could be that the

person is a small adult, or is not sitting on

the seat properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the

front seat, the front passenger air bag

status light may or may not be illumi-

nated, depending on the size of the child

and the type of child restraint being used.

If the front passenger air bag status light

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53

1-54 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

is not illuminated (indicating that the air

bag might inflate in a crash), it could be

that the child restraint or seat belt is not

being used properly. Make sure that the

child restraint is installed properly, the

seat belt is used properly and the occu-

pant is positioned properly. If the front

passenger air bag status light is not

illuminated, reposition the occupant or

child restraint in a rear seat.

If the front passenger air bag status light

will not illuminate even though you be-

lieve that the child restraint, the seat belts

and the occupant are properly positioned,

it is recommended that you take your

vehicle to a NISSAN dealer. A NISSAN

dealer can check the system status by

using a special tool. However, until you

have confirmed with your dealer that

your air bag is working properly, reposi-

tion the occupant or child restraint in a

rear seat.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System

and front passenger air bag status light

will take a few seconds to register a

change in the passenger seat status. This

is normal system operation and does not

indicate a malfunction.

If a malfunction occurs in the front

passenger air bag system, the supple-

mental air bag warning light

, located

in the meters and gauges area, will

illuminate. Have the system checked. It is

recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

Normal operation:

In order for the occupant classification

sensor system to classify the front pas-

senger based on weight, please follow the

precautions and steps outlined below:

Precautions:

. Make sure that there are no objects

weighing over 9.1 lbs (4 kg) hanging on

the seat or placed in the seatback

pocket.

. Make sure that a child restraint or

other object is not pressing against

the rear of the seatback.

. Make sure that a rear passenger is not

pushing or pulling on the back of the

front passenger seat.

. Make sure that the front passenger

seat or seatback is not forced back

against an object on the seat or floor

behind it.

. Make sure that there is no object

placed under the front passenger

seat.

. Make sure that the front passenger

seat head restraint does not contact

the roof when adjusting the front

passenger seat.

Steps:

1. Adjust the seat as outlined. (See

“Seats” (P.1-3).) Sit upright, leaning

against the seatback, and centered

on the seat cushion with your feet

comfortably extended to the floor.

2. Make sure there are no objects on

your lap.

3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined. (See

“Seat belts” (P.1-12).) Front passenger

seat belt buckle status is monitored

by the occupant classification system,

and is used as an input to determine

occupancy status. So, it is highly

recommended that the front passen-

ger fasten their seat belt.

4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds

allowing the system to classify the

front passenger before the vehicle is

put into motion.

5. Ensure proper classification by check-

ing the front passenger air bag status

light.

NOTE:

This vehicle’s occupant classification

sensor system locks the classification

during driving so it is important that

you confirm that the front passenger is

properly classified prior to driving. Also,

the occupant classification sensor sys-

tem may recalculate the weight of the

occupant under some conditions (both

while driving and when stopped), so the

front passenger seat occupant should

continue to remain seated as outlined

above.

Troubleshooting:

If you think the front passenger air bag

status light is incorrect:

1. If the light is ON with an adult occupying

the front passenger seat:

. Occupant is a small adult — the front

passenger air bag status light is func-

tioning as intended. The front passen-

ger air bag and front passenger knee

air bag are suppressed.

However, if the occupant is not a small

adult, then this may be due to the

following conditions that may be interfer-

ing with the weight sensors:

. Occupant is not sitting upright, lean-

ing against the seatback, and cen-

tered on the seat cushion with his/her

feet comfortably extended to the

floor.

. A child restraint or other object press-

ing against the rear of the seatback.

. A rear passenger pushing or pulling

on the back of the front passenger

seat.

. Forcing the front seat or seatback

against an object on the seat or floor

behind it.

. An object placed under the front

passenger seat.

. An object placed between the seat

cushion and center console or be-

tween the seat cushion and the door.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a

stop when it is safe to do so. Check and

correct any of the above conditions.

Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed dur-

ing which the front passenger air bag

status light will remain lit for about 7

seconds initially.

If the light is still ON after this, the person

should be advised not to ride in the front

passenger seat and it is recommended

that the vehicle should be checked by a

NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

2. If the light is OFF with a small adult, child

or child restraint occupying the front

passenger seat.

This may be due to the following condi-

tions that may be interfering with the

weight sensors:

. Small adult or child is not sitting

upright, leaning against the seatback,

and centered on the seat cushion with

his/her feet comfortably extended to

the floor.

. The child restraint is not properly

installed, as outlined. (See “Child re-

straints” (P.1-21).)

. An object weighing over 9.1 lbs (4 kg)

hanging on the seat or placed in the

seatback pocket.

. A child restraint or other object press-

ing against the rear of the seatback.

. A rear passenger pushing or pulling

on the back of the front passenger

seat.

. Forcing the front seat or seatback

against an object on the seat or floor

behind it.

. An object placed under the front

passenger seat.

. An object placed between the seat

cushion and center console.

. The front passenger seat head re-

straint contacting the roof.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a

stop when it is safe to do so. Check and

correct any of the above conditions.

Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed dur-

ing which the front passenger air bag

status light will remain lit for about 7

seconds initially.

If the light is still OFF after this, the small

adult, child or child restraint should be

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55

1-56 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

repositioned in the rear seat and it is

recommended that the vehicle should be

checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible.

3. If the light is OFF with no front passenger

and no objects on the front passenger

seat, the vehicle should be checked as

soon as possible. It is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Other supplemental front-impact

air bag precautions

WARNING

. Do not place any objects on the

steering wheel pad or on the

instrument panel. Also, do not

place any objects between any

occupant and the steering wheel

or instrument panel. Such objects

may become dangerous projec-

tiles and cause injury if the front

air bags inflate.

. Do not place objects with sharp

edges on the seat. Also, do not

place heavy objects on the seat

that will leave permanent impres-

sions in the seat. Such objects

can damage the seat or occupant

classification sensors (weight

sensors). This can affect the op-

eration of the air bag system and

result in serious personal injury.

. Do not use water or acidic clea-

ners (hot steam cleaners) on the

seat. This can damage the seat or

occupant classification sensors.

This can also affect the operation

of the air bag system and result in

serious personal injury.

. Immediately after inflation, sev-

eral front air bag system compo-

nents will be hot. Do not touch

them; you may severely burn

yourself.

. No unauthorized changes should

be made to any components or

wiring of the supplemental air

bag system. This is to prevent

accidental inflation of the supple-

mental air bag or damage to the

supplemental air bag system.

. Do not make unauthorized

changes to your vehicle’s electri-

cal system, suspension system or

front end structure. This could

affect proper operation of the

front air bag system.

. Tampering with the front air bag

system may result in serious per-

sonal injury. Tampering includes

changes to the steering wheel

and the instrument panel assem-

bly by placing material over the

steering wheel pad and above the

instrument panel or by installing

additional trim material around

the air bag system.

. Removing or modifying the front

passenger seat may affect the

function of the air bag system

and result in serious personal

injury.

. Modifying or tampering with the

front passenger seat may result

in serious personal injury. For

example, do not change the front

seats by placing material on the

seat cushion or by installing ad-

ditional trim material, such as

seat covers, on the seat that is

not specifically designed to as-

sure proper air bag operation.

Additionally, do not stow any

objects under the front passen-

ger seat or the seat cushion and

seatback. Such objects may inter-

fere with the proper operation of

the occupant classification sen-

sors.

. No unauthorized changes should

be made to any components or

wiring of the seat belt system.

This may affect the front air bag

system. Tampering with the seat

belt system may result in serious

personal injury.

. It is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for work on and

around the front air bag. It is also

recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for installation of electrical

equipment. The Supplemental

Restraint System (SRS) wiring

harnesses* should not be modi-

fied or disconnected. Unauthor-

ized electrical test equipment

and probing devices should not

be used on the air bag system.

. A cracked windshield should be

replaced immediately by a quali-

fied repair facility. A cracked

windshield could affect the func-

tion of the supplemental air bag

system.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors are

yellow and orange for easy identifica-

tion.

When selling your vehicle, we request that

you inform the buyer about the front air

bag system and guide the buyer to the

appropriate sections in this Owner’s Man-

ual.

WAB0047X

Driver’s side

DRIVER AND FRONT PASSENGER

SUPPLEMENTAL KNEE AIR BAG

The knee air bag is located in the knee

bolster, on the driver’s and passenger’s

sides. All of the information, cautions

and warnings in this manual apply and

must be followed. The knee air bag is

designed to inflate in higher severity

frontal collisions, although it may inflate

if the forces in another type of collision

are similar to those of a higher severity

frontal impact. It may not inflate in certain

collisions.

WAB0048X

Passenger’s side

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not

always an indication of proper knee air

bag operation.

When the knee air bag inflates, a fairly

loud noise may be heard, followed by

release of smoke. This smoke is not

harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care

should be taken not to inhale it, as it may

cause irritation and choking. Those with a

history of a breathing condition should

get fresh air promptly.

The knee air bag helps to cushion the

impact force on the knees of the driver

and passenger. It can help reduce serious

injuries. However, an inflating knee air bag

may cause abrasions or other injuries.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57

1-58 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The knee air bag provides restraint to the

lower body.

The knee air bag inflates quickly in order

to help protect the occupants. Because of

this, the force of the knee air bag inflating

can increase the risk of injury if the

occupant is too close to, or is against,

this air bag module during inflation. The

knee air bag will deflate quickly after the

collision is over OR the knee air bag will

remain inflated for a short time.

The knee air bag operates only when

the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position.

After placing the ignition switch in the

ON position, the supplemental air bag

warning light illuminates. The supple-

mental air bag warning light will turn

off after about 7 seconds if the system

is operational.

WARNING

. Do not place any objects between

the knee bolster and the driver’s

or passenger’s seat. Such objects

may become dangerous projec-

tiles and cause injury if a knee air

bag inflates.

. Right after inflation, the knee air

bag system components will be

hot. Do not touch them; you may

severely burn yourself.

. No unauthorized changes should

be made to any components or

wiring of the knee air bag system.

This is to preventdamageto or

accidental inflation of the knee

air bag system.

. Do not make unauthorized

changes to your vehicle’s electri-

cal system or suspension system.

This could affect proper opera-

tion of the knee air bag system.

. Tampering with the knee air bag

system may result in serious per-

sonal injury. For example, do not

change the driver or passenger

knee bolster or install additional

trim material around the knee air

bag.

. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for work on and

around the knee air bag. It is also

recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for installation of

electrical equipment. The SRS

wiring harnesses* should not be

modified or disconnected. Un-

authorized electrical test equip-

ment and probing devices should

not be used on the knee air bag

system.

*The SRS wiring harness or connectors

are yellow or orange for easy identifica-

tion.

When selling your vehicle, we request that

you inform the buyer about the knee air

bag system and guide the buyer to the

appropriate sections in this manual.

WAB0049X

FRONT AND REAR OUTBOARD

SEAT-MOUNTED SIDE-IMPACT SUP-

PLEMENTAL AIR BAG AND ROOF-

MOUNTED CURTAIN SIDE-IMPACT

AND ROLLOVER SUPPLEMENTAL

AIR BAG SYSTEMS

The side air bags are located in the

outside of the seatback of the front and

rear seats. The curtain air bags are

located in the side roof rails. All of the

information, cautions and warnings in

this manual apply and must be fol-

lowed. The side air bags and curtain air

bags are designed to inflate in higher

severity side collisions, although they may

inflate if the forces in another type of

collision are similar to those of a higher

severity side impact. They are designed to

inflate on the side where the vehicle is

impacted. They may not inflate in certain

side collisions.

Curtain air bags are also designed to

inflate in certain types of rollover colli-

sions or near rollovers. As a result, certain

vehicle movements (for example, during

severe off-roading) may cause the curtain

air bags to inflate.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not

always an indication of proper side air

bag and curtain air bag operation.

When the side air bags and curtain air

bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may be

heard, followed by release of smoke. This

smoke is not harmful and does not

indicate a fire. Care should be taken not

to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and

choking. Those with a history of a breath-

ing condition should get fresh air

promptly.

Side air bags, along with the use of seat

belts, help to cushion the impact force on

the chest and pelvic area of the front and

rear outboard occupants. Curtain air

bags help to cushion the impact force to

the head of occupants in the front and

rear outboard seating positions. They can

help save lives and reduce serious injuries.

However, an inflating side air bag or

curtain air bag may cause abrasions or

other injuries. Side air bags and curtain air

bags do not provide restraint to the lower

body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn

and the driver, front passenger and rear

outboard occupants seated upright as far

as practical away from the side air bags.

Rear seat passengers should be seated as

far away as practical from the door

finishers and side roof rails. The side air

bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly in

order to help protect the occupants.

Because of this, the force of the side air

bags and curtain air bags inflating can

increase the risk of injury if the occupant

is too close to, or is against, these air bag

modules during inflation. The side air bag

will deflate quickly after the collision is

over. The curtain air bag will remain

inflated for a short time.

The side air bags and curtain air bags

operate only when the ignition switch is

in the ON position.

After placing the ignition switch in the

ON position, the supplemental air bag

warning light illuminates. The supple-

mental air bag warning light will turn

off after about 7 seconds if the systems

are operational.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59

1-60 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

. Do not place any objects near the

seatback of the front and rear

seats. Also, do not place any

objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.)

between the front and rear door

finishers and the front and rear

seats. Such objects may become

dangerous projectiles and cause

injury if a side air bag inflates.

. Right after inflation, several side

air bag and curtain air bag sys-

tem components will be hot. Do

not touch them; you may severely

burn yourself.

. No unauthorized changes should

be made to any components or

wiring of the side air bag and

curtain air bag systems. This is to

prevent damage to or accidental

inflation of the side air bag and

curtain air bag systems.

. Do not make unauthorized

changes to your vehicle’s electri-

cal system, suspension system or

side panel. This could affect prop-

er operation of the side air bag

and curtain air bag systems.

. Tampering with the side air bag

system may result in serious per-

sonal injury. For example, do not

change the front and rear seats

by placing material near the seat-

backs or by installing additional

trim material, such as seat covers,

around the side air bag.

. Removing or modifying the front

and rear passenger seat may

affect the function of the air bag

system and result in serious per-

sonal injury.

. It is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for work on and

around the side air bag and

curtain air bag. It is also recom-

mended you visit a NISSAN dealer

for installation of electrical equip-

ment. The Supplemental Re-

straint System (SRS) wiring

harnesses* should not be modi-

fied or disconnected. Unauthor-

ized electrical test equipment

and probing devices should not

be used on the side air bag or

curtain air bag systems.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors are

yellow and orange for easy identifica-

tion.

When selling your vehicle, we request that

you inform the buyer about the side air

bag and curtain air bag systems and

guide the buyer to the appropriate sec-

tions in this Owner’s Manual.

SEAT BELTS WITH PRETENSIONERS

(front and rear outboard seats)

WARNING

. The pretensioners cannot be re-

used after activation. They must

be replaced together with the

retractor and buckle as a unit.

. If the vehicle becomes involved in

a collision but a pretensioner is

not activated, be sure to have the

pretensioner system checked

and, if necessary, repaired. It is

recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

. No unauthorized changes should

be made to any components or

wiring of the pretensioner sys-

tem. This is to prevent damage to

or accidental activation of the

pretensioners. Tampering with

the pretensioner system may re-

sult in serious personal injury.

. It is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for work on and

around the pretensioner system.

It is also recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for installation of

electrical equipment. Unauthor-

ized electrical test equipment

and probing devices should not

be used on the pretensioner sys-

tem.

. If you need to dispose of a pre-

tensioner or scrap the vehicle, it is

recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service. Correct

pretensioner disposal procedures

are set forth in the appropriate

NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect

disposal procedures could cause

personal injury.

The pretensioner system may activate

with the supplemental air bag system in

certain types of collisions. Working with

the seat belt retractor, it helps tighten the

seat belt when the vehicle becomes

involved in certain types of collisions,

helping to restrain front and rear out-

board seat occupants.

The pretensioner is encased with the seat

belt retractor. These seat belts are used

the same way as conventional seat belts.

When a pretensioner activates, smoke is

released and a loud noise may be heard.

The smoke is not harmful and does not

indicate a fire. Care should be taken not

to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and

choking. Those with a history of a breath-

ing condition should get fresh air

promptly.

After pretensioner activation, load limiters

allow the seat belt to release webbing (if

necessary) to reduce forces against the

chest.

The supplemental air bag warning light

is used to indicate malfunctions in

the pretensioner system. See “Supple-

mental air bag warning light” (P.1-62). If

the operation of the supplemental air bag

warning light indicates there is a mal-

function, have the system checked. It is

recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

When selling your vehicle, we request that

you inform the buyer about the preten-

sioner system and guide the buyer to the

appropriate sections in this Owner’s Man-

ual.

SSS1020

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING

LABELS

Warning labels about the supplemental

front-impact air bag system are placed in

the vehicle as shown in the illustration.

SRS air bag

The warning labels are located on the

surface of the sun visors.

WARNING

Do not use a rear-facing child re-

straint on a seat protected by an air

bag in front of it. If the air bag

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61

1-62 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

deploys, it may cause serious injury

or death.

SPA1097

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING

LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light,

displaying

in the instrument panel,

monitors the circuits for the air bag

systems, pretensioners and all related

wiring.

When the ignition switch is in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warn-

ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds

and then turns off. This means the system

is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur,

the air bag and/or pretensioner systems

need servicing:

. The supplemental air bag warning

light remains on after approximately

7 seconds.

. The supplemental air bag warning

light flashes intermittently.

. The supplemental air bag warning

light does not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the air bag and/

or pretensioner systems may not operate

properly. They must be checked and

repaired. It is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning

light is on, it could mean that the

front air bag, knee air bag, side air

bag, curtain air bag and/or preten-

sioner systems will not operate in an

accident. To help avoid injury to

yourself or others, have your vehicle

checked as soon as possible. It is

recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT PRO-

CEDURE

The front air bags, knee air bags, side air

bags, curtain air bags and pretensioners

are designed to activate on a one-time-

only basis. As a reminder, unless it is

damaged, the supplemental air bag

warning light will remain illuminated after

inflation has occurred. These systems

should be repaired and/or replaced as

soon as possible. It is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

When maintenance work is required on

the vehicle, the front air bags, knee air

bags, side air bags, curtain air bags and

pretensioners and related parts should be

pointed out to the person performing the

maintenance. The ignition switch should

always be in the LOCK position when

working under the hood or inside the

vehicle.

WARNING

. Once a front air bag, knee air bag,

side air bag or curtain air bag has

inflated, the air bag module will

not function again and must be

replaced. Additionally, the acti-

vated pretensioners must also

be replaced. The air bag module

and pretensioner should be re-

placed. It is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service. However, the air bag

modules and pretensioner sys-

tem cannot be repaired.

. The front air bag, knee air bag,

side air bag and curtain air bag

systems, and pretensioner sys-

tem should be inspected if there

is any damage to the front end or

side portion of the vehicle. It is

recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

. If you need to dispose of a sup-

plemental air bag or pretensioner

or scrap the vehicle, it is recom-

mended you visit a NISSAN deal-

er. Correct supplemental air bag

and pretensioner system dispo-

sal procedures are set forth in the

appropriate NISSAN Service Man-

ual. Incorrect disposal procedures

could cause personal injury.

. If there is an impact to your

vehicle from any direction, your

Occupant Classification Sensor

(OCS) should be checked to verify

it is still functioning correctly. It is

recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

The OCS should be checked even

if no air bags deploy as a result of

the impact. Failure to verify prop-

er OCS function may result in an

improper air bag deployment re-

sulting in injury or death.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63

1-64 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

MEMO

2 Instruments and controls
Cockpit .................................................................................................. 2-3
Instrument panel .......................................................................... 2-4
Meters and gauges ..................................................................... 2-5
Speedometer and odometer ........................................ 2-6
Tachometer ................................................................................ 2-7
Engine coolant temperature gauge ....................... 2-7
Fuel gauge................................................................................... 2-8
Instrument brightness control .................................... 2-9
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
position indicator (if so equipped) ........................... 2-9
Warning lights, indicator lights and
audible reminders ..................................................................... 2-10
Checking lights ..................................................................... 2-11
Warning/indicator lights (red)................................... 2-11
Warning/indicator lights (yellow) ........................... 2-13
Warning/indicator lights (other) ............................. 2-17
Audible reminders .............................................................. 2-18
Vehicle information display ............................................... 2-19
How to use the vehicle
information display ........................................................... 2-20
Startup display ...................................................................... 2-20
Settings ....................................................................................... 2-21
Vehicle information display warnings
and indicators........................................................................ 2-31
Trip computer ........................................................................ 2-40
Clock and outside air temperature ................... 2-42
Traffic Sign Recognition (if so equipped) ...... 2-43
Security systems ....................................................................... 2-45
Vehicle Security System .............................................. 2-45
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ................. 2-47
Wiper and washer switch ................................................... 2-48
Windshield wiper and washer operation ...... 2-49
Rear window wiper and washer switch ................. 2-50
Rear window and outside mirror
defroster switch ......................................................................... 2-51
Headlight and turn signal switch ................................ 2-52
Headlight switch ............................................................... 2-52
Turn signal switch ........................................................... 2-58
Fog light switch (if so equipped) ......................... 2-59
Horn ..................................................................................................... 2-59
Heated steering wheel (if so equipped) .................. 2-59
Heated seats (if so equipped) ......................................... 2-60
Dynamic driver assistance switch
(models without ProPILOT assist) ............................... 2-61
Steering assist switch (models with
ProPILOT assist) ......................................................................... 2-62
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch ........... 2-62
Intelligent 4x4 LOCK switch (if so equipped) ...... 2-63
Rear door alert............................................................................ 2-63
ECO mode switch ..................................................................... 2-64

Power outlet .................................................................................. 2-65
USB (Universal Serial Bus)
charging connector .......................................................... 2-66
Emergency Call (SOS) button (if
so equipped) .................................................................................. 2-67
Emergency support .......................................................... 2-67
Storage .............................................................................................. 2-69
Cup holders ............................................................................. 2-69
Soft bottle holders ............................................................. 2-70
Flexible luggage boards (if so equipped) ......... 2-70
Glove box ................................................................................... 2-71
Console box............................................................................. 2-71
Sunglasses holder .............................................................. 2-72
Card holder (driver’s side) ............................................ 2-72
Luggage hooks ..................................................................... 2-73
Parcel shelf (if so equipped) ....................................... 2-73
Roof rack (if so equipped) .................................................. 2-75
Windows ............................................................................................ 2-76
Power windows .................................................................... 2-76
Moonroof (if so equipped) .................................................. 2-78
Power moonroof ................................................................. 2-78
Interior lights .............................................................................. 2-80
Interior light switch ........................................................ 2-81
Console light (if so equipped)................................. 2-81
Map lights ............................................................................... 2-81
Room light ............................................................................ 2-82
Vanity mirror light (if so equipped) .................... 2-82
Cargo light ............................................................................. 2-83
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver (if
so equipped) ................................................................................. 2-83
Programming HomeLink® ......................................... 2-84
Programming HomeLink® for Canadian
customers and gate openers ................................. 2-85
Operating the HomeLink®
Universal Transceiver .................................................... 2-85
Programming troubleshooting ............................. 2-86
Clearing the programmed information .......... 2-86
Reprogramming a single
HomeLink® button ........................................................... 2-86
If your vehicle is stolen ................................................ 2-86

WAA0118X

1. Instrument brightness control

2. TRIP RESET switch

3. Headlight and turn signal switch/Fog light

switch*

4. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left

side)

— Audio control**

— Vehicle information display control

5. Steering wheel

— Horn

6. Wiper and washer switch

7. Hazard indicator flasher switch

8. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right

side)

— Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)

— Cruise control switches*

— ProPILOT assist*

— Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys-

tem**

— Voice Recognition system switch**

— Siri® Eyes Free**

9. Shift lever

— Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT)

— Manual Transmission (MT)

10. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch

11. Heated steering wheel switch*

12. Parking brake (Pedal type)

13. Intelligent 4x4 LOCK switch*

14. Steering assist switch* (models with Pro-

PILOT assist) or Dynamic driver assistance

switch* (models without ProPILOT assist)

15. SPORT mode switch*

16. ECO switch

17. Push-button ignition switch (model with

Intelligent Key system)

18. Ignition switch (model without Intelligent

Key system)

19. Parking brake (Switch type)

20. Automatic brake hold switch*

*: if so equipped

**: See the separate NissanConnect® Own-

er’s Manual (if so equipped).

Instruments and controls 2-3

COCKPIT

2-4 Instruments and controls

WAA0119X

1. Side ventilator

2. Meters and gauges/Clock

3. Center ventilator

4. Audio system** or navigation system**

— RearView Monitor*

— Intelligent Around View® Monitor*

— Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys-

tem**

5. Front passenger supplemental air bag

6. Fuse box cover

7. Fuel-filler door release handle

8. Hood release handle

9. Steering wheel lock lever

10. Driver’s front-impact air bag /Horn

11. Driver supplemental knee air bag

12. Heater/air conditioner control

13. Auxiliary input jack** and USB connection

port**

14. Power outlet

15. Defroster switch

16. Front passenger supplemental knee air

bag

17. Glove box

*: if so equipped

**: See the separate NissanConnect® Own-

er’s Manual (if so equipped).

INSTRUMENT PANEL

JVC0581X

1. Tachometer

2. Warning/indicator lights

3. Vehicle information display

— Odometer/twin trip odometer

4. Speedometer

5. Engine coolant temperature gauge

6. Fuel gauge

The needle indicators may move

slightly after the ignition switch is

placed in the OFF or LOCK position. This

is not a malfunction.

CAUTION

. For cleaning, use a soft cloth,

dampened with water. Never use

a rough cloth, alcohol, benzine,

thinner or any kind of solvent or

paper towel with a chemical

cleaning agent. They will scratch

or cause discoloration to the lens.

. Do not spray any liquid such as

water on the meter lens. Spraying

liquid may cause the system to

malfunction.

Instruments and controls 2-5

METERS AND GAUGES

2-6 Instruments and controls

JVI1006X

Speedometer

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed

in miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers

per hour (km/h).

JVI1603X

Distance to empty (dte — km or

mile)/Odometer

Distance to empty (dte — km or mile):

The distance to empty (dte)

provides

you with an estimation of the distance

that can be driven before refueling. The

dte is constantly being calculated, based

on the amount of fuel in the fuel tank and

the actual fuel consumption.

The display is updated every 30 seconds.

The dte mode includes a low range

warning feature. If the fuel level is low,

the warning is displayed on the screen.

When the fuel level drops even lower, the

dte display will change to “———”.

. If the amount of fuel added is small,

the display just before the ignition

switch is placed in the “OFF” position

may continue to be displayed.

. When driving uphill or rounding

curves, the fuel in the tank shifts,

which may momentarily change the

display.

Odometer/Twin trip odometer:

After the ignition switch is placed in the

OFF or LOCK position from ON position,

the distance to empty and odometer/

twin trip odometer stays on for 30

seconds. With the ignition switch in OFF

position, when you open any door then

close all doors, the odometer/twin trip

odometer stays on for 30 seconds.

The odometer/twin trip odometer is dis-

played in the vehicle information display

when the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

The odometer

displays the total dis-

tance the vehicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer

displays the

distance of individual trips.

Changing display:

Push the TRIP RESET switch

(located on

the instrument panel) to change the dis-

play as follows:

ODO ? TRIP A ? TRIP B ? ODO

Resetting twin trip odometer:

Push the TRIP RESET switch

for more

than 1 second to reset the trip odometer

to zero.

JVI0951X

TACHOMETER

The tachometer indicates engine speed in

revolutions per minute (RPM). Do not rev

the engine into the red zone

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the

red zone, shift to a higher gear or

reduce engine speed. Operating the

engine in the red zone may cause

serious engine damage.

JVI0820X

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

GAUGE

The engine coolant temperature gauge

indicates the engine coolant tempera-

ture.

The engine coolant temperature is nor-

mal when the gauge needle points within

the zone

shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature will vary

with the outside air temperature and

driving conditions.

Instruments and controls 2-7

2-8 Instruments and controls

CAUTION

. If the gauge indicates the engine

coolant temperature is near the

hot (H) end of the normal range,

reduce vehicle speed to decrease

the temperature.

. If the gauge is over the normal

range, stop the vehicle as soon as

safely possible and let the engine

idle.

. If the engine is overheated, con-

tinued operation of the vehicle

may seriously damage the en-

gine. (See “If your vehicle over-

heats” (P.6-16) for immediate

action required.)

JVI0640X

FUEL GAUGE

The fuel gauge indicates the approximate

fuel level in the tank when the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

The gauge may move slightly during

braking, turning, accelerating, or going

up and down hills due to movement of

fuel in the tank.

The low fuel warning

appears on the

vehicle information display when the fuel

level in the tank is getting low. Refuel as

soon as it is convenient, preferably before

the gauge reads 0 (empty).

The arrow,

, indicates the location of

the fuel-filler door.

Refuel before the gauge reads the

empty (0) position.

There is a small reserve of fuel in the tank

when the fuel gauge reads the empty (0)

position.

CAUTION

. If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the

malfunction indicator light

(MIL) may come on. Refuel as

soon as possible. After a few

driving trips, the

light should

turn off. If the light remains on

after a few driving trips, have the

vehicle inspected. It is recom-

mended you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

. For additional information, see

“Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL)” (P.2-16).

JVI0644X

JVI0661M

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS CON-

TROL

The instrument brightness control switch

can be operated when the ignition switch

is in the ON position. When the switch is

operated, the vehicle information display

switches to the brightness adjustment

mode.

Push the + side of the switch

brighten the meter panel lights. The bar

moves to the + side.

Push the - side of the switch

to dim the

lights. The bar

moves to the − side.

The vehicle information display returns to

the normal display when the instrument

brightness control switch is not operated

for more than 5 seconds.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANS-

MISSION (CVT) POSITION INDICA-

TOR (if so equipped)

The Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) position indicator indicates the shift

lever position when the ignition switch is

in the ON position.

Instruments and controls 2-9

2-10 Instruments and controls

Warning indicator light (red) Warning indicator light (yellow)

Warning indicator light (other)

Brake warning light

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK indicator

light (if so equipped)

Automatic brake hold indicator light

(green) (if so equipped)

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warn-

ing light

Automatic brake hold indicator light

(white) (if so equipped)

Charge warning light

Exterior light indicator

Electronic parking brake indicator

light (if so equipped)

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)

system warning light

Front fog light indicator light (if so

equipped)

Electric power steering warning light

High beam assist indicator light

Master warning light

Electronic parking brake warning light

(if so equipped)

High beam indicator light

Seat belt warning light and chime

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Security indicator light Low tire pressure warning light

Supplemental air bag warning light Master warning light

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system

warning light

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off

indicator light

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warn-

ing light

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR

LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

CHECKING LIGHTS

With all doors closed, apply the parking

brake, fasten the seat belts and place the

ignition switch in the ON position without

starting the engine. The following lights (if

so equipped) will come on:

, , or (red), PARK or ,

The following lights (if so equipped) come

on briefly and then go off:

, , , , , or , ,

or (red).

If any light does not come on or operates

in a way other than described, it may

indicate a burned-out bulb and/or a

system malfunction. It is recommended

you have the system checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS (red)

See “Vehicle information display” (P.2-19).

or Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking

brake and the foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator (models not

equipped with electronic parking brake

system):

When the ignition switch is in the ON

position, the light illuminates when the

parking brake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light:

When the ignition switch is placed in the

ON position, the brake warning light

illuminates, and then turns off (models

equipped with electronic parking brake

system). If the light illuminates while the

engine is running with the parking brake

not applied, stop the vehicle and perform

the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. If brake

fluid is necessary, add fluid and have

the system checked. It is recom-

mended you have this service per-

formed by a NISSAN dealer. (See

“Brake and clutch fluid” (P.8-9).)

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have

the warning system checked. It is

recommended you have this service

performed by a NISSAN dealer.

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning

indicator:

When the parking brake is released and

the brake fluid level is sufficient, if both

the brake warning light and the Anti-lock

Braking System (ABS) warning light illu-

minate, it may indicate the ABS is not

functioning properly. Have the brake

system checked, and if necessary re-

paired. It is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service. (See “Anti-

lock Braking System (ABS) warning light”

(P.2-13).)

WARNING

. Your brake system may not be

working properly if the warning

light is on. Driving could be dan-

gerous. If you judge it to be safe,

drive carefully to the nearest

service station for repairs. Other-

wise, have your vehicle towed

because driving it could be dan-

gerous.

. Pressing the brake pedal with the

engine stopped and/or low brake

fluid level may increase your

stopping distance and braking

will require greater pedal effort

as well as pedal travel.

Instruments and controls 2-11

2-12 Instruments and controls

. If the brake fluid level is below the

minimum or MIN mark on the

brake fluid reservoir, do not drive

until the brake system has been

checked. It is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

Charge warning light

If the light illuminates while the engine is

running, it may indicate the charging

system is not functioning properly. Turn

the engine off and check the alternator

belt. If the belt is loose, broken, missing or

if the light remains on, have your vehicle

serviced immediately. It is recommended

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving if the alter-

nator belt is loose, broken or miss-

ing.

Electronic parking

brake indicator light (if so

equipped)

The electronic parking brake indicator

light indicates that the electronic parking

brake system is operating.

When the ignition switch is placed in the

ON position, the electronic parking brake

indicator light illuminates. When the en-

gine is started and the parking brake is

released, the warning light turns off.

If the parking brake is not fully released,

the electronic parking brake indicator

light remains on. Be sure that the electro-

nic parking brake indicator light has

turned off before driving. (See “Parking

brake” (P.5-27).)

If the electronic parking brake indicator

light illuminates or flashes while the

electronic parking brake warning light

or (yellow) illuminates, it may

indicate that the electronic parking brake

system is not functioning properly. Have

the system checked, and if necessary

repaired. It is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

Master warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON

position, the master warning light illumi-

nates if a warning message appears in

the vehicle information display.

See “Vehicle information display” (P.2-19).

Seat belt warning light and

chime

The light and chime remind you to fasten

the driver and front passenger seat belts.

The light illuminates whenever the igni-

tion switch is placed in the ON position,

and will remain illuminated until the front

seat belts are fastened.

When the vehicle speed exceeds 10 MPH

(15 km/h), the light will blink unless the

front seat belts are securely fastened.

When the ignition switch is placed in the

ON position, the chime will sound for

about 6 seconds unless the driver’s seat

belt is securely fastened.

When the vehicle speed exceeds 10 MPH

(15 km/h), the chime will sound unless the

front seat belts are securely fastened. The

chime will continue to sound for about 95

seconds until the front seat belts are

fastened.

For additional information, refer to “Seat

belt warning light and chime” (P.1-14).

Security indicator light

The light blinks when the ignition switch

is in the OFF or LOCK position. This

function indicates the security system

equipped on the vehicle is operational.

If the security system is malfunctioning,

this light will remain on while the ignition

switch is in the ON position. For additional

information, see “Security systems” (P.2-

45).

Supplemental air bag warning

light

After placing the ignition switch in the ON

or START position, the supplemental air

bag warning light will illuminate. The

supplemental air bag warning light will

turn off after about 7 seconds if the

supplemental front air bag and supple-

mental side air bag, curtain air bag

systems and/or pretensioner seat belt

are operational.

If any of the following conditions occur,

the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air

bag and pretensioner systems need ser-

vicing.

. The supplemental air bag warning

light remains on after approximately

7 seconds.

. The supplemental air bag warning

light flashes intermittently.

. The supplemental air bag warning

light does not illuminate at all.

It is recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for these services.

Unless checked and repaired, the Supple-

mental Restraint Systems and/or the

pretensioners may not function properly.

For additional information, see “Supple-

mental Restraint System (SRS)” (P.1-42).

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning

light is on, it could mean that the

front air bag, side air bag, curtain air

bag and/or pretensioner systems

will not operate in an accident. To

help avoid injury to yourself or

others, have your vehicle checked. It

is recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS (yel-

low)

See “Vehicle information display” (P.2-19).

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK

indicator light (if so equipped)

When the ignition switch is in the ON

position, the All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK

indicator light illuminates and then turns

off.

When selecting LOCK mode while the

engine is running, the LOCK indicator

light illuminates. (See “Intelligent 4x4”

(P.5-123).)

CAUTION

Do not drive on dry hard surface

roads in the LOCK mode.

or Anti-lock Braking Sys-

tem (ABS) warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON

position, the Anti-lock Braking System

(ABS) warning light illuminates and then

turns off. This indicates the ABS is opera-

tional.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while

Instruments and controls 2-13

2-14 Instruments and controls

the engine is running, or while driving, it

may indicate the ABS is not functioning

properly. Have the system checked. It is

recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-

lock function is turned off. The brake

system then operates normally, but with-

out anti-lock assistance. (See “Brake sys-

tem” (P.5-129).)

Automatic Emergency Braking

(AEB) system warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON

position, the AEB system warning light

illuminates. After starting the engine, the

warning light turns off.

This light illuminates when the AEB with

pedestrian detection system is set to OFF

on the vehicle information display.

If the light illuminates when the AEB with

pedestrian detection system is ON, it may

indicate that the system is unavailable.

See “Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)

with pedestrian detection system” (P.5-

97) or “Intelligent Forward Collision Warn-

ing (I-FCW)” (P.5-107).

Electric power steering warn-

ing light

When the ignition switch is in the ON

position, the electric power steering

warning light illuminates. After starting

the engine, the electric power steering

warning light turns off. This indicates the

electric power steering is operational.

If the electric power steering warning

light illuminates while the engine is run-

ning, it may indicate the electric power

steering is not functioning properly and

may need servicing. Have the system

checked. It is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service.

When the electric power steering warning

light illuminates with the engine running,

the power assist to the steering will cease

operation but you will still have control of

the vehicle. At this time, greater steering

efforts are required to operate the steer-

ing wheel, especially in sharp turns and at

low speeds.

(See “Electric power steering” (P.5-128).)

or Electronic parking

brake warning light (if so equipped)

The electronic parking brake warning

light functions for the electronic parking

brake system. If the warning light illumi-

nates, it may indicate that the electronic

parking brake system is not functioning

properly. Have the brake system checked,

and, if necessary, repaired. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

Low tire pressure warning

light

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that

monitors the tire pressure of all tires

except the spare tire (if so equipped).

The low tire pressure warning light warns

of low tire pressure or indicates that the

TPMS is not functioning properly.

After the ignition switch is placed in the

ON position, this light illuminates for

about 1 second and turns off.

Low tire pressure warning:

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire

pressure, the warning light will illuminate.

The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning

also appears in the vehicle information

display.

When the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates, you should stop and adjust

the tire pressure to the recommended

COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and

Loading Information label. The low tire

pressure warning light does not automa-

tically turn off when the tire pressure is

adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the

recommended pressure, the vehicle must

be driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25

km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off

the low tire pressure warning light. Use a

tire pressure gauge to check the tire

pressure.

The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning

is active as long as the low tire pressure

warning light remains illuminated.

For additional information, see “Vehicle

information display” (P.2-19), “Tire Pres-

sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P.5-5)

and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)” (P.6-3).

TPMS malfunction:

If the TPMS is not functioning properly,

the low tire pressure warning light will

flash for approximately 1 minute when the

ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-

tion. The light will remain on after the 1

minute. Have the system checked. It is

recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service. The “Tire Pressure Low -

Add Air” warning does not appear if the

low tire pressure warning light illuminates

to indicate a TPMS malfunction.

For additional information, see “Tire Pres-

sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P.5-5).

WARNING

. If the light does not illuminate

with the ignition switch placed in

the ON position, have the vehicle

checked. It is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service as soon as possible.

. If the light illuminates while driv-

ing, avoid sudden steering man-

euvers or abrupt braking, reduce

vehicle speed, pull off the road to

a safe location and stop the

vehicle as soon as possible. Driv-

ing with under-inflated tires may

permanently damage the tires

and increase the likelihood of tire

failure. Serious vehicle damage

could occur and may lead to an

accident and could result in ser-

ious personal injury. Check the

tire pressure for all four tires.

Adjust the tire pressure to the

recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading

Information label to turn the low

tire pressure warning light OFF. If

the light still illuminates while

driving after adjusting the tire

pressure, a tire may be flat or

the TPMS may be malfunctioning.

If you have a flat tire, replace it

with a spare tire (if so equipped)

or repair it using the emergency

tire puncture repair kit (if so

equipped) as soon as possible. If

no tire is flat and all tires are

properly inflated, it is recom-

mended you consult a NISSAN

dealer.

. Since the spare tire (if so

equipped) is not equipped with

the TPMS, when a spare tire is

mounted or a wheel is replaced,

the TPMS will not function and

the low tire pressure warning

light will flash for approximately

1 minute. The light will remain on

after 1 minute. Have your tires

replaced and/or TPMS system

reset as soon as possible. It is

recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for these services.

. Replacing tires with those not

originally specified by NISSAN

could affect the proper operation

of the TPMS.

Instruments and controls 2-15

2-16 Instruments and controls

CAUTION

. The TPMS is not a substitute for

the regular tire pressure check.

Be sure to check the tire pressure

regularly.

. If the vehicle is being driven at

speeds of less than 16 MPH (25

km/h), the TPMS may not operate

correctly.

. Be sure to install the specified

size of tires to the four wheels

correctly.

Master warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON

position, the master warning light illumi-

nates if a warning message appears in

the vehicle information display.

See “Vehicle information display” (P.2-19).

Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL)

If the malfunction indicator light comes

on steady or blinks while the engine is

running, it may indicate a potential emis-

sion control and/or Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) malfunction.

The malfunction indicator light may also

illuminate steady if the fuel-filler cap is

loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out

of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel-filler

cap is installed and closed tightly, and

that the vehicle has at least 3 US gallons

(11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the

light

should turn off if no other potential

emission control system malfunction ex-

ists.

If this indicator light remains on for 20

seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds

when the engine is not running, it indi-

cates that the vehicle is not ready for an

emission control system inspection/

maintenance test. (See “Readiness for

Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test” (P.10-

19).)

Operation:

The malfunction indicator light will come

on in one of two ways:

. Malfunction indicator light on steady

— An emission control system and/or

CVT malfunction has been detected.

Check the fuel-filler cap if the LOOSE

FUEL CAP warning appears in the

vehicle information display. If the

fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tight-

en or install the cap and continue to

drive the vehicle. The

light should

turn off after a few driving trips. If the

light does not turn off after a few

driving trips, have the vehicle in-

spected. It is recommended you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service. You

do not need to have your vehicle

towed to the dealer.

. Malfunction indicator light blinking —

An engine misfire has been detected

which may damage the emission

control system.

To reduce or avoid emission control

system damage:

1) Do not drive at speeds above 45

MPH (72 km/h).

2) Avoid hard acceleration or decel-

eration.

3) Avoid steep uphill grades.

4) If possible, reduce the amount of

cargo being hauled or towed.

The malfunction indicator light may

stop blinking and remain on.

Have the vehicle inspected. It is re-

commended you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service. You do not need to

have your vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without

having the emission control system

and/or CVT system checked and

repaired as necessary could lead to

poor driveability, reduced fuel econ-

omy, and possible damage to the

emission control system.

Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)

system warning light

This light comes on when the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position. It

turns off after the engine is started.

This light illuminates when the RAB sys-

tem is turned off in the vehicle informa-

tion display.

If the light illuminates when the RAB

system is on, it may indicate that the

system is unavailable. For additional in-

formation, see “Rear Automatic Braking

(RAB)” (P.5-116).

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

off indicator light

When the ignition switch is in the ON

position, the Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) off indicator light illuminates and

then turns off.

The light comes on when the Vehicle

Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch is

pushed to OFF. This indicates that the

VDC system and traction control system

are not operating.

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON

position, the Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) warning light illuminates and then

turns off.

The light will blink when the Vehicle

Dynamic Control (VDC) system or the

traction control system is operating, thus

alerting the driver that the vehicle is

nearing its traction limits. The road sur-

face may be slippery.

If the VDC warning light illuminates while

the VDC system is on, this light alerts the

driver to the fact that the VDC system’s

fail-safe mode is operating, for example

the VDC system may not be functioning

properly. Have the system checked. It is

recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service. If a malfunction occurs in

the system, the VDC system function will

be canceled but the vehicle is still drive-

able. For additional information, see “Ve-

hicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” (P.5-

131) of this manual.

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS

(other)

See “Vehicle information display” (P.2-19).

Automatic brake hold indica-

tor light (green) (if so equipped)

The automatic brake hold indicator light

(green) illuminates while the automatic

brake hold system is operating. (See

“Automatic brake hold” (P.5-29).)

Automatic brake hold indica-

tor light (white) (if so equipped)

The automatic brake hold indicator light

(white) illuminates when the automatic

brake hold system is on standby. (See

“Automatic brake hold” (P.5-29).)

Instruments and controls 2-17

2-18 Instruments and controls

Exterior light indicator

This indicator illuminates when the head-

light switch is turned to the AUTO,

position and the front parking lights,

rear combination lights, license plate

lights or headlights are on. The indicator

turns off when these lights are turned off.

Front fog light indicator light

(if so equipped)

The front fog light indicator light illumi-

nates when the front fog lights are on.

(See “Fog light switch” (P.2-59).)

High beam assist indicator

light

This indicator light illuminates when the

headlights come on while the headlight

switch is in the AUTO position or

position (Type B) with the high beam

selected. This indicates that the high

beam assist system is operational. (See

“High beam assist” (P.2-55).)

High beam indicator light

This light illuminates when the headlight

high beam is on and goes out when the

low beam is selected.

Turn signal/hazard indicator

lights

The light flashes when the turn signal

switch lever or hazard switch is turned on.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Door lock warning chime

Models with Intelligent Key system:

When the chime sounds, be sure to check

both the vehicle and the Intelligent Key.

(See “Troubleshooting guide” (P.3-17).)

Models without Intelligent Key system:

A chime sounds if the driver’s side door is

opened while the key is left in the ignition

switch and the ignition switch is in the

OFF or LOCK position. Be sure to remove

the key and carry it with you when you

leave the vehicle.

Light reminder chime

The light reminder chime will sound when

the driver side door is opened with the

headlight switch in the

or posi-

tion, and the ignition switch is in the ACC,

OFF or LOCK position.

Turn the light switch to the OFF (if so

equipped) or the AUTO position when you

leave the vehicle.

Driving aid chimes (if so equipped)

An audible alert/chime may be heard if

any of the following systems are active:

. Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)

with Pedestrian Detection

. Intelligent Forward Collision Warning

(I-FCW)

. Blind Spot Warning (BSW)

. Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

. Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)

. Lane Departure Warning (LDW)

. ProPILOT Assist

. Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)

. Rear Sonar System (RSS)

For additional information, refer to the

“Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

NISSAN Intelligent Key® door buz-

zer (if so equipped)

The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if

any one of the following improper opera-

tions is found.

. The Intelligent Key is left inside the

vehicle when locking the doors.

. The Intelligent Key is left outside the

vehicle when operating the vehicle.

When the buzzer sounds, be sure to

check both the vehicle and the Intelligent

Key. For additional information, refer to

“Intelligent Key system” (P.3-11).

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear

warnings. When a brake pad requires

replacement, it will make a high pitched

scraping sound when the vehicle is in

motion. This scraping sound will first

occur only when the brake pedal is

depressed. After more wear of the brake

pad, the sound will always be heard even

if the brake pedal is not depressed. Have

the brakes checked as soon as possible if

the warning sound is heard.

Parking brake reminder chime

The parking brake reminder chime will

sound if the vehicle is driven at more than

4 MPH (7 km/h) (models not equipped

with electronic parking brake) or 2 MPH (4

km/h) (models equipped with electronic

parking brake) with the parking brake

applied. Stop the vehicle and release the

parking brake.

JVI0641X

The vehicle information display is

located between the tachometer and

the speedometer, and it displays the

warnings and information. The following

items are also displayed if the vehicle is

equipped with them:

. Vehicle settings

. Trip computer information

. Driver Assistance

. Cruise control system information

. ProPILOT Assist

. Intelligent Key operation information

. Audio information

. Navigation - turn by turn

Instruments and controls 2-19

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

2-20 Instruments and controls

. Indicators and warnings

. Tire pressure information

. Chassis Control

. Other information

JVI1566X

HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE INFOR-

MATION DISPLAY

The vehicle information display can be

changed using the buttons OK

, ,

, and located on the

steering wheel.

OK - change or select an item in the

vehicle information display

- navigate through the items in vehi-

cle information display

- go back to the previous menu

- change from one display screen

to the next (i.e. trip, Fuel economy)

STARTUP DISPLAY

When the ignition switch is placed in the

ON position, the vehicle information dis-

play may display the following screens if

the vehicle is equipped with them:

. Home

. Drive Computer — Average Speed-Trip

(Distance & Time)-Fuel Economy

. Compass or Navigation

. Audio

. ProPILOT Assist

. Driving Aids

. Tire Pressures

. 4x4–i

. Chassis Control

. Warnings

. Settings

Warnings will only display if there are any

present. For more information on warn-

ings and indicators, see “Vehicle informa-

tion display warnings and indicators” (P.2-

31).

To control what items display in the

vehicle information display, see “Settings”

(P.2-21).

SETTINGS

The setting mode allows you to change

the information displayed in the vehicle

information display:

. Driver Assistance

. Clock

. Meter Settings

. Vehicle Settings

. Maintenance

. Alarm (if so equipped)

. Tire Pressures

. Unit

. Language

. Factory Reset

Driver Assistance

To change the status, warnings or turn on

or off any of the systems/warnings dis-

played in the “Driver Assistance” menu,

use the

buttons to select and the

to change a menu item:

. Driving Aids

. Parking Aids (if so equipped)

. Chassis Control (if so equipped)

. Driver Attention (if so equipped)

. Speed Limit Sign (if so equipped)

Driving Aids:

To change the status, warnings or turn on

or off any of the systems/warnings dis-

played in the “Driving Aids” menu, use the

buttons to select and the OK to

change a menu item:

. Steering Assist (if so equipped)

Allows user to turn the Steering Assist

ON/OFF.

. Emergency Brake

— Front

Allows user to turn the Automatic

Emergency Braking (AEB) with pe-

destrian detection system and In-

telligent Forward Collision Warning

(I-FCW) system ON/OFF

— Rear

Allows user to turn the Rear Auto-

matic Braking (RAB) system ON/

OFF.

. Lane

— Warning (LDW)

Allows user to turn the Lane De-

parture Warning (LDW) system ON/

OFF.

— Prevention (LDP)

Allows user to turn the Intelligent

Lane Intervention (I-LI) system ON/

OFF.

. Blind Spot

— Warning (BSW)

Allows user to turn the Blind Spot

Warning (BSW) system ON/OFF.

For additional information, see “ProPILOT

assist” (P.5-64), “Automatic Emergency

Braking (AEB) with pedestrian detection

system” (P.5-97), “Rear Automatic Braking

(RAB)” (P.5-116), “Lane Departure Warning

(LDW)” (P.5-35), “Intelligent Lane Interven-

tion (I-LI)” (P.5-86), and “Blind Spot Warn-

ing (BSW)” (P.5-46).

Parking Aids (if so equipped):

To change the status or turn on or off any

of the systems displayed in the “Parking

Aids” menu, use the

buttons to

select and the OK

to change a menu

item:

. Moving Object (if so equipped)

Press the OK

to turn the Moving

Object Detection (MOD) ON/OFF.

. Cross Traffic

Press the OK

to turn the Rear Cross

Traffic Alert (RCTA) ON/OFF.

. Rear Sensor (if so equipped)

Allows user to turn the rear sensor

ON/OFF.

. Display (if so equipped)

Allows user to turn the Rear Sonar

System (RSS) display ON/OFF.

. Volume (if so equipped)

Allows user to select sensor volume

(High, Med. or Low).

. Range (if so equipped)

Allows user to select the sensor range

Instruments and controls 2-21

2-22 Instruments and controls

(Far, Mid. or Near).

For additional information, see “Moving

Object Detection (MOD)” (P.4-21), “Rear

Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)” (P.5-54) and

“Rear Sonar System (RSS)” (P.5-136).

Chassis Control:

To change the status, warnings or turn on

or off any of the systems/warnings dis-

played in the “Chassis Control” menu.

Use the

buttons to select and the

to change a menu item:

. Trace Control

— See “Intelligent Trace Control” (P.5-

133) for more information.

. Engine Brake (if so equipped)

— See “Intelligent Engine Brake (Con-

tinuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) models)” (P.5-134) for more

information.

Press the OK

to turn ON/OFF.

Driver Attention (if so equipped) :

This menu allows the customer to turn

the Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) on or

off. See “Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA)”

(P.5-94).

Speed Limit Sign (if so equipped):

This menu allows the customer to turn

the Traffic Sign Recognition on or off. For

additional information, see “Traffic Sign

Recognition” (P.2-43).

Clock

Allows user to adjust the clock settings

and time within the vehicle information

display. Adjustments that can be made

include automatically setting the time,

12H/24H format, Daylight Savings Time,

time zone, and manually setting the time

(depending on the vehicle’s equipment).

The clock may also be set within the

center display. For additional information,

refer to the separate NissanConnect®

Owner’s Manual.

Meter Settings

The meter settings allows the customer

to choose from the various meter selec-

tions.

The meter settings can be changed using

the

and the OK buttons.

Main Menu Selection:

The items that display when the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position can be

enabled/disabled. To change the items

that are displayed, use the

to scroll

and the OK

to select a menu item.

Body Color:

The color of the vehicle that displays in

the vehicle information display when the

ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-

tion can be changed.

1. Use the

buttons until “Body

Color” is selected, and press OK

2. Select the body color using the

buttons and press OK .

ECO Mode Settings:

This setting allows the customer to

change the ECO mode system settings.

Use the

buttons until “ECO Mode

Settings” is selected, and press OK

- ECO Indicator

This setting allows the customer to en-

able/disable the ambient ECO indicator in

the vehicle information display.

1. Use the

buttons to select “ECO

Indicator”.

2. Press the OK

to turn ON/OFF the

ambient ECO in the vehicle informa-

tion display.

- DISP Mode

WAC0086X

This setting allows the customer to en-

able/disable the ECO pedal guide func-

tion.

1. Use the

buttons to select “DISP

Mode”.

2. Press the OK

to select “Pedal” or

“Inst.FE.”.

For detailed information, see “ECO mode

system” (P.5-32).

ECO Drive Report:

- Display

This setting allows the customer to en-

able/disable the ECO Drive Report in the

vehicle information display.

1. Use the

buttons to select “Dis-

play”.

2. Press the OK

to turn ON/OFF the

ECO management display in the vehi-

cle information display.

- View History

This setting allows the customer to reset

the past history of the fuel economy and

the best fuel economy.

Welcome Effect:

You can choose whether or not to display

the welcome screen when the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position. You

can also choose the following items to

define how the welcome screen looks:

. Dial Effect

. Display Effect

Select “Welcome Effect” using the

buttons and press the OK to select

this menu. Use the

buttons to

navigate between the menu options and

press the OK

to turn each function ON/

OFF.

Vehicle Settings

The vehicle settings allows the customer

to change settings for the following

settings.

. Lighting

. Turn indicator

. Locking

. Wipers

. Driving Position (if so equipped)

. Rear Door Alert

. Remote start (if so equipped)

The vehicle settings can be changed

using the

, and the OK buttons.

Lighting:

The “Lighting” menu has the following

options:

. Welcome Light

The welcome lighting can be set to be

ON or OFF. From the “Lighting” menu,

select “Welcome Light”. Use the OK

to turn this feature ON or OFF.

. Auto Room Lamp

The interior light timer can be set to

be ON or OFF. From the “Lighting”

menu, select “Auto Room Lamp”. Use

the OK

to turn this feature ON or

OFF.

. Light Sensitivity

The sensitivity of the Intelligent Auto

Instruments and controls 2-23

2-24 Instruments and controls

Headlight can be adjusted. From the

“Lighting” menu, select “Light Sensitiv-

ity”. Use the

buttons and the OK

to select the required sensitivity.

The following options are available:

— Turn on earliest

— Turn on earlier

— Turn on standard

— Turn on later

. Light Off Delay

The duration of the automatic head-

lights can be changed from 0 to 180

seconds. From the “Lighting” menu,

select “Light Off Delay”. Use the OK

to change the duration.

Turn indicator:

The “3 Flash Pass” overtaking feature can

be set to be ON or OFF. From the “Turn

indicator” menu, select “3 Flash Pass”. Use

the OK

to turn this feature ON or OFF.

Locking:

There are the following options in the

“Locking” menu:

. I–Key Door Lock (if so equipped)

When this item is turned on, the

request switch on the door is acti-

vated. From the “Locking” menu, select

“I-Key Door Lock”. Use the OK

activate or deactivate this function.

. Selective Unlock

When this item is turned on, and the

door handle request switch on the

driver’s or front passenger’s side door

is pushed, only the corresponding

door is unlocked. All the doors can

be unlocked if the door handle re-

quest switch is pushed again within 1

minute. When this item is turned to off,

all the doors will be unlocked when

the door handle request switch is

pushed once. From the “Locking”

menu, select “Selective Unlock”. Use

the OK

to activate or deactivate this

function.

. Auto Door Unlock

The “Auto Door Unlock” feature allows

the customer to customize the auto

door unlock options.

— Ignition OFF

— Shift to Park (for Continuously Vari-

able Transmission (CVT) models)

— Off

. Answer Bk. Horn (if so equipped)

When the answer back horn is on, the

horn will chirp and the hazard indica-

tors will flash twice when locking the

vehicle with the Intelligent Key or

remote keyless entry function.

Wipers:

. Speed Dependent

The “Speed Dependent” feature can be

activated or deactivated. From the

“Wipers” menu, select “Speed Depen-

dent”. Use the OK

to turn this

feature ON or OFF.

. Reverse Link

The “Reverse Link” wiper feature can

be set to be ON or OFF. From the

“Wipers” menu, select “Reverse Link”.

Use the OK

to turn this feature ON

or OFF.

. Drip wipe

The “Drip wipe” feature can be set to

be ON or OFF. From the “Wipers” menu,

select “Drip wipe”. Use the OK

to turn

this feature ON or OFF.

Driving Position (if so equipped):

. Exit Seat Slide

When this item is turned on, this

feature will move the driver’s seat

backward for an easy exit when the

ignition switch is turned off and the

driver’s door is opened. After getting

into the vehicle and placing the igni-

tion switch in the ON position, the

driver’s seat will move to the previous

set position. See “Memory Seat” (P.3-

34).

Rear Door Alert:

. Horn & Alert

When selected, the alert is displayed

and the horn sounds.

. Alert Only

When selected, only the alert is dis-

played.

. OFF

When selected, no alert or horn will be

active.

For additional information, refer to “Rear

door alert” (P.2-63).

Remote start (if so equipped):

The “Remote start” feature allows user to

turn the remote engine start on or off.

When turned on, the engine can be

restarted remotely. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Remote engine start”

(P.3-23).

Maintenance

The maintenance mode allows you to set

alerts for the reminding of maintenance

intervals. To change an item:

Select “Maintenance” using the

switch

and press OK .

Oil and Filter:

This indicator appears when the custo-

mer set distance comes for changing the

engine oil and filter. You can set or reset

the distance for checking or replacing

these items. For scheduled maintenance

items and intervals, refer to the “9. Main-

tenance and schedules” section.

Tire:

This indicator appears when the custo-

mer set distance comes for replacing

tires. You can set or reset the distance

for replacing tires.

WARNING

The tire replacement indicator is not

a substitute for regular tire checks,

including tire pressure checks. See

“Changing wheels and tires” (P.8-37).

Many factors including tire inflation,

alignment, driving habits and road

conditions affect tire wear and when

tires should be replaced. Setting the

tire replacement indicator for a cer-

tain driving distance does not mean

your tires will last that long. Use the

tire replacement indicator as a guide

only and always perform regular tire

checks. Failure to perform regular

tire checks, including tire pressure

checks could result in tire failure.

Serious vehicle damage could occur

and may lead to a collision, which

could result in serious personal in-

jury or death.

Other:

This indicator appears when the custo-

mer set distance comes for checking or

replacing maintenance items other than

the engine oil, oil filter and tires. Other

maintenance items can include such

things as air filter or tire rotation. You

can set or reset the distance for checking

or replacing the items.

Instruments and controls 2-25

2-26 Instruments and controls

Alarm (if so equipped)

This setting allows the customer to set

alarms.

Select “Alarm” using the

button and

press OK button

Timer Alert (if so equipped):

This setting allows the customer to set an

alert to notify the driver that the set time

has been reached.

1. Use the button to select “Timer

Alert”.

2. Press the OK button

3. To change the timer amount, use the

button and the OK button to

save the selected time amount.

Navigation (if so equipped):

This setting allows the customer to en-

able/disable the alert for navigation in the

vehicle information display.

1. Use the

button to select “Navi-

gation”.

2. Press the OK button

to turn ON/OFF

the alert.

Phone (if so equipped):

This setting allows the customer to en-

able/disable the alert for an incoming call

in the vehicle information display.

1. Use the

button to select

“Phone”.

2. Press the OK button

to turn ON/OFF

the alert.

Mail (if so equipped):

This setting allows the customer to en-

able/disable the alert for incoming mail in

the vehicle information display.

1. Use the

button to select “Mail”.

2. Press the OK button

to turn ON/OFF

the alert.

Tire Pressures

The settings in the “Tire pressures” menu

are all related to the Tire Pressure Mon-

itoring System (TPMS). (See “Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P.5-5), “Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P.6-

3), “Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)” (P.8-29).)

Tire Pressure Unit:

The unit for tire pressure that displays in

the vehicle information display can be

changed to:

. psi

. kPa

. bar

. Kgf/cm

Use the button and the OK button

to select and change the unit.

If necessary, refer to the following table to

convert between units.

JVI0938X

Unit

The units that are shown in the vehicle

information display can be changed:

. Mileage

. Tire pressures

. Temperature

Use the

button , and the OK button

to select and change the units of the

vehicle information display.

Mileage:

The unit for the mileage that is shown in

the vehicle information display can be

changed to:

. km, l/100km

. km, km/l

. miles, MPG

Use the

button and the OK button

to select and change the unit.

Tire pressures:

See “Tire Pressures” (P.2-26).

Temperature:

The temperature that is shown in the

vehicle information display can be chan-

ged from:

. °C (Celsius)

. °F (Fahrenheit)

Use the

button to toggle choices.

Instruments and controls 2-27

2-28 Instruments and controls

Language

The language of the vehicle information

display can be changed.

Use the

button , and the OK button

to select and change the language of

the vehicle information display.

Factory Reset

The settings in the vehicle information

display can be reset back to the factory

default. To reset the vehicle information

display:

1. Select “Factory Reset” using the

button and press the OK button .

2. Select “YES” to return all settings back

to default by pressing the OK button

WAC0175X

Instruments and controls 2-29

2-30 Instruments and controls

WAC0410X

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

WARNINGS AND INDICATORS

The displayed images may differ depend-

ing on the model.

1. Engine start operation indicator

(for Continuously Variable Trans-

mission (CVT) models)

This indicator appears when the shift

lever is in the P (Park) position.

This indicator means that the engine will

start by pushing the ignition switch with

the brake pedal depressed. You can start

the engine directly in any position of the

ignition switch.

2. Engine start operation indicator

(for Manual Transmission (MT)

models)

This indicator means that the engine will

start by pushing the ignition switch with

the clutch pedal depressed. You can start

the engine directly in any position of the

ignition switch.

You can also start the engine by pushing

the ignition switch with the brake pedal

depressed when the shift lever is in the N

(Neutral) position.

3. No Key detected warning (if so

equipped)

This warning appears when the door is

closed with the Intelligent Key left outside

the vehicle and the ignition switch in the

ON position. Make sure that the Intelligent

Key is inside the vehicle.

See “Intelligent Key system” (P.3-11) for

more details.

4. Shift to Park warning (CVT mod-

els) (if so equipped)

This warning appears when the ignition

switch is pushed to stop the engine with

the shift lever in any position except the P

(Park) position.

If this warning appears, move the shift

lever to the P (Park) position or place the

ignition switch in the ON position.

An inside warning chime will also sound.

(See “Intelligent Key system” (P.3-11).)

5. Key Battery Low warning (if so

equipped)

This warning appears when the Intelli-

gent Key battery is running out of power.

If this indicator appears, replace the

battery with a new one. See “Intelligent

Key battery replacement” (P.8-23).

6. Engine start operation for Intelli-

gent Key system indicator (if so

equipped)

This indicator appears when the Intelli-

gent Key battery is running out of power

and when the Intelligent Key system and

vehicle are not communicating normally.

If this indicator appears, touch the igni-

tion switch with the Intelligent Key while

depressing the brake pedal. (See “Intelli-

gent Key battery discharge” (P.5-17).)

7. Key ID incorrect warning (if so

equipped)

This warning appears when the ignition

switch is placed from the LOCK position

and the Intelligent Key cannot be recog-

nized by the system. You cannot start the

engine with an unregistered key. Use the

registered Intelligent Key.

See “Intelligent Key system” (P.3-11).

8. Release Parking Brake warning

This warning appears when the vehicle

speed is above 4 MPH (7 km/h) (models

not equipped with electronic parking

brake) or 2 MPH (4 km/h) (models

equipped with electronic parking brake)

and the parking brake is applied. Stop the

vehicle and release the parking brake.

Instruments and controls 2-31

2-32 Instruments and controls

9. Low fuel level warning

This warning appears when the fuel level

in the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as

soon as it is convenient, preferably before

the fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There

will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank

when the fuel gauge needle reaches 0

(Empty).

10. Low Washer Fluid warning (if so

equipped)

This warning appears when the window

washer fluid is at a low level. Add window

washer fluid as necessary. For additional

information, refer to “Window washer

fluid” (P.8-10).

11. Door/liftgate open warning

This warning appears if any of the doors

and/or the liftgate are open or not closed

securely. The vehicle icon indicates which

door or the liftgate is open on the display.

12. Rear seat belt warning

This rear seat belt warning appears after

the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position. If any of the rear passenger’s

seat belts is not fastened, the seat icon

illuminates in red to show which seat belt

is not fastened. The seat icon illuminates

in red until the corresponding rear pas-

senger’s seat belt is fastened. The warn-

ing will automatically turn off after

approximately 35 seconds. When the

vehicle speed exceeds 10 MPH (15 km/h),

if a rear passenger’s seat belt is unfas-

tened, a buzzer will sound and the seat

icon illuminates in red. The seat icon

illuminates in red until the corresponding

rear passenger’s seat belt is fastened. The

warning will automatically turn off after

approximately 35 seconds. For precau-

tions on seat belt usage, see “Seat belts”

(P.1-12).

13. Key System Error: See Owner’s

Manual warning (if so equipped)

This warning appears if there is a mal-

function in the Intelligent Key system.

If this warning appears while the engine is

stopped, the engine cannot be started. If

this warning appears while the engine is

running, the vehicle can be driven. How-

ever, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for repair as soon as

possible.

14. Loose Fuel Cap warning

This warning appears when the fuel-filler

cap is not tightened correctly after the

vehicle has been refueled. For additional

information, refer to “Fuel-filler cap” (P.3-

28).

15. Tire Pressure Low — Add Air

warning

This warning appears when the low tire

pressure warning light in the meter

illuminates and low tire pressure is de-

tected. The warning appears each time

the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position as long as the low tire pressure

warning light remains illuminated. If this

warning appears, stop the vehicle and

adjust the pressure to the recommended

COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and

Loading Information label. (See “Low tire

pressure warning light” (P.2-14) and “Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P.5-

5).)

16. Low Oil Pressure Stop Vehicle

warning

This warning appears if low engine oil

pressure is detected. If the warning ap-

pears during normal driving, pull off the

road in a safe area and stop the engine

immediately. It is recommended that you

call a NISSAN dealer.

The low oil pressure warning is not

designed to indicate a low oil level. Use

the dipstick to check the oil level. (See

“Engine oil” (P.8-6).)

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine

oil pressure warning displayed could

cause serious damage to the engine.

17. AWD Error: See Owner’s Manual

warning (if so equipped)

This warning appears when the All-Wheel

Drive (AWD) system is not functioning

properly while the engine is running.

Reduce vehicle speed and have the sys-

tem checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. See

“Intelligent 4x4” (P.5-123).

18. AWD High Temp. Stop vehicle

warning (if so equipped)

This warning may appear while trying to

free a stuck vehicle due to increased oil

temperature. The driving mode may

change to Two-Wheel Drive (2WD). If this

warning is displayed, stop the vehicle with

the engine idling, as soon as it is safe to

do so. Then if the warning turns off, you

can continue driving. See “Intelligent 4x4”

(P.5-123).

19. Tire Size Incorrect: See Owner’s

Manual warning (if so equipped)

This warning may appear if there is a

large difference between the diameters of

the front and rear wheels and tires. Pull

off the road in a safe area, with the engine

idling. Check that all the tire sizes are the

same, that the tire pressure is correct and

that the tires are not excessively worn.

See “Intelligent 4x4” (P.5-123).

20. Battery Voltage Low Charge

Battery warning

This warning appears when the battery

voltage is low and the battery needs to be

charged.

21. Shipping Mode On Push Storage

Fuse warning (if so equipped)

This warning may appear if the extended

storage fuse switch is not pushed in

(switched on). When this warning ap-

pears, push in (switch on) the extended

storage fuse switch to turn off the warn-

ing. For more information, see “Extended

storage fuse switch” (P.8-21).

22. Power will turn off to save the

battery warning

This warning appears after the ignition

switch is in the ON position for a certain

period of time.

23. Power turned off to save the

battery warning

This warning appears after the ignition

switch is automatically turned OFF to

save the battery.

24. Reminder: Turn OFF Headlights

warning

This warning appears when the driver

side door is opened with the headlight

switch is left ON and the ignition switch is

placed in the OFF or LOCK position. Place

the headlight switch in OFF (if so

equipped) or AUTO position. For addi-

tional information, see “Headlight and

turn signal switch” (P.2-52).

25. Headlight System Error: See

Owner’s Manual warning (if so

equipped)

This warning appears if the LED head-

lights are malfunctioning. Have the sys-

tem checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Instruments and controls 2-33

2-34 Instruments and controls

26. Timer Alert — Time for a driver

break? indicator

This indicator appears when the set “Time

for a driver break?” indicator activates.

You can set the time for up to 6 hours.

27. Chassis Control System Error:

See Owner’s Manual warning

This warning appears if the chassis con-

trol module detects an error in the

chassis control system. Have the system

checked. It is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service. (See

“Chassis control” (P.5-133).)

28. Cruise control indicator (if so

equipped)

This indicator shows the cruise control

system status. The status is shown by the

color.

See “Cruise control” (P.5-62) for details.

29. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

indicator (if so equipped)

This indicator shows the Intelligent Cruise

Control (ICC) system status. The status is

shown by the color. (See “Intelligent

Cruise Control (ICC)” (P.5-75).)

30. Continuously Variable Trans-

mission (CVT) position indicator

(CVT models)

This indicator shows the automatic shift

position.

In the manual shift mode, when the

transmission does not shift to the se-

lected gear due to a transmission protec-

tion mode, the CVT position indicator will

blink and a chime will sound.

See “Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT)” (P.5-20) for further details.

31. CVT Error: See Owner’s Manual

warning (CVT models)

This warning appears when there is a

malfunction with the CVT system. If this

warning comes on, have the system

checked. It is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service.

32 Malfunction warning

This warning appears when the following

systems malfunction.

. Lane Departure Warning (LDW)

. Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)

. Blind Spot Warning (BSW)

. Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

. Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)

with pedestrian detection

. Intelligent Forward Collision Warning

(I-FCW)

. Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)

For more details, see “Lane Departure

Warning (LDW)” (P.5-35), “Intelligent Lane

Intervention (I-LI)” (P.5-40), “Blind Spot

Warning (BSW)” (P.5-46), “Rear Cross Traf-

fic Alert (RCTA)” (P.5-54), “ProPILOT assist”

(P.5-64), “Automatic Emergency Braking

(AEB) with pedestrian detection system”

(P.5-97), “Intelligent Forward Collision

Warning (I-FCW)” (P.5-107) or “Rear Auto-

matic Braking (RAB)” (P.5-116).

33. Drive mode indicators

These indicators illuminate in the vehicle

information display when either the ECO

or SPORT mode is selected.

For additional information, refer to

“SPORT mode switch” (P.5-32) or “ECO

mode system” (P.5-32).

34. Unavailable: High Cabin Tem-

perature warning

This warning appears if the interior tem-

perature of the vehicle has reached such

a high temperature that the sensor for

the Lane Departure Warning (LDW), Intel-

ligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) or Traffic

Sign Recognition (TSR) (if so equipped)

system can no longer function reliably.

Once the interior temperature has

reached normal levels, the warning

should disappear.

If the warning continues to display, have

the system checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

For additional information, refer to “Lane

Departure Warning (LDW)” (P.5-35), “Intel-

ligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)” (P.5-86) or

“Traffic Sign Recognition” (P.2-43).

35. Not Available: Poor Road Con-

ditions warning (if so equipped)

This message appears when the Intelli-

gent Lane Intervention (I-LI) system or the

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system

becomes unavailable because the road

is slippery. See “Intelligent Lane Interven-

tion (I-LI)” (P.5-40) or “Intelligent Cruise

Control (ICC)” (P.5-75).

36. Currently unavailable warning

This message appears when the Intelli-

gent Lane Intervention (I-LI) system or the

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system

becomes unavailable because the VDC is

turned off or operates. For additional

information, refer to “Intelligent Lane

Intervention (I-LI)” (P.5-40) or “Intelligent

Cruise Control (ICC)” (P.5-75).

37. Forward Driving Aids Tempora-

rily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked/

Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruc-

tion warning

This message appears when the front

radar sensor may be obstructed due to:

. mud, dirt, snow, ice, etc.

. inclement weather (rain, fog, snow,

etc)

All forward driving aids are temporarily

disabled until the system detects that the

front radar sensor is no longer ob-

structed.

See “Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)

with pedestrian detection system” (P.5-

97), “Intelligent Forward Collision Warning

(I-FCW)” (P.5-107) or “ProPILOT assist” (P.5-

64).

38. Unavailable: Side Radar Ob-

struction warning

This warning appears when the Blind

Spot Warning (BSW)/Rear Cross Traffic

Alert (RCTA) system becomes unavailable

because a radar blockage is detected.

(See “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” (P.5-46) or

“Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)” (P.5-54).)

39. Press Brake Pedal warning (for

electronic parking brake equipped

models)

This indicator appears in the following

situations:

. The driver tries to release the electro-

nic parking brake manually without

depressing the brake pedal.

. The vehicle is stopped on a steep hill

and there is a possibility of moving

backward, even if the electronic park-

ing brake is applied.

. This warning appears if the vehicle

moves while the automatic brake hold

(if so equipped) is activated.

40. Lane Departure Warning (LDW)/

Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)

indicator

This indicator shows when the LDW and/

or I-LI systems are engaged.

See “Lane Departure Warning (LDW)” (P.5-

35) or “Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)”

(P.5-40).

Instruments and controls 2-35

2-36 Instruments and controls

41. Steering assist indicator (if so

equipped)

This indicator appears when the steering

assist system is engaged.

See “ProPILOT assist” (P.5-64).

42. Steering assist alert (if so

equipped)

This message may appear when the

steering assist system is engaged.

It will be displayed under the following

condition:

. When not holding the steering wheel

or when there is no steering wheel

operation.

Hold on the steering wheel immediately.

When the steering operation is detected,

the warning turns off and the steering

assist function is automatically restored.

For additional information, refer to “Pro-

PILOT assist” (P.5-64).

43. Automatic Emergency Braking

(AEB) emergency warning indicator

This indicator illuminates along, with an

audible warning, when the system de-

tects the possibility of a forward collision.

See “Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)

with pedestrian detection system” (P.5-

97).

44. Rear Door Alert is activated

When the system is enabled, this message

appears when the Rear Door Alert system

is active and can remind the driver to

check the back seat.

. Using the steering switch, a driver can

select “Dismiss Message” to clear the

display for a period of time. If no

selection is made, this message auto-

matically turns off after a period of

time.

. Using the steering switch, a driver can

select “Disable Alert” to disable the

horn alert for the remainder of the

current trip.

For additional information, see “Rear door

alert” (P.2-63).

WARNING

Selecting “Dismiss Message” during a

stop within a trip temporarily dis-

misses the message for that stop

without turning the system off.

Alerts can be provided for other

stops during the trip. Selecting “Dis-

able Alert” turns off the Rear Door

Alert system for the remainder of a

trip and no audible alert will be

provided.

NOTE:

This system is disabled until a driver

enables it using the vehicle information

display. See “Vehicle Settings” (P.2-23).

45. Check Back Seat For all articles

When the system is enabled, this message

appears when the vehicle comes to a

complete stop, the shift lever is moved

from the D (Drive) position to P (Park)

position, and the driver exits the vehicle.

This message alerts the driver, after a

period of time, to check for items in the

rear seat after the audible alert has been

provided.

NOTE:

This system is disabled until a driver

enables it using the vehicle information

display. For additional information, see

“Vehicle Settings” (P.2-23).

46. Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)

indicator

This indicator illuminates to indicate the

status of the Rear Automatic Braking

(RAB) system.

See “Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)” (P.5-

116).

47. Rear Sonar System (RSS) indi-

cator

This indicator illuminates to indicate the

status of the Rear Sonar System.

See “Rear Sonar System (RSS)” (P.5-136).

48. Not Available Bad Weather (if so

equipped)

This message may appear when the

steering assist system is engaged.

Under the following conditions, the steer-

ing assist system is automatically can-

celed:

. When the wiper low speed or high

speed operates.

. When lane markers in the traveling

lane cannot be correctly detected for

a period of time due to such items as a

snow rut, reflection of light on a rainy

day or several unclear lane markers

are present.

If you want to use the steering assist

system again, cancel the ProPILOT assist

system and set it again when lane

markers are clearly visible.

49. Not available Front Camera

Obstructed (if so equipped)

This message may appear when the

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system is

engaged.

Under the following conditions, the ICC

system is automatically canceled:

. The camera area of the windshield is

fogged up or covered with dirt, water,

drops, ice, snow, etc.

. Strong light, such as sunlight or high

beams from oncoming vehicles, enter

the front camera

50. Not Available Parking Brake On

(if so equipped)

This message may appear when the

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system is

engaged.

Under the following condition, the ICC

system is automatically canceled:

. The electronic parking brake is ap-

plied.

The above system cannot be used when

the electronic parking brake is activated.

51. Not Available Seat Belt Not

Fastened (if so equipped)

This message may appear when the

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system is

engaged.

Under the following condition, the ICC

system is automatically canceled:

. When the driver’s seat belt is not

fastened.

The ICC system cannot be used when the

driver’s seat belt is not fastened.

52. Press Brake Pedal (if so

equipped)

This message may appear when the

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system is

engaged.

It will be displayed under the following

condition:

. While the vehicle is stopped by the ICC

, the driver’s door is opened but the

electronic parking brake was not acti-

vated.

Step on the brake immediately.

Instruments and controls 2-37

2-38 Instruments and controls

53. Press brake pedal to operate

switch warning (if so equipped)

This warning appears if the automatic

brake hold switch is pushed without

depressing the brake pedal while the

automatic brake hold function is acti-

vated. Depress the brake pedal and push

the switch to deactivate the automatic

brake hold function. For more details, see

“Automatic brake hold” (P.5-29).

54. AUTO HOLD Caution Steep

Slope indicator (if so equipped)

This indicator appears when the auto-

matic brake hold function is activated

while the vehicle is on a steep hill.

55. Steep Slope Apply Foot Brake to

hold vehicle warning (if so

equipped)

This warning appears before the electro-

nic parking brake is applied and the brake

force of the automatic brake hold func-

tion is released when the vehicle is on a

steep hill, to prevent the vehicle rolls out.

56. Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA)

malfunction warning (if so

equipped)

This warning appears when the Intelli-

gent Driver Alertness (I-DA) system mal-

functions. See “Intelligent Driver Alertness

(I-DA)” (P.5-94).

57. Traffic Sign Recognition mal-

function warning (if so equipped)

This warning appears when the Traffic

Sign Recognition system malfunctions.

For more details, see “Traffic Sign Recog-

nition” (P.2-43).

58. Parking Sensor Error warning (if

so equipped)

This warning illuminates when there is a

malfunction with the Rear Sonar System

(RSS). For additional information, refer to

“Rear Sonar System (RSS)” (P.5-136).

WAC0177X

Instruments and controls 2-39

2-40 Instruments and controls

JVI1566X

TRIP COMPUTER

The trip computer display can be chan-

ged using the buttons OK

, , ,

and

located on the steering

wheel.

OK - change or select an item in the

vehicle information display

- navigate through the items in vehi-

cle information display

- go back to the previous menu

- change from one display screen

to the next

1. Safety Shield

The safety shield mode shows the oper-

ating condition for the following systems.

. Lane Departure Warning (LDW)

. Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)

. Blind Spot Warning (BSW)

. Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)

with pedestrian detection system

For more details, see “Lane Departure

Warning (LDW)” (P.5-35), “Intelligent Lane

Intervention (I-LI)” (P.5-40), “Blind Spot

Warning (BSW)” (P.5-46) or “Automatic

Emergency Braking (AEB) with pedestrian

detection system” (P.5-97).

2. Average speed 1 and 2 (MPH or

km/h)

The average speed 1 mode shows the

average vehicle speed since the last reset.

The average speed 2 mode shows the

average vehicle speed since the time the

ignition switch was turned ON. The aver-

age speed 2 is automatically reset each

time the ignition is placed in the OFF

position.

Resetting is done by pushing the OK

button. When the OK button is pushed,

the following menu items are displayed.

. Cancel

— Return to the previous screen with-

out resetting.

. Average Speed

— Reset the average speed.

. All

— Reset all items of “Average Speed”,

“Elapsed time and trip odometer”

and “Fuel economy.”

Once the “Average speed 1” is displayed,

you can use

buttons to switch

between the “Average speed 1” and “Aver-

age speed 2.”

The display is updated every 30 seconds.

The first 30 seconds after a reset, the

display shows “——”.

3. Elapsed time and trip odometer 1

and 2 (mile or km)

Elapsed time:

The elapsed time mode 1 shows the time

since the last reset. The elapsed time 2

mode shows the time since the ignition

switch was turned ON. (The trip odometer

is also reset at the same time.)

Trip odometer:

The trip odometer 1 mode shows the total

distance the vehicle has been driven since

the last reset. The trip odometer 2 mode

shows the total distance the vehicle has

been driven since the time the ignition

switch was placed in the ON position. (The

elapsed time is also reset at the same

time.)

The elapsed time and trip odometer 2 is

automatically reset each time the ignition

is placed in the OFF position.

Resetting is done by pushing the OK

button. When the OK button is pushed,

the following menu items are displayed.

. Cancel

— Return to the previous screen with-

out resetting.

. Distance

— Reset the elapsed time and trip

odometer.

. All

— Reset all items of “Average Speed”,

“Elapsed time and trip odometer”

and “Fuel economy.”

Once the “Elapsed time and trip odometer

1” is displayed, you can use

buttons

to switch between the “Elapsed time and

trip odometer 1” and “Elapsed time and

trip odometer 2.”

4-5. Fuel economy/ECO pedal

guide

Current fuel consumption:

The current fuel consumption mode

shows the current fuel consumption.

Average fuel consumption:

The average fuel consumption 1 mode

shows the average fuel consumption

since the last reset. The average fuel

consumption 2 mode shows the average

fuel consumption since the time the

ignition switch was placed in the ON

position. The average fuel consumption

2 is automatically reset each time the

ignition is placed in the OFF position.

Resetting is done by pushing the OK

button. When the OK button is pushed,

the following menu items are displayed.

. Cancel

— Return to the previous screen with-

out resetting.

. Fuel Economy

— Reset the fuel economy.

. All

— Reset all items of “Average Speed”,

“Elapsed time and trip odometer”

and “Fuel economy”.

Once the “Fuel economy 1” is displayed,

you can use

buttons to switch

between the “Fuel economy 1” and “Fuel

economy 2”.

The display is updated every 30 seconds.

For about the first 1/3 mile (500 m) after a

reset, the display shows “——”.

6. Audio

The audio mode shows the status of

audio information.

7. Navigation (if so equipped)

When the route guidance is set in the

navigation system, this item shows the

navigation route information.

8. Compass (if so equipped)

This display indicates the heading direc-

tion of the vehicle.

9. Intelligent 4x4 torque distribution

display (if so equipped)

When the Intelligent 4x4 torque distribu-

tion display is selected, you can view the

distribution ratio of the transmission

torque to the front and rear wheels

during driving.

Instruments and controls 2-41

2-42 Instruments and controls

10. Chassis control

When Intelligent Trace Control, Intelligent

Engine Brake (Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) models) or Active Ride

Control system is operated, it shows the

operating condition. It also shows oper-

ating condition of Hill Start Assist. The

operating condition of the automatic

brake hold function (if so equipped) is

also shown. See “Intelligent Trace Control”

(P.5-133), “Intelligent Engine Brake (Con-

tinuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

models)” (P.5-134), “Active Ride Control”

(P.5-135), “Hill Start Assist system” (P.5-136)

or “Automatic brake hold” (P.5-29) for

more details.

11. Tire Pressures

The tire pressure mode shows the pres-

sure of all four tires while the vehicle is

driven.

When the Tire Pressure Low — Add Air

warning appears, the display can be

switched to the tire pressure mode by

pushing the OK

button to reveal addi-

tional details on the displayed warning.

12. Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA)

system (if so equipped)

When the “Driver Attention” display is

selected, you can view your attention

level as detected by the system. (See

“Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA)” (P.5-

94).)

13. Traffic Sign Recognition (if so

equipped)

The Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system

provides the driver with information

about the most recently detected speed

limit. See “Traffic Sign Recognition” (P.2-

43)for more details.

JVI0932X

CLOCK AND OUTSIDE AIR TEM-

PERATURE

The clock and outside air temperature

are displayed on the upper side of the

vehicle information display.

Clock

For clock adjustment, see “Clock” (P.2-22)

or the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s

Manual (if so equipped).

Outside air temperature (°F or °C)

The outside air temperature is displayed

in °F or °C in the range of −40 to 140°F (−40

to 60°C).

The outside air temperature mode in-

cludes a low temperature warning fea-

ture. If the outside air temperature is

below 37°F (3°C), the warning

is dis-

played (if so equipped).

The outside temperature sensor is lo-

cated in front of the radiator. The sensor

may be affected by road or engine heat,

wind directions and other driving condi-

tions. The display may differ from the

actual outside temperature or the tem-

perature displayed on various signs or

billboards.

WAC0198X

TRAFFIC SIGN RECOGNITION (if so

equipped)

The Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system

provides the driver with information

about the most recently detected speed

limit. The system captures the road sign

information with the multi-sensing front

camera unit

located on the windshield

in front of the inside rearview mirror and

displays the detected signs in the vehicle

information display. For vehicles

equipped with Navigation System, the

speed limit displayed is based on a

combination of Navigation System data

and live camera recognition. TSR informa-

tion is always displayed at the top of the

vehicle information display, and option-

ally in the main central area of the display

screen.

WARNING

The TSR system is only intended to

be a support device to provide the

driver with information. It is not a

replacement for the driver’s atten-

tion to traffic conditions or respon-

sibility to drive safely. It cannot

prevent accidents due to careless-

ness. It is the driver’s responsibility

to stay alert and drive safely at all

times.

System operation

The traffic recognition system displays

the following types of road sign:

Instruments and controls 2-43

2-44 Instruments and controls

WAC0214X

WAC0215X

Latest detected speed limit

Reduce speed limit caution (orange)

No speed limit information

No-overtaking zone

Reduce speed limit caution (with no

speed limit information) (orange)

CAUTION

. The Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)

system is intended as an aid to

careful driving. It is the driver’s

responsibility to stay alert, drive

safely, and observe all road reg-

ulations that currently apply, in-

cluding looking out for road

signs.

. The Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)

system may not function prop-

erly under the following condi-

tions:

— When rain, snow or dirt ad-

heres to the windshield in

front of the TSR camera unit.

— When the headlights are not

bright due to dirt on the lens

or if the aiming is not adjusted

properly.

— When strong light enters the

camera unit. (For example, the

light directly shines on the

front of the vehicle at sunrise

or sunset.)

— When a sudden change in

brightness occurs. (For exam-

ple, when the vehicle enters or

exits a tunnel or under a

bridge.)

— In areas not covered by the

Navigation System.

— If there are deviations in rela-

tion to the navigation, for ex-

ample due to changes in the

road routing.

— When overtaking buses or

trucks with speed stickers.

Turning the TSR system on and off

Turning the TSR system on or off is done

using the "Settings" menu in the vehicle

information display. For details, see “Ve-

hicle information display” (P.2-19).

Perform the following steps to enable or

disable the TSR system:

1. In the "Settings" menu, select the

"Driver Assistance" key.

2. Touch "Speed Limit Sign" to turn the

system ON/OFF.

System temporarily unavailable

If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight

under high temperature conditions (over

approximately 40°C (104°F)) and then

started, the TSR system may be deacti-

vated automatically. The “Unavailable:

high cabin temperature” warning mes-

sage will appear in the vehicle informa-

tion display.

Action to take:

When the interior temperature is reduced,

the TSR system will resume operating

automatically.

System Malfunction

If the TSR system malfunctions it will be

turned off automatically and the TSR

"Malfunction" warning message will ap-

pear in the vehicle information display.

Action to take:

If the TSR "Malfunction" warning mes-

sage appears, pull off the road at a safe

location and stop the vehicle. Turn the

engine off and restart the engine. If the

TSR "Malfunction" message continues to

appear, have the system checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

Maintenance

The TSR uses the same multi-sensing

front camera unit that is used by the

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system,

located in front of the interior rearview

mirror. For maintenance of the camera,

see “System maintenance” (P.5-39).

JVI1587X

Your vehicle has two types of security

systems, as follows:

. Vehicle security system

. NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

The security condition will be shown by

the security indicator light.

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM

The vehicle security system provides

visual and audio alarm signals if someone

opens the doors, hood (if so equipped)

and liftgate when the system is armed. It

is not, however, a motion detection type

system that activates when a vehicle is

moved or when a vibration occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft but

Instruments and controls 2-45

SECURITY SYSTEMS

2-46 Instruments and controls

cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the

theft of interior or exterior vehicle com-

ponents in all situations. Always secure

your vehicle even if parking for a brief

period. Never leave your keys in the

vehicle, and always lock it when unat-

tended. Be aware of your surroundings,

and park in secure, well-lit areas when-

ever possible.

Many devices offering additional protec-

tion, such as component locks, identifica-

tion markers, and tracking systems, are

available at auto supply stores and speci-

alty shops. Your NISSAN dealer may also

offer such equipment. Check with your

insurance company to see if you may be

eligible for discounts for various theft

protection features.

SIC2045

How to arm the vehicle security

system

1. Close all windows. The system can be

armed even if the windows are open.

2. Remove the keys from the vehicle.

3. Close all doors, hood (if so equipped)

and liftgate. Lock all doors. The doors

can be locked with the key fob (if so

equipped), Intelligent Key (if so

equipped), the request switch (if so

equipped), or power door lock switch.

4. Confirm that the security indicator

light stays on for about 30 seconds.

The vehicle security system is now

pre-armed. The vehicle security sys-

tem will automatically shift into the

armed phase. The security light begins

to flash once every three seconds. If

during the pre-armed phase one of

the following occurs, the system will

not arm:

Any door is unlocked with the key

fob (if so equipped), the Intelligent

Key (if so equipped), or the request

switch (if so equipped).

Ignition switch is placed in the ON

position.

Even when the driver and/or passen-

gers are in the vehicle, the system will

activate with all the doors, hood (if so

equipped) and liftgate locked with the

ignition switch placed in the LOCK posi-

tion. When placing the ignition switch in

the ON position, the system will be

released.

Vehicle security system activation

The vehicle security system will give the

following alarm:

. The headlights blink and the horn

sounds intermittently.

. The alarm automatically turns off

after approximately 50 seconds. How-

ever, the alarm reactivates if the

vehicle is tampered with again.

The alarm is activated by:

. Opening any doors, the hood (if so

equipped) or liftgate without using the

key or Intelligent Key (even if the door

is unlocked by releasing the door

inside lock knob or using the mechan-

ical key).

How to stop an activated alarm

The alarm stops only by unlocking a door

or the liftgate by pushing the UNLOCK

button on the key fob (if so equipped)

or the Intelligent Key (if so equipped), or

pushing the request switch (if so

equipped) on the driver’s or passenger’s

door in range of the door handle.

If the Intelligent Key battery is dis-

charged:

If the Intelligent Key battery is discharged,

the alarm will not stop by pushing the

UNLOCK

button on the key fob (if so

equipped) or the Intelligent Key (if so

equipped), or pushing the request switch

(if so equipped) on the driver’s or passen-

ger’s door in range of the door handle. In

such a case, unlock the driver’s door

using the mechanical key and touch the

ignition switch with the Intelligent Key to

stop the alarm. (See “Intelligent Key bat-

tery discharge” (P.5-17).)

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYS-

TEM

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

will not allow the engine to start without

the use of the registered key.

If the engine fails to start using the

registered key, it may be due to inter-

ference caused by another registered key,

an automated toll road device or auto-

mated payment device on the key ring.

Restart the engine using the following

procedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON

position for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or

LOCK position and wait approximately

10 seconds.

3. Repeat step 1 and 2 again.

4. Restart the engine while holding the

device (which may have caused the

interference) separate from the regis-

tered key.

If this procedure allows the engine to

start, NISSAN recommends placing the

registered key on a separate key ring

to avoid interference from other de-

vices.

Statement related to section 15 of FCC

rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer

System (CONT ASSY-BCM. ANT ASSY-

IMMOBILISER)

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference,

and (2) this device must accept any

interference received, including inter-

ference that may cause undesired op-

eration.

Note: Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Ca-

nada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following

two conditions: (1) this device may not

cause interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation of the device.

Instruments and controls 2-47

2-48 Instruments and controls

SIC2045

Security indicator light

The security indicator light blinks when-

ever the ignition switch is placed in the

OFF or LOCK position.

This function indicates the NISSAN Vehi-

cle Immobilizer System is operational.

If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

is malfunctioning, the light will remain on

while the ignition switch is placed in the

ON position.

If the light still remains on and/or the

engine will not start, seek service for

the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

as soon as possible. Please bring all

registered keys that you have. It is

recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer

solution may freeze on the wind-

shield and obscure your vision which

may lead to an accident. Warm wind-

shield with the defroster before you

wash the windshield.

CAUTION

. Do not operate the washer con-

tinuously for more than 30 sec-

onds.

. Do not operate the washer if the

reservoir tank is empty.

. Do not fill the window washer

reservoir tank with washer fluid

concentrates at full strength.

Some methyl alcohol based

washer fluid concentrates may

permanently stain the grille if

spilled while filling the window

washer reservoir tank.

. Pre-mix washer fluid concen-

trates with water to the manu-

facturer’s recommended levels

before pouring the fluid into the

window washer reservoir tank. Do

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

not use the window washer re-

servoir tank to mix the washer

fluid concentrate and water.

If the windshield wiper operation is

interrupted by snow or ice, the wiper

may stop moving to protect its motor. If

this occurs, turn the wiper switch to the

OFF position and remove the snow or

ice that is on and around the wiper

arms. In approximately 1 minute, turn

the switch on again to operate the

wiper.

JVI0863X

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER

OPERATION

The windshield wiper and washer oper-

ates when the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper

at the following speed:

Intermittent — intermittent operation can

be adjusted by turning the knob toward

(Slower) or (Faster). Also, the inter-

mittent operation speed varies in accor-

dance with the vehicle speed. (For

example, when the vehicle speed is high,

the intermittent operation speed will be

faster.)

Low — continuous low speed operation

High — continuous high speed operation

Push the lever up to have one sweep

operation of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you

to operate the

washer. Then the wiper will also operate

several times.

After a short delay, the drip wipe function

will operate the wiper once more to clear

remaining windshield-washer fluid from

the windshield.

NOTE:

The Speed Dependent feature and Drip

Wipe feature may be disabled. For

additional information, refer to “Vehicle

information display” (P.2-19) in this sec-

tion.

Instruments and controls 2-49

2-50 Instruments and controls

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer

solution may freeze on the rear

window glass and obscure your vi-

sion. Warm the rear window with the

defroster before you wash the rear

window.

CAUTION

. Do not operate the washer con-

tinuously for more than 30 sec-

onds.

. Do not operate the washer if the

reservoir tank is empty.

. Do not fill the window washer

reservoir tank with washer fluid

concentrates at full strength.

Some methyl alcohol based

washer fluid concentrates may

permanently stain the grille if

spilled while filling the window

washer reservoir tank.

. Pre-mix washer fluid concen-

trates with water to the manu-

facturer’s recommended levels

before pouring the fluid into the

window washer reservoir tank. Do

not use the window washer re-

servoir tank to mix the washer

fluid concentrate and water.

If the rear window wiper operation is

interrupted by snow or ice, the wiper

may stop moving to protect its motor. If

this occurs, turn the wiper switch to the

OFF position and remove the snow or

ice that is on and around the wiper

arms. In approximately 1 minute, turn

the switch on again to operate the

wiper.

JVI0867X

The rear window wiper and washer

operate when the ignition switch is in

the ON position.

Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF

position to operate the wiper.

Intermittent (INT) — intermittent opera-

tion (not adjustable)

Low (ON) — continuous low speed opera-

tion

Push the switch forward to operate the

washer. Then the wiper will also operate

several times.

REAR WINDOW WIPER AND

WASHER SWITCH

Reverse Link feature:

When the windshield wiper switch is on,

moving the shift lever to the R (Reverse)

position will operate the rear window

wiper.

NOTE:

The Reverse Link feature may be dis-

abled. For additional information, refer

to “Vehicle information display” (P.2-19).

Wiper drip wipe system:

The wiper will also operate once about 3

seconds after the washer and wiper are

operated. This operation is to wipe

washer fluid that has dripped on the

windshield.

JVI0852X

Type A

JVI0853X

Type B

To defog/defrost the rear window glass

and outside mirrors (if so equipped), start

the engine and push the switch on. The

indicator light

will illuminate. Push the

switch again to turn the defroster off.

It will automatically turn off in approxi-

mately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the

rear window, be careful not to

scratch or damage the rear window

defroster.

Instruments and controls 2-51

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE

MIRROR DEFROSTER SWITCH

2-52 Instruments and controls

JVI1616X

HEADLIGHT SWITCH

Lighting

Type A:

WAC0411X

Type B:

Rotate the switch to the position, and

the front parking, tail, license plate, and

instrument panel lights will come on. The

Intelligent Auto Headlight system will be

set (Type B).

Rotate the switch to the position, and

the headlights will come on and all the

other lights remain on.

JVI1624X

Intelligent Auto Headlight system

Type A:

The Intelligent Auto Headlight system

allows the headlights to be set so they

turn on and off automatically.

To set the Intelligent Auto Headlight

system:

1. Make sure the headlight switch is in

the AUTO position

2. Place the ignition switch in the ON

position.

3. The Intelligent Auto Headlight system

automatically turns the headlights on

and off.

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

To turn the Intelligent Auto Headlight

system off, turn the switch to the OFF,

or position.

The Intelligent Auto Headlight system can

turn on the headlights automatically

when it is dark and turn off the headlights

when it is light.

The headlights will also be turned on

automatically at twilight or in rainy

weather (when the windshield wiper is

operated continuously).

If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position and one of the doors is opened

and this condition is continued, the head-

lights remain on for 5 minutes.

WAC0412X

Type B:

The Intelligent Auto Headlight system

allows the headlights to be set so they

turn on and off automatically.

To set the Intelligent Auto Headlight

system:

1. Make sure the headlight switch is in

the AUTO position

or position .

2. Place the ignition switch in the ON

position.

3. The Intelligent Auto Headlight system

automatically turns the headlights on

and off.

To turn the Intelligent Auto Headlight

system off, turn the switch to the

position.

The Intelligent Auto Headlight system can

turn on the headlights automatically

when it is dark and turn off the headlights

when it is light.

The headlights will also be turned on

automatically at twilight or in rainy

weather (when the windshield wiper is

operated continuously).

If the ignition switch is turned to the ON

position when the parking brake is ap-

plied, the headlights remain off.

With the

position selected, the head-

lights turn off when the ignition switch is

placed in the OFF position, the shift lever

is in the P (Park) position, or the parking

brake is applied. (The front parking, tail,

license plate, and instrument lights are

on.)

How to turn off all lights:

With the AUTO position selected, all lights

turn off when the engine is restarted after

the parking brake is applied.

NOTE:

When driving at night, the headlights

remain on and cannot be turned off.

When the vehicle is stopped, the head-

lights can be turned off when the head-

light switch is in the

position.

With the AUTO position selected (head-

Instruments and controls 2-53

2-54 Instruments and controls

lights are on), the headlights will remain

on for 5 minutes when the ignition switch

is placed in the OFF position and one of

the doors is opened.

JVI0510X

Be sure not to put anything on top of

the photo sensor

located on the top

of the instrument panel. The photo

sensor controls the Intelligent Auto

Headlight; if it is covered, the photo

sensor reacts as if it is dark and the

headlights will illuminate.

Automatic headlights off delay:

You can keep the headlights on for up to

180 seconds after you place the ignition

switch in the OFF and open any door then

close all the doors. You can adjust the

period of the automatic headlights off

delay from 0 seconds (OFF) to 180 sec-

onds. The factory default setting is 45

seconds.

For automatic headlights off delay

setting, see “Vehicle Settings” (P.2-23).

JVI1617X

Example

Headlight beam select

To select the high beam function, push

the lever forward. The high beam lights

come on and the

light illuminates.

Pull the lever back to select the low beam.

Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the

headlight high beams on and off.

High beam assist

The high beam assist system will operate

when the vehicle is driven at speeds of

approximately 19 MPH (30 km/h) and

above. If an oncoming vehicle or leading

vehicle appears in front of your vehicle

when the headlight high beam is on, the

headlight will be switched to the low

beam automatically.

Precautions on high beam assist:

WARNING

. The high beam assist system is a

convenience but it is not a sub-

stitute for safe driving operation.

The driver should remain alert at

all times, ensure safe driving

practices and switch the high

beams and low beam manually

when necessary.

. The high beam or low beam may

not switch automatically under

the following conditions. Switch

the high beam and low beam

manually.

— During bad weather (rain, fog,

snow, wind, etc.).

— When a light source similar to

a headlight or tail light is in

the vicinity of the vehicle.

— When the headlights of the

oncoming vehicle or the lead-

ing vehicle are turned off,

when the color of the light is

affected due to foreign mate-

rials on the lights, or when the

light beam is out of position.

— When there is a sudden, con-

tinuous change in brightness.

— When driving on a road that

passes over rolling hills, or a

road that has level differ-

ences.

— When driving on a road with

many curves.

— When a sign or mirror-like

surface is reflecting intense

light towards the front of the

vehicle.

— When the container, etc. being

towed by a leading vehicle is

reflecting intense light.

— When a headlight on your

vehicle is damaged or dirty.

— When the vehicle is leaning at

an angle due to a punctured

tire, being towed, etc.

Instruments and controls 2-55

2-56 Instruments and controls

. The timing of switching the low

beam and high beam may

change under the following situa-

tions.

— The brightness of the head-

lights of the oncoming vehicle

or leading vehicle.

— The movement and direction

of the oncoming vehicle and

the leading vehicle.

— When only one light on the

oncoming vehicle or the lead-

ing vehicle is illuminated.

— When the oncoming vehicle or

the leading vehicle is a two-

wheeled vehicle.

— Road conditions (incline,

curve, the road surface, etc.).

— The number of passengers

and the amount of cargo.

JVI1621X

Type A

WAC0414X

Type B

High beam assist operations:

To activate the high beam assist system,

turn the headlight switch to the AUTO

position

or position (Type B) and

push the lever forward

(high beam

position). The high beam assist indicator

light in the meter will illuminate while the

headlights are turned on.

If the high beam assist indicator light

does not illuminate in the above condi-

tion, it may indicate that the system is not

functioning properly. It is recommended

you have the system checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

When the vehicle speed lowers to less

than approximately 13 MPH (20 km/h), the

headlight remains the low beam.

To turn off the high beam assist system,

turn the headlight switch to the

position or select the low beam position

by placing the lever in the neutral posi-

tion.

WAC0198X

Ambient image sensor maintenance:

The ambient image sensor

for the high

beam assist system is located in front of

the inside mirror. To keep the proper

operation of the high beam assist system

and prevent a system malfunction, be

sure to observe the following:

. Always keep the windshield clean.

. Do not attach a sticker (including

transparent material) or install an

accessory near the ambient image

sensor.

. Do not strike or damage the areas

around the ambient image sensor. Do

not touch the sensor lens that is

located on the ambient image sensor.

If the ambient image sensor is damaged

due to an accident, it is recommended

you contact a NISSAN dealer.

Battery saver system

. When the headlight switch is in the

or position while the ignition

switch is in the ON position, the lights

will automatically turn off within a

period of time after the ignition switch

has been placed in the OFF position.

. When the headlight switch remains in

the

or position after the lights

automatically turn off, the lights will

turn on when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position.

CAUTION

. When you turn on the headlight

switch again after the lights auto-

matically turn off, the lights will

not turn off automatically. Be

sure to turn the light switch to

the OFF (if so equipped) or the

AUTO position when you leave

the vehicle for extended periods

of time, otherwise the battery will

be discharged.

. Never leave the light switch on

when the engine is not running

for extended periods of time even

if the headlights turn off auto-

matically.

Daytime Running Light (DRL) sys-

tem

Type A:

The LED portion of the headlights auto-

matically illuminate at 100% intensity

when the engine is started and the

parking brake released. The LED Daytime

Running Light (DRL) operate with the

headlight switch in the OFF position or

in the

position. When you turn the

headlight switch to the

position for

full illumination, the LED lights switch

from LED DRL to the park function.

If the parking brake is applied before the

engine is started, the LED DRL do not

illuminate. The LED DRL illuminate when

the parking brake is released. The LED

DRL will remain on until the ignition

switch is placed in the OFF position.

It is necessary at dusk to turn the head-

light switch ON for interior controls and

switches to illuminate, as those remain

OFF while the switch is in the OFF

position.

Instruments and controls 2-57

2-58 Instruments and controls

WARNING

When the LED DRL system is active,

tail lights on your vehicle are not on.

It is necessary at dusk to turn on

your headlights. Failure to do so

could cause an accident injuring

yourself and others.

Type B:

The LED portion of the headlights auto-

matically illuminate at 100% intensity

when the engine is started and the

parking brake released. The DRL operate

with the headlight switch in the AUTO

position or

position, the headlight

must be off. When you turn the headlight

switch to the

position for full illumi-

nation, the LED lights switch from LED

DRL to the park function.

If the parking brake is applied before the

engine is started, the LED DRL do not

illuminate. The LED DRL illuminate when

the parking brake is released. The LED

DRL will remain on until the ignition

switch is placed in the OFF position or

the headlight turns on.

JVI1591X

Example

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

Move the lever up or down to signal the

turning direction. When the turn is com-

pleted, the turn signals cancel automati-

cally.

Lane change signal

Move the lever up or down until the turn

signal begins to flash, but the lever does

not latch, to signal a lane change. Hold

the lever until the lane change is com-

pleted.

Move the lever up or down until the turn

signal begins to flash, but the lever does

not latch, and release the lever. The turn

signal will automatically flash three times.

Choose the appropriate method to signal

a lane change based on road and traffic

conditions.

JVI0980X

Example

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)

To turn the fog lights on, turn the head-

light switch to the

position, then turn

the fog light switch to the

position.

To turn the fog lights on with the head-

light switch in the AUTO position or

position (Type B), the headlights must be

on, then turn the fog light switch to the

position.

To turn them off, turn the fog light switch

to the OFF position.

The headlights must be on for the fog

lights to operate. The fog lights automa-

tically turn off when the high beam

headlights are selected.

JVI1569X

To sound the horn, push the center pad

area of the steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing

so could affect proper operation of

the supplemental front air bag sys-

tem. Tampering with the supple-

mental front air bag system may

result in serious personal injury.

JVI1592X

The heated steering wheel system is

designed to operate only when the sur-

face temperature of the steering wheel is

below 68°F (20°C).

Push the heated steering wheel switch to

warm the steering wheel after the engine

starts. The indicator light on the switch

will illuminate.

If the surface temperature of the steering

wheel is below 68°F (20°C), the system will

heat the steering wheel and cycle off and

on to maintain a temperature above 68°F

(20°C). The indicator light will remain on

as long as the system is on.

Push the switch again to turn the heated

steering wheel system off manually. The

Instruments and controls 2-59

HORN

HEATED STEERING WHEEL (if so equipped)

2-60 Instruments and controls

indicator light will turn off.

NOTE:

If the surface temperature of the steer-

ing wheel is above 68°F (20°C) when the

switch is turned on, the system will not

heat the steering wheel. This is not a

malfunction.

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use

the seat heater if you or the occu-

pants cannot monitor elevated seat

temperatures or have an inability to

feel pain in body parts that contact

the seat. Use of the seat heater by

such people could result in serious

injury.

CAUTION

. The battery could run down if the

seat heater is operated while the

engine is not running.

. Do not use the seat heater for

extended periods or when no one

is using the seat.

. Do not put anything on the seat

which insulates heat, such as a

blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc.

Otherwise, the seat may become

overheated.

. Do not place anything hard or

heavy on the seat or pierce it with

a pin or similar object. This may

result in damage to the heater.

. Any liquid spilled on the heated

seat should be removed immedi-

ately with a dry cloth.

. When cleaning the seat, never use

gasoline, thinner, or any similar

materials.

. If any malfunctions are found or

the heated seat does not operate,

turn the switch off and have the

system checked. It is recom-

mended you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)

JVR0322X

The seats are warmed by built-in heaters.

The switches located on the center con-

sole can be operated independently of

each other.

1. Start the engine.

2. Select heat range.

For high-speed heating, push the HI

(High) side of the switch.

For low-speed heating, push the LO

(Low) side of the switch.

The indicator light on the switch

will

illuminate when the heater is on.

3. To turn off the heater, return the

switch to the level position. Make sure

the indicator light goes off.

The heater is controlled by a thermo-

stat, automatically turning the heater

on and off. The indicator light will

remain on as long as the switch is on.

When the vehicle’s interior is warmed,

or before you leave the vehicle, be

sure to turn off the switch.

JVI1593X

The dynamic driver assistance switch is

used to temporarily turn on and off the

Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) system.

The I-LI system must be turned on with

the dynamic driver assistance switch

every time the ignition is placed in the

ON position.

When the dynamic driver assistance

switch is turned off, the indicator

the switch is off. The indicator will also be

off if the I-LI system is deactivated using

the vehicle information display.

The I-LI system warns the driver with an

indicator and a chime, and helps assist

the driver to return the vehicle to the

center of the traveling lane by applying

Instruments and controls 2-61

DYNAMIC DRIVER ASSISTANCE SWITCH

(models without ProPILOT assist)

2-62 Instruments and controls

the brakes to the left or right wheels

individually (for a short period of time). For

additional information, see “Intelligent

Lane Intervention (I-LI)” (P.5-40).

WAC0074X

The steering assist switch is used to

temporarily turn on and off the steering

assist system.

The steering assist system controls the

steering system to help keep your vehicle

near the center of the lane when driving.

For additional information, see “ProPILOT

assist” (P.5-64).

SIC4544

The vehicle should be driven with the

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system on

for most driving conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the

VDC system reduces the engine output to

reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will

be reduced even if the accelerator is

depressed to the floor. If maximum en-

gine power is needed to free a stuck

vehicle, turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC

OFF switch. The

indicator light will

illuminate.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart

the engine to turn on the system. (See

“Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system”

STEERING ASSIST SWITCH (models

with ProPILOT assist)

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

OFF SWITCH

(P.5-131).)

JVI1595X

The Intelligent 4x4 LOCK switch is located

on the instrument panel. The AWD LOCK

indicator light will illuminate when the

switch is turned on. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Intelligent 4x4” (P.5-123).

Each time you push the switch, the AWD

mode will switch: AUTO ? LOCK ? AUTO.

The Rear Door Alert system functions

under certain conditions to indicate there

may be an object or passenger in the rear

seat(s). Check the seat(s) before exiting

the vehicle.

The Rear Door Alert system is initially

disabled. The driver can enable the sys-

tem using the vehicle information display.

For additional information, see “Vehicle

Settings” (P.2-23).

When the system is enabled:

. The system is activated when a rear

door is opened and closed within 10

minutes of the vehicle being driven.

When the vehicle is started and the

system is activated, a visual message

appears in the vehicle information

display. For additional information,

see “44. Rear Door Alert is activated”

(P.2-36).

. If a rear door is opened and closed but

the vehicle is not driven within ap-

proximately 10 minutes, the system

will not be activated. A rear door must

be opened and closed and the vehicle

is driven within 10 minutes for the

system to activate.

When the Rear Door Alert system is

activated and a driver exits the vehicle

after arriving at a destination:

Instruments and controls 2-63

INTELLIGENT 4X4 LOCK SWITCH (if

so equipped)

REAR DOOR ALERT

2-64 Instruments and controls

. When the driver puts the vehicle in the

P (Park) position, a message appears

in the vehicle information display for

the driver to “Dismiss Message” or

“Disable Alert” if desired.

. With the system enabled, when the

driver exits the vehicle, an audible alert

(horn sound) will occur unless a rear

door is opened and closed within a

short time to deactivate the alert.

. If the doors are locked before the alert

is deactivated by opening a rear door,

the horn will sound.

. If the system is activated but the

liftgate is opened before opening a

rear door, the horn will be delayed

until after the liftgate is closed.

. If the audible horn alert occurs, a

message will also appear in the vehi-

cle information display that states,

“Check Back Seat for all articles”. For

additional information, see “45. Check

Back Seat For all articles” (P.2-36).

WARNING

. If the driver selects “Disable

Alert”, no audible alert will be

provided regardless of rear door

open/close status.

. There may be times when there is

an object or passenger in the rear

seat(s) but the audible alert does

not sound. For example, this may

occur if rear seat passengers

enter or exit the vehicle during a

trip.

. The system does not directly

detect objects or passengers in

the rear seat(s). Instead, it can

detect when a rear door is

opened and closed, indicating

that there may be something in

the rear seat(s).

NOTE:

There may be times when the horn

sounds but there are no objects or

passengers in the rear seat(s).

For additional information, see “44. Rear

Door Alert is activated” (P.2-36).

JVS0185X

The ECO mode system helps to enhance

the fuel economy by controlling the

engine and CVT operation (for CVT mod-

els) automatically to avoid rapid accelera-

tion.

To turn on the ECO mode system, push

the ECO switch. The ECO mode indicator

appears on the meter.

To turn off the ECO mode, push the ECO

switch again. The ECO mode indicator will

turn off.

. The ECO mode system cannot be

turned off while the accelerator pedal

is depressed even if the ECO switch is

pushed to OFF. Release the accelera-

tor pedal to turn off the ECO mode

ECO MODE SWITCH

system.

. The ECO mode system will turn off

automatically if a malfunction occurs

in the system.

. Turn off the ECO mode system when

acceleration is required such as when:

— driving with a heavy load of pas-

sengers or cargo in the vehicle

— driving on a steep uphill slope

WAC0077X

Instrument Panel

WAC0233X

Center Console Box

The power outlet is located in the instru-

ment panel and center console box.

CAUTION

. The outlet and plug may be hot

during or immediately after use.

. Do not use with accessories that

exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A)

power draw. Do not use double

adapters or more than one elec-

trical accessory.

. Use power outlet with the engine

running to avoid discharging the

vehicle battery.

. Avoid using power outlet when

the air conditioner, headlights or

rear window defroster is on.

. This power outlet is not designed

for use with a cigarette lighter

unit.

. Push the plug in as far as it will

go. If good contact is not made,

the plug may overheat or the

internal temperature fuse may

open.

. Before inserting or disconnecting

a plug, be sure the electrical

accessory being used is turned

OFF.

Instruments and controls 2-65

POWER OUTLET

2-66 Instruments and controls

. When not in use, be sure to close

the cap. Do not allow water or any

liquid to contact the outlet.

WAC0234X

USB (Universal Serial Bus) CHAR-

GING CONNECTOR

The USB charging connector is located in

the center console box.

The USB charging connector can be used

only for charging an external device.

Connect a USB device into the connector.

Charging will start automatically (max-

imum output up to 5 volt, 12W, 2.4A).

The external device will be charged con-

tinuously while the ignition switch is in

the ACC or ON position.

Some mobile devices cannot be charged

depending on their specifications.

CAUTION

. Do not force a USB device into the

connector. Inserting the USB de-

vice tilted or up-side-down into

the connector may damage the

connector. Make sure that the

USB device is connected correctly

into the connector.

. Do not use a reversible USB cable.

Using the reversible USB cable

may damage the connector.

EMERGENCY SUPPORT

NissanConnect® Services provides var-

ious services to support dealing with

emergencies of the subscribed vehicle

and the driver.

For example, in case of an illness or

serious injury, you can seek support by

pushing the in-vehicle Emergency Call

(SOS) button and connecting to Nissan-

Connect® Services. NissanConnect® Ser-

vices can specify the location of the

vehicle via GPS, and the information will

be sent to the police or other agencies as

needed.

For information about other NissanCon-

nect® Services emergency support re-

lated services, refer to the

NissanConnect® Services website or con-

tact the NissanConnect® Customer Sup-

port Line.

NissanConnect® Services website:

For U.S.

www.nissanusa.com/connect

For Canada

http://www.nissan.ca/nissanconnect

(English)

www.nissan.ca/nissanconnect/fr

(French)

NissanConnect® Customer Support Line:

1-855-426-6628

WARNING

. Please note that the Automatic

Collision Notification service and

Emergency Call function cannot

be used in the following condi-

tions:

— Emergency functions and ser-

vices will not be available

without a paid subscription

to NissanConnect® Services.

— The NissanConnect® Services

network system is disabled.

— The vehicle moves outside the

service area where the TCU

(Telematics Control Unit) is

connected to the system.

— The vehicle is outside the area

where the cellular network

service is receivable.

— The vehicle is in a location

with poor signal reception

such as tunnels, underground

parking garages, behind

buildings or in mountainous

areas.

— The line is busy.

— The TCU (Telematics Control

Unit) or other systems of your

vehicle are not working prop-

erly.

— It may not be possible to

make an emergency call de-

pending on the severity of a

collision and/or emergency.

. Park the vehicle in a safe location

and set the parking brake before

operating the Emergency Call

(SOS) button.

. Only use this service in case of an

emergency. There may be a pen-

alty for inappropriate use of the

service.

. Radio waves could adversely af-

fect electric medical equipment.

Individuals who use pacemakers

should contact the device manu-

facturer regarding any possible

effects before using the system.

. The TCU (Telematics Control Unit)

antenna is installed inside the

upper central part of the instru-

ment panel. An occupant should

not get any closer to the antenna

than specified by the pacemaker

manufacturer. The radio waves

Instruments and controls 2-67

EMERGENCY CALL (SOS) BUTTON

(if so equipped)

2-68 Instruments and controls

from the TCU antenna may ad-

versely affect the operation of the

pacemaker while using the Nis-

sanConnect® Services.

WAC0510X

Making an emergency call

The design may vary from the illustra-

tions depending on the models and

specifications.

1. Push the Emergency Call (SOS) button.

2. When the line is connected, speak to

the Response Specialist.

If you want to cancel the emergency call,

push and hold the Emergency Call (SOS)

button for a few seconds.

The Emergency Call (SOS) button is lo-

cated near the map light.

NOTE:

. When making an emergency call, be

sure the ignition switch is turned to

the ON position. The emergency call

cannot be activated while the igni-

tion switch is turned to the OFF

position.

. After the Emergency Call (SOS) but-

ton is pushed, it may take some time

until the system initiates connec-

tion, depending on the technical

environment and whether the TCU

(Telematics Control Unit) is being

used by other services.

. An indicator light on the Emergency

Call (SOS) button shows the readi-

ness of the emergency support sys-

tem. If the indicator light is not

illuminated, pushing the Emergency

Call (SOS) button does not connect

your vehicle to the Response Spe-

cialist.

The indicator light blinks while con-

nected to the NissanConnect® Ser-

vices Response Center.

. Even when the indicator light is

illuminated, connection to the Nis-

sanConnect® Services Response

Center may not be possible. If this

occurs in an emergency situation,

contact the authorities by other

means.

. To avoid disconnecting the line, do

not turn off the engine or the hybrid

system.

CUP HOLDERS

CAUTION

. Avoid abrupt starting and braking

when the cup holder is being

used to prevent spilling the drink.

If the liquid is hot, it can scald you

or your passenger.

. Use only soft cups in the cup

holder. Hard objects can injure

you in an accident.

JVI1601X

Center console

Front

Instruments and controls 2-69

STORAGE

2-70 Instruments and controls

JVI0873X

Rear seat (if so equipped)

The rear cup holders are located in the

rear fold-down armrest.

SOFT BOTTLE HOLDERS

CAUTION

. Do not use bottle holder for any

other objects that could be

thrown about in the vehicle and

possibly injure people during

sudden braking or an accident.

. Do not use bottle holder for open

liquid containers.

JVI0884X

Door (front and rear)

FLEXIBLE LUGGAGE BOARDS (if so

equipped)

You can use the cargo area in diverse

ways using the flexible luggage boards.

WARNING

Do not put objects heavier than 110

lbs (50 kg) on the load floor.

CAUTION

. Do not push the front edge of the

luggage board forcibly. Doing so

may cause the luggage board to

be tilted, resulting in personal

injury.

. Do not handle the luggage board

forcibly as this may deform it.

. While in the upper position, do

not recline the seatbacks.

. Do not place cargo higher than

the seatbacks. In a sudden stop

or collision, unsecured cargo

could cause personal injury.

NOTE:

The diversity of the cargo area may be

restricted depending on the equipment

of each vehicle.

JVI1620X

1. Pull the outer board upward to 90°.

2. Push down the board until it stops.

JVI0888X

GLOVE BOX

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driv-

ing to help prevent injury in an

accident or a sudden stop.

To open the glove box, pull the handle.

To close, push the lid in until the lock

latches. The glove box light illuminates

when the headlight switch is turned on.

JVI1685X

CONSOLE BOX

To open the console box lid, push up the

knob

and pull up the lid.

To close, push the lid down until the lock

latches.

Instruments and controls 2-71

2-72 Instruments and controls

JVI0619X

SUNGLASSES HOLDER

WARNING

Keep the sunglasses holder closed

while driving to avoid obstructing

the driver’s view and to help prevent

an accident.

CAUTION

. Do not use for anything other

than sunglasses.

. Do not leave sunglasses in the

sunglasses holder while parking

in direct sunlight. The heat may

damage the sunglasses.

To open the sunglasses holder, push and

release. Only store one pair of sunglasses

in the holder.

SIC4348

CARD HOLDER (driver’s side)

Slide a card in the card holder.

JVI1686X

Cargo area

LUGGAGE HOOKS

To use the hook, pull it up as illustrated.

WARNING

. Always make sure that the cargo

is properly secured. Use the sui-

table ropes and hooks.

. Unsecured cargo can become

dangerous in an accident or sud-

den stop.

. Do not apply a total load of more

than 22 lb (10 kg) to a single hook.

JVI1336X

Cargo area (hooks for shopping bags, etc.)

WARNING

Do not apply a total load of more

than 7 lb (3 kg) to the hook.

JVI1334X

PARCEL SHELF (if so equipped)

WARNING

. Never put anything on the parcel

shelf, no matter how small. Any

object on it could cause an injury

in case of an accident or if the

brakes are applied suddenly.

. Do not leave the parcel shelf in

position when it is disengaged

from the grooves.

. Properly secure all cargo to help

prevent it from sliding or shifting.

Do not place cargo higher than

Instruments and controls 2-73

2-74 Instruments and controls

the seatbacks. In a sudden stop

or collision, unsecured cargo

could cause personal injury

. The child restraint top tether

strap may be damaged by con-

tact with the parcel shelf or items

in the cargo area. Remove the

parcel shelf from the vehicle or

store it in its storage space. Also,

secure any lose items in the cargo

area. Your child could be seriously

injured or killed in a collision if the

top tether strap is damaged.

Removal

1. Open the liftgate. (See “Liftgate” (P.3-

26).)

2. Detach both of the ropes (left and

right)

from the inside of the liftgate.

3. Detach the parcel shelf by simply

pulling it rearwards through the lift-

gate opening.

JVI1335X

CAUTION

Make sure the parcel shelf is care-

fully stored when not in use in order

to prevent any damage.

Installation

1. Open the liftgate.

2. Insert the parcel shelf by pushing it

forwards as far as possible through

the liftgate opening.

3. Attach the corresponding ropes to

each side

of the liftgate.

4. Close the liftgate.

JVI0889X

Do not apply any load directly to the roof

side rails. Cross bars must be installed

before applying load/cargo/luggage to

the roof of the vehicle. Genuine NISSAN

accessory cross bars are available

through a NISSAN dealer. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

additional information.

The service load capacity for the roof side

rails is 150 lb (68 kg), however do not

exceed the accessory cross bars load

capacity.

Be careful that your vehicle does not

exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) or its Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR front and rear). The GVWR and

GAWR are located on the F.M.V.S.S. or C.V.

M.S.S. certification label (located on the

driver’s door pillar). For additional infor-

mation regarding GVWR and GAWR, refer

to “Vehicle loading information” (P.10-12).

WARNING

. Always install the cross bars onto

the roof side rails before loading

cargo of any kind. Loading cargo

directly onto the roof side rails or

the vehicle’s roof may cause ve-

hicle damage.

. Drive extra carefully when the

vehicle is loaded at or near the

cargo carrying capacity, espe-

cially if the significant portion of

that load is carried on the cross

bars.

. Heavy loading of the cross bars

has the potential to affect the

vehicle stability and handling

during sudden or unusual hand-

ling maneuvers.

. Roof rack cross bars should be

evenly distributed.

. Do not exceed maximum roof

rack cross bars load.

. Properly secure all cargo with

ropes or straps to help prevent it

from sliding or shifting. In a sud-

den stop or collision, unsecured

cargo could cause personal in-

jury.

Instruments and controls 2-75

ROOF RACK (if so equipped)

2-76 Instruments and controls

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

. Make sure that all passengers

have their hands, etc. inside the

vehicle while it is in motion and

before closing the windows. Use

the window lock switch to pre-

vent unexpected use of the

power windows.

. To help avoid risk of injury or

death through unintended opera-

tion of the vehicle and or its

systems, including entrapment

in windows or inadvertent door

lock activation, do not leave chil-

dren, people who require the

assistance of others or pets un-

attended in your vehicle. Addi-

tionally, the temperature inside a

closed vehicle on a warm day can

quickly become high enough to

cause a significant risk of injury

or death to people and pets.

The power windows operate when the

ignition switch is in the ON position, or for

about 45 seconds after the ignition

switch is placed in the OFF position. If

the driver’s or front passenger’s door is

opened during this period of about 45

seconds, power to the windows is can-

celed.

SIC4533

1. Window lock button

2. Driver side window

3. Rear left passenger side window

4. Front passenger side window

5. Rear right passenger side window

Main power window switch (driver’s

side)

To open or close the window, push down

or pull up the switch and hold it. The

main switch (driver side switches) will

open or close all the windows.

WINDOWS

Locking passengers’ windows

When the lock button is pushed in, only

the driver side window can be opened or

closed. Push it in again to cancel.

SIC4523

Passenger side power window

switch

The passenger side switch will open or

close only the corresponding window. To

open or close the window, push down or

pull up the switch and hold it.

SIC4524

Automatic operation

The automatic operation is available for

the switch that has an

mark on its

surface.

To fully open or close the window, com-

pletely push down or pull up the switch

and release it; the switch need not be

held. The window will automatically open

or close all the way. To stop the window,

just push or lift the switch in the opposite

direction.

A light push or pull on the switch will

cause the window to open or close until

the switch is released.

Instruments and controls 2-77

2-78 Instruments and controls

Auto-reverse function

WARNING

There are some small distances im-

mediately before the closed position

which cannot be detected. Make sure

that all passengers have their hands,

etc., inside the vehicle before closing

the window.

If the control unit detects something

caught in the window as it is closing, the

window will be immediately lowered.

The auto reverse function can be acti-

vated when the window is closed by

automatic operation when the ignition

switch is in the ON position or for 45

seconds after the ignition switch is placed

in the OFF position.

Depending on the environment or driv-

ing conditions, the auto reverse func-

tion may be activated if an impact or

load similar to something being caught

in the window occurs.

If the windows do not close auto-

matically

If the power window automatic function

(closing only) does not operate properly,

perform the following procedure to initi-

alize the power window system.

1. Start the engine.

2. Close the door.

3. After starting the engine, open the

window completely by operating the

power window switch.

4. Pull the power window switch and

hold it to close the window, and then

hold the switch more than 3 seconds

after the window is closed completely.

5. Release the power window switch.

Operate the window by the automatic

function to confirm the initialization is

complete.

If the power window automatic function

does not operate properly after perform-

ing the procedure above, it is recom-

mended you have your vehicle checked

by a NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

. In an accident you could be

thrown from the vehicle through

an open moonroof. Always use

seat belts and child restraints.

. Do not allow anyone to stand up

or extend any portion of their

body out of the moonroof open-

ing while the vehicle is in motion

or while the moonroof is closing.

CAUTION

. Remove water drops, snow, ice or

sand from the moonroof before

opening.

. Do not place any heavy object on

the moonroof or surrounding

area.

POWER MOONROOF

The moonroof only operates when the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

The moonroof is operational for about 45

seconds, even if the ignition switch is

pushed to the OFF position. If the driver’s

door or the passenger’s door is opened

MOONROOF (if so equipped)

during this period of about 45 seconds,

power to the moonroof is canceled.

JVI0655X

Sunshade

The sunshade will open automatically

when the moonroof is opened. However,

it must be closed manually.

Tilting the moonroof

To tilt up, first close the moonroof, then

push the switch to the tilt up position

and release it; it need not be held. To tilt

down the moonroof, push the switch to

the tilt down position

Sliding the moonroof

To fully open or close the moonroof, push

the switch to the open

or close

position and release it; it need not be held.

The roof will automatically open or close

all the way. To stop the roof, push the

switch once more while it is opening or

closing.

Auto reverse function

WARNING

There are some small distances im-

mediately before the closed position

which cannot be detected. Make sure

that all passengers have their hands,

etc., inside the vehicle before closing

the moonroof.

If the control unit detects something

caught in the moonroof when it is closing,

the moonroof will be immediately

opened.

The auto reverse function can be acti-

vated when the moonroof is closed by

automatic operation when the ignition

switch is in the ON position or for about

45 seconds after the ignition switch is

pushed to the OFF position.

If the moonroof cannot be closed auto-

Instruments and controls 2-79

2-80 Instruments and controls

matically when the auto reverse function

activates due to a malfunction, push and

hold the moonroof switch to the close

position

Depending on the environment or driv-

ing conditions, the auto reverse func-

tion may be activated if an impact or

load similar to something being caught

in the moonroof occurs.

If the moonroof does not operate

If the moonroof does not operate prop-

erly, perform the following procedure to

initialize the moonroof operation system.

1. If the moonroof is open, close it fully

by repeatedly pushing the moonroof

switch to the close position

to tilt

the moonroof up.

2. Push and hold the switch to the close

position

3. Release the moonroof switch after the

moonroof moves slightly up and

down.

4. Push and hold the switch to the open

position

to fully tilt the moonroof

down.

5. Check if the moonroof switch oper-

ates normally.

If the moonroof does not operate prop-

erly after performing the procedure

above, have your moonroof checked and

repaired. It is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

CAUTION

. Do not leave the light switch on

when the engine is not running

for extended periods of time to

prevent the battery from being

discharged.

. Turn off the lights when you leave

the vehicle.

INTERIOR LIGHTS

JVI0626X

INTERIOR LIGHT SWITCH

The interior light can be turned ON

regardless of door position. The light will

go off after a period of time unless the

ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-

tion when any door is opened.

The interior lights can be set to operate

when the doors are opened. To turn off

the interior lights when a door open, push

the switch, the interior lights will not

illuminate, regardless of door position.

The lights will go off when the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position, or the

driver’s door is closed and locked. The

lights will also go off after a period of time

when the doors are open.

JVI0627X

CONSOLE LIGHT (if so equipped)

The console light will turn on whenever

the parking lights or headlights are illu-

minated.

JVI0628X

MAP LIGHTS

Push the button to turn the map lights

on. To turn them off, push the button

again.

Instruments and controls 2-81

2-82 Instruments and controls

SIC2063A

ROOM LIGHT

The room light has a three-position

switch.

When the switch is in the ON position

the room light illuminates.

When the switch is in the DOOR position

, the room light illuminates when a door

is opened.

The interior light timer will keep the room

light on for approximately 15 seconds

when:

. The key is removed from the ignition

switch with the driver’s door closed.

(model without Intelligent Key system)

. The ignition switch is placed in the

OFF position. (model with Intelligent

Key system)

The interior light timer will be cancelled

when:

. The driver’s door is locked.

. The ignition switch is placed in the ON

position.

When the switch is in the OFF position

the room light does not illuminate, re-

gardless of any condition.

SIC3869

VANITY MIRROR LIGHT (if so

equipped)

The light on the vanity mirror will turn on

when the cover on the vanity mirror is

opened.

When the cover is closed, the light will

turn off.

The lights will also turn off after a

period of time when the lights remain

illuminated to prevent the battery from

becoming discharged.

CARGO LIGHT

The cargo lights illuminate when the

liftgate is opened. When the liftgate is

closed, the lights will turn off.

The light will also turn off after a period

of time when the light remains illumi-

nated after the ignition switch has been

pushed to the OFF position to prevent

the battery from becoming discharged.

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver

provides a convenient way to consolidate

the functions of up to three individual

hand-held transmitters into one built-in

device.

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver:

. Will operate most Radio Frequency

(RF) devices such as garage doors,

gates, home and office lighting, entry

door locks and security systems.

. Is powered by your vehicle’s battery.

No separate batteries are required. If

the vehicle’s battery is discharged or is

disconnected, HomeLink® will retain

all programming.

When the HomeLink® Universal Trans-

ceiver is programmed, retain the origi-

nal transmitter for future programming

procedures (Example: new vehicle pur-

chases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the

programmed HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver buttons should be erased

for security purposes. For additional

information, refer to “Programming

HomeLink®” (P.2-84).

WARNING

. Do not use the HomeLink® Uni-

versal Transceiver with any gar-

age door opener that lacks safety

stop and reverse features as re-

quired by federal safety stan-

dards. (These standards became

effective for opener models man-

ufactured after April 1, 1982.) A

garage door opener which cannot

detect an object in the path of a

closing garage door and then

automatically stop and reverse,

does not meet current federal

safety standards. Using a garage

door opener without these fea-

tures increases the risk of serious

injury or death.

. During the programming proce-

dure your garage door or security

gate will open and close (if the

transmitter is within range). Make

sure that people or objects are

clear of the garage door, gate,

etc. that you are programming.

. Your vehicle’s engine should be

turned off while programming

the HomeLink® Universal Trans-

ceiver. Do not breathe exhaust

gases; they contain colorless

and odorless carbon monoxide.

Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It

can cause unconsciousness or

death.

Instruments and controls 2-83

HomeLink® UNIVERSAL

TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)

2-84 Instruments and controls

PROGRAMMING HomeLink®

The following steps show generic instruc-

tions how to program a HomeLink®

button. If you have any questions or are

having difficulty programming your

HomeLink® buttons, refer to the

HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink.

com/nissan or call 1-800-355-3515.

NOTE:

It is also recommended that a new

battery be placed in the hand-held

transmitter of the device being pro-

grammed to HomeLink® for quicker

programming and accurate transmis-

sion of the radio-frequency.

1. Position the end of your hand-held

transmitter 1-3 in (26-76 mm) away

from the HomeLink® surface, keeping

the HomeLink® indicator light

view.

JVI0428X

2. Using both hands, simultaneously

press and hold the desired HomeLink®

button and handheld transmitter but-

ton. DO NOT release until the

HomeLink® indicator light

flashes

slowly and then rapidly. When the

indicator light flashes rapidly, both

buttons may be released. (The rapid

flashing indicates successful pro-

gramming.)

NOTE:

Some devices to be programmed

may require you to replace Step 2

with the cycling procedure noted in

the “Programming HomeLink® for

Canadian customers and gate open-

ers” (P.2-85).

JVI0429X

3. Press and hold the programmed

HomeLink® button and observe the

indicator light.

If the indicator light is solid/

continuous, programming is com-

plete and your device should acti-

vate when the HomeLink® button is

pressed and released.

If the indicator light blinks rapidly

for two seconds and then turns to a

solid/continuous light, continue

with Steps 4-6 for a rolling code

device. A second person may make

the following steps easier. Use a

ladder or other device. Do not stand

on your vehicle to perform the next

steps.

4. At the receiver located on the garage

door opener motor in the garage,

locate the “learn” or “smart” button

(the name and color of the button

may vary by manufacturer but it is

usually located near where the hang-

ing antenna wire is attached to the

unit). If there is difficulty locating the

button, reference the garage door

opener’s manual.

5. Press and release the “learn” or “smart”

button.

NOTE:

Once the button is pressed, you have

approximately 30 seconds to initiate

the next step.

6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press

and hold the programmed HomeLink®

button for two seconds and release.

Repeat the “press/hold/release” se-

quence up to 3 times to complete

the programming process. HomeLink®

should now activate your rolling code

equipped device.

7. If you have any questions or are

having difficulty programming your

HomeLink® buttons, refer to the

HomeLink® web site at: www.

homelink.com/nissan or call 1-800-

355-3515.

PROGRAMMING HomeLink® FOR

CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND GATE

OPENERS

Canadian radio-frequency laws require

transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)

after several seconds of transmission –

which may not be long enough for

HomeLink® to pick up the signal during

programming. Similar to this Canadian

law, some U.S. gate operators are de-

signed to “time-out” in the same manner.

If you live in Canada or you are having

difficulties programming a gate operator

or garage door opener by using the

“Programming HomeLink®” procedures,

replace “Programming HomeLink®” Step

2 with the following:

NOTE:

When programming a garage door

opener, etc., unplug the device during

the “cycling” process to prevent possi-

ble damage to the garage door opener

components.

Step 2: Using both hands, simultaneously

press and hold the desired HomeLink®

button and the hand-held transmitter

button. During programming, your hand-

held transmitter may automatically stop

transmitting. Continue to press and hold

the desired HomeLink® button while you

press and re-press (“cycle”) your hand-

held transmitter every two seconds until

the frequency signal has been learned.

The HomeLink® indicator light will flash

slowly and then rapidly after several

seconds upon successful programming.

DO NOT release until the HomeLink®

indicator light flashes slowly and then

rapidly. When the indicator light flashes

rapidly, both buttons may be released.

The rapid flashing indicates successful

programming.

Proceed with “Programming HomeLink®”

step 3 to complete.

Remember to plug the device back in

when programming is completed.

OPERATING THE HomeLink® UNI-

VERSAL TRANSCEIVER

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver,

after it is programmed, can be used to

activate the programmed device. To op-

erate, simply press and release the appro-

priate programmed HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver button. The amber indicator

light will illuminate while the signal is

being transmitted.

For convenience, the hand-held transmit-

ter of the device may also be used at any

time.

Instruments and controls 2-85

2-86 Instruments and controls

PROGRAMMING TROUBLESHOOT-

ING

If the HomeLink® does not quickly learn

the hand-held transmitter information:

. replace the hand-held transmitter

batteries with new batteries.

. position the hand-held transmitter

with its battery area facing away from

the HomeLink® surface.

. press and hold both the HomeLink®

and hand-held transmitter buttons

without interruption.

. position the hand-held transmitter 1-3

in (26-76 mm) away from the

HomeLink® surface. Hold the transmit-

ter in that position for up to 15

seconds. If HomeLink® is not pro-

grammed within that time, try holding

the transmitter in another position -

keeping the indicator light in view at

all times.

If you have any questions or are having

difficulty programming your HomeLink®

buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site

at: www.homelink.com/nissan or 1-800-

355-3515.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED IN-

FORMATION

The following procedure clears the pro-

grammed information from both buttons.

Individual buttons cannot be cleared.

However, individual buttons can be re-

programmed, see “Reprogramming a sin-

gle HomeLink® button” (P.2-86).

To clear all programming

1. Press and hold the two outer

HomeLink® buttons until the indicator

light begins to flash in approximately

10 seconds. Do not hold for longer

than 20 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

HomeLink® is now in the programming

mode and can be programmed at any

time beginning with “Programming

HomeLink®” - Step 1.

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE

HomeLink® BUTTON

To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver button, complete the follow-

ing.

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®

button. Do not release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash

after 20 seconds. Without releasing

the HomeLink® button, proceed with

“Programming HomeLink®” - Step 1.

For questions or comments, contact

HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com/

nissan or 1-800-355-3515.

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver

button has now been reprogrammed.

The new device can be activated by

pushing the HomeLink® button that was

just programmed. This procedure will not

affect any other programmed HomeLink®

buttons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle is stolen, you should

change the codes of any non-rolling code

device that has been programmed into

HomeLink®. Consult the Owner’s Manual

of each device or call the manufacturer or

dealer of those devices for additional

information.

When your vehicle is recovered, you will

need to reprogram the HomeLink® Uni-

versal Transceiver with your new trans-

mitter information.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference,

and (2) this device must accept any

interference received, including inter-

ference that may cause undesired op-

eration.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Ca-

nada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following

two conditions: (1) this device may not

cause interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation of the device.

Instruments and controls 2-87

2-88 Instruments and controls

MEMO

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Keys ......................................................................................................... 3-2
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System key (if
so equipped) .............................................................................. 3-2
Intelligent Key (if so equipped) ................................... 3-3
Doors ...................................................................................................... 3-5
Locking with key .................................................................... 3-5
Locking with inside lock knob ..................................... 3-6
Locking with power door lock switch ................... 3-6
Automatic door locks ......................................................... 3-7
Child safety rear door lock ............................................. 3-7
Remote keyless entry system (if so equipped) ...... 3-7
How to use remote keyless entry system ......... 3-8
Intelligent Key system (if so equipped) .................... 3-11
Intelligent Key operating range .............................. 3-13
Door locks/unlocks precaution ............................... 3-13
Intelligent Key operation .............................................. 3-14
Battery saver system ....................................................... 3-16
Warning lights and audible reminders .............. 3-16
Troubleshooting guide ................................................... 3-17
How to use remote keyless entry function ...... 3-19
Remote engine start (if so equipped) ....................... 3-23
Remote engine start operating range ............... 3-23
Remote starting the engine .................................... 3-23
Extending engine run time ....................................... 3-24
Canceling a remote engine start ........................ 3-24
Conditions the remote engine start will
not work .................................................................................. 3-24
Hood .................................................................................................... 3-25
Liftgate .............................................................................................. 3-26
Liftgate release lever ..................................................... 3-27
Fuel-filler door ............................................................................. 3-28
Opening the fuel-filler door...................................... 3-28
Fuel-filler cap ....................................................................... 3-28
Tilt/telescopic steering ........................................................ 3-30
Tilt or telescopic operation ...................................... 3-31
Sun visors........................................................................................ 3-31
Mirrors .............................................................................................. 3-32
Inside mirror ......................................................................... 3-32
Outside mirrors .................................................................. 3-33
Vanity mirror ........................................................................ 3-34
Memory Seat (if so equipped)......................................... 3-34
Memory storage function .......................................... 3-35
Entry/Exit function .......................................................... 3-35
System operation ............................................................. 3-36

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

A key number plate is supplied with your

keys. Record the key number and keep it

in a safe place (such as your wallet), not in

the vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is

recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer

for duplicates by using the key number.

NISSAN does not record any key numbers

so it is very important to keep track of

your key number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you

have lost all keys and do not have one to

duplicate from. If you still have a key, it

can be duplicated without knowing the

key number.

JVP0307X

1. Master key (2)

2. Key number plate (1)

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYS-

TEM KEY (if so equipped)

Your vehicle can only be driven with the

master keys, which are registered to the

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System com-

ponents. As many as 4 master keys can

be registered and used with one vehicle.

The new keys must be registered by a

NISSAN dealer prior to use with the

master of your vehicle. Since the registra-

tion process requires erasing all memory

in the master components when register-

ing new keys, be sure to take all master

keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

Do not allow the NISSAN Vehicle

Immobilizer System key, which con-

tains an electrical transponder, to

come into contact with water or salt

water. This could affect the system

function.

KEYS

JVP0543X

Mechanical key

To unfold the key from the fob, press the

release button.

When storing the key, press the release

button and push key to fold the key back

into fob slot.

SPA2406

Type A

JVP0177X

Type B

1. Intelligent Key (2 sets)

2. Mechanical key (inside Intelligent Key) (2

sets)

3. Key number plate

INTELLIGENT KEY (if so equipped)

Your vehicle can only be driven with the

Intelligent Keys which are registered to

your vehicle’s Intelligent Key system com-

ponents and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer

System components. As many as 4 In-

telligent Keys can be registered and used

with one vehicle. The new keys must be

registered by a NISSAN dealer prior to use

with the Intelligent Key system and

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System of

your vehicle. Since the registration pro-

cess requires erasing all memory in the

Intelligent Key components when regis-

tering new keys, be sure to take all

Intelligent Keys that you have to the

NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

. Be sure to carry the Intelligent

Key with you when driving. The

Intelligent Key is a precision de-

vice with a built-in transmitter. To

avoid damaging it, please note

the following.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

— The Intelligent Key is water

resistant; however, wetting

may damage the Intelligent

Key. If the Intelligent Key gets

wet, immediately wipe until it

is completely dry.

— Do not bend, drop or strike it

against another object.

— If the outside temperature is

below 14°F (-10°C) degrees, the

battery of the Intelligent Key

may not function properly.

— Do not place the Intelligent

Key for an extended period in

a place where temperatures

exceed 140°F (60°C).

— Do not change or modify the

Intelligent Key.

— Do not use a magnet key

holder.

— Do not place the Intelligent

Key near an electric appliance

such as a television set, per-

sonal computer or cellular

phone.

— Do not allow the Intelligent

Key to come into contact with

water or salt water, and do

not wash it in a washing

machine. This could affect

the system function.

. If an Intelligent Key is lost or

stolen, NISSAN recommends

erasing the ID code of that Intel-

ligent Key. This will prevent the

Intelligent Key from unauthorized

use to unlock the vehicle. For

information regarding the eras-

ing procedure, it is recommended

you visit a NISSAN dealer.

SPA2033

Mechanical key

To remove the mechanical key, release

the lock knob at the back of the Intelli-

gent Key.

To install the mechanical key, firmly insert

it into the Intelligent Key until the lock

knob returns to the lock position.

Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock

the driver’s door. (See “Doors” (P.3-5).)

CAUTION

Always carry the mechanical key

installed in the Intelligent Key.

WARNING

. Always have the doors locked

while driving. Along with the use

of seat belts, this provides great-

er safety in the event of an

accident by helping to prevent

persons from being thrown from

the vehicle. This also helps keep

children and others from unin-

tentionally opening the doors,

and will help keep out intruders.

. Before opening any door, always

look for and avoid oncoming

traffic.

. To help avoid risk of injury or

death through unintended opera-

tion of the vehicle and or its

systems, including entrapment

in windows or inadvertent door

lock activation, do not leave chil-

dren, people who require the

assistance of others or pets un-

attended in your vehicle. Addi-

tionally, the temperature inside a

closed vehicle on a warm day can

quickly become high enough to

cause a significant risk of injury

or death to people and pets.

SPA2457

LOCKING WITH KEY

To lock the driver’s door, insert the

mechanical key to the door key cylinder

and turn the key to the front of the

vehicle

To unlock the driver’s door, turn the

mechanical key to the rear of the vehicle

To lock or unlock the other door, use the

power door lock switch, the LOCK

UNLOCK

button on the Intelligent Key

or the key fob, or the request switch (if so

equipped).

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

DOORS

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

SPA2726

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB

To lock the door without the key, move

the inside lock knob to the lock position

then close the door.

To unlock, move the inside lock knob to

the unlock position

When locking the door without a key, be

sure not to leave the key inside the

vehicle.

SPA2803

Driver’s armrest

SPA2804

Passenger’s armrest

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK

SWITCH

Operating the power door lock switch

(located on the driver’s and front passen-

ger’s doors) will lock or unlock all the

doors.

To lock the doors, push the power door

lock switch to the lock position

with the

driver’s and front passenger’s doors open,

then close the door.

When locking the door this way, be sure

not to leave the key inside the vehicle.

To unlock the doors, push the power door

lock switch to the unlock position

Lockout protection

Lockout protection function helps to

prevent the keys from being accidentally

locked inside the vehicle.

When the power door lock switch (driver’s

or front passenger’s side) is moved to the

lock position with the Intelligent Key left

in the vehicle (models with Intelligent Key

system) or the key left in the ignition

switch (models without Intelligent Key

system) and any door open, all doors will

unlock automatically and a chime will

sound after the door is closed.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS

. All doors lock automatically when the

vehicle speed reaches 15 MPH (24

km/h).

. All doors unlock automatically when

the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position or when the shift lever is

moved to the P (Park) position, if

selected (CVT model).

SPA2801

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK

Child safety rear door locks help prevent

the rear doors from being opened acci-

dentally, especially when small children

are in the vehicle.

When the levers are in the lock position

, the rear doors can be opened only

from the outside.

To disengage, move the levers to the

unlock position

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors

(including the liftgate), and activate the

panic alarm by using the key fob from

outside the vehicle.

Before locking the doors, make sure the

key is not left in the vehicle.

The key fob can operate at a distance of

approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the

vehicle. (The effective distance depends

upon the conditions around the vehicle.)

As many as 4 key fobs can be used with

one vehicle. For information concerning

the purchase and use of additional key

fobs, contact a NISSAN dealer.

The key fob will not function:

. When the key fob is not within the

operational range.

. When the doors are open or not

closed securely.

. When the key is in the ignition switch.

. When the battery is discharged.

WARNING

The remote keyless entry key fob

transmits radio waves when the

buttons are pushed. The FAA advises

that the radio waves may affect

aircraft navigation and communica-

tion systems. Do not operate the key

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM

(if so equipped)

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

fob while on an airplane. Make sure

the buttons are not operated unin-

tentionally when the unit is stored

during a flight.

CAUTION

The following conditions or occur-

rences will damage the key fob.

. Do not allow the key fob to

become wet.

. Do not drop the key fob.

. Do not strike the key fob sharply

against another object.

. If the outside temperature is be-

low 14°F (-10°C) degrees, the bat-

tery of key fob may not function

properly.

. Do not place the key fob for an

extended period in an area where

temperatures exceed 140°F

(60°C).

If a key fob is lost or stolen, NISSAN

recommends erasing the ID code of

that key fob. This will prevent the key

fob from unauthorized use to unlock

the vehicle. For information regard-

ing the erasing procedure, it is re-

commended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer.

For information regarding the replace-

ment of a battery, see “Key fob battery

replacement” (P.8-21).

JVP0308X

Jackknife type key release button

LOCK button

UNLOCK button

PANIC button

Battery indicator light

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS

ENTRY SYSTEM

Welcome light and farewell light

function

When you lock or unlock the doors or the

liftgate, the daytime running lights, park-

ing lights and the tail lights will illuminate

for a period of time. The welcome light

and farewell light function can be dis-

abled. For information about disabling

the welcome light and farewell light

function, see “Vehicle Settings” (P.2-23).

Locking doors

1. Remove the key from the ignition

switch.

2. Close all the doors.

3. Push the LOCK

button on the

key fob.

4. All the doors will lock.

All of the doors will lock when the

LOCK

button is pushed even

though a door remains open.

5. The hazard indicator flashes twice

and the horn chirps once.

. When the LOCK

button is pushed

with all doors locked, the hazard

indicator flashes twice and the horn

chirps once as a reminder that the

doors are already locked.

. Operate the door handles to confirm

that the doors have been securely

locked.

Unlocking doors

1. Push the UNLOCK button on

the key fob.

The driver’s door unlocks.

The hazard indicator flashes once if

all doors are completely closed.

2. Push the UNLOCK

button again

within 5 seconds.

All the doors and the liftgate unlock.

The hazard indicator flashes once if

all doors are completely closed.

All doors will be locked automatically

unless one of the following operations is

performed within 1 minute of pushing the

UNLOCK

button.

. Any door or liftgate is opened.

. The ignition switch is placed in the ON

position.

NOTE:

The unlocking operation can be chan-

ged in selective unlock in the Vehicle

Settings of the vehicle information dis-

play. For additional information, refer to

“Vehicle Settings” (P.2-23).

Using panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel

threatened, you may activate the alarm

to call attention as follows:

1. Push the PANIC

button on the

key fob for more than 0.5 seconds.

2. The theft warning alarm and head-

lights will stay on for 25 seconds.

3. The panic alarm stops when:

It has run for 25 seconds, or

Any of the buttons on the key fob is

pushed. (Note: the PANIC button

must be pushed for more than 1

second.)

Battery indicator light

The battery indicator light illuminates

when you push any button. If the light

does not illuminate, the battery is weak or

needs replacement. For information re-

garding replacement of a battery, see

“Key fob battery replacement” (P.8-21).

Setting hazard indicator and horn

mode

This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and

horn mode when you first receive the

vehicle.

In hazard indicator and horn mode, when

the LOCK

button is pushed, the

hazard indicator flashes twice and the

horn chirps once. When the UNLOCK

button is pushed, the hazard indicator

flashes once.

If the horn chirp is not necessary, you can

switch to hazard indicator only mode by

following the switching procedure.

In hazard indicator only mode, when the

LOCK

button is pushed, the hazard

indicator flashes twice. When the UNLOCK

button is pushed, neither the hazard

indicator nor the horn operates.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Mode (Pushing the or

button)

DOOR LOCK

DOOR UNLOCK

Hazard indicator and horn mode

HAZARD - twice

HORN - once

HAZARD - once

HORN - none

Hazard indicator mode HAZARD - twice

HAZARD - none

Switching procedure:

To switch the hazard indicator and horn

operation, push the LOCK

and

UNLOCK

buttons on the key fob

simultaneously for more than 2 seconds.

. When the hazard indicator mode is

set, the hazard indicator flashes 3

times.

. When the hazard indicator and horn

mode is set, the hazard indicator

flashes once and the horn chirps once.

The horn operation can also be turned on

or off in the vehicle information display.

See “Vehicle Settings” (P.2-23).

WARNING

. Radio waves could adversely af-

fect electric medical equipment.

Those who use a pacemaker

should contact the electric med-

ical equipment manufacturer for

the possible influences before

use.

. The Intelligent Key transmits

radio waves when the buttons

are pushed. The FAA advises that

the radio waves may affect air-

craft navigation and communica-

tion systems. Do not operate the

Intelligent Key while on an air-

plane. Make sure the buttons are

not operated unintentionally

when the unit is stored during a

flight.

The Intelligent Key system can operate all

the door locks using the remote control-

ler function or pushing the request switch

on the vehicle without taking the key out

from a pocket or purse. The operating

environment and/or conditions may af-

fect the Intelligent Key system operation.

Be sure to read the following before using

the Intelligent Key system.

CAUTION

. Be sure to carry the Intelligent

Key with you when operating the

vehicle.

. Never leave the Intelligent Key in

the vehicle when you leave the

vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is always communi-

cating with the vehicle as it receives radio

waves. The Intelligent Key system trans-

mits weak radio waves. Environmental

conditions may interfere with the opera-

tion of the Intelligent Key system under

the following operating conditions.

. When operating near a location where

strong radio waves are transmitted,

such as a TV tower, power station and

broadcasting station.

. When in possession of wireless equip-

ment, such as a cellular phone, trans-

ceiver, and CB radio.

. When the Intelligent Key is in contact

with or covered by metallic materials.

. When any type of radio wave remote

control is used nearby.

. When the Intelligent Key is placed near

an electric appliance such as a perso-

nal computer.

. When the vehicle is parked near a

parking meter.

In such cases, correct the operating

conditions before using the Intelligent

Key function or use the mechanical key.

Although the life of the battery varies

depending on the operating conditions,

the battery’s life is approximately 2 years.

If the battery is discharged, replace it with

a new one.

Since the Intelligent Key is continuously

receiving radio waves, if the key is left

near equipment which transmits strong

radio waves, such as signals from a TV

and personal computer, the battery life

may become shorter.

For information regarding replacement of

a battery, see “Intelligent Key battery

replacement” (P.8-23).

As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be

registered and used with one vehicle. For

information about the purchase and use

of additional Intelligent Keys, it is recom-

mended that you contact a NISSAN deal-

er.

CAUTION

. Do not allow the Intelligent Key,

which contains electrical compo-

nents, to come into contact with

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM (if so equipped)

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

water or salt water. This could

affect the system function.

. Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

. Do not strike the Intelligent Key

sharply against another object.

. Do not change or modify the

Intelligent Key.

. Wetting may damage the Intelli-

gent Key. If the Intelligent Key

gets wet, immediately wipe until

it is completely dry.

. If the outside temperature is be-

low 14°F (−10°C) degrees, the bat-

tery of the Intelligent Key may not

function properly.

. Do not place the Intelligent Key

for an extended period in an area

where temperatures exceed

140°F (60°C).

. Do not attach the Intelligent Key

with a key holder that contains a

magnet.

. Do not place the Intelligent Key

near equipment that produces a

magnetic field, such as a TV,

audio equipment, personal com-

puters or cellular phone.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen,

NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code

of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle.

This may prevent the unauthorized use of

the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle.

For information regarding the erasing

procedure, it is recommended that you

contact a NISSAN dealer.

The Intelligent Key function can be dis-

abled. For information about disabling

the Intelligent Key function, it is recom-

mended that you contact a NISSAN deal-

er.

SPA2074

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATING

RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can only be

used when the Intelligent Key is within

the specified operating range from the

request switch

When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-

charged or strong radio waves are pre-

sent near the operating location, the

Intelligent Key system’s operating range

becomes narrower, and the Intelligent

Key may not function properly.

The operating range is within 31.50 in (80

cm) from each request switch

If the Intelligent Key is too close to the

door glass, handle or rear bumper, the

request switches may not function.

When the Intelligent Key is within the

operating range, it is possible for anyone

who does not carry the Intelligent Key to

push the request switch to lock/unlock

the doors including the liftgate.

SPA2407

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS PRECAU-

TION

. Do not push the door handle request

switch with the Intelligent Key held in

your hand as illustrated. The close

distance to the door handle will cause

the Intelligent Key system to have

difficulty recognizing that the Intelli-

gent Key is outside the vehicle.

. After locking with the door handle

request switch, verify the doors are

securely locked by testing them.

. To prevent the Intelligent Key from

being left inside the vehicle, make sure

you carry the key with you and then

lock the doors.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

. Do not pull the door handle before

pushing the door handle request

switch. The door will be unlocked but

will not open. Release the door handle

once and pull it again to open the

door.

SPA2408

JVP0099X

JVP0538X

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION

You can lock or unlock the doors without

taking the key out from your pocket or

bag.

When you carry the Intelligent Key with

you, you can lock or unlock all doors by

pushing the door handle request switch

(driver’s or front passenger’s)

or liftgate

request switch

within the range of

operation.

When you lock or unlock the doors, the

hazard indicator will flash and the horn

(or the outside chime) will sound as a

confirmation. For details, see “Setting

hazard indicator and horn mode” (P.3-21).

Welcome light and farewell light

function

When you lock or unlock the doors or the

liftgate, the daytime running lights, park-

ing lights and the tail lights will illuminate

for a period of time. The welcome light

and farewell light function can be dis-

abled. For information about disabling

the welcome light and farewell light

function, see “Vehicle Settings” (P.2-23).

Locking doors

1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park)

position (Continuously Variable Trans-

mission (CVT) models), or the shift

lever in the N (Neutral) position (Man-

ual Transmission (MT) models), place

the ignition switch in the OFF position

and make sure you carry the Intelli-

gent Key with you.

2. Close all doors.

3. Push any door handle request switch

while carrying the Intelligent Key with

you.

4. All doors and the liftgate will lock.

5. The hazard indicator lights flash twice

and the outside buzzer sounds twice.

NOTE:

. Request switches for all doors and

the liftgate can be deactivated when

the I-Key Door Lock setting is turned

off in the Vehicle Settings of the

vehicle information display. For ad-

ditional information, see “Vehicle

Settings” (P.2-23).

. Doors lock with the door handle

request switch while the ignition

switch is not in the LOCK position.

. Doors do not lock by pushing the

door handle request switch while

any door is open. However, doors

lock by pushing the driver’s side

door handle request switch while

the driver’s door is closed.

. Doors do not lock with the door

handle request switch with the In-

telligent Key inside the vehicle and a

beep sounds to warn you. However,

when an Intelligent Key is inside the

vehicle, doors can be locked with

another Intelligent Key.

CAUTION

. After locking the doors using the

request switch, make sure that

the doors have been securely

locked by operating the door

handles or the liftgate opener

switch.

. When locking the doors using the

request switch, make sure to

have the Intelligent Key in your

possession before operating the

request switch to prevent the

Intelligent Key from being left in

the vehicle.

. The request switch is operational

only when the Intelligent Key has

been detected by the Intelligent

Key system.

Unlocking doors

1. Push the door handle request switch

or the liftgate request switch

while carrying the Intelligent Key with

you.

2. The hazard indicator flashes once and

outside chime sounds once. The cor-

responding door or the liftgate will

unlock.

3. Push the request switch again within 1

minute.

4. The hazard indicator flashes once and

outside chime sounds once again. All

the doors and the liftgate will unlock.

All doors will be locked automatically

unless one of the following operations is

performed within 1 minute after pushing

the request switch while the doors are

locked.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

. Opening any door.

. Pushing the ignition switch.

During this 1-minute time period, if the

UNLOCK

button on the Intelligent Key

is pushed, all doors will be locked auto-

matically after another 1 minute.

NOTE:

The unlocking operation can be chan-

ged in selective unlock in the Vehicle

Settings of the vehicle information dis-

play. For additional information, see

“Vehicle Settings” (P.2-23).

Opening liftgate

1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Push the liftgate opener switch

3. The liftgate will unlock.

BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM

When all the following conditions are met

for a period of time, the battery saver

system will cut off the power supply to

prevent battery discharge.

. The ignition switch is in the ON posi-

tion. (See “Push-button ignition switch

positions” (P.5-16).)

. All doors are closed, and

. The shift lever is in the P (Park)

position (CVT model) or N (Neutral)

position (MT model).

WARNING LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE RE-

MINDERS

To help prevent the vehicle from moving

unexpectedly by erroneous operation of

the Intelligent Key listed on the following

chart or to help prevent the vehicle from

being stolen, chime or beep sounds inside

and outside the vehicle and the warning

display appears on the vehicle informa-

tion display.

When a chime or beep sounds or the

warning display appears, be sure to check

the vehicle and Intelligent Key.

See “Troubleshooting guide” (P.3-17) and

“Vehicle information display” (P.2-19).

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are programmed for the vehicle. If another Intelligent Key is in range or inside the vehicle,

the vehicle system may respond differently than expected.

Symptom Possible cause

Action to take

When stopping the engine

(CVT model)

The Shift to Park warning appears on

the display and the inside warning chime

sounds continuously.

The shift lever is not in the P (Park)

position.

Move the shift lever to the P (Park)

position.

When opening the driver’s

door to get out of the vehicle

The Door/liftgate open warning appears

on the display.

The ignition switch is in the ON

position.

Place the ignition switch in the OFF

position.

When closing the door after

getting out of the vehicle

The No Key Detected warning appears

on the display, the outside chime sounds

three times and the inside warning

chime sounds for approximately three

seconds.

The ignition switch is in the ON

position.

Place the ignition switch in the OFF

position.

The red Shift to Park warning appears

on the display and the inside side chime

sounds continuously. (CVT model)

The ignition switch is in the ON

position and the shift lever is not in

the P (Park) position.

Move the shift lever to the P (Park)

position and place the ignition switch

in the OFF position.

The Rear Door Alert is activated mes-

sage appears on the display, the horn

sounds three times twice, or a Check

Back Seat for all articles warning ap-

pears on the display.

The Rear Door Alert is activated.

Check the back seat for all articles,

clear the Rear Door Alert warning

message by using the steering

switches.

When closing the door with

the inside lock knob turned

to LOCK

The outside chime sounds for approxi-

mately three seconds and all the doors

unlock.

The Intelligent Key is inside the

vehicle.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the door han-

dle request switch or the

LOCK button on the Intelli-

gent Key to lock the door

The outside chime sounds for approxi-

mately three seconds.

The Intelligent Key is inside the

vehicle.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

When pushing the ignition

switch to start the engine

The Key Battery Low warning appears

on the display.

The battery charge is low.

Replace the battery with a new one.

(See “Intelligent Key battery replace-

ment” (P.8-23).)

The Key ID Incorrect warning appears on

the display.

The Intelligent Key is not in the

vehicle.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the ignition

switch

The Key System Error warning appears

on the display.

It warns of a malfunction with the

Intelligent Key system.

It is recommended that you contact a

NISSAN dealer.

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS

ENTRY FUNCTION

WARNING

. Radio waves could adversely af-

fect electric medical equipment.

Those who use a pacemaker

should contact the electric med-

ical equipment manufacturer for

the possible influences before

use.

. The Intelligent Key transmits

radio waves when the buttons

are pushed. The FAA advises that

the radio waves may affect air-

craft navigation and communica-

tion systems. Do not operate the

Intelligent Key while on an air-

plane. Make sure the buttons are

not operated unintentionally

when the unit is stored during a

flight.

CAUTION

. Do not allow the Intelligent Key,

which contains electrical compo-

nents, to come into contact with

water or salt water. This could

affect the system function.

. Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

. Do not strike the Intelligent Key

sharply against another object.

. Do not change or modify the

Intelligent Key.

. Wetting may damage the Intelli-

gent Key. If the Intelligent Key

gets wet, immediately wipe until

it is completely dry.

. If the outside temperature is be-

low 14°F (-10°C) degrees, the bat-

tery of the Intelligent Key may not

function properly.

. Do not place the Intelligent Key

for an extended period in an area

where temperatures exceed

140°F (60°C).

. Do not attach the Intelligent Key

with a key holder that contains a

magnet.

. Do not place the Intelligent Key

near equipment that produces a

magnetic field, such as a TV,

audio equipment, personal com-

puters or cellular phone.

The remote keyless entry function can

operate all door locks using the remote

keyless entry function of the Intelligent

Key. The remote keyless entry function

can operate at a distance of approxi-

mately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. (The

operating distance depends upon the

conditions around the vehicle.)

The remote keyless entry function will not

operate:

. When the Intelligent Key is not within

the operational range.

. When the doors are open or not

closed securely.

. When the Intelligent Key battery is

discharged.

The remote keyless entry function can

also operate the vehicle alarm.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

JVP0541X

Type A

JVP0542X

Type B

LOCK button

UNLOCK button

PANIC button

Remote engine start button

When you lock or unlock the doors or the

liftgate, the hazard indicator will flash and

the horn (or the outside chime) will sound

as a confirmation. For details, see “Setting

hazard indicator and horn mode” (P.3-21).

Locking doors

1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF

position.

2. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.*

3. Close all the doors.

4. Push the LOCK

button on the

Intelligent Key.

5. All the doors and the liftgate will lock.

6. The hazard indicator flashes twice

and the horn chirps once.

*: Doors will lock with the Intelligent Key

while the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

Operate the door handles to confirm that

the doors have been securely locked.

Unlocking doors

1. Push the UNLOCK button on

the Intelligent Key once.

2. The hazard indicator flashes once. The

driver’s door will unlock.

3. Push the UNLOCK

button again

within 5 seconds.

4. The hazard indicator flashes once. All

the doors and the liftgate will unlock.

All doors will be locked automatically

unless one of the following operations is

performed within 1 minute after pushing

the UNLOCK

button while the doors

are locked.

. Opening any door (including the lift-

gate).

. Pushing the ignition switch.

During this 1-minute time period, if the

UNLOCK

button is pushed, all doors

will be locked automatically after another

1 minute.

NOTE:

The unlocking operation can be chan-

ged in selective unlock in the Vehicle

Settings of the vehicle information dis-

play. For additional information, see

“Vehicle Settings” (P.2-23).

Using panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel

threatened, you may activate the alarm

to call attention as follows:

1. Push the PANIC

button on the

Intelligent Key for more than 0.5

seconds.

2. The theft warning alarm and head-

lights will stay on for 25 seconds.

3. The panic alarm stops when:

It has run for 25 seconds, or

Any of the buttons on the Intelligent

Key is pushed. (Note: the PANIC

button must be pushed for more

than 0.5 seconds.)

Remote engine start (if so

equipped)

The remote engine start button is

on the Intelligent Key if the vehicle has

remote engine start function. This func-

tion allows the engine to start from

outside the vehicle. See “Remote engine

start” (P.3-23).

Setting hazard indicator and horn

mode

This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and

horn mode when you first receive the

vehicle.

In hazard indicator and horn mode, when

the LOCK

button is pushed, the

hazard indicator flashes twice and the

horn chirps once. When the UNLOCK

button is pushed, the hazard indicator

flashes once.

If horns are not necessary, the system

can be switched to the hazard indicator

mode.

In hazard indicator mode, when the LOCK

button is pushed, the hazard indica-

tor flashes twice. When the UNLOCK

button is pushed, neither the hazard

indicator nor the horn operates.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Hazard indicator and horn mode:

Operation DOOR LOCK

DOOR UNLOCK

Pushing door handle request switch

or liftgate request switch

HAZARD - twice

OUTSIDE CHIME - twice

HAZARD - once

OUTSIDE CHIME - once

Pushing

or button

HAZARD - twice

HORN - once

HAZARD - once

HORN - none

Hazard indicator mode:

Operation DOOR LOCK

DOOR UNLOCK

Pushing door handle request switch

or liftgate request switch

HAZARD - twice

OUTSIDE CHIME - none

HAZARD - none

OUTSIDE CHIME - none

Pushing

or button

HAZARD - twice

HORN - none

HAZARD - none

HORN - none

Switching procedure:

To switch the hazard indicator and horn

(chime) operation, push the LOCK

and UNLOCK buttons on the Intel-

ligent Key simultaneously for more than 2

seconds.

. When the hazard indicator mode is

set, the hazard indicator flashes 3

times.

. When the hazard indicator and horn

mode is set, the hazard indicator

flashes once and the horn chirps once.

The horn operation can also be turned on

or off in the vehicle information display.

See “Vehicle Settings” (P.2-23).

WARNING

To avoid risk of injury or death, do

not use the remote engine start

function when the vehicle is in an

enclosed area such as a garage.

JVP0446X

The remote engine start

button is on

the Intelligent Key if the vehicle has

remote engine start function. This func-

tion allows the engine to start from

outside the vehicle.

Some systems, such as the air conditioner

system, will turn on during a remote

engine start, if the system was on the

last time the ignition switch was turned

off.

Laws in some local communities may

restrict the use of remote engine starters.

For example, some laws require a person

using remote engine start to have the

vehicle in view. Check local regulations for

any requirements.

Other conditions may affect the remote

engine start function. See “Conditions the

remote engine start will not work” (P.3-

24).

Other conditions can affect the perfor-

mance of the Intelligent Key transmitter.

See “Intelligent Key system” (P.3-11) for

additional information.

REMOTE ENGINE START OPERATING

RANGE

The remote engine start function can

only be used when the Intelligent Key is

within the specified operating range from

the vehicle.

When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-

charged or other strong radio wave

sources are present near the operating

location, the Intelligent Key operating

range becomes narrower, and the Intelli-

gent Key may not function properly.

The remote engine start operating range

is approximately 197 ft (60 m) from the

vehicle.

REMOTE STARTING THE ENGINE

To use the remote start function to start

the engine, perform the following:

1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle.

2. Push the LOCK

button to lock all

doors.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

REMOTE ENGINE START (if so equipped)

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3. Within 5 seconds push and hold the

remote engine start

button until

the turn signal lights flash and the tail

lights illuminate. If the vehicle is not

within view, push and hold the remote

engine start

button for at least 2

seconds.

The following events will occur when the

engine starts:

. The front parking lights will turn on

and remain on as long as the engine is

running.

. The doors will be locked and the air

conditioner system may turn on.

. The engine will continue to run for

about 10 minutes. Repeat the steps to

extend the time for an additional 10

minutes. See “Extending engine run

time” (P.3-24).

Depress and hold the brake pedal, then

place the ignition switch in the ON posi-

tion before driving. For further instruc-

tions, see “Driving the vehicle” (P.5-20).

EXTENDING ENGINE RUN TIME

The remote engine start function can be

extended one time by performing the

steps listed in “Remote starting the en-

gine” (P.3-23). Run time will be calculated

as follows:

. The first 10 minute run time will start

when the remote engine start func-

tion is performed.

. The second 10 minutes will start im-

mediately when the remote engine

start function is performed. For exam-

ple, if the engine has been running for

5 minutes, and 10 minutes are added,

the engine will run for a total of 15

minutes.

. Extending engine run time will count

towards the two remote engine start

limit.

A maximum of two remote engine starts,

or a single start with an extension, are

allowed between ignition cycles.

The ignition switch must be cycled to the

ON position and then back to the OFF

position before the remote engine start

procedure can be used again.

CANCELING A REMOTE ENGINE

START

To cancel a remote engine start, perform

one of the following:

. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle

and push and hold the remote engine

start

button until the front park-

ing lights turn off.

. Turn on the hazard indicator flashers.

. Cycle the ignition switch ON and then

OFF.

. The extended engine run time has

expired.

. The first 10 minute timer has expired.

. The engine hood has been opened.

. The shift lever is moved out of the P

(Park) position.

. The theft alarm sounds due to illegal

entry into the vehicle.

. The ignition switch is pushed without

an Intelligent Key in the vehicle.

. The ignition switch is pushed with an

Intelligent Key in the vehicle but the

brake pedal is not depressed.

CONDITIONS THE REMOTE ENGINE

START WILL NOT WORK

The remote engine start will not operate

if any of the following conditions are

present:

. The ignition switch is placed in the ON

position.

. The hood is not securely closed.

. The hazard indicator flashers are on.

. The engine is still running. The engine

must be completely stopped. Wait at

least 6 seconds if the engine goes

from running to off. This is not applic-

able when extending engine run time.

. The remote engine start

button is

not pushed and held for at least 2

seconds.

. The remote engine start button is

not pushed and held within 5 seconds

of pushing the LOCK

button.

. The brake pedal is depressed.

. The doors are not closed and locked.

. The liftgate is open.

. The Key System Error warning mes-

sage remains on in the vehicle infor-

mation display.

. An Intelligent Key is left inside the

vehicle.

. The theft alarm sounds due to illegal

entry into the vehicle.

. Two remote engine starts, or a single

remote engine start with an exten-

sion, have already been used.

. The shift lever is not in the P (Park)

position.

. The remote engine start function has

been switched to the OFF position in

Vehicle Settings of the vehicle infor-

mation display. For additional infor-

mation, see “Vehicle Settings” (P.2-23).

The remote engine start may display a

warning or indicator in the vehicle infor-

mation display. For an explanation of the

warning or indicator, see “Vehicle infor-

mation display warnings and indicators”

(P.2-31).

WARNING

. Make sure the hood is completely

closed and latched before driving.

Failure to do so could cause the

hood to fly open and result in an

accident.

. Never open the hood if steam or

smoke is coming from the engine

compartment to avoid injury.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25

HOOD

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

WAD0090X

1. Pull the hood lock release handle

located below the instrument panel

until the hood springs up.

2. Locate the lever

in between the

hood and grille, and push the lever up

with your fingertips.

3. Raise the hood.

4. Remove the support rod and insert it

into the slot

Hold the coated part

when removing

or resetting the support rod. Avoid

direct contact with the metal parts, as

they may be hot immediately after the

engine has been stopped.

When closing the hood:

1. While supporting the hood, return the

support rod to its original position.

2. Slowly lower the hood to about 8 to 12

in (20 to 30 cm) above the hood lock,

then let it drop.

3. Make sure it is securely latched.

WARNING

. Always be sure the liftgate has

been closed securely to prevent it

from opening while driving.

. Do not drive with the liftgate

open. This could allow dangerous

exhaust gases to be drawn into

the vehicle. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Exhaust gas

(carbon monoxide)” (P.5-4).

. To help avoid risk of injury or

death through unintended opera-

tion of the vehicle and or its

systems, including entrapment

in windows or inadvertent door

lock activation, do not leave chil-

dren, people who require the

assistance of others or pets un-

attended in your vehicle. Addi-

tionally, the temperature inside a

closed vehicle on a warm day can

quickly become high enough to

cause a significant risk of injury

or death to people and pets.

. Always be sure that hands and

feet are clear of the door frame to

avoid injury while closing the

liftgate.

LIFTGATE

CAUTION

Do not use accessory carriers that

attach to the liftgate. Doing so will

cause damage to the vehicle.

JVP0396X

To open the liftgate, unlock it and push

the opener switch

. Pull up the liftgate to

open.

The liftgate can be unlocked by:

. pushing the UNLOCK

button on

the key.

. pushing the liftgate request switch (if

so equipped).

. pushing the door handle request

switch (if so equipped).

. pushing the power door lock switch to

the unlock position.

To close the liftgate, pull down until it

securely locks.

JVP0410X

LIFTGATE RELEASE LEVER

If the liftgate cannot be opened with the

power door lock switch due to a dis-

charged battery, follow these steps.

1. Fold the rear seats down. See “Seats”

(P.1-3).

2. Remove the cover plate from the lock

using a suitable tool.

3. Move the release lever to the right

using a suitable tool as illustrated. The

liftgate will be unlatched.

4. Push the liftgate up to open.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer as soon as possible for repair.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

WARNING

. Fuel is extremely flammable and

highly explosive under certain

conditions. You could be burned

or seriously injured if it is misused

or mishandled. Always stop the

engine and do not smoke or allow

open flames or sparks near the

vehicle when refueling.

. Fuel may be under pressure. Turn

the cap a half of a turn, and wait

for any “hissing” sound to stop to

prevent fuel from spraying out

and possibly causing personal

injury. Then remove the cap.

. Use only an original equipment

type fuel-filler cap as a replace-

ment. It has a built-in safety valve

needed for proper operation of

the fuel system and emission

control system. An incorrect cap

can result in a serious malfunc-

tion and possible injury.

JVP0540X

OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER DOOR

To open the fuel-filler door, pull the

release handle located below the instru-

ment panel. To lock, close the fuel-filler

door securely.

SPA2800

FUEL-FILLER CAP

To remove the fuel-filler cap:

1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclock-

wise

to remove.

2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap

holder

while refueling.

To install the fuel-filler cap:

1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into

the fuel-filler tube.

2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise

until a single click is heard.

FUEL-FILLER DOOR

WARNING

. Gasoline is extremely flammable

and highly explosive under cer-

tain conditions. You could be

burned or seriously injured if it is

misused or mishandled. Always

stop engine and do not smoke or

allow open flames or sparks near

the vehicle when refueling.

. Do not attempt to top off the fuel

tank after the fuel pump nozzle

shuts off automatically. Contin-

ued refueling may cause fuel

overflow, resulting in fuel spray

and possibly a fire.

. Use only an original equipment

type fuel-filler cap as a replace-

ment. It has a built-in safety valve

needed for proper operation of

the fuel system and emission

control system. An incorrect cap

can result in a serious malfunc-

tion and possible injury. It could

also cause the malfunction indi-

cator light to come on.

. Never pour fuel into the throttle

body to attempt to start your

vehicle.

. Do not fill a portable fuel contain-

er in the vehicle or trailer. Static

electricity can cause an explosion

of flammable liquid, vapor or gas

in any vehicle or trailer. To reduce

the risk of serious injury or death

when filling portable fuel contain-

ers:

— Always place the container on

the ground when filling.

— Do not use electronic devices

when filling.

— Keep the pump nozzle in con-

tact with the container while

you are filling it.

— Use only approved portable

fuel containers for flammable

liquid.

CAUTION

. If fuel is spilled on the vehicle

body, flush it away with water to

avoid paint damage.

. Insert the cap straight into the

fuel-filler tube, then tighten until

the fuel-filler cap clicks. Failure to

tighten the fuel-filler cap properly

may cause the

malfunction

indicator light (MIL) to illuminate.

If the

light illuminates be-

cause the fuel-filler cap is loose

or missing, tighten or install the

cap and continue to drive the

vehicle. The

light should turn

off after a few driving trips. If the

light does not turn off after a

few driving trips, have the vehicle

inspected. It is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

For additional information, see

“Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL)” (P.2-16).

. The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning

message will be displayed if the

fuel-filler cap is not properly tigh-

tened. It may take a few driving

trips for the message to be dis-

played. Failure to tighten the fuel-

filler cap properly after the LOOSE

FUEL CAP warning message is

displayed may cause the

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

to illuminate.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29

3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

JVP0503X

LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message

The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message

is displayed on the vehicle information

display when the fuel-filler cap is not

tightened correctly after the vehicle has

been refueled. It may take a few driving

trips for the message to be displayed. To

turn off the warning message, do the

following procedure:

1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap

as soon as possible. For additional

information, refer to “Fuel-filler cap”

(P.3-28).

2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.

3. Push the OK button

on the steering

wheel for about 1 second to turn off

the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning mes-

sage after tightening the fuel cap.

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel

while driving. You could lose control

of your vehicle and cause an acci-

dent.

TILT/TELESCOPIC STEERING

JVP0301X

TILT OR TELESCOPIC OPERATION

Pull the lock lever down and adjust the

steering wheel up, down, forward or

rearward to the desired position. Push

the lock lever up securely to lock the

steering wheel in place.

SIC3739

1. To block glare from the front, swing

down the main sun visor

2. To block glare from the side, remove

the main sun visor from the center

mount and swing it to the side

3. Slide the sun visor

in or out as

needed.

CAUTION

. Do not store the sun visor before

returning the extension to its

original position.

. Do not pull the extension sun

visor forcedly downward.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31

SUN VISORS

3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

SPA2447

INSIDE MIRROR

Adjust the angle of the inside mirror to

the desired position.

SPA2143

Manual anti-glare type (if so

equipped)

The night position will reduce glare

from the headlights of vehicles behind

you at night.

Use the day position

when driving in

daylight hours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when

necessary, because it reduces rear

view clarity.

SPA2450-A

Automatic anti-glare type (if so

equipped)

The inside mirror is designed so that it

automatically changes reflection accord-

ing to the intensity of the headlights of

the following vehicle.

The anti-glare system will be automati-

cally turned on when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position.

When the anti-glare system is turned on,

the indicator light

will illuminate and

excessive glare from the headlights of the

vehicle behind you will be reduced.

Push the “*” switch

to make the inside

rearview mirror operate normally. The

MIRRORS

indicator light will turn off. Push the “I”

switch

to turn the system on.

Do not allow any object to cover the

sensors

or apply glass cleaner on

them. Doing so will reduce the sensitiv-

ity of the sensor, resulting in improper

operation.

For the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver

operation, see “HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver” (P.2-83).

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING

Objects viewed in the outside mirror

on the passenger side are closer

than they appear. Be careful when

moving to the right. Using only this

mirror could cause an accident. Use

the inside mirror or glance over your

shoulder to properly judge distances

to other objects.

JVP0395X

Adjusting outside mirrors

The outside mirror control switch is

located on the driver’s armrest.

The outside mirror will operate only when

the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position.

Move the switch right or left to select the

right or left side mirror

, then adjust

using the control switch.

Defrosting outside mirrors (if so

equipped)

The outside mirrors will be heated when

the rear window defroster switch is

operated. (See “Rear window and outside

mirror defroster switch” (P.2-51).)

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-33

3-34 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

SPA1829

Foldable outside mirrors

Fold the outside mirror by pushing it

toward the rear of the vehicle.

SIC3869

VANITY MIRROR

To use the front vanity mirror, pull down

the sun visor and pull up the cover.

The memory seat system has two fea-

tures:

. Memory storage function

. Entry/exit function

MEMORY SEAT (if so equipped)

WAD0097X

MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION

Two positions for the driver’s seat and

outside mirrors can be stored in the

memory switch. Follow these procedures

to use the memory system.

1. Adjust the driver’s seat and outside

mirrors to the desired positions by

manually operating each adjusting

switch. For additional information, re-

fer to “Seats” (P.1-3) and “Outside

mirrors” (P.3-33).

2. Push the SET switch and, within 5

seconds, push the memory switch (1

or 2).

3. The indicator light for the pushed

memory switch will come on and stay

on for approximately 5 seconds.

4. The chime will sound if the memory

has been stored.

NOTE:

If a new memory position is stored in

the same memory switch, the previous

memory position will be overwritten by

the new stored position.

Confirming memory storage

Push the SET switch. If a memory position

has not been stored in the switch (1 or 2)

the indicator light for the respective

switch will come ON for approximately

0.5 seconds. If a memory position has

been stored in the switch (1 or 2) then the

indicator light for the respective switch

will stay ON for approximately 5 seconds.

Linking an Intelligent Key to a

stored memory position

Each Intelligent Key can be linked to a

stored memory position (memory switch

1 or 2) with the following procedure.

1. Follow steps 1-3 in the “Memory sto-

rage function” (P.3-35) for storing the

memory position.

2. The indicator light for the pushed

memory switch will come on. While

the indicator light is on for 5 seconds,

press the

button on the Intelligent

Key. The indicator light of the linked

memory switch will blink. After the

indicator light goes off, the Intelligent

Key is linked to that memory setting.

Once it is linked, when ignition switch is

placed in the OFF position, pressing the

button on the Intelligent Key will

move the driver’s seat and outside mir-

rors to the linked memory switch posi-

tion.

NOTE:

If a new memory position is stored in

the linked memory switch, then the

Intelligent Key will link the new position

and overwrites the previous position.

ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION

This system is designed so that the

driver’s seat will automatically move

when the shift lever is in the P (Park)

position. This allows the driver to get into

and out of the driver’s seat more easily.

The driver’s seat will slide backward:

. When the driver’s door is opened with

the ignition switch placed in the OFF

position.

. When the ignition switch is changed

from ON to OFF with the driver’s door

open.

The driver’s seat will return to the pre-

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-35

3-36 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

vious position:

. When the ignition switch is turned to

ON while the shift lever is in the P

(Park) position.

The entry/exit function can be adjusted

or canceled through “Vehicle Settings” in

the vehicle information display by per-

forming the following:

. Switch the “Exit Seat Slide” from ON to

OFF. For additional information, refer

to “Vehicle Settings” (P.2-23).

SYSTEM OPERATION

The memory seat system will not work or

will stop operating under the following

conditions:

. When the vehicle is moving. (The

driver’s seat returning function can

be operated if the vehicle speed is

below 4 MPH (7 km/h).)

. When any of the memory switches are

pushed while the memory seat is

operating.

. When the switch for the driver’s seat is

pushed while the memory seat is

operating.

. When the seat has already been

moved to the memorized position.

. When no seat position is stored in the

memory switch.

. When the shift lever is moved from P

(Park) to any other position.

4 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio
and phone systems
NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual .................................... 4-2
RearView Monitor (if so equipped) ................................. 4-2
RearView Monitor system operation ..................... 4-3
How to read the displayed lines ................................ 4-3
Difference between predictive and
actual distances ...................................................................... 4-4
How to park with predictive course lines .......... 4-6
Adjusting the screen ........................................................... 4-7
How to turn ON and OFF predictive course
lines ................................................................................................. 4-7
RearView Monitor system limitations.................... 4-7
System maintenance .......................................................... 4-9
Intelligent Around View® Monitor (if
so equipped) .................................................................................. 4-10
Intelligent Around View® Monitor
system operation ................................................................ 4-11
Difference between predictive and
actual distances ................................................................... 4-14
How to park with predictive course lines ....... 4-16
How to switch the display ........................................... 4-17
Adjusting the screen ........................................................ 4-18
Intelligent Around View® Monitor
system limitations............................................................ 4-18
System maintenance .................................................... 4-20
Moving Object Detection (MOD) (if
so equipped) ................................................................................. 4-21
MOD system operation ................................................ 4-21
Turning MOD on and off ............................................ 4-23
MOD system limitations .............................................. 4-23
System maintenance .................................................... 4-24
Ventilators ...................................................................................... 4-25
Center ventilators ............................................................ 4-25
Side ventilators .................................................................. 4-25
Rear ventilators (if so equipped) .......................... 4-25
Heater and air conditioner ................................................ 4-26
Manual air conditioner and heater .................... 4-27
Automatic air conditioner and heater ............ 4-31
Operating tips (for automatic
air conditioner) ................................................................... 4-33
Servicing air conditioner............................................. 4-33
Antenna ............................................................................................ 4-34
Car phone or CB radio ......................................................... 4-35

4-2 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

For models with NissanConnect® system,

refer to NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual

that includes the following information.

Available functions may vary depending

on the models and specifications.

. Audio

. Hands-Free Phone

. Apple CarPlay®

. Android Auto

. NissanConnect® Services powered by

SiriusXM®

. Navigation system

. Voice recognition

. Information and settings viewable on

NissanConnect®

WAE0016X

1. CAMERA button

WARNING

. Failure to follow the warnings

and instructions for proper use

of the RearView Monitor could

result in serious injury or death.

. RearView Monitor is a conveni-

ence feature and is not a sub-

stitute for proper backing. Always

turn and look out the windows,

and check mirrors to be sure that

it is safe to move before operat-

NISSANCONNECT® OWNER’S MANUAL

REARVIEW MONITOR (if so equipped)

ing the vehicle. Always back up

slowly.

. The system is designed as an aid

to the driver in showing large

stationary objects directly behind

the vehicle, to help avoid dama-

ging the vehicle.

. The distance guide line and the

vehicle width line should be used

as a reference only when the

vehicle is on a level paved sur-

face. The distance viewed on the

monitor is for reference only and

may be different than the actual

distance between the vehicle and

displayed objects.

CAUTION

Do not scratch the camera lens when

cleaning dirt or snow from the front

of the camera.

The RearView Monitor system automati-

cally shows a rear view of the vehicle

when the shift lever is placed in the R

(Reverse) position.

The radio can still be heard while the

RearView Monitor is active.

JVH1585X

To display the rear view, the RearView

Monitor system uses a camera located

just above the vehicle’s license plate

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM OP-

ERATION

When the ignition switch is placed in the

ON position, move the shift lever to the R

(Reverse) position to operate the Rear-

View Monitor.

SAA1896

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED

LINES

Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle

width and distances to objects with

reference to the bumper line

are

displayed on the monitor.

Distance guide lines:

Indicate distances from the vehicle body.

. Red line

: approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

. Yellow line

: approximately 3 ft (1 m)

. Green line

: approximately 7 ft (2 m)

. Green line

(if so equipped): approxi-

mately 10 ft (3 m)

Vehicle width guide lines

Indicate the vehicle width when backing

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-3

4-4 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

up.

Predictive course lines

Indicate the predictive course when back-

ing up. The predictive course lines will be

displayed on the monitor when the shift

lever is in the R (Reverse) position and if

the steering wheel is turned. The predic-

tive course lines will move depending on

how much the steering wheel is turned

and will not be displayed while the steer-

ing wheel is in the straight ahead position.

The vehicle width guide lines and the

width of the predictive course lines are

wider than the actual width and course.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTIVE

AND ACTUAL DISTANCES

The displayed guidelines and their loca-

tions on the ground are for approximate

reference only. Objects on uphill or down-

hill surfaces or projecting objects will be

actually located at distances different

from those displayed in the monitor

relative to the guidelines (refer to illustra-

tions). When in doubt, turn around and

view the objects as you are backing up, or

park and exit the vehicle to view the

positioning of objects behind the vehicle.

JVH1159X

Backing up on a steep uphill

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width

guide lines are shown closer than the

actual distance. Note that any object on

the hill is farther than it appears on the

monitor.

JVH1160X

Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle down a hill,

the distance guide lines and the vehicle

width guide lines are shown farther than

the actual distance. Note that any object

on the hill is closer than it appears on the

monitor.

SAA1923

Backing up near a projecting object

The predictive course lines do not

touch the object in the display. However,

the vehicle may hit the object if it projects

over the actual backing up course.

SAA1980

Backing up behind a projecting

object

The position is shown farther than the

position

in the display. However, the

position

is actually at the same dis-

tance as the position

. The vehicle may

hit the object when backing up to the

position

if the object projects over the

actual backing up course.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-5

4-6 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTIVE

COURSE LINES

WARNING

. If the tires are replaced with

different sized tires, the predic-

tive course lines may be dis-

played incorrectly.

. On a snow-covered or slippery

road, there may be a difference

between the predictive course

line and the actual course line.

. If the battery is disconnected or

becomes discharged, the predic-

tive course lines may be dis-

played incorrectly. If this occurs,

please perform the following pro-

cedures:

— Turn the steering wheel from

lock to lock while the engine is

running.

— Drive the vehicle on a straight

road for more than 5 minutes.

. When the steering wheel is

turned with the ignition switch in

the ON position, the predictive

course lines may be displayed

incorrectly.

SAA1897

1. Visually check that the parking space

is safe before parking your vehicle.

2. The rear view of the vehicle is dis-

played on the screen

when the shift

lever is moved to the R (Reverse)

position.

WAE0465X

3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting

the steering wheel so that the pre-

dictive course lines

enter the park-

ing space

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make

the vehicle width guide lines

parallel

to the parking space

while referring

to the predictive course lines.

5. When the vehicle is parked in the

space completely, move the shift lever

to the P (Park) position and apply the

parking brake.

WAE0058X

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

1. Push the MENU button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key and then

touch the “Camera” key.

3. Touch the “Display Settings” key.

4. Touch the “Brightness”, “Contrast”,

“Tint”, “Color”, or “Black Level” key.

5. Adjust the item by touching the “+” or

“–” key on the touch screen display.

NOTE:

Do not adjust any of the display settings

of the RearView Monitor while the

vehicle is moving. Make sure the park-

ing brake is firmly applied.

HOW TO TURN ON AND OFF PRE-

DICTIVE COURSE LINES

To turn the predictive course lines on and

off when the shift lever is in the P (Park)

position, perform the following operation.

1. Push the MENU button

2. Touch the “Settings” key and then

touch the “Camera” key.

3. Touch the “Predictive Course Lines”

key to turn the feature ON or OFF.

Pushing the CAMERA button while the

shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position

can also turn on and off the predictive

course lines.

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM LIM-

ITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limita-

tions for RearView Monitor. Failure to

operate the vehicle in accordance

with these system limitations could

result in serious injury or death.

. The system cannot completely

eliminate blind spots and may

not show every object.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-7

4-8 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

. Underneath the bumper and the

corner areas of the bumper can-

not be viewed on the RearView

Monitor because of its monitoring

range limitation. The system will

not show small objects below the

bumper, and may not show ob-

jects close to the bumper or on

the ground.

. Objects viewed in the RearView

Monitor differ from actual dis-

tance because a wide-angle lens

is used.

. Objects in the RearView Monitor

will appear visually opposite

compared to when viewed in the

rearview and outside mirrors.

. Use the displayed lines as a re-

ference. The lines are highly af-

fected by the number of

occupants, fuel level, vehicle po-

sition, road conditions and road

grade.

. Make sure that the liftgate is

securely closed when backing up.

. Do not put anything on the rear-

view camera. The rearview cam-

era is installed above the license

plate.

. When washing the vehicle with

high-pressure water, be sure not

to spray it around the camera.

Otherwise, water may enter the

camera unit causing water con-

densation on the lens, a malfunc-

tion, fire or an electric shock.

. Do not strike the camera. It is a

precision instrument. Otherwise,

it may malfunction or cause da-

mage resulting in a fire or an

electric shock.

The following are operating limitations

and do not represent a system malfunc-

tion:

. When the temperature is extremely

high or low, the screen may not clearly

display objects.

. When strong light directly shines on

the camera, objects may not be dis-

played clearly.

. Vertical lines may be seen in objects

on the screen. This is due to strong

reflected light from the bumper.

. The screen may flicker under fluores-

cent light.

. The colors of objects on the RearView

Monitor may differ somewhat from

the actual color of objects.

. Objects on the monitor may not be

clear in a dark environment.

. There may be a delay when switching

between views.

. If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on

the camera, the RearView Monitor

may not display objects clearly. Clean

the camera.

. Do not use wax on the camera lens.

Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth

dampened with a diluted mild clean-

ing agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.

JVH1585X

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

. Do not use alcohol, benzine or

thinner to clean the camera. This

will cause discoloration.

. Do not damage the camera as the

monitor screen may be adversely

affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the

camera

, RearView Monitor may not

display objects clearly. Clean the camera

by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a

diluted mild cleaning agent and then

wiping it with a dry cloth.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-9

4-10 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

WAE0016X

1. CAMERA button

WARNING

. Failure to follow the warnings

and instructions for the proper

use of the Intelligent Around

View® Monitor system could re-

sult in serious injury or death.

. The Intelligent Around View®

Monitor is a convenience feature

and is not a substitute for proper

vehicle operation because it has

areas where objects cannot be

viewed. The four corners of the

vehicle in particular, are areas

where objects do not always ap-

pear in the bird’s-eye, front, or

rear views. Always check your

surroundings to be sure that it is

safe to move before operating

the vehicle. Always operate the

vehicle slowly.

. The driver is always responsible

for safety during parking and

other maneuvers.

CAUTION

Do not scratch the lens when clean-

ing dirt or snow from the front of the

camera.

The Intelligent Around View® Monitor

system is designed as an aid to the driver

in situations such as slot parking or

parallel parking.

The monitor displays various views of the

position of the vehicle in a split screen

format. Not all views are available at all

times.

Available views:

INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW®

MONITOR (if so equipped)

. Front view

The view to the front of the vehicle.

. Rear view

The view to the rear of the vehicle.

. Bird’s-eye view

The views to the vehicle from above.

. Front-side view

The view around and ahead of the

front passenger’s side wheel.

WAE0211X

To display the multiple views, the Intelli-

gent Around View® Monitor system uses

cameras

located in the front grille, on

the vehicle’s outside mirrors and one just

above the vehicle’s license plate.

INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW®

MONITOR SYSTEM OPERATION

When the ignition switch is placed in the

ON position, push the CAMERA button on

the instrument panel or move the shift

lever to the R (Reverse) position to

operate the Intelligent Around View®

Monitor.

The screen displayed on the Intelligent

Around View® Monitor will automatically

return to the previous screen 3 minutes

after the CAMERA button has been

pushed with the shift lever in a position

other than the R (Reverse) position.

Available views

WARNING

. The distance guide lines and the

vehicle width guide lines should

be used as a reference only when

the vehicle is on a paved, level

surface. The apparent distance

viewed on the monitor may be

different than the actual distance

between the vehicle and dis-

played objects.

. Use the displayed lines and the

bird’s-eye view as a reference.

The lines and the bird’s-eye view

are greatly affected by the num-

ber of occupants, fuel level, vehi-

cle position, road condition and

road grade.

. If the tires are replaced with

different sized tires, the predic-

tive course lines and the bird’s-

eye view may be displayed incor-

rectly.

. When driving the vehicle up a hill,

objects viewed in the monitor are

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-11

4-12 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

farther than they appear. When

driving the vehicle down a hill,

objects viewed in the monitor are

closer than they appear.

. Objects in the rear view will ap-

pear visually opposite compared

to when viewed in the rearview

and outside mirrors.

. Use the mirrors or actually look to

properly judge distances to other

objects.

. On a snow-covered or slippery

road, there may be a difference

between the predictive course

line and the actual course line.

. The vehicle width and predictive

course lines are wider than the

actual width and course.

. The displayed lines on the rear

view will appear slightly off to the

right because the rear view cam-

era is not installed in the rear

center of the vehicle.

SAA1840

Front view

SAA1896

Rear view

Front and rear view:

Guiding lines that indicate the approx-

imate vehicle width and distances to

objects with reference to the vehicle body

line

, are displayed on the monitor.

Distance guide lines:

Indicate distances from the vehicle body.

. Red line

: approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

. Yellow line

: approximately 3 ft (1 m)

. Green line

: approximately 7 ft (2 m)

. Green line

(if so equipped): approxi-

mately 10 ft (3 m)

Vehicle width guide lines

Indicate the vehicle width.

Predictive course lines

Indicate the predictive course when op-

erating the vehicle. When the monitor

displays the rear view, the predictive

course lines will be displayed on the

monitor if the steering wheel is turned.

The predictive course lines will move

depending on how much the steering

wheel is turned and will not be displayed

while the steering wheel is in the straight

ahead position.

The front view will not be displayed when

the vehicle speed is above 6 MPH (10

km/h).

NOTE:

. When the monitor displays the front

view and the steering wheel turns

about 90 degrees or less from the

straight ahead position, both the

right and left predictive course lines

are displayed. When the steering

wheel turns about 90 degrees or

more, the predictive course line is

displayed only on the opposite side

of the turn.

JVH1037X

Bird’s-eye view:

The bird’s-eye view shows the overhead

view of the vehicle which helps confirm

the vehicle position and the predictive

course to a parking space.

The vehicle icon

shows the position of

the vehicle. Note that the distance be-

tween objects viewed in the bird’s-eye

view differs from the actual distance.

The areas that the cameras cannot cover

are indicated in black.

After the ignition switch is placed in the

ON position, the non-viewable area

highlighted in yellow for a few seconds

after the bird’s-eye view is displayed.

In addition, the non-viewable corners

are displayed in red to remind the driver

to be cautious. When the rear sonar is

active, non-viewable corners

for the

rear side of the vehicle are not displayed.

(See “Rear Sonar System (RSS)” (P.5-136).)

WARNING

. Objects in the bird’s-eye view will

appear farther than the actual

distance.

. Tall objects, such as a curb or

vehicle, may be misaligned or not

displayed at the seam of the

views.

. Objects that are above the cam-

era cannot be displayed.

. The view for the bird’s-eye view

may be misaligned when the

camera position alters.

. A line on the ground may be

misaligned and is not seen as

being straight at the seam of the

views. The misalignment will in-

crease as the line proceeds away

from the vehicle.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-13

4-14 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

SAA3571

Front-side view:

Guiding lines:

Guiding lines that indicate the approx-

imate width and the front end of the

vehicle are displayed on the monitor.

The front-of-vehicle line

shows the

front part of the vehicle.

The side-of-vehicle line

shows the

vehicle width including the outside mir-

rors.

The extensions

of both the front and

side

lines are shown with a green

dotted line.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTIVE

AND ACTUAL DISTANCES

The displayed guidelines and their loca-

tions on the ground are for approximate

reference only. Objects on uphill or down-

hill surfaces or projecting objects will be

actually located at distances different

from those displayed in the monitor

relative to the guidelines (refer to illustra-

tions). When in doubt, turn around and

view the objects as you are backing up, or

park and exit the vehicle to view the

positioning of objects behind the vehicle.

JVH1159X

Backing up on a steep uphill

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width

guide lines are shown closer than the

actual distance. Note that any object on

the hill is farther than it appears on the

monitor.

JVH1160X

Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle down a hill,

the distance guide lines and the vehicle

width guide lines are shown farther than

the actual distance. Note that any object

on the hill is closer than it appears on the

monitor.

SAA1923

Backing up near a projecting object

The predictive course lines do not

touch the object in the display. However,

the vehicle may hit the object if it projects

over the actual backing up course.

SAA3475

Backing up behind a projecting

object

The position is shown farther than the

position

in the display. However, the

position

is actually at the same dis-

tance as the position

. The vehicle may

hit the object when backing up to the

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-15

4-16 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

position if the object projects over the

actual moving course.

HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTIVE

COURSE LINES

WARNING

. If the tires are replaced with

different sized tires, the predic-

tive course lines may be dis-

played incorrectly.

. On a snow-covered or slippery

road, there may be a difference

between the predictive course

line and the actual course line.

. If the battery is disconnected or

becomes discharged, the predic-

tive course lines may be dis-

played incorrectly. If this occurs,

please perform the following pro-

cedures:

— Turn the steering wheel from

lock to lock while the engine is

running.

— Drive the vehicle on a straight

road for more than 5 minutes.

. When the steering wheel is

turned with the ignition switch in

the ON position, the predictive

course lines may be displayed

incorrectly.

SAA1897

1. Visually check that the parking space

is safe before parking your vehicle.

2. The rear view of the vehicle is dis-

played on the screen

when the shift

lever is moved to the R (Reverse)

position.

SAA1898

3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting

the steering wheel so that the pre-

dictive course lines

enter the park-

ing space

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make

the vehicle width guide lines

parallel

to the parking space

while referring

to the predictive course lines.

5. When the vehicle is parked in the

space completely, move the shift lever

to the P (Park) position and apply the

parking brake.

HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY

With the ignition switch placed in the ON

position, push the CAMERA button or

move the shift lever to the R (Reverse)

position to operate the Intelligent Around

View® Monitor.

The Intelligent Around View® Monitor dis-

plays different split screen views depend-

ing on the position of the shift lever. Push

the CAMERA button to switch between

the available views.

If the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)

position, the available views are:

. Rear view/bird’s-eye view split screen

. Rear view/front-side view split screen

. Rear view

If the shift lever is in the out of R (Reverse)

position, the available views are:

. Front view/bird’s-eye view split screen

. Front view/front-side view split screen

The display will switch from the Intelligent

Around View® Monitor screen when:

. The shift lever is in the D (Drive)

position and the vehicle speed in-

creases above approximately 6 MPH

(10 km/h).

. A different screen is selected.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-17

4-18 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

WAE0058X

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

1. Push the MENU button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key and then

touch the “Camera” key.

3. Touch the “Display Settings” key.

4. Touch the “Brightness”, “Contrast”,

“Tint”, “Color”, or “Black Level” key.

5. Adjust the item by touching the “+” or

“–” key on the touch screen display.

NOTE:

Do not adjust the display settings of the

Intelligent Around View® Monitor while

the vehicle is moving. Make sure the

parking brake is firmly applied.

INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW®

MONITOR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limita-

tions for Intelligent Around View®

Monitor. Failure to operate the vehi-

cle in accordance with these system

limitations could result in serious

injury or death.

. Do not use the Intelligent Around

View® Monitor with the outside

mirrors in the stored position,

and make sure that the liftgate

is securely closed when operating

the vehicle using the Intelligent

Around View® Monitor.

. The apparent distance between

objects viewed on the Intelligent

Around View® Monitor differs

from the actual distance.

. The cameras are installed above

the front grille, the outside mir-

rors and above the rear license

plate. Do not put anything on the

cameras.

. When washing the vehicle with

highpressure water, be sure not

to spray it around the cameras.

Otherwise, water may enter the

camera unit causing water con-

densation on the lens, a malfunc-

tion, fire or an electric shock.

. Do not strike the cameras. They

are precision instruments. Doing

so could cause a malfunction or

cause damage resulting in a fire

or an electric shock.

WAE0060X

There are some areas where the system

will not show objects and the system

does not warn of moving objects. When in

the front or the rear view display, an

object below the bumper or on the

ground may not be viewed

. When in

the bird’s-eye view, a tall object near the

seam

of the camera viewing areas will

not appear in the monitor.

The following are operating limitations

and do not represent a system malfunc-

tion:

. There may be a delay when switching

between views.

. When the temperature is extremely

high or low, the screen may not

display objects clearly.

. When strong light directly shines on

the camera, objects may not be dis-

played clearly.

. The screen may flicker under fluores-

cent light.

. The colors of objects on the Intelligent

Around View® Monitor may differ

somewhat from the actual color of

objects.

. Objects on the Intelligent Around

View® Monitor may not be clear and

the color of the object may differ in a

dark environment.

. There may be differences in sharpness

between each camera view of the

bird’s-eye view.

. Do not use wax on the camera lens.

Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth

that has been dampened with a

diluted mild cleaning agent, then wipe

with a dry cloth.

WAE0056X

System temporarily unavailable

When the “ ” icon is displayed on the

screen, there will be abnormal conditions

in the Intelligent Around View® Monitor.

This will not hinder normal driving opera-

tion but the system should be inspected.

It is recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-19

4-20 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

WAE0057X

When the “ ” icon is displayed on the

screen, the camera image may be receiv-

ing temporary electronic disturbances

from surrounding devices. This will not

hinder normal driving operation but the

system should be inspected. It is recom-

mended you visit a NISSAN dealer.

WAE0211X

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

. Do not use alcohol, benzine or

thinner to clean the camera. This

will cause discoloration.

. Do not damage the camera as the

monitor screen may be adversely

affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of

the cameras

, the Intelligent Around

View® Monitor may not display objects

clearly. Clean the camera by wiping with a

cloth dampened with a diluted mild

cleaning agent and then wiping with a

dry cloth.

WAE0016X

1. CAMERA button

WARNING

. Failure to follow the warnings

and instructions for proper use

of the Moving Object Detection

system could result in serious

injury or death.

. The MOD system is not a substi-

tute for proper vehicle operation

and is not designed to prevent

contact with objects surrounding

the vehicle. When maneuvering,

always use the outside mirror

and rearview mirror and turn

and check the surroundings to

ensure it is safe to maneuver.

. The system is deactivated at

speeds above 5 MPH (8 km/h). It

is reactivated at lower speeds.

. The MOD system is not designed

to detect the surrounding sta-

tionary objects.

The MOD system can inform the driver of

moving objects near the vehicle when

driving out of garages, maneuvering in

parking lots and in other such instances.

The MOD system detects moving objects

by using image processing technology on

the image shown in the display.

MOD SYSTEM OPERATION

The MOD system will turn on automati-

cally under the following conditions:

. When the shift lever is in the R

(Reverse) position.

. When the CAMERA button is pushed

to activate the Intelligent Around

View® Monitor system on the display.

. When vehicle speed decreases below

approximately 5 MPH (8 km/h).

The MOD system operates in the follow-

ing conditions when the camera view is

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-21

MOVING OBJECT DETECTION

(MOD) (if so equipped)

4-22 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

displayed:

. When the shift lever is in the P (Park) or

N (Neutral) position and the vehicle is

stopped, the MOD system detects the

moving objects in the bird’s-eye view.

The MOD system will not operate if

either door is opened. If outside mir-

rors are folded, MOD may not operate

properly.

. When the shift lever is in the D (Drive)

position, and the vehicle speed is

below approximately 5 MPH (8 km/h),

the MOD system detects moving ob-

jects in the front view.

. When the shift lever is in the R

(Reverse) position and the vehicle

speed is below approximately 5 MPH

(8 km/h), the MOD system detects

moving objects in the rear view. The

MOD system will not operate if the

liftgate is open.

The MOD system does not detect moving

objects in the front-side view. The MOD

icon is not displayed on the screen when

in this view.

When the MOD system detects a moving

object near the vehicle, the yellow frame

will be displayed on the view where the

object is detected and a chime will sound

once. While the MOD system continues to

detect moving objects, the yellow frame

continues to be displayed.

NOTE:

While the RCTA chime (if so equipped) is

beeping, the MOD system does not

chime.

JVH1256X

Front and bird’s-eye views

JVH0873X

Rear and bird’s-eye views

JVH1257X

Rear and front-side views

WAE0067X

Rear view

In the bird’s-eye view, the yellow frame

is displayed on each camera image (front,

rear, right, left) depending on where

moving objects are detected.

The yellow frame

is displayed on each

view in the front view and rear view

modes.

A blue MOD icon

is displayed in the view

where the MOD system is operative. A

gray MOD icon

is displayed in the view

where the MOD system is not operative.

If the MOD system is turned off, the MOD

icon

is not displayed.

TURNING MOD ON AND OFF

The MOD system can be turned on and

off using the vehicle information display.

(See “Driver Assistance” (P.2-21).)

MOD SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limita-

tions for MOD. Failure to operate the

vehicle in accordance with these

system limitations could result in

serious injury or death.

. Excessive noise (for example,

audio system volume or open

vehicle window) will interfere

with the chime sound, and it

may not be heard.

. The MOD system performance

will be limited according to en-

vironmental conditions and sur-

rounding objects such as:

— When there is low contrast

between background and the

moving objects.

— When there is blinking source

of light.

— When strong light such as

another vehicle’s headlight or

sunlight is present.

— When camera orientation is

not in its usual position, such

as when the outside mirror is

folded.

— When there is dirt, water drops

or snow on the camera lens.

— When the position of the mov-

ing objects in the display is

not changed.

. The MOD system might detect

flowing water droplets on the

camera lens, white smoke from

the muffler, moving shadows, etc.

. The MOD system may not func-

tion properly depending on the

speed, direction, distance or

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-23

4-24 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

shape of the moving objects.

. If your vehicle sustains damage

to the parts where the camera is

installed, leaving it misaligned or

bent, the sensing zone may be

altered and the MOD system may

not detect objects properly.

. When the temperature is extre-

mely high or low, the screen may

not display objects clearly. This is

not a malfunction.

NOTE:

The blue MOD icon will change to

orange if one of the following has

occurred.

. When the system is malfunctioning.

. When the component temperature

reaches a high level (icon will blink).

. When the rear view camera has

detected a blockage (icon will blink).

If the icon light continues to illuminate

orange, have the MOD system checked.

It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

WAE0211X

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

. Do not use alcohol, benzine or

thinner to clean the camera. This

will cause discoloration.

. Do not damage the camera as the

monitor screen may be adversely

affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of

the cameras

, the MOD system may not

operate properly. Clean the camera by

wiping with a cloth dampened with a

diluted mild cleaning agent and then

wiping with a dry cloth.

JVH0662X

CENTER VENTILATORS

Open/close the ventilators by moving the

control to either direction.

: This symbol indicates that the venti-

lators are open. Moving the control to

this direction will open the ventilators.

: This symbol indicates that the venti-

lators are closed. Moving the control

to this direction will close the ventila-

tors.

Adjust the air flow direction of the venti-

lators by moving the center knob (up/

down, left/right) until the desired position

is achieved.

JVH0663X

SIDE VENTILATORS

Open/close the ventilators by moving the

control to either direction.

: This symbol indicates that the venti-

lators are open. Moving the control to

this direction will open the ventilators.

: This symbol indicates that the venti-

lators are closed. Moving the control

to this direction will close the ventila-

tors.

Adjust the air flow direction of the venti-

lators by moving the center knob (up/

down, left/right) until the desired position

is achieved.

JVH0879X

REAR VENTILATORS (if so equipped)

Open/close the ventilators by moving the

control to either direction.

: This symbol indicates that the venti-

lators are open. Moving the side

control to this direction will open the

ventilators.

: This symbol indicates that the venti-

lators are closed. Moving the side

control to this direction will close the

ventilators.

Adjust the air flow direction of the venti-

lators by moving the center knob (up/

down, left/right) until the desired position

is achieved.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-25

VENTILATORS

4-26 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

WARNING

. The heater and air conditioner

operate only when the engine is

running.

. Never leave children or adults

who would normally require the

support of others alone in the

vehicle. Pets should not be left

alone either. They could unknow-

ingly activate switches or con-

trols and inadvertently become

involved in a serious accident

and injure themselves. On hot,

sunny days, temperatures in a

closed vehicle could quickly be-

come high enough to cause se-

vere or possibly fatal injuries to

people or animals.

. Do not use the recirculation mode

for long periods as it may cause

the interior air to become stale

and the windows to fog up.

. Do not adjust the heating and air

conditioning controls while driv-

ing so that full attention may be

given to vehicle operation.

The heater and air conditioner operate

when the engine is running. The air

blower will operate even if the engine is

turned off and the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position.

NOTE:

. Odors from inside and outside the

vehicle can build up in the air condi-

tioner unit. Odor can enter the pas-

senger compartment through the

ventilators.

. When parking, set the heater and air

conditioner controls to turn off air

recirculation to allow fresh air into

the passenger compartment. This

should help reduce odors inside the

vehicle.

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

JVH0664X

1. A/C button/Fan speed control dial

2. Air flow control buttons

3. MAX A/C button/Temperature control

dial

4. Front defroster

button

5. Rear defroster

button (See “Rear

window and outside mirror defroster

switch” (P.2-51).)

6. Air recirculation

button

MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER AND

HEATER

Controls

Turning system on/off:

To turn on the system, turn the fan speed

control

dial out of the OFF position.

Turn the dial counterclockwise to the OFF

position to turn off the system.

Fan speed control:

Turn the fan speed control

dial

clockwise to increase the fan speed.

Turn the fan speed control

dial

counterclockwise to decrease the fan

speed.

Temperature control:

Turn the temperature control dial to set

the desired temperature. Turn the dial

between the middle and the right posi-

tion to select the hot temperature. Turn

the dial between the middle and the left

position to select the cool temperature.

Air flow control:

Push one of the air flow control buttons

to select the air flow outlets.

— Air flows mainly from center and side

ventilators.

— Air flows mainly from center and side

ventilators and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from the foot outlet

and partly from the defroster.

— Air flows mainly from the defroster

and foot outlets.

Air intake control:

The air intake control mode will change

each time the air recirculation

button

is pushed.

. When the indicator light is turned on,

the air recirculates inside the vehicle.

. When the indicator light is turned off,

the air flow is drawn from outside the

vehicle.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-27

4-28 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

A/C (Air Conditioner) operation:

Push the A/C button to turn on or off the

air conditioner. When the air conditioner

is on, the A/C indicator light on the button

illuminates.

MAX A/C (Quick Air Conditioning) op-

eration:

Push the MAX A/C button for maximum

cooling and dehumidifying.

When the MAX A/C mode is turned on, the

air flow mode indicator will turn off with

the air flow mode fixed at

At the same time, the indicator light on

the A/C button and the air recirculation

mode will turn on.

Push the MAX A/C button again to turn

off the MAX A/C mode. When the MAX A/C

mode is turned off, most of the settings

will return to the previous state, while the

indicator light on the A/C button will stay

on.

Heater operation

Heating:

This mode is used to direct heated air

from the foot outlets. Some air also flows

from the defroster outlets and the side

ventilator outlets.

1. Push the air recirculation

button

for normal heating. (The indicator light

will turn off.)

2. Push the

button. (The indicator

light will turn on.)

3. Turn the fan speed control

dial to

the desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position between the

middle and the hot (right) position.

Ventilation:

This mode directs outside air from the

side and center ventilators.

1. Push the air recirculation

button.

(The indicator light will turn off.)

2. Push the

button. (The indicator

light will turn on.)

3. Turn the fan speed control

dial to

the desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position.

Defrosting or defogging:

This mode directs the air to the defroster

outlets to defrost/defog the windows.

1. Push the front defroster

button.

(The indicator light will turn on.)

2. Turn the fan speed control

dial to

the desired position.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position between the

middle and the hot (right) position.

To remove frost from the windshield

quickly, turn the temperature control

dial to the maximum hot (right) posi-

tion and the fan speed control

dial

to the maximum position.

When the front defroster mode is

selected, the air conditioner automa-

tically turns on if the outside tempera-

ture is more than 36°F (2°C). This

dehumidifies the air which helps defog

the windshield. The air recirculation

indicator automatically turns off, al-

lowing outside air to be drawn into

the passenger compartment to

further improve the defogging perfor-

mance. The recirculation mode can-

not be activated in the front defroster

mode.

Bi-level heating:

The bi-level mode directs warmed air to

the side and center ventilators and to the

front and rear floor outlets.

1. Push the air recirculation

button.

(The indicator light will turn off.)

2. Push the

button. (The indicator

light will turn on.)

3. Turn the fan speed control

dial to

the desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position.

Heating and defogging:

This mode heats the interior and defogs

the windows.

1. Push the

button. (The indicator

light will turn on.)

2. Turn the fan speed control

dial to

the desired position.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to

the maximum hot (right) position.

When the

button is pushed, the air

conditioner automatically turns on if the

outside temperature is more than 36°F

(2°C). This dehumidifies the air which

helps defog the windshield. The air re-

circulation indicator automatically turns

off, allowing outside air to be drawn into

the passenger compartment to further

improve the defogging performance.

NOTE:

Clear snow and ice from the wiper

blades and air inlet in front of the

windshield. This improves heater op-

eration.

Air conditioner operation

Start the engine, turn the fan speed

control

dial to the desired position,

and push the A/C button to activate the

air conditioner. When the air conditioner

is on, cooling and dehumidifying func-

tions are added to the heater operation.

The air conditioner cooling function op-

erates only when the engine is running.

Cooling:

This mode is used to cool and dehumidify

the air.

1. Push the

button. (The indicator

light will turn on.)

2. Turn the fan speed control

dial to

the desired position.

3. Push the A/C button. (The indicator

light will turn on.)

4. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position between the

middle and the cool (left) position.

For quick cooling, push the MAX A/C

button. When the MAX A/C button is

pushed, it will activate the air recirculation

mode. The amount of air coming through

the ventilators is the highest it can go

when in MAX A/C mode regardless of the

position of the fan speed control

dial.

Dehumidified heating:

This mode is used to heat and dehumidify

the air.

1. Push the air recirculation

button.

(The indicator light will turn off.)

2. Push the

button. (The indicator

light will turn on.)

3. Turn the fan speed control

dial to

the desired position.

4. Push the A/C button on. (The indicator

light will turn on.)

5. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position between the

middle and the hot (right) position.

Dehumidified defogging:

This mode is used to defog the windows

and dehumidify the air.

1. Push the front defroster

button.

(The indicator light will turn on.)

2. Turn the fan speed control

dial to

the desired position.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position.

When the front defroster or

mode is

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-29

4-30 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

selected, the air conditioner automatically

turns on if the outside temperature is

more than 36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies

the air which helps defog the windshield.

The air recirculation mode automatically

turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn

into the passenger compartment to

further improve the defogging perfor-

mance.

The air conditioner is always on in front

defroster or

mode, regardless of

whether the indicator light is on or off.

NOTE:

. The air conditioner system should

be operated for approximately 10

minutes at least once a month. This

helps prevent damage to the air

conditioner system due to the lack

of lubrication.

. A visible mist may be seen coming

from the ventilators in hot, humid

conditions as the air is cooled ra-

pidly. This does not indicate a mal-

function.

. If the engine coolant temperature

becomes too high, the air recircula-

tion mode will be activated and the

indicator light will come on automa-

tically.

. If the engine coolant temperature

gauge indicates engine coolant tem-

perature over the normal range, turn

the air conditioner off. (See “If your

vehicle overheats” (P.6-16).)

JVH0665X

1. Front defroster button

2. ON·OFF button/Temperature control dial

(driver side)

3. MODE button

4. Display screen

5. A/C (Air Conditioner) button

6. DUAL button/Temperature control dial

(passenger side)

7. Rear defroster

button (See “Rear

window and outside mirror defroster

switch” (P.2-51).)

8. Air recirculation

button

9. Fan speed control

button

10. AUTO button

11. Outside air circulation

button

AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER AND

HEATER

Automatic operation (AUTO)

The AUTO mode may be used year-round

as the system automatically controls the

air conditioner to a constant tempera-

ture, air flow distribution and fan speed

after the desired temperature is set

manually.

Cooling and dehumidified heating:

1. Push the AUTO button (the indicator

light will turn on).

2. Turn the temperature control dial to

set the desired temperature.

When the DUAL indicator light is not

illuminated, pushing the DUAL but-

ton (the indicator light will turn on)

allows the user to independently

change the driver and passenger

side temperatures with the corre-

sponding temperature control dial.

To cancel the separate tempera-

ture setting, push the DUAL button

(the indicator light will turn off) and

the driver’s side temperature

setting will be applied to both the

driver and passenger sides.

The temperature of the passenger

compartment will be maintained

automatically. Air flow distribution

and fan speed are also controlled

automatically.

A visible mist may be seen coming

from the ventilators in hot and humid

conditions as the air is cooled rapidly.

This does not indicate a malfunction.

Dehumidified defrosting/defogging:

1. Push the front defroster

button

(The indicator light on the front

defroster

button will illuminate).

2. Turn the temperature control dial to

set the desired temperature.

. To quickly remove frost from the out-

side surface of the windshield, set the

temperature and the fan speed to the

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-31

4-32 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

maximum levels.

. After the windshield is cleared, push

the AUTO button (the AUTO indicator

light will turn on).

. When the front defroster

button is

pushed, the air conditioner will turn on

when the outside air temperature is

above approximately 36°F (2°C) to

defog the windshield. The air recircu-

lation mode will automatically turn off.

The outside air circulation mode will

be selected to improve the defogging

performance.

Do not set the temperature too low when

the front defroster mode is on (the

indicator light is illuminated), because

doing so may fog up the windshield.

Manual operation

The manual mode can be used to control

the heater and air conditioner to your

desired settings.

Fan speed control:

Push the fan speed control button (

side or side) to manually control the

fan speed.

Push the AUTO button to change the fan

speed to the automatic mode.

Air flow control:

Push the MODE button to select the

desired mode:

— Air flows mainly from the center and

side ventilators.

— Air flows mainly from the center and

side ventilators and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from the foot outlet

and partly from the defroster.

— Air flows mainly from the front

defroster outlets and foot outlets.

Temperature control:

Turn the temperature control dial to set

the desired temperature.

. When the DUAL indicator light is not

illuminated, pushing the DUAL button

(the indicator light will turn on) allows

the user to independently change the

driver and passenger side tempera-

tures with the corresponding tem-

perature control dial.

Also turning the passenger’s side

temperature control dial changes only

the front passenger’s side tempera-

ture. (The DUAL indicator light will

illuminate and DUAL will appear on

the display.)

. To cancel the separate temperature

setting, push the DUAL button (the

indicator light will turn off) and the

driver’s side temperature setting will

be applied to both the driver and

passenger sides.

Air intake control:

. Push the air recirculation

button

to recirculate interior air inside the

vehicle. The indicator light on the

button will come on.

The air recirculation cannot be acti-

vated when the air conditioner is in

the front defrosting mode.

. Push the outside air circulation

button to draw outside air into the

passenger compartment. The indica-

tor light on the button will come on.

. To control the air intake automatically,

push and hold either the air recircula-

tion

button or the outside air

circulation

button (whichever but-

ton with the indicator light illumi-

nated). The indicator lights (both air

recirculation

and outside air cir-

culation

buttons) will flash twice,

and then the air intake will switch to

automatic control. When the auto-

matic control is set, the system auto-

matically alternates between the

outside air circulation and the air

recirculation modes. (The indicator

light of the active mode will turn on.)

NOTE:

Even if the system is manually set to the

air recirculation mode, when both out-

side temperature and coolant tempera-

ture are low, the system may

automatically switch to the outside air

circulation mode.

To turn the system off:

To turn off the heater and air conditioner,

push the ON·OFF button.

Push the ON·OFF button again, the sys-

tem will turn on in the mode which was

used immediately before the system was

turned off.

Remote engine start logic (if so

equipped)

When the remote engine start function is

activated, the vehicles equipped with the

automatic air conditioner and heater may

go into automatic heating or cooling

mode depending on the outside and

cabin temperatures. During this period,

the display and the buttons will be

inoperable until the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position. When the

temperature is low, the rear defroster

and the heated steering wheel (if so

equipped) may also be activated auto-

matically with the activation of the re-

mote engine start function. (See “Remote

engine start” (P.3-23).)

JVH0727X

JVH0728X

OPERATING TIPS (for automatic air

conditioner)

When the engine coolant temperature

and outside air temperature are low, the

air flow from the foot outlets may not

operate for a maximum of 150 seconds.

However, this is not a malfunction. After

the coolant temperature warms up, air

flow from the foot outlets will operate

normally.

The sensors

and , located on the

instrument panel, help maintain a con-

stant temperature. Do not put anything

on or around the sensors.

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains

refrigerant under high pressure. To

avoid personal injury, any air condi-

tioner service should be done only by

an experienced technician with the

proper equipment.

The air conditioner system in your vehicle

is charged with a refrigerant designed

with the environment in mind.

This refrigerant will not harm the

earth’s ozone layer. However, it may

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-33

4-34 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

contribute in a small part to global

warming.

Special charging equipment and lubricant

are required when servicing your vehicle’s

air conditioner. Using improper refriger-

ants or lubricants will cause severe da-

mage to the air conditioner system. (See

“Air conditioning system refrigerant and

oil recommendations” (P.10-6).)

A NISSAN dealer will be able to service

your environmentally friendly air condi-

tioner system.

In-cabin microfilter

The air conditioner system is equipped

with an in-cabin microfilter. To make sure

the air conditioner heats, defogs, and

ventilates efficiently, replace the filter

according the specified maintenance in-

tervals listed in the "9. Maintenance and

schedules" section. It is recommended to

visit a NISSAN dealer to replace the filter.

The filter should be replaced if the air flow

decreases significantly or if windows fog

up easily when operating the heater or air

conditioner.

SAA2374

To remove the antenna, hold the bottom

of the antenna and turn it counterclock-

wise.

To install the antenna, turn the antenna

clockwise and tighten.

CAUTION

. To avoid damaging or deforming

the antenna, be sure to remove

the antenna under the following

conditions.

— The vehicle enters a garage

with a low ceiling.

— The vehicle is covered with a

car cover.

. Be sure that antenna is removed

before the vehicle enters an auto-

matic car wash.

. Always properly tighten the an-

tenna rod during installation.

Otherwise, the antenna rod may

break during vehicle operation.

ANTENNA

When installing a car phone or a CB radio

in your vehicle, be sure to observe the

following precautions, otherwise the new

equipment may adversely affect the elec-

tronic control modules and electronic

control system harness.

WARNING

. A cellular phone should not be

used for any purpose while driv-

ing so full attention may be given

to vehicle operation. Some juris-

dictions prohibit the use of cellu-

lar phones while driving.

. If you must make a call while your

vehicle is in motion, the hands-

free cellular phone operational

mode (if so equipped) is highly

recommended. Exercise extreme

caution at all times so full atten-

tion may be given to vehicle

operation.

. If a conversation in a moving

vehicle requires you to take

notes, pull off the road to a safe

location and stop your vehicle

before doing so.

CAUTION

. Keep the antenna as far away as

possible from the electronic con-

trol modules.

. Keep the antenna wire more than

8 in (20 cm) away from the

electronic control system har-

ness. Do not route the antenna

wire next to any harness.

. Adjust the antenna standing-

wave ratio as recommended by

the manufacturer.

. Connect the ground wire from the

CB radio chassis to the body.

. For details, it is recommended

you visit a NISSAN dealer.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-35

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

4-36 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

MEMO

5 Starting and driving
Precautions when starting and driving ...................... 5-4
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ................................ 5-4
Three-way catalyst ............................................................... 5-4
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ........... 5-5
Avoiding collision and rollover .................................... 5-8
On-pavement and off-road
driving precautions .............................................................. 5-9
Off-road recovery .................................................................. 5-9
Rapid air pressure loss ...................................................... 5-9
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ..................... 5-10
Driving safety precautions .......................................... 5-10
Ignition switch (models without Intelligent
Key system) .................................................................................... 5-12
Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) ............................................................ 5-13
Manual Transmission (MT)........................................... 5-13
Key positions .......................................................................... 5-14
Push-button ignition switch (model with
Intelligent Key system) .......................................................... 5-14
Operating range for engine start function ...... 5-14
Push-button ignition switch operation............. 5-15
Push-button ignition switch positions .............. 5-16
Emergency engine shut off ........................................ 5-16
Intelligent Key battery discharge ........................... 5-17
Before starting the engine................................................. 5-17
Starting the engine (model without Intelligent
Key system) ................................................................................... 5-18
Starting the engine (model with Intelligent
Key system) ................................................................................... 5-19
Remote engine start (if so equipped) .............. 5-20
Driving the vehicle ................................................................... 5-20
Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) ......................................................... 5-20
Manual Transmission (MT) ........................................ 5-25
Parking brake............................................................................... 5-27
Pedal type............................................................................... 5-27
Switch type (models with electronic parking
brake system) ...................................................................... 5-27
Automatic brake hold (if so equipped) .................... 5-29
How to activate/deactivate the automatic
brake hold function ........................................................ 5-30
How to use the automatic brake
hold function........................................................................ 5-31
SPORT mode switch (if so equipped) ....................... 5-32
ECO mode system ................................................................... 5-32
ECO Pedal Guide function ......................................... 5-33
Ambient ECO ........................................................................ 5-34
ECO Drive Report .............................................................. 5-34
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) ..................................... 5-35
LDW system operation ................................................. 5-36
How to enable/disable the LDW system ....... 5-37

LDW system limitations .................................................. 5-37
System temporarily unavailable ............................. 5-38
System malfunction .......................................................... 5-39
System maintenance ....................................................... 5-39
Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) ................................ 5-40
I-LI system operation ....................................................... 5-41
How to enable/disable the I-LI system ............. 5-42
I-LI system limitations ..................................................... 5-43
System temporarily unavailable ............................. 5-44
System malfunction .......................................................... 5-45
System maintenance ....................................................... 5-45
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) ................................................... 5-46
BSW system operation ................................................... 5-47
How to enable/disable the BSW system .......... 5-48
BSW system limitations.................................................. 5-48
BSW driving situations .................................................... 5-49
System temporarily unavailable ............................. 5-52
System malfunction .......................................................... 5-53
System maintenance ....................................................... 5-53
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) ....................................... 5-54
RCTA system operation ................................................. 5-55
How to enable/disable the RCTA system ....... 5-57
RCTA system limitations ............................................... 5-58
System temporarily unavailable ............................. 5-60
System malfunction .......................................................... 5-61
System maintenance ....................................................... 5-61
Cruise control (if so equipped) ....................................... 5-62
Precautions on cruise control .................................. 5-63
Cruise control operations ............................................ 5-63
ProPILOT assist (if so equipped) ................................... 5-64
ProPILOT assist system operation ..................... 5-66
ProPILOT assist switches ........................................... 5-67
ProPILOT assist system display
and indicators ..................................................................... 5-68
Turning the conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode ON ............................................. 5-69
Operating ProPILOT assist ........................................ 5-69
How to enable/disable the
steering assist ..................................................................... 5-73
How to cancel the ProPILOT
assist system ....................................................................... 5-75
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) .............................. 5-75
Steering assist .................................................................... 5-84
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control mode ....................................................................... 5-91
Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) (if
so equipped) ................................................................................. 5-94
Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA)
system operation ............................................................. 5-95
Attention level indicator ............................................. 5-95
How to enable/disable the Intelligent
Driver Alertness (I-DA) system................................ 5-96
Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA)
system limitations............................................................ 5-96
System malfunction ....................................................... 5-97
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with
pedestrian detection system .......................................... 5-97
AEB with pedestrian detection
system operation ............................................................. 5-98

Turning the AEB with pedestrian detection
system ON/OFF ................................................................ 5-100
AEB with pedestrian detection
system limitations .......................................................... 5-101
System temporarily unavailable ......................... 5-104
System malfunction ...................................................... 5-105
System maintenance ................................................... 5-106
Intelligent Forward Collision
Warning (I-FCW) ....................................................................... 5-107
I-FCW system operation ............................................ 5-109
Turning the I-FCW system ON/OFF ................. 5-110
I-FCW system limitations .......................................... 5-112
System temporarily unavailable ......................... 5-114
System malfunction ...................................................... 5-114
System maintenance ................................................... 5-115
Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) .................................... 5-116
RAB system operation ................................................ 5-117
Turning the RAB system ON/OFF...................... 5-117
RAB system limitations .............................................. 5-119
System malfunction ...................................................... 5-121
System maintenance ................................................... 5-121
Break-in schedule ................................................................. 5-122
Fuel Efficient Driving Tips................................................ 5-122
Increasing fuel economy ................................................. 5-123
Intelligent 4x4 (if so equipped)................................... 5-123
Intelligent 4x4 LOCK switch operations ...... 5-125
Parking/parking on hills ................................................... 5-127
Electric power steering .................................................... 5-128
Brake system ........................................................................... 5-129
Braking precautions ................................................... 5-129
Brake assist ............................................................................... 5-130
Brake assist ....................................................................... 5-130
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ........................ 5-130
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system .............. 5-131
Chassis control ....................................................................... 5-133
Intelligent Trace Control ......................................... 5-133
Intelligent Engine Brake (Continuously
Variable Transmission (CVT) models) .......... 5-134
Active Ride Control ..................................................... 5-135
Hill Start Assist system ..................................................... 5-136
Rear Sonar System (RSS) ................................................ 5-136
System operation ......................................................... 5-137
How to enable/disable the RSS ........................ 5-139
RSS limitations ................................................................ 5-140
System temporarily unavailable ....................... 5-140
System maintenance ................................................ 5-140
Cold weather driving ......................................................... 5-141
Freeing a frozen door lock ................................... 5-141
Anti-freeze .......................................................................... 5-141
Battery................................................................................... 5-141
Draining of coolant water ..................................... 5-141
Tire equipment ............................................................... 5-141
Special winter equipment ..................................... 5-142
Driving on snow or ice ............................................. 5-142

5-4 Starting and driving

WARNING

. Do not leave children or adults

who would normally require the

support of others alone in your

vehicle. Pets should not be left

alone either. They could acciden-

tally injure themselves or others

through inadvertent operation of

the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny

days, temperatures in a closed

vehicle could quickly become

high enough to cause severe or

possibly fatal injuries to people or

animals.

. Properly secure all cargo with

ropes or straps to help prevent it

from sliding or shifting. Do not

place cargo higher than the seat-

backs. In a sudden stop or colli-

sion, unsecured cargo could

cause personal injury.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

. Do not breathe exhaust gas; it

contains colorless and odorless

carbon monoxide. Carbon mon-

oxide is dangerous. It can cause

unconsciousness or death.

. If you suspect that exhaust fumes

are entering the vehicle, drive

with all windows fully open, and

have the vehicle inspected imme-

diately.

. Do not run the engine in closed

spaces such as a garage.

. Do not park the vehicle with the

engine running for an extended

period of time.

. Keep the liftgate closed while

driving, otherwise exhaust gas

could be drawn into the passen-

ger compartment. If you must

drive with the liftgate open, fol-

low these precautions:

— Open all the windows.

— Turn the air recirculation

mode off and set the fan

speed control to the highest

level to circulate the air.

. If a special body or other equip-

ment is added for recreational or

other usage, follow the manufac-

turer’s recommendation to pre-

vent carbon monoxide entry into

the vehicle. (Some recreational

vehicle appliances such as stoves,

refrigerators, heaters, etc. may

also generate carbon monoxide.)

. The exhaust system and body

should be inspected by a quali-

fied mechanic whenever:

— Your vehicle is raised while

being serviced.

— You suspect that exhaust

fumes are entering into the

passenger compartment.

— You notice a change in the

sound of the exhaust system.

— You have had an accident

involving damage to the ex-

haust system, underbody, or

rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emission

control device installed in the exhaust

system. Exhaust gases in the three-way

catalyst are burned at high temperatures

to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING

. The exhaust gas and the exhaust

system are very hot. Keep people,

animals and flammable materials

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING

AND DRIVING

away from the exhaust system

components.

. Do not stop or park the vehicle

over flammable materials such as

dry grass, wastepaper or rags.

They may ignite and cause a fire.

CAUTION

. Do not use leaded gasoline. De-

posits from leaded gasoline will

seriously reduce the three-way

catalyst’s ability to help reduce

exhaust pollutants.

. Keep your engine tuned up. Mal-

functions in the ignition, fuel in-

jection, or electrical systems can

cause overrich fuel flow into the

three-way catalyst, causing it to

overheat. Do not keep driving if

the engine misfires, or if notice-

able loss of performance or other

unusual operating conditions are

detected. Have the vehicle in-

spected. It is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

. Avoid driving with an extremely

low fuel level. Running out of fuel

could cause the engine to misfire,

damaging the three-way catalyst.

. Do not race the engine while

warming it up.

. Do not push or tow your vehicle

to start the engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS-

TEM (TPMS)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold

and inflated to the inflation pressure

recommended by the vehicle manufac-

turer on the vehicle placard or tire infla-

tion pressure label. (If your vehicle has

tires of a different size than the size

indicated on the vehicle placard or tire

inflation pressure label, you should deter-

mine the proper tire inflation pressure for

those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle

has been equipped with a Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) that illumi-

nates a low tire pressure telltale when

one or more of your tires is significantly

under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low

tire pressure telltale illuminates, you

should stop and check your tires as soon

as possible, and inflate them to the

proper pressure. Driving on a significantly

under-inflated tire causes the tire to

overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-

ciency and tire tread life, and may affect

the vehicle’s handling and stopping abil-

ity.

Please note that the TPMS is not a

substitute for proper tire maintenance,

and it is the driver’s responsibility to

maintain correct tire pressure, even if

under-inflation has not reached the level

to trigger illumination of the TPMS low

tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with

a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate

when the system is not operating prop-

erly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is

combined with the low tire pressure tell-

tale. When the system detects a malfunc-

tion, the telltale will flash for

approximately one minute and then re-

main continuously illuminated. This se-

quence will continue upon subsequent

vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunc-

tion exists. When the malfunction indica-

tor is illuminated, the system may not be

able to detect or signal low tire pressure

as intended. TPMS malfunctions may

occur for a variety of reasons, including

the installation of replacement or alter-

nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that

prevent the TPMS from functioning prop-

erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction

telltale after replacing one or more tires

Starting and driving 5-5

5-6 Starting and driving

or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that

the replacement or alternate tires and

wheels allow the TPMS to continue to

function properly.

Additional information

. Since the spare tire (if so equipped) is

not equipped with the TPMS, the TPMS

does not monitor the tire pressure of

the spare tire.

. The TPMS will activate only when the

vehicle is driven at speeds above 16

MPH (25 km/h). Also, this system may

not detect a sudden drop in tire

pressure (for example a flat tire while

driving).

. The low tire pressure warning light

does not automatically turn off when

the tire pressure is adjusted. After the

tire is inflated to the recommended

pressure, the vehicle must be driven at

speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to

activate the TPMS and turn off the low

tire pressure warning light. Use a tire

pressure gauge to check the tire

pressure.

. The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air”

warning appears in the vehicle infor-

mation display when the low tire

pressure warning light is illuminated

and low tire pressure is detected. The

“Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning

turns off when the low tire pressure

warning light turns off.

The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air”

warning does not appear if the low

tire pressure warning light illuminates

to indicate a TPMS malfunction.

. Tire pressure rises and falls depending

on the heat caused by the vehicle’s

operation and the outside tempera-

ture. Do not reduce the tire pressure

after driving because the tire pressure

rises after driving. Low outside tem-

perature can lower the temperature

of the air inside the tire which can

cause a lower tire inflation pressure.

This may cause the low tire pressure

warning light to illuminate. If the

warning light illuminates in low ambi-

ent temperature, check the tire pres-

sure for all four tires.

For additional information, see “Low tire

pressure warning light” (P.2-14) and “Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P.6-

3).

WARNING

. If the low tire pressure warning

light illuminates while driving,

avoid sudden steering maneu-

vers or abrupt braking, reduce

vehicle speed, pull off the road

to a safe location and stop the

vehicle as soon as possible. Driv-

ing with under-inflated tires may

permanently damage the tires

and increase the likelihood of tire

failure. Serious vehicle damage

could occur and may lead to an

accident and could result in ser-

ious personal injury. Check the

tire pressure for all four tires.

Adjust the tire pressure to the

recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading

Information label to turn the low

tire pressure warning light OFF. If

you have a flat tire, replace it with

a spare tire (if so equipped) or

repair it using the emergency tire

puncture repair kit (if so

equipped) as soon as possible.

(See “Flat tire” (P.6-3) for chan-

ging a flat tire.)

. Since the spare tire (if so

equipped) is not equipped with

the TPMS, when a spare tire is

mounted or a wheel is replaced,

the TPMS will not function and

the low tire pressure warning

light will flash for approximately

1 minute. The light will remain on

after 1 minute. Have your tires

replaced and/or TPMS system

reset as soon as possible. It is

recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for these services.

. Replacing tires with those not

originally specified by NISSAN

could affect the proper operation

of the TPMS.

. Do not inject any tire liquid or

aerosol tire sealant into the tires,

as this may cause a malfunction

of the tire pressure sensors

(models without emergency tire

puncture repair kit).

. NISSAN recommends using only

Genuine NISSAN Emergency Tire

Sealant provided with your vehi-

cle. Other tire sealants may da-

mage the valve stem seal which

can cause the tire to lose air

pressure. Visit a NISSAN dealer

as soon as possible after using

tire repair sealant (models with

emergency tire puncture repair

kit).

CAUTION

. The TPMS may not function prop-

erly when the wheels are

equipped with tire chains or the

wheels are buried in snow.

. Do not place metalized film or

any metal parts (antenna, etc.) on

the windows. This may cause

poor reception of the signals

from the tire pressure sensors,

and the TPMS will not function

properly.

Some devices and transmitters may tem-

porarily interfere with the operation of

the TPMS and cause the low tire pressure

warning light to illuminate. Some exam-

ples are:

. Facilities or electric devices using

similar radio frequencies are near the

vehicle.

. If a transmitter set to similar frequen-

cies is being used in or near the

vehicle.

. If a computer (or similar equipment) or

a DC/AC converter is being used in or

near the vehicle.

Low tire pressure warning light may

illuminate in the following cases.

. If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel

and tire without TPMS.

. If the TPMS has been replaced and the

ID has not been registered.

. If the wheel is not originally specified

by NISSAN.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference,

and (2) this device must accept any

interference received, including inter-

ference that may cause undesired op-

eration.

Note: Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Ca-

nada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following

two conditions: (1) this device may not

cause interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation of the device.

Starting and driving 5-7

5-8 Starting and driving

TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert

When adding air to an under-inflated tire,

the TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert provides

visual and audible signals outside the

vehicle to help you inflate the tires to

the recommended COLD tire pressure.

Vehicle set-up:

1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level

place.

2. Apply the parking brake and place the

shift lever in the P (Park) position (CVT

model) or N (Neutral) position (MT

model).

3. Place the ignition switch in the ON

position. Do not start the engine.

Operation:

1. Add air to the tire.

2. After a few seconds, the hazard in-

dicators will start flashing.

3. When the designated pressure is

reached, the horn beeps once and

the hazard indicators stop flashing.

4. Perform the above steps for each tire.

. If the tire is over-inflated more than

approximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn

beeps and the hazard indicators flash

3 times. To correct the pressure, push

the core of the valve stem on the tire

briefly to release pressure. When the

pressure reaches the designated

pressure, the horn beeps once.

. If the hazard indicator does not flash

within approximately 15 seconds after

starting to inflate the tire, it indicates

that the TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert

is not operating.

. The TPMS will not activate the Easy Fill

Tire Alert under the following condi-

tions:

— If there is interference from an

external device or transmitter

— The air pressure from the inflation

device such as those using a power

socket is not sufficient to inflate the

tire

— If an electrical equipment is being

used in or near the vehicle

— There is a malfunction in the TPMS

system

— There is a malfunction in the horn

or hazard indicators

. If the TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert

does not operate due to TPMS inter-

ference, move the vehicle about 3 ft

(1m) backward or forward and try

again.

If the TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert is not

working, use a tire pressure gauge.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLL-

OVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a

safe and prudent manner may result

in loss of control or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times.

Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid exces-

sive speed, high speed cornering, or

sudden steering maneuvers, because

these driving practices could cause you

to lose control of your vehicle. As with

any vehicle, a loss of control could

result in a collision with other vehicles

or objects, or cause the vehicle to roll-

over, particularly if the loss of control

causes the vehicle to slide sideways. Be

attentive at all times, and avoid driving

when tired. Never drive when under the

influence of alcohol or drugs (including

prescription or over-the-counter drugs

which may cause drowsiness). Always

wear your seat belt as outlined in “Seat

belts” (P.1-12) of this manual, and also

instruct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in

collisions and rollovers. In a rollover

crash, an unbelted or improperly belted

person is significantly more likely to be

injured or killed than a person properly

wearing a seat belt.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD

DRIVING PRECAUTIONS

Utility vehicles have a significantly high-

er rollover rate than other types of

vehicles.

They have higher ground clearance than

passenger cars to make them capable of

performing in a variety of on-pavement

and off-road applications. This gives them

a higher center of gravity than ordinary

cars. An advantage of higher ground

clearance is a better view of the road,

allowing you to anticipate problems.

However, they are not designed for cor-

nering at the same speeds as conven-

tional passenger cars any more than low-

slung sports cars are designed to perform

satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If

at all possible, avoid sharp turns or abrupt

maneuvers, particularly at high speeds. As

with other vehicles of this type, failure to

operate this vehicle correctly may result

in loss of control or vehicle rollover. Seat

belts help reduce the risk of injury in

collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash,

an unbelted or improperly belted person

is significantly more likely to be injured or

killed than a person properly wearing a

seat belt.

Be sure to read “Driving safety precau-

tions” (P.5-10).

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY

If the right side or left side wheels leave

the road surface, maintain control of the

vehicle by following the procedure below.

Please note that this procedure is only a

general guide. The vehicle must be driven

as appropriate based on the conditions of

the vehicle, road and traffic.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Do not apply the brakes.

3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering

wheel with both hands and try to hold

a straight course.

4. When appropriate, slowly release the

accelerator pedal to gradually slow

the vehicle.

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the

vehicle to follow the road while the

vehicle speed is reduced. Do not

attempt to drive the vehicle back onto

the road surface until vehicle speed is

reduced.

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn

the steering wheel until both tires

return to the road surface. When all

tires are on the road surface, steer the

vehicle to stay in the appropriate

driving lane.

If you decide that it is not safe to

return the vehicle to the road sur-

face based on vehicle, road or

traffic conditions, gradually slow

the vehicle to a stop in a safe place

off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS

Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can

occur if the tire is punctured or is

damaged due to hitting a curb or pothole.

Rapid air pressure loss can also be caused

by driving on under-inflated tires.

Rapid air pressure loss can affect the

handling and stability of the vehicle,

especially at highway speeds.

Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by

maintaining the correct air pressure and

visually inspect the tires for wear and

damage. See “Wheels and tires” (P.8-29) of

this manual.

If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or

“blows-out” while driving, maintain con-

trol of the vehicle by following the proce-

dure below. Please note that this

procedure is only a general guide. The

vehicle must be driven as appropriate

based on the conditions of the vehicle,

road and traffic.

Starting and driving 5-9

5-10 Starting and driving

WARNING

The following actions can increase

the chance of losing control of the

vehicle if there is a sudden loss of tire

air pressure. Losing control of the

vehicle may cause a collision and

result in personal injury.

. The vehicle generally moves or

pulls in the direction of the flat

tire.

. Do not rapidly apply the brakes.

. Do not rapidly release the accel-

erator pedal.

. Do not rapidly turn the steering

wheel.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering

wheel with both hands and try to hold

a straight course.

3. When appropriate, slowly release the

accelerator pedal to gradually slow

the vehicle.

4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe

location off the road and away from

traffic if possible.

5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gra-

dually stop the vehicle.

6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers

and either contact a roadside emer-

gency service to change the tire or see

“Changing a flat tire (models with

spare tire)” (P.6-4) of this Owner’s

Manual.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND

DRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of

alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the

bloodstream reduces coordination,

delays reaction time and impairs

judgement. Driving after drinking

alcohol increases the likelihood of

being involved in an accident injuring

yourself and others. Additionally, if

you are injured in an accident, alco-

hol can increase the severity of the

injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving.

However, you must choose not to drive

under the influence of alcohol. Every year

thousands of people are injured or killed

in alcohol-related accidents. Although the

local laws vary on what is considered to

be legally intoxicated, the fact is that

alcohol affects all people differently and

most people underestimate the effects of

alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t

mix! And that is true for drugs, too (over-

the-counter, prescription, and illegal

drugs). Don’t drive if your ability to oper-

ate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol,

drugs, or some other physical condition.

DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Your vehicle is designed for both normal

and off-road use. However, avoid driving

in deep water or mud as your vehicle is

mainly designed for leisure use, unlike a

conventional off-road vehicle.

Remember that Two-Wheel Drive (2WD)

models are less capable than All-Wheel

Drive (AWD) models for rough road driving

and extrication when stuck in deep snow,

mud, or the like.

Please observe the following precautions:

WARNING

. Drive carefully when off the road

and avoid dangerous areas. Every

person who drives or rides in this

vehicle should be seated with

their seat belt fastened. This will

keep you and your passengers in

position when driving over rough

terrain.

. Do not drive across steep slopes.

Instead drive either straight up or

straight down the slopes. Off-

road vehicles can tip over side-

ways much more easily than they

can forward or backward.

. Many hills are too steep for any

vehicle. If you drive up them, you

may stall. If you drive down them,

you may not be able to control

your speed. If you drive across

them, you may roll over.

. Do not shift ranges while driving

on downhill grades as this could

cause loss of control of the vehi-

cle.

. Stay alert when driving to the top

of a hill. At the top there could be

a drop-off or other hazard that

could cause an accident.

. If your engine stalls or you cannot

make it to the top of a steep hill,

never attempt to turn around.

Your vehicle could tip or roll over.

Always back straight down in R

(Reverse) range. Never back down

in N (Neutral), using only the

brake, as this could cause loss of

control.

. Heavy braking going down a hill

could cause your brakes to over-

heat and fade, resulting in loss of

control and an accident. Apply

brakes lightly and use a low

range to control your speed.

. Unsecured cargo can be thrown

around when driving over rough

terrain. Properly secure all cargo

so it will not be thrown forward

and cause injury to you or your

passengers.

. To avoid raising the center of

gravity excessively, do not exceed

the rated capacity of the roof rack

(if so equipped) and evenly dis-

tribute the load. Secure heavy

loads in the cargo area as far

forward and as low as possible.

Do not equip the vehicle with tires

larger than specified in this man-

ual. This could cause your vehicle

to roll over.

. Do not grip the inside or spokes

of the steering wheel when driv-

ing off-road. The steering wheel

could move suddenly and injure

your hands. Instead drive with

your fingers and thumbs on the

outside of the rim.

. Before operating the vehicle, en-

sure that the driver and all pas-

sengers have their seat belts

fastened.

. Always drive with the floor mats

in place as the floor may became

hot.

. Lower your speed when encoun-

tering strong crosswinds. With a

higher center of gravity, your

vehicle is more affected by strong

side winds. Slower speeds ensure

better vehicle control.

. Do not drive beyond the perfor-

mance capability of the tires,

even with AWD engaged.

. For AWD equipped vehicles, do

not attempt to raise two wheels

off the ground and shift the

transmission to any drive or re-

verse position with the engine

running. Doing so may result in

drivetrain damage or unexpected

vehicle movement which could

result in serious vehicle damage

or personal injury.

. Do not attempt to test an AWD

equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel

dynamometer (such as the dy-

namometers used by some

states for emissions testing), or

Starting and driving 5-11

5-12 Starting and driving

similar equipment even if the

other two wheels are raised off

the ground. Make sure you inform

test facility personnel that your

vehicle is equipped with AWD

before it is placed on a dynam-

ometer. Using the wrong test

equipment may result in drive-

train damage or unexpected ve-

hicle movement which could

result in serious vehicle damage

or personal injury.

. When a wheel is off the ground

due to an unlevel surface, do not

spin the wheel excessively (AWD

model).

. Accelerating quickly, sharp steer-

ing maneuvers or sudden braking

may cause loss of control.

. If at all possible, avoid sharp

turning maneuvers, particularly

at high speeds. Your vehicle has

a higher center of gravity than a

conventional passenger car. The

vehicle is not designed for cor-

nering at the same speeds as

conventional passenger cars.

Failure to operate this vehicle

correctly could result in loss of

control and/or a rollover acci-

dent.

. Always use tires of the same type,

size, brand, construction (bias,

bias-belted or radial), and tread

pattern on all four wheels. Install

traction devices on the front

wheels when driving on slippery

roads and drive carefully.

. Be sure to check the brakes im-

mediately after driving in mud or

water. See “Brake system” (P.5-

129) for wet brakes.

. Avoid parking your vehicle on

steep hills. If you get out of the

vehicle and it rolls forward, back-

ward or sideways, you could be

injured.

. Whenever you drive off-road

through sand, mud or water as

deep as the wheel hub, more

frequent maintenance may be

required. See the maintenance

schedule shown in the “9. Main-

tenance and schedules” section.

. Spinning the front wheels on

slippery surfaces may cause the

AWD warning message to display

and the AWD system to automa-

tically switch from the AWD mode

to the 2WD mode. This could

reduce traction. (AWD models)

WARNING

Never remove the key or place the

ignition switch in the LOCK position

while driving. The steering wheel will

lock and could cause the driver to

lose control of the vehicle. This could

result in serious vehicle damage or

personal injury.

IGNITION SWITCH (models without

Intelligent Key system)

JVS1067X

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANS-

MISSION (CVT)

The ignition lock is designed so that the

ignition switch cannot be turned to the

LOCK position until the shift lever is

moved to the P (Park) position. When

moving the ignition switch to the LOCK

position, to remove the key from the

ignition switch, make sure the shift lever

is in the P (Park) position.

When the ignition switch cannot be

turned to the LOCK position:

1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park)

position.

2. Turn the ignition switch slightly in the

ON direction.

3. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK

position.

4. Remove the key.

If the ignition switch is turned to the

LOCK position, the shift lever cannot be

moved from the P (Park) position. The

shift lever can be moved if the ignition

switch is in the ON position with the foot

brake pedal depressed.

JVS1067X

MANUAL TRANSMISSION (MT)

The ignition switch includes a device that

helps prevent accidental removal of the

key while driving.

The key can only be removed when the

ignition switch is in the LOCK position.

Starting and driving 5-13

5-14 Starting and driving

KEY POSITIONS

LOCK: Normal parking position (0)

OFF: (Not used) (1)

This position activates electrical acces-

sories such as the radio when the engine

is not running.

ON: Normal operating position (2)

This position turns on the ignition system

and the electrical accessories.

START: (3)

This position starts the engine. As soon as

the engine has started, release the key. It

automatically returns to the ON position.

WARNING

Do not operate the push-button

ignition switch while driving the ve-

hicle except in an emergency. (The

engine will stop when the ignition

switch is pushed 3 consecutive times

or the ignition switch is pushed and

held for more than 2 seconds.) If the

engine stops while the vehicle is

being driven, this could lead to a

crash and serious injury.

Before operating the push-button igni-

tion switch, be sure to move the shift

lever to the P (Park) position (for Con-

tinuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

models) or the shift lever to the N

(Neutral) position (for Manual Transmis-

sion (MT) models).

SSD0436

OPERATING RANGE FOR ENGINE

START FUNCTION

The Intelligent Key can only be used for

starting the engine when the Intelligent

Key is within the specified operating

range

When the Intelligent Key battery is almost

discharged or strong radio waves are

present near the operating location, the

Intelligent Key system’s operating range

becomes narrower and may not function

properly.

If the Intelligent Key is within the operat-

ing range, it is possible for anyone, even

someone who does not carry the Intelli-

gent Key, to push the ignition switch to

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

(model with Intelligent Key system)

start the engine.

. The cargo room area is not included in

the operating range but the Intelligent

Key may function.

. If the Intelligent Key is placed on the

instrument panel, inside the glove box

or door pocket, the Intelligent Key may

not function.

. If the Intelligent Key is placed near the

door or window outside the vehicle,

the Intelligent Key may function.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

OPERATION

CAUTION

. Do not leave the vehicle for ex-

tended periods of time when the

ignition switch is in the ON posi-

tion and the engine is not run-

ning. This can discharge the

battery.

. Use electrical accessories with

the engine running to avoid dis-

charging the vehicle battery. If

you must use accessories while

the engine is not running, do not

use them for extended periods of

time and do not use multiple

electrical accessories at the same

time.

JVS0937X

When the ignition switch is pushed with-

out depressing the brake pedal (CVT

models) or the clutch pedal (MT models),

the ignition switch will illuminate.

Push the ignition switch center:

. once to change to ON.

. two times to change to OFF.

The ignition switch will automatically

return to the LOCK position when any

door is either opened or closed with the

switch in the OFF position.

Starting and driving 5-15

5-16 Starting and driving

Continuously Variable Transmis-

sion (CVT) models

The ignition lock is designed so that the

ignition switch position cannot be

switched to OFF until the shift lever is

moved to the P (Park) position.

When the ignition switch cannot be

pushed toward the OFF position, proceed

as follows:

1. Move the shift lever into the P (Park)

position.

2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition

switch position will change to the ON

position.

3. Push the ignition switch again to the

OFF position.

The shift lever can be moved from the P

(Park) position if the ignition switch is in

the ON position and the brake pedal is

depressed.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

POSITIONS

LOCK (Normal parking position)

The ignition switch can only be locked at

this position.

The ignition switch will lock when any

door is opened or closed with the ignition

switched off.

ON (Normal operating position)

The ignition system and the electrical

accessory power activate at this position

without the engine turned on.

The ON position has a battery saver

feature that will place the ignition switch

in the OFF position, if the vehicle is not

running, after some time under the fol-

lowing conditions:

. all doors are closed.

. shift lever is in P (Park) position (CVT

model) or N (Neutral) position (MT

model).

The battery saver feature will be can-

celled if any of the following occur:

. any door is opened.

. shift lever is moved out of the P (Park)

position (CVT model).

. ignition switch changes position.

OFF position

The engine is turned off in this position.

Auto ACC position

With the vehicle in the P (Park) position

(CVT models) or the N (Neutral) position

(MT models), the Intelligent Key with you

and the ignition placed from ON to OFF,

the radio can still be used for a period of

time, or until the driver’s door is opened.

After a period of time, functions such as

radio, navigation (if so equipped), and

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

may be restarted by turning on the audio

system (see the separate NissanConnect®

Owner’s Manual), or by pushing the UN-

LOCK button on the Intelligent Key for up

to a total of 30 minutes.

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

To shut off the engine in an emergency

situation while driving, perform the fol-

lowing procedure:

. Rapidly push the push-button ignition

switch 3 consecutive times in less

than 1.5 seconds, or

. Push and hold the push-button igni-

tion switch for more than 2 seconds.

JVS0404X

INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY DIS-

CHARGE

If the battery of the Intelligent Key is

discharged, or environmental conditions

interfere with the Intelligent Key opera-

tion, start the engine according to the

following procedure:

1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park)

position (for CVT models) or the shift

lever to the N (Neutral) position (for MT

models).

2. Firmly apply the foot brake.

3. Touch the ignition switch with the

Intelligent Key as illustrated. (A chime

will sound.)

4. Push the ignition switch while depres-

sing the brake pedal within 10 sec-

onds after the chime sounds. The

engine will start.

After step 3 is performed, when the

ignition switch is pushed without depres-

sing the brake pedal, the ignition switch

position will change to ACC.

NOTE:

. When the ignition switch is pushed

to the ON position or the engine is

started by the above procedures, the

“Key Battery Low” warning appears

(on the Vehicle information display)

even if the Intelligent Key is inside

the vehicle. This is not a malfunction.

To turn off the warning, touch the

ignition switch with the Intelligent

Key again.

. If the “Key Battery Low” warning

appears (on the Vehicle information

display), replace the battery as soon

as possible. (See “Intelligent Key

battery replacement” (P.8-23).)

. Make sure the area around the vehicle

is clear.

. Check fluid levels such as engine oil,

coolant, brake fluid, and window

washer fluid as frequently as possible,

or at least whenever you refuel.

. Check that all windows and lights are

clean.

. Visually inspect tires for their appear-

ance and condition. Also check tires

for proper inflation.

. Lock all doors.

. Position seat and adjust head re-

straints.

. Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

. Fasten seat belts and ask all passen-

gers to do likewise.

. Check the operation of warning lights

when the ignition switch is placed in

the ON position. (See “Warning lights,

indicator lights and audible remin-

ders” (P.2-10).)

Starting and driving 5-17

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

5-18 Starting and driving

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) model:

Move the shift lever to the P (Park) or N

(Neutral) position. (P is recommended.)

The starter is designed so that it does

not operate unless the shift lever is in

either of the above positions.

Manual Transmission (MT) model:

Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)

position, and depress the clutch pedal

to the floor while starting the engine.

3. Crank the engine with your foot off

the accelerator pedal by turning the

ignition switch to START. Release the

switch when the engine starts. If the

engine starts, but fails to run, repeat

the above procedure.

If the engine is very hard to start in

extremely cold weather or when

restarting, depress the accelerator

pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to

the floor) and hold it and then

crank the engine. Release the ac-

celerator pedal when the engine

starts.

If the engine is very hard to start

because it is flooded, depress the

accelerator pedal all the way to the

floor and hold it. Crank the engine

for 5 - 6 seconds. After cranking the

engine, release the accelerator

pedal. Crank the engine with your

foot off the accelerator pedal by

turning the ignition switch to

START. Release the ignition switch

when the engine starts. If the

engine starts, but fails to run, re-

peat the above procedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more

than 15 seconds at a time. If the

engine does not start, turn the igni-

tion switch off and wait 10 seconds

before cranking again, otherwise the

starter could be damaged.

Do not turn the ignition switch to the

START position unless the engine

and starter have stopped moving.

Attempting to start the engine while

the engine or starter is moving may

cause damage.

4. Warm-up

Allow the engine to idle for at least 30

seconds after starting. Do not race the

engine while warming it up. Drive at

moderate speed for a short distance

first, especially in cold weather. In cold

weather, keep the engine running for

a minimum of 2 - 3 minutes before

shutting it off. Starting and stopping

the engine over a short period of time

may make the vehicle more difficult to

start.

5. To stop the engine, shift the shift lever

to the P (Park) position (CVT model) or

N (Neutral) position (MT model) and

turn the ignition switch to the OFF

position.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery dis-

charge and potential no-start condi-

tions such as:

1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume

battery power when the engine is

not running (Phone chargers, GPS,

DVD players, etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/

or only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to

be charged to maintain battery health.

STARTING THE ENGINE (model

without Intelligent Key system)

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) model:

Move the shift lever to the P (Park) or N

(Neutral) position. (P is recommended.)

The starter is designed not to operate

unless the shift lever is in either of the

above positions.

Manual Transmission (MT) model:

Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)

position. Depress the clutch pedal fully

to the floor.

The starter is designed not to operate

unless the clutch pedal is fully de-

pressed.

The Intelligent Key must be carried

when operating the ignition switch.

3. Push the ignition switch to the ON

position. Depress the brake pedal (CVT

models) or the clutch pedal (MT mod-

els) and push the ignition switch to

start the engine.

To start the engine immediately, push

and release the ignition switch while

depressing the brake pedal (CVT mod-

els) or the clutch pedal (MT models)

with the ignition switch in any posi-

tion.

If the engine is very hard to start in

extremely cold weather or when

restarting, depress the accelerator

pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to

the floor) and while holding, crank

the engine. Release the accelerator

pedal when the engine starts.

If the engine is very hard to start

because it is flooded, depress the

accelerator pedal all the way to the

floor and hold it. Push the ignition

switch to the ON position to start

cranking the engine. After 5 or 6

seconds, stop cranking by pushing

the ignition switch to OFF. After

cranking the engine, release the

accelerator pedal. Crank the engine

with your foot off the accelerator

pedal by depressing the brake

pedal and pushing the push-button

ignition switch to start the engine.

If the engine starts, but fails to run,

repeat the above procedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more

than 15 seconds at a time. If the

engine does not start, push the

ignition switch to OFF and wait 10

seconds before cranking again,

otherwise the starter could be da-

maged.

4. Warm-up

Allow the engine to idle for at least 30

seconds after starting. Do not race the

engine while warming it up. Drive at

moderate speed for a short distance

first, especially in cold weather. In cold

weather, keep the engine running for

a minimum of 2 - 3 minutes before

shutting it off. Starting and stopping

the engine over a short period of time

may make the vehicle more difficult to

start.

When racing the engine up to 4,000

rpm or more under no load condition,

the engine will enter the fuel cut

mode.

5. To stop the engine, move the shift

lever to the P (Park) position (CVT

models) or move the shift lever to

the N (Neutral) position (MT models),

and push the ignition switch to the

OFF position.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery dis-

charge and potential no-start condi-

tions such as:

1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume

battery power when the engine is

not running (Phone chargers, GPS,

DVD players, etc.)

Starting and driving 5-19

STARTING THE ENGINE (model

with Intelligent Key system)

5-20 Starting and driving

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/

or only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to

be charged to maintain battery health.

REMOTE ENGINE START (if so

equipped)

Vehicles started with the remote engine

start function require the ignition switch

to be placed in the ON position before the

shift lever can be moved from the P (Park)

position. To place the ignition switch in

the ON position, perform the following

steps:

1. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is

carried with you.

2. Depress the brake pedal.

3. Push the ignition switch once to the

ON position.

For additional information about the

remote engine start function, see “Re-

mote engine start” (P.3-23).

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANS-

MISSION (CVT)

The Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) in your vehicle is electronically

controlled to produce maximum power

and smooth operation.

The recommended operating procedures

for this transmission are shown on the

following pages. Follow these procedures

for maximum vehicle performance and

driving enjoyment.

Engine power may be automatically

reduced to protect the CVT if the engine

speed increases quickly when driving

on slippery roads or while being tested

on some dynamometers.

Starting the vehicle

1. After starting the engine, fully depress

the foot brake pedal before moving

the shift lever out of the P (Park)

position.

This CVT is designed so that the foot

brake pedal must be depressed

before shifting from P (Park) to any

driving position while the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

The shift lever cannot be moved out

of the P (Park) position and into any

of the other positions if the ignition

switch is placed in the LOCK or OFF

position.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed

and move the shift lever to a driving

position.

3. Release the parking brake and foot

brake pedal, and then gradually start

the vehicle in motion.

WARNING

. Do not depress the accelerator

pedal while shifting from P (Park)

or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D

(Drive), or manual shift mode. Al-

ways depress the brake pedal

until shifting is completed. Failure

to do so could cause you to lose

control and have an accident.

. Cold engine idle speed is high, so

use caution when shifting into a

forward or reverse gear before

the engine has warmed up.

. Never shift to either the P (Park)

or R (Reverse) position while ve-

hicle is moving forward and P

(Park) or D (Drive) while the vehi-

cle is reversing. This could cause

an accident or damage the trans-

mission.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

. Do not downshift abruptly on

slippery roads. This may cause a

loss of control.

CAUTION

. To avoid possible damage to your

vehicle; when stopping the vehi-

cle on an uphill grade, do not hold

the vehicle by depressing the

accelerator pedal. The foot brake

should be used for this purpose.

. Except in an emergency, do not

shift to the N (Neutral) position

while driving. Coasting with the

transmission in the N (Neutral)

position may cause serious da-

mage to the transmission.

JVS1025X

Shifting

To move the shift lever,

Push the button

while depressing

the brake pedal.

Push the button

Just move the shift lever.

After starting the engine, fully depress the

brake pedal, push the shift lever button

and move the shift lever from the P (Park)

position to any of the desired shift posi-

tions.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the shift

lever is in any position while the

engine is not running. Failure to do

so could cause the vehicle to move

unexpectedly or roll away and result

in serious personal injury or property

damage.

CAUTION

Use the P (Park) or R (Reverse) posi-

tion only when the vehicle is com-

pletely stopped.

If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

or ACC position for any reason while the

shift lever is in any positions other than

the P (Park), the ignition switch cannot be

placed in the LOCK position.

If the ignition switch cannot be placed in

the LOCK position, perform the following

steps:

1. Apply the parking brake when the

vehicle is stopped.

2. Place the ignition switch in the ON

position while depressing the foot

Starting and driving 5-21

5-22 Starting and driving

brake pedal.

3. Move the shift lever to the P (Park)

position.

4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK

position.

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage,

move the shift lever to the P (Park)

or R (Reverse) position only when the

vehicle is completely stopped.

P (Park):

Use this position when the vehicle is

parked or when starting the engine. Make

sure the vehicle is completely stopped.

The brake pedal must be depressed and

the shift lever button pushed in to move

the shift lever from N (Neutral) or any

drive position to P (Park). Apply the

parking brake. When parking on a hill,

apply the parking brake first, then move

the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

R (Reverse):

Use this position to back up. Make sure

the vehicle is completely stopped before

selecting the R (Reverse) position. The

brake pedal must be depressed and the

shift lever button pushed in to move the

shift lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or

any driving position to R (Reverse).

N (Neutral):

Neither forward nor reverse gear is en-

gaged. The engine can be started in this

position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and

restart a stalled engine while the vehicle

is moving.

D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forward

driving.

Manual shift mode

When the shift lever is shifted from the D

(Drive) position to the manual shift gate,

the transmission enters the manual shift

mode. Shift ranges can be selected

manually by moving the shift lever up or

down.

In the manual shift mode, the shift range

is displayed on the position indicator in

the meter.

Shift ranges up or down one by one as

follows:

/// / / /

. When shifting up, move the shift lever

to the + (up) side. The transmission

shifts to a higher range.

. When shifting down, move the shift

lever to the − (down) side. The trans-

mission shifts to a lower range.

. Moving the shift lever to the same side

twice will shift the ranges in succes-

sion. However, if this motion is rapidly

done, the second shifting may not be

completed properly.

. When canceling the manual shift

mode, return the shift lever to the D

(Drive) position. The transmission re-

turns to the normal driving mode.

M8 (8th):

Use this position for all normal forward

driving.

However, you need to shift down the

gears manually when accelerating or

passing another vehicle.

M7 (7th), M6 (6th) and M5 (5th):

Use these positions when driving up long

slopes, or for engine braking when driving

down long slopes.

M4 (4th), M3 (3rd) and M2 (2nd) :

Use these positions for hill climbing or

engine braking on downhill grades.

M1 (1st):

Use this position when climbing steep

hills slowly or driving slowly through deep

snow, sand or mud, or for maximum

engine braking on steep downhill grades.

. Remember not to drive at high speeds

for extended periods of time in lower

than M7 range. This reduces fuel

economy.

. In the manual shift mode, the trans-

mission may not shift to the se-

lected range. This helps maintain

driving performance and reduces

the chance of vehicle damage or

loss of control.

. In the manual shift mode, the trans-

mission automatically shifts down

to 1st gear before the vehicle comes

to a stop. When accelerating again, it

is necessary to shift up to the

desired range.

. When the CVT fluid temperature is

extremely low, the manual shift mode

may not work and automatically shift

as a drive mode. This is not a mal-

function. In this case, return the shift

lever to the D (Drive) position and drive

for a while and then shift to the

manual shift mode.

. When the CVT fluid temperature is

high, the shift range may upshift at a

lower engine speed than usual. This is

not a malfunction.

Accelerator downshift — In D posi-

tion —

For passing or hill climbing, fully depress

the accelerator pedal to the floor. This

shifts the transmission down into a lower

gear, depending on the vehicle speed.

High fluid temperature protection

mode

This transmission has a high fluid tem-

perature protection mode. If the fluid

temperature becomes too high (for ex-

ample, when climbing steep grades in

high temperature with heavy loads), en-

gine power and, under some conditions,

vehicle speed will be decreased automa-

tically to reduce the chance of transmis-

sion damage. Vehicle speed can be

controlled with the accelerator pedal,

but the engine and vehicle speed may

be limited.

Fail-safe

If the vehicle is driven under extreme

conditions, such as excessive wheel

spinning and subsequent hard braking,

the fail-safe system may be activated.

The MIL may illuminate to indicate the

fail-safe mode is activated. (See “Mal-

function Indicator Light (MIL)” (P.2-16).)

This will occur even if all electrical

circuits are functioning properly. In this

case, place the ignition switch in the

OFF position and wait for 10 seconds.

Then turn the switch back to the ON

position. The vehicle should return to its

normal operating condition. If it does

not return to its normal operating con-

dition, have the transmission checked

and repaired, if necessary. It is recom-

mended you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

WARNING

When the high fluid temperature

protection mode or fail-safe opera-

tion occurs, vehicle speed may be

gradually reduced. The reduced

speed may be lower than other

traffic, which could increase the

chance of a collision. Be especially

careful when driving. If necessary,

pull to the side of the road at a safe

place and allow the transmission to

return to normal operation, or have it

repaired if necessary.

Starting and driving 5-23

5-24 Starting and driving

Adaptive Shift Control (ASC)

The Adaptive Shift Control automatically

operates when the transmission is in the

“D” (Drive) position and selects an appro-

priate gear depending on the road con-

ditions such as uphill or downhill.

Control on uphill and curving roads:

A low gear is maintained that suits the

degree of the slope to allow smooth

driving with a small number of shifts.

Control on downhill roads:

The Adaptive Shift Control shifts to a low

gear that suits the degree of the slope

when the accelerator pedal is depressed,

and uses the engine braking to help

driving in the downhill.

Control on winding roads:

A low gear is maintained on continuous

curves that involve repeated acceleration

and deceleration, so that smooth accel-

eration is available instantly when the

accelerator pedal is depressed.

NOTE:

. Adaptive Shift Control may not op-

erate when the transmission oil

temperature is low immediately

after the start of driving or when it

is very hot.

. During some driving situations, hard

braking for example, the Adaptive

Shift Control may automatically op-

erate. The transmission may auto-

matically shift to a lower gear for

engine braking. This increases en-

gine speed but not vehicle speed.

Vehicle speed is controlled by the

accelerator pedal when the vehicle

is in the Adaptive Shift Control

mode.

. When the Adaptive Shift Control

operates, the transmission some-

times maintains a lower gear for a

longer period of time than when

Adaptive Shift Control is not operat-

ing. Engine speed will be higher for a

specific vehicle speed while Adap-

tive Shift Control is operating than

when Adaptive Shift Control is not

operating.

JVS0392X

Shift lock release

If the battery charge is low or discharged,

the shift lever may not be moved from the

P (Park) position even with the brake

pedal depressed and the shift lever but-

ton pushed.

To move the shift lever, perform the

following procedure:

1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or

LOCK position.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Remove the shift lock release cover

(shown in the illustration above) using

a suitable tool.

4. Insert the mechanical key and push

down the shift lock release.

5. Push the shift lever button and move

the shift lever to the N (Neutral)

position while holding down the shift

lock release.

Place the ignition switch in the ON posi-

tion. The vehicle may be moved to the

desired location.

Replace the removed shift lock release

cover after the operation.

If the shift lever cannot be moved out of

the P (Park) position, have the CVT system

checked as soon as possible. It is recom-

mended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

WARNING

If the shift lever cannot be moved

from the P (Park) position while the

engine is running and the brake

pedal is depressed, the stop lights

may not work. Malfunctioning stop

lights could cause an accident injur-

ing yourself and others.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION (MT)

WARNING

. Do not downshift abruptly on

slippery roads. This may cause a

loss of control.

. Do not over-rev the engine when

shifting to a lower gear. This may

cause a loss of control or engine

damage.

. When the high fluid temperature

protection mode or fail-safe op-

eration occurs, vehicle speed may

be gradually reduced. The re-

duced speed may be lower than

other traffic, which could increase

the chance of a collision. Be

especially careful when driving. If

necessary, pull to the side of the

road at a safe place and allow the

transmission to return to normal

operation, or have it repaired if

necessary.

CAUTION

. Do not rest your foot on the

clutch pedal while driving. This

may damage the clutch.

. Fully depress the clutch pedal

before shifting to help prevent

transmission damage.

. Stop your vehicle completely be-

fore shifting into R (Reverse).

. When the vehicle is stopped for a

period of time, for example at a

stop light, shift to N (Neutral) and

release the clutch pedal with the

foot brake applied.

Starting and driving 5-25

5-26 Starting and driving

SSD0552

Shifting

To change gears, or when upshifting or

downshifting, fully depress the clutch

pedal, shift into the appropriate gear,

then slowly and smoothly release the

clutch pedal.

To ensure smooth gear changes, be sure

to fully depress the clutch pedal before

operating the shift lever. If the clutch

pedal is not fully depressed before the

transmission is shifted, a gear noise may

be heard. Transmission damage could

occur.

Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to

2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th gear in

sequence according to vehicle speed.

To back up, pull the shift lever ring

upward and then move it to the R

(Reverse) gear after stopping the vehicle

completely.

The shift lever ring returns to its original

position when the shift lever is moved to

the N (Neutral) position.

If it is difficult to move the shift lever into

the R (Reverse) or 1st gear, shift to the N

(Neutral) position, and then release the

clutch pedal once. Fully depress the

clutch pedal again and shift into the R

(Reverse) or 1st gear.

Suggested maximum speed in

each gear

Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is

not running smoothly, or if you need to

accelerate.

Do not exceed the maximum suggested

speed (shown below) in any gear. For level

road driving, use the highest gear sug-

gested for that speed. Always observe

posted speed limits, and drive according

to the road conditions, which will ensure

safe operation. Do not over-rev the en-

gine when shifting to a lower gear as it

may cause engine damage or loss of

vehicle control.

Gear

MPH (km/h)

1st

28 (46)

2nd

50 (81)

3rd

70 (112)

4th

90 (145)

5th

—

6th

—

WARNING

. Never drive the vehicle with the

parking brake applied. The brake

will overheat and fail to operate

and will lead to an accident.

. Never release the parking brake

from outside the vehicle. If the

vehicle moves, it will be impossi-

ble to push the foot brake pedal

and will lead to an accident.

. Never use the shift lever in place

of the parking brake. When park-

ing, be sure the parking brake is

fully applied.

. To help avoid risk of injury or

death through unintended opera-

tion of the vehicle and/or its

systems, do not leave children,

people who require the assis-

tance of others or pets unat-

tended in your vehicle.

Additionally, the temperature in-

side a closed vehicle on a warm

day can quickly become high

enough to cause a significant risk

of injury or death to people and

pets.

SPA2331

PEDAL TYPE

To apply the parking brake, firmly depress

the parking brake pedal

To release the parking brake, depress and

hold the foot brake

and then fully

depress and release the parking brake

pedal

Before driving, be sure that the brake

warning light has turned off.

JVP0498X

SWITCH TYPE (models with elec-

tronic parking brake system)

The electronic parking brake can be

applied or released automatically or by

operating the parking brake switch.

Automatic operation

With the vehicle stationary, the electronic

parking brake is automatically applied

when the engine is turned off with the

ignition switch.

For the model with the automatic brake

hold function, the electronic parking

brake will apply automatically if the igni-

tion switch is placed in the “OFF” position

when the brake force is maintained by

Starting and driving 5-27

PARKING BRAKE

5-28 Starting and driving

automatic brake hold function.

The electronic parking brake is automati-

cally released as soon as the vehicle

starts while the accelerator pedal is

depressed.

WARNING

. The electronic parking brake will

not be automatically applied

when the engine is stopped with-

out using the ignition switch (for

example, by engine stalling).

Without the vehicle stationary,

the electronic parking brake will

not be automatically applied

even if the engine is turned off

with the ignition switch.

. Before leaving the vehicle, move

the shift lever to the 1 (1st) or R

(Reverse) position and check that

the electronic parking brake in-

dicator light is illuminated to

confirm that the electronic park-

ing brake is applied. The electro-

nic parking brake indicator light

will remain on for a period of time

after the driver’s door is locked.

CAUTION

When parking in an area where the

outside temperature is below 32°F

(0°C), do not apply the parking brake

to prevent it from freezing.

For safe parking, place the shift lever

in the 1 (1st) or R (Reverse) position

and securely block the wheels.

NOTE:

. To keep the electronic parking brake

released after the engine is turned

off, place the ignition switch in the

OFF position, depress the brake

pedal and push down the parking

brake switch before opening the

driver’s door.

. If a malfunction occurs in the elec-

tronic parking brake system (for

example, due to battery discharge),

it is recommended to contact a

NISSAN dealer.

. If the shift lever is moved to the P

(Park) position when the brake force

is maintained by the automatic

brake hold function, the electronic

parking brake will apply automati-

cally.

. If the driver’s seat belt is unfastened

when the brake force is maintained

by the automatic brake hold func-

tion, the electronic parking brake

will apply automatically.

. If the ignition switch is placed in the

OFF position when the brake force is

maintained by the automatic brake

hold function, the electronic parking

brake will apply automatically.

Manual operation

The electronic parking brake will not be

automatically applied if the engine is

stopped without using the ignition switch

(for example, by engine stalling). In such a

case, you have to apply the parking brake

manually.

To apply: Pull the switch up

. The

indicator light

will illuminate.

To release: With the ignition switch in the

ON position, depress the brake pedal and

push the switch down

. The indicator

light

will turn off.

Before driving, check that the electronic

parking brake indicator light

goes

out. For additional information, see

“Warning lights, indicator lights and audi-

ble reminders” (P.2-10).

NOTE:

. A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is

driven without releasing the parking

brake. See “Audible reminders” (P.2-

18).

. While the electronic parking brake is

applied or released, an operating

sound is heard from the lower side

of the rear seat. This is normal and

does not indicate a malfunction.

. When the electronic parking brake is

frequently applied and released in a

short period of time, the parking

brake may not operate in order to

prevent the parking brake system

from overheating. If this occurs,

operate the electronic parking brake

switch again after waiting approxi-

mately 1 minute.

. If the electronic parking brake must

be applied while driving in an emer-

gency, pull up and hold the parking

brake switch. When you release the

parking brake switch, the parking

brake will be released.

. While pulling up the electronic park-

ing brake switch during driving, the

parking brake is applied and a chime

sounds. The electronic parking

brake indicator light in the meter

and in the parking brake switch

illuminate. This does not indicate a

malfunction. The electronic parking

brake indicator light in the meter

and in the parking brake switch turn

off when the parking brake is re-

leased.

. When pulling the electronic parking

brake switch up with the ignition

switch in the OFF or ACC position,

the parking brake switch indicator

light will continue to illuminate for a

short period of time.

The automatic brake hold function main-

tains the braking force without the driver

having to depress the brake pedal when

the vehicle is stopped at a traffic light or

intersection. As soon as the driver de-

presses the accelerator pedal again, the

automatic brake hold function is deacti-

vated and the braking force is released.

The operating status of the automatic

brake hold can be displayed on the

vehicle information display.

WARNING

. The automatic brake hold func-

tion is not designed to hold the

vehicle on a steep hill or slippery

road. Never use the automatic

brake hold when the vehicle is

stopped on a steep hill or slippery

road. Failure to do so may cause

the vehicle to move.

. When the automatic brake hold

function is activated but fails to

maintain the vehicle at a stand-

still, depress the brake pedal to

stop the vehicle. If the vehicle

unexpectedly moves due to out-

side conditions, the chime may

sound and automatic brake hold

warning may illuminate in the

vehicle information display.

Starting and driving 5-29

AUTOMATIC BRAKE HOLD (if so equipped)

5-30 Starting and driving

. Be sure to deactivate the auto-

matic brake hold function when

using a car wash or towing your

vehicle.

. Make sure to place the shift lever

in the P (Park) position and apply

the parking brake when parking

your vehicle, riding on or off the

vehicle, or loading luggage. Fail-

ure to do so could cause the

vehicle to move or roll away

unexpectedly and result in ser-

ious personal injury or property

damage.

. If any of the following conditions

occur, the automatic brake hold

function may not function. Have

the system checked promptly. It

is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

Failure to operate the vehicle in

accordance with these conditions

could cause the vehicle to move

or roll away unexpectedly and

result in serious personal injury

or property damage.

— A warning message appears

in the vehicle information dis-

play.

— The indicator light on the

automatic brake hold switch

does not illuminate when the

switch is pushed.

. The automatic brake hold func-

tion will not be activated if the

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

OFF indicator light, electronic

parking brake warning light or

master warning light illuminate

and the Chassis Control System

Error message appears in the

vehicle information display.

. To maintain the braking force to

keep the vehicle to a standstill, a

noise may be heard. This is not a

malfunction.

JVP0497X

HOW TO ACTIVATE/DEACTIVATE

THE AUTOMATIC BRAKE HOLD

FUNCTION

How to activate the automatic

brake hold function

1. With the ignition switch in the ON

position, push the automatic brake

hold switch

. The indicator light on

the automatic brake hold switch

illuminates.

2. When the automatic brake hold func-

tion goes into standby, the automatic

brake hold indicator light (white) illu-

minates.

To use the automatic brake hold function,

the following conditions need to be met.

. The driver’s seat belt is fastened.

. The electronic parking brake is re-

leased.

. The shift lever is not in the P (Park)

position.

. The vehicle is not parked on a steep

hill.

NOTE:

The automatic brake hold function re-

sets to OFF every time the ignition

switch is switched from the OFF posi-

tion to the ON position.

How to deactivate the automatic

brake hold function

While the automatic brake hold function

is activated, push the automatic brake

hold switch to turn off the automatic

brake hold indicator light and deactivate

the automatic brake hold function. To

deactivate the automatic brake hold

function while the brake force has been

maintained by the automatic brake hold

function, depress the brake pedal and

push the automatic brake hold switch.

WARNING

Make sure to firmly depress and hold

the brake pedal when turning off the

automatic brake hold function while

the brake force is applied. When the

automatic brake hold function is

deactivated, the brake force will be

released. This could cause the vehi-

cle to move or roll away unexpect-

edly.

Failure to prevent the vehicle from

rolling may result in serious personal

injury or property damage.

HOW TO USE THE AUTOMATIC

BRAKE HOLD FUNCTION

For additional information on using the

automatic brake hold function, refer to

the instructions outlined in this section.

To maintain braking force auto-

matically

With the automatic brake hold function

activated and the automatic brake hold

indicator light (white) illuminated on the

meter, depress the braking pedal to stop

the vehicle. The brake force is automati-

cally applied without your foot depressed

on the brake pedal. While the brake hold is

maintained, the automatic brake hold

indicator light (green) illuminates on the

meter.

To start the vehicle from a stand-

still

With the shift lever not in the P (Park) or N

(Neutral) position, depress the accelerator

pedal while the brake force is maintained.

The brake force will automatically be

released to restart the vehicle. The auto-

matic brake hold indicator light (white) on

the meter illuminates and the automatic

brake hold returns to standby.

Parking

When the shift lever is in the P (Park)

position with the brake force maintained

by the automatic brake hold function, the

parking brake will automatically be ap-

plied and the brake force of the auto-

matic brake hold will be released. The

automatic brake hold indicator light turns

off. When the parking brake is applied

with the brake force maintained by the

automatic brake hold function, the brake

force of the automatic brake hold will be

released. The automatic brake hold in-

dicator light turns off.

NOTE:

. Under the following conditions, the

parking brake will automatically be

Starting and driving 5-31

5-32 Starting and driving

applied and the brake force of the

automatic brake hold will be re-

leased:

— The braking force is applied by

the automatic brake hold function

for 3 minutes or longer.

— The driver’s seat belt is unfas-

tened.

— The ignition switch is placed in

the OFF position.

— If a malfunction occurs in the

automatic brake hold function.

. When the vehicle stops, but the

brake force is not automatically

applied, depress the brake pedal

firmly until the automatic brake hold

indicator light (green) illuminates.

Automatic brake hold function dis-

play

The automatic brake hold function status

can be checked in the “Chassis Control”

mode in the vehicle information display.

For additional information, see “Trip com-

puter” (P.2-40).

WAF0037X

The SPORT mode switch adjusts the

engine and transmission points to en-

hance performance. Push the SPORT

mode switch on the instrument panel to

activate the SPORT mode. The SPORT

mode indicator (drive mode indicator)

appears in the vehicle information dis-

play.

NOTE:

In the SPORT mode, fuel economy may

be reduced.

JVS0185X

The ECO mode system helps to enhance

the fuel economy by controlling the

engine and CVT operation (for CVT mod-

els) automatically to avoid rapid accelera-

tion.

To turn on the ECO mode system, push

the ECO switch. The ECO mode indicator

appears on the meter.

To turn off the ECO mode, push the ECO

switch again. The ECO mode indicator will

turn off.

. The ECO mode system cannot be

turned off while the accelerator pedal

is depressed even if the ECO switch is

pushed to OFF. Release the accelera-

tor pedal to turn off the ECO mode

SPORT MODE SWITCH (if so equipped)

ECO MODE SYSTEM

system.

. The ECO mode system will turn off

automatically if a malfunction occurs

in the system.

. Turn off the ECO mode system when

acceleration is required such as when:

— driving with a heavy load of pas-

sengers or cargo in the vehicle

— driving on a steep uphill slope

WAF0142X

ECO PEDAL GUIDE FUNCTION

Use the ECO Pedal Guide function for

improving fuel economy.

When the ECO Pedal Guide bar is in the

green range

, it indicates that the

vehicle is driven within range of economy

drive.

If the ECO Pedal Guide bar is out of the

green range, it indicates that the accel-

erator pedal is depressed over the range

of economy drive.

The ECO Pedal Guide bar is not displayed

when:

. The cruise control system (if so

equipped) is operating.

. The Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

system (if so equipped) is operating.

. The vehicle speed is less than approxi-

mately 2 MPH (4 km/h).

. The shift lever is in the P (Park) (CVT

model), N (Neutral) or R (Reverse)

position.

To activate or deactivate the ECO Pedal

Guide function, see “Settings” (P.2-21).

Starting and driving 5-33

5-34 Starting and driving

WAF0143X

AMBIENT ECO

The ambient ECO is displayed accord-

ing to the accelerator pedal operation,

while driving the vehicle in ECO mode.

The ambient ECO will illuminate in the

directions of

as the driving pattern

becomes more ECO friendly.

To activate or deactivate the ambient

ECO, see “Settings” (P.2-21).

The ambient ECO is not displayed in the

following conditions

. The vehicle speed is under 6 MPH (10

km/h).

. The shift lever is in the P (Park) (CVT

model), N (Neutral) or R (Reverse)

position.

. The cruise control system (if so

equipped) is operating.

. The Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

system (if so equipped) is operating.

JVS1083X

ECO DRIVE REPORT

When the ignition switch is in the OFF

position, ECO management display ap-

pears.

ECO evaluation

Previous 5 times (History)

Current fuel economy

Best fuel economy

The result of ECO evaluation is displayed

when the vehicle is driven for about 10

minutes or more.

: The more economically you drive, the

appear.

: The average fuel economy for the

previous 5 times will be displayed.

: The average fuel economy since the

last reset will be displayed.

: The best fuel economy of the past

history will be displayed.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use of the

LDW system could result in serious

injury or death.

. This system is only a warning

device to inform the driver of a

potential unintended lane depar-

ture. It will not steer the vehicle or

prevent loss of control. It is the

driver’s responsibility to stay

alert, drive safely, keep the vehi-

cle in the traveling lane, and be in

control of the vehicle at all times.

WAC0198X

The LDW system warns the driver with an

indicator on the vehicle information dis-

play and chime that the vehicle is begin-

ning to leave the driving lane.

The LDW system monitors the lane mar-

kers on the traveling lane using the

camera unit

located above the inside

mirror.

Starting and driving 5-35

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)

5-36 Starting and driving

JVS1087X

LDW indicator (on the vehicle information

display)

Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left

side)

Vehicle information display

LDW SYSTEM OPERATION

The LDW system operates at speeds of

approximately 37 MPH (60 km/h) and

above and when the lane markings are

clear. When the vehicle approaches either

the left or the right side of the traveling

lane, a warning chime will sound and the

LDW indicator on the vehicle information

display will blink to alert the driver.

The warning function will stop when the

vehicle returns inside of the lane markers.

JVS1088X

Vehicle information display

Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left

side)

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE LDW

SYSTEM

Perform the following steps to enable or

disable the LDW system.

1. Press the

button until “Set-

tings” appears in the vehicle informa-

tion display and then press “OK”

button. Use the

button to select

“Driver Assistance”. Then press the

“OK” button.

2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the “OK”

button.

3. Use the

buttons to navigate in the

menu and use the “OK” button to

select or change an item:

Select “Lane (LDW)” and press the

“OK” button.

Use the “OK” button to check/

uncheck the box for “Warning”.

NOTE:

If you disable the LDW system, the

system will remain disabled the next

time you start the vehicle’s engine.

LDW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limita-

tions for the LDW system. Failure to

follow the warnings and instructions

for proper use of the LDW system

could result in serious injury or

death.

. The system will not operate at

speeds below approximately 37

MPH (60 km/h) or if it cannot

detect lane markers.

Starting and driving 5-37

5-38 Starting and driving

. Excessive noise will interfere with

the warning chime sound, and

the chime may not be heard.

. Do not use the LDW system under

the following conditions as it may

not function properly:

— During bad weather (rain, fog,

snow, etc.).

— When driving on slippery

roads, such as on ice or snow.

— When driving on winding or

uneven roads.

— When there is a lane closure

due to road repairs.

— When driving in a makeshift or

temporary lane.

— When driving on roads where

the lane width is too narrow.

— When driving without normal

tire conditions (for example,

tire wear, low tire pressure,

installation of spare tire (if so

equipped), tire chains, non-

standard wheels).

— When the vehicle is equipped

with non-original brake parts

or suspension parts.

. The system may not function

properly under the following con-

ditions:

— On roads where there are

multiple parallel lane markers;

lane markers that are faded or

not painted clearly; yellow

painted lane markers; non-

standard lane markers; or

lane markers covered with

water, dirt, snow, etc.

— On roads where discontinued

lane markers are still detect-

able.

— On roads where there are

sharp curves.

— On roads where there are

sharply contrasting objects,

such as shadows, snow,

water, wheel ruts, seams or

lines remaining after road re-

pairs. (The LDW system could

detect these items as lane

markers.)

— On roads where the traveling

lane merges or separates.

— When the vehicle’s traveling

direction does not align with

the lane marker.

— When traveling close to the

vehicle in front of you, which

obstructs the lane camera

unit detection range.

— When rain, snow, dirt or object

adheres to the windshield in

front of the lane camera unit.

— When the headlights are not

bright due to dirt on the lens

or if the aiming is not adjusted

properly.

— When strong light enters the

lane camera unit. (For exam-

ple, the light directly shines on

the front of the vehicle at

sunrise or sunset.)

— When a sudden change in

brightness occurs. (For exam-

ple, when the vehicle enters or

exits a tunnel or under a

bridge.)

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAIL-

ABLE

Condition A:

If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight

under high temperature conditions (over

approximately 104°F (40°C)) and then

started, the LDW system may be deacti-

vated automatically, the LDW indicator

will flash and the following message will

appear in the vehicle information display.

- “Unavailable: High Cabin Temperature”

When the interior temperature is reduced,

the LDW system will resume operating

automatically and the LDW indicator will

stop flashing.

Condition B:

The warning function of the LDW system

is not designed to work under the follow-

ing conditions:

. When you operate the lane change

signal and change traveling lanes in

the direction of the signal. (The LDW

system will become operable again

approximately 2 seconds after the

lane change signal is turned off.)

. When the vehicle speed lowers to less

than approximately 37 MPH (60 km/h).

Action to take:

After the above conditions have finished

and the necessary operating conditions

are satisfied, the LDW system will resume.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

If the LDW system malfunctions, it will

cancel automatically and “Malfunction”

will appear in the vehicle information

display. If the warning message appears

in the vehicle information display, pull off

the road to a safe location and stop the

vehicle. Place the ignition switch in the

OFF position and restart the engine. If the

warning message continues to appear in

the vehicle information display, have the

system checked. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WAC0198X

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The camera unit for the LDW system is

located above the inside mirror.

To keep the proper operation of the LDW

system and prevent a system malfunc-

tion, be sure to observe the following:

. Always keep the windshield clean.

. Do not attach a sticker (including

transparent material) or install an

accessory near the camera unit.

. Do not place reflective materials, such

as white paper or a mirror, on the

instrument panel. The reflection of

sunlight may adversely affect the

camera unit’s capability of detecting

the lane markers.

Starting and driving 5-39

5-40 Starting and driving

. Do not strike or damage the areas

around the camera unit. Do not touch

the camera lens or remove the screw

located on the camera unit. If the

camera unit is damaged due to an

accident, it is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use of the I-LI

system could result in serious injury

or death.

. The I-LI system will not steer the

vehicle or prevent loss of control.

It is the driver’s responsibility to

stay alert, drive safely, keep the

vehicle in the traveling lane, and

be in control of the vehicle at all

times.

. The I-LI system is primarily in-

tended for use on well-developed

freeways or highways. It may not

detect the lane markers in certain

road, weather, or driving condi-

tions.

WAC0198X

The I-LI system warns the driver if the

vehicle has left the center of the traveling

lane with the I-LI indicator and chime, and

helps assist the driver to return the

vehicle to the center of the traveling lane

by applying the brakes to the left or right

wheels individually (for a short period of

time).

The I-LI system monitors the lane mar-

kers on the traveling lane using the

camera unit

located above the inside

mirror.

INTELLIGENT LANE INTERVENTION (I-LI)

WAF0078X

I-LI ON indicator (on the vehicle informa-

tion display)

I-LI indicator (on the vehicle information

display)

Vehicle information display

Dynamic driver assistance switch* (mod-

els without ProPILOT assist)

ProPILOT assist switch (models with Pro-

PILOT assist)

I-LI SYSTEM OPERATION

The I-LI system operates above approxi-

mately 37 MPH (60 km/h) and when the

lane markings are clear. When the vehicle

approaches either the left or the right

side of the traveling lane, a warning chime

will sound and the I-LI indicator (orange)

on the vehicle information display will

blink to alert the driver. Then, the I-LI

system will automatically apply the

brakes for a short period of time to help

assist the driver to return the vehicle to

the center of the traveling lane.

To turn on the I-LI system, push the

dynamic driver assistance switch (models

without ProPILOT assist) or the ProPILOT

assist switch (models with ProPILOT as-

sist) on the steering wheel after starting

the engine. The I-LI ON indicator on the

vehicle information display will illuminate.

Push the dynamic driver assistance

switch or the ProPILOT assist switch

again to turn off the I-LI system. The I-LI

ON indicator will turn off.

Starting and driving 5-41

5-42 Starting and driving

WAF0139X

Vehicle information display

Dynamic driver assistance switch* (mod-

els without ProPILOT assist)

ProPILOT assist switch (models with Pro-

PILOT assist)

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE I-LI

SYSTEM

Perform the following steps to enable or

disable the I-LI system.

For models with ProPILOT assist

1. Press the button until “Set-

tings” appears in the vehicle informa-

tion display and then press “OK”

button. Use the

button to select

“Driver Assistance.” Then press the

OK button.

2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the OK

button.

3. To set the I-LI system to on or off, use

the

buttons to navigate in the

menu and use the OK button to select

or change an item:

Select “Lane” and press the OK

button.

To turn on the I-LI system, use the

OK button to check the box for

“Prevention (LDP).”

4. Press the ProPILOT assist switch

(models with ProPILOT assist) to turn

the system on or off.

NOTE:

Turning on the ProPILOT assist system

(if so equipped) will turn on the I-LI

system at the same time. For additional

information, see “ProPILOT assist” (P.5-

64).

For models without ProPILOT assist

1. To turn on the I-LI system, push the

dynamic driver assistance switch on

the instrument panel after starting

the engine.

2. The I-LI ON indicator on the Vehicle

Information Display will appear.

3. Push the dynamic driver assistance

switch again to turn off the I-LI

system. The I-LI ON indicator on the

vehicle information display will turn

off. The I-LI system will be automati-

cally turned off when the engine off.

I-LI SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limita-

tions for the I-LI system. Failure to

follow the warnings and instructions

for proper use of the I-LI system

could result in serious injury or

death.

. The I-LI system may activate if

you change lanes without first

activating your turn signal or, for

example, if a construction zone

directs traffic to cross an existing

lane marker. If this occurs you

may need to apply corrective

steering to complete your lane

change.

. Because the I-LI may not activate

under the road, weather, and lane

marker conditions described in

this section, it may not activate

every time your vehicle begins to

leave its lane and you will need to

apply corrective steering.

. The I-LI system will not operate at

speeds below approximately 37

MPH (60 km/h) or if it cannot

detect lane markers.

. Do not use the I-LI system under

the following conditions as it may

not function properly:

— During bad weather (rain, fog,

snow, etc.).

— When driving on slippery

roads, such as on ice or snow.

— When driving on winding or

uneven roads.

— When there is a lane closure

due to road repairs.

— When driving in a makeshift or

temporary lane.

— When driving on roads where

the lane width is too narrow.

— When driving without normal

tire conditions (for example,

tire wear, low tire pressure,

installation of spare tire (if so

equipped), tire chains, non-

standard wheels).

— When the vehicle is equipped

with non-original brake parts

or suspension parts.

. The system may not function

properly under the following con-

ditions:

— On roads where there are

multiple parallel lane markers;

lane markers that are faded or

not painted clearly; yellow

painted lane markers; non-

standard lane markers; or

lane markers covered with

water, dirt, snow, etc.

— On roads where discontinued

lane markers are still detect-

able.

— On roads where there are

sharp curves.

— On roads where there are

sharply contrasting objects,

such as shadows, snow,

water, wheel ruts, seams or

lines remaining after road re-

Starting and driving 5-43

5-44 Starting and driving

pairs. (The I-LI system could

detect these items as lane

markers.)

— On roads where the traveling

lane merges or separates.

— When the vehicle’s traveling

direction does not align with

the lane marker.

— When traveling close to the

vehicle in front of you, which

obstructs the lane camera

unit detection range.

— When rain, snow or dirt ad-

heres to the windshield in

front of the lane camera unit.

— When the headlights are not

bright due to dirt on the lens

or if the aiming is not adjusted

properly.

— When strong light enters the

lane camera unit. (For exam-

ple, the light directly shines on

the front of the vehicle at

sunrise or sunset.)

— When a sudden change in

brightness occurs. (For exam-

ple, when the vehicle enters or

exits a tunnel or under a

bridge.)

. Excessive noise will interfere with

the warning chime sound, and

the chime may not be heard.

While the I-LI system is operating, you

may hear a sound of brake operation.

This is normal and indicates that the I-LI

system is operating properly.

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAIL-

ABLE

Condition A:

The warning and assist functions of the I-

LI system are not designed to work under

the following conditions:

. When you operate the lane change

signal and change the traveling lanes

in the direction of the signal. (The I-LI

system will be deactivated for ap-

proximately 2 seconds after the lane

change signal is turned off.)

. When the vehicle speed lowers to less

than approximately 37 MPH (60 km/h).

Action to take:

After the above conditions have finished

and the necessary operating conditions

are satisfied, the warning and assist

functions will resume.

Condition B:

The assist function of the I-LI system is

not designed to work under the following

conditions (warning is still functional):

. When the brake pedal is depressed.

. When the steering wheel is turned as

far as necessary for the vehicle to

change lanes.

. When the vehicle is accelerated during

the I-LI system operation.

. When the Intelligent Cruise Control

(ICC) approach warning occurs (if so

equipped).

. When the hazard warning flashers are

operated.

. When driving on a curve at high speed.

Action to take:

After the above conditions have finished

and the necessary operating conditions

are satisfied, the I-LI system application of

the brakes will resume.

Condition C:

If the following message appears in the

vehicle information display, a chime will

sound and the I-LI system will be turned

off automatically.

. "Currently unavailable":

When the VDC system (except Trac-

tion Control System (TCS) function) or

ABS operates or VDC system is turned

off.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer

exist, turn off the I-LI system. Push the

dynamic driver assistance switch (models

without ProPILOT assist) or the ProPILOT

assist switch (models with ProPILOT as-

sist) again to turn the I-LI system back on.

Temporary disabled status at high tem-

perature:

If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight

under high temperature conditions (over

approximately 104°F (40°C)) and then the

I-LI system is turned on, the I-LI system

may be deactivated automatically and

the following message will appear on

the vehicle information display: “Unavail-

able: High Cabin Temperature.” When the

interior temperature is reduced, the sys-

tem will resume operating automatically.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

If the I-LI system malfunctions, it will

cancel automatically. The I-LI indicator

(orange) will illuminate and the “Malfunc-

tion” warning message will appear in the

display.

If the I-LI indicator (orange) illuminates in

the display, pull off the road to a safe

location. Turn the engine off and restart

the engine. If the I-LI indicator (orange)

continues to illuminate, have the I-LI

system checked. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WAC0198X

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The camera unit for the I-LI system is

located above the inside mirror. To keep

the proper operation of the I-LI system

and prevent a system malfunction, be

sure to observe the following:

. Always keep the windshield clean.

. Do not attach a sticker (including

transparent material) or install an

accessory near the camera unit.

. Do not place reflective materials, such

as white paper or a mirror, on the

instrument panel. The reflection of

sunlight may adversely affect the

camera unit’s capability of detecting

the lane markers.

. Do not strike or damage the areas

around the camera unit. Do not touch

the camera lens or remove the screw

located on the camera unit. If the

camera unit is damaged due to an

accident, it is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer.

Starting and driving 5-45

5-46 Starting and driving

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use of the

BSW system could result in serious

injury or death.

. The BSW system is not a replace-

ment for proper driving proce-

dure and is not designed to

prevent contact with vehicles or

objects. When changing lanes, al-

ways use the side and rear mir-

rors and turn and look in the

direction your vehicle will move

to ensure it is safe to change

lanes. Never rely solely on the

BSW system.

The BSW system helps alert the driver of

other vehicles in adjacent lanes when

changing lanes.

JVS0649X

The BSW system uses radar sensors

installed near the rear bumper to detect

other vehicles in an adjacent lane.

SSD1030

Detection zone

The radar sensors can detect vehicles on

either side of your vehicle within the

detection zone shown as illustrated. This

detection zone starts from the outside

mirror of your vehicle and extends ap-

proximately 10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear

bumper, and approximately 10 ft (3.0 m)

sideways.

BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW)

WAF0079X

Side indicator light

Vehicle information display

Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left

side)

BSW SYSTEM OPERATION

The BSW system operates above approxi-

mately 20 MPH (32 km/h).

If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the

detection zone, the side indicator light

illuminates.

If the turn signal is then activated, the

system chimes (twice) and the side in-

dicator light flashes. The side indicator

light continues to flash until the detected

vehicle leaves the detection zone.

The side indicator light illuminates for a

few seconds when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position.

The brightness of the side indicator light

is adjusted automatically depending on

the brightness of the ambient light.

If a vehicle comes into the detection zone

after the driver activates the turn signal,

then only the side indicator light flashes

and no chime sounds. For additional

information, refer to “BSW driving situa-

tions” (P.5-49).

Starting and driving 5-47

5-48 Starting and driving

WAF0140X

Vehicle information display

Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left

side)

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE BSW

SYSTEM

Perform the following steps to enable or

disable the BSW system.

1. Press the

button until “Set-

tings” appears in the vehicle informa-

tion display and then press “OK”

button. Use the

button to select

“Driver Assistance”. Then press the

“OK” button.

2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the “OK”

button.

3. Use the

buttons to navigate in the

menu and use the “OK” button to

select or change an item.

Select “Blind Spot” and press the

“OK” button.

Use the “OK” button to check/

uncheck the box for “Warning.”

NOTE:

The system will retain current settings

in the vehicle information display even

if the engine is restarted.

BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limita-

tions for the BSW system. Failure to

operate the vehicle in accordance

with these system limitations could

result in serious injury or death.

. The BSW system cannot detect all

vehicles under all conditions.

. The radar sensors may not be

able to detect and activate BSW

when certain objects are present

such as:

— Pedestrians, bicycles, animals.

— Vehicles such as motorcycles,

low height vehicles, or high

ground clearance vehicles.

— Oncoming vehicles.

— Vehicles remaining in the de-

tection zone when you accel-

erate from a stop.

— A vehicle merging into an

adjacent lane at a speed ap-

proximately the same as your

vehicle.

— A vehicle approaching rapidly

from behind.

— A vehicle which your vehicle

overtakes rapidly.

— A vehicle that passes through

the detection zone quickly.

— When overtaking several vehi-

cles in a row, the vehicles after

the first vehicle may not be

detected if they are traveling

close together.

. The radar sensor’s detection zone

is designed based on a standard

lane width. When driving in a

wider lane, the radar sensors

may not detect vehicles in an

adjacent lane. When driving in a

narrow lane, the radar sensors

may detect vehicles driving two

lanes away.

. The radar sensors are designed

to ignore most stationary objects,

however objects such as guard-

rails, walls, foliage and parked

vehicles may occasionally be de-

tected. This is a normal operation

condition.

. The following conditions may re-

duce the ability of the radar to

detect other vehicles:

— Severe weather

— Road spray

— Ice/frost/dirt build-up on the

vehicle

. Do not attach stickers (including

transparent material), install ac-

cessories or apply additional

paint near the radar sensors.

These conditions may reduce the

ability of the radar to detect other

vehicles.

. Excessive noise (for example,

audio system volume, open vehi-

cle window) will interfere with the

chime sound, and it may not be

heard.

BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS

Indicator on

Indicator off

Indicator flashing

Starting and driving 5-49

5-50 Starting and driving

JVS0737X

Illustration 1 – Approaching from behind

Another vehicle approaching from

behind

Illustration 1: The side indicator light

illuminates if a vehicle enters the detec-

tion zone from behind in an adjacent lane.

JVS0738X

Illustration 2 – Approaching from behind

Illustration 2: If the driver activates the

turn signal while another vehicle is in the

detection zone, then the system chimes

(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

. The radar sensors may not detect

vehicles which are approaching ra-

pidly from behind.

. If the driver activates the turn signal

before a vehicle enters the detection

zone, the side indicator light will

flash but no chime will sound when

the other vehicle is detected.

JVS0739X

Illustration 3 – Overtaking another vehicle

Overtaking another vehicle

Illustration 3: The side indicator light

illuminates if you overtake a vehicle and

that vehicle stays in the detection zone

for approximately 2 seconds.

JVS0740X

Illustration 4 – Overtaking another vehicle

Illustration 4: If the driver activates the

turn signal while another vehicle is in the

detection zone, then the system chimes

(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

. When overtaking several vehicles in

a row, the vehicles after the first

vehicle may not be detected if they

are traveling close together.

. The radar sensors may not detect

slower moving vehicles if they are

passed quickly.

. If the driver activates the turn signal

before a vehicle enters the detection

zone, the side indicator light will

flash but no chime will sound when

the other vehicle is detected.

JVS0741X

Illustration 5 – Entering from the side

Entering from the side

Illustration 5: The side indicator light

illuminates if a vehicle enters the detec-

tion zone from either side.

Starting and driving 5-51

5-52 Starting and driving

WAF0555X

Illustration 6 – Entering from the side

Illustration 6: If the driver activates the

turn signal while another vehicle is in the

detection zone, then the system chimes

(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

. The radar sensors may not detect a

vehicle which is traveling at about

the same speed as your vehicle

when it enters the detection zone.

. If the driver activates the turn signal

before a vehicle enters the detection

zone, the side indicator light will

flash but no chime will sound when

the other vehicle is detected.

JVS1090X

Vehicle information display

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAIL-

ABLE

When radar blockage is detected, the BSW

system will be turned off automatically, a

chime will sound and the “Unavailable:

Side Radar Obstruction” warning mes-

sage will appear in the vehicle informa-

tion display

The system is not available until the

conditions no longer exist.

The radar sensors may be blocked by

temporary ambient conditions such as

splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked

condition may also be caused by objects

such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the

radar sensors.

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, the

RCTA system will also stop working.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer

exist, the system will resume automati-

cally.

If the “Unavailable: Side Radar Obstruc-

tion” warning message continues to ap-

pear, have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

When the BSW system malfunctions, it will

be turned off automatically and the

system malfunction warning message will

appear in the vehicle information display.

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, the

RCTA system will also stop working.

Action to take:

Stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn

the engine off and restart the engine. If

the message continues to appear, have

the BSW system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

JVS0649X

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The two radar sensors

for the BSW

system are located near the rear bumper.

Always keep the area near the radar

sensors clean.

The radar sensors may be blocked by

temporary ambient conditions such as

splashing water, mist or fog.

The blocked condition may also be

caused by objects such as ice, frost or

dirt obstructing the radar sensors.

Check for and remove objects obstruct-

ing the area around the radar sensors.

Do not attach stickers (including trans-

parent material), install accessories or

apply additional paint near the radar

sensors.

Do not strike or damage the area around

the radar sensors.

See a NISSAN dealer or other authorized

repair shop if the area around the radar

sensors is damaged due to a collision.

Radio frequency statement

For USA

FCC : OAYSRR3B

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, in-

cluding interference that may cause

undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment

For Canada

This device complies with Industry Ca-

nada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following

two conditions: (1) this device may not

cause interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference, including

Starting and driving 5-53

5-54 Starting and driving

interference that may cause undesired

operation of the device.

Frequency bands: 24.05 – 24.25 Ghz

The field strength of SRR3-B is below

250 millivolts/m measured at 3 metres

with an average detector.

This device contains licence-exempt

transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply

with Innovation, Science and Economic

Development Canada’s licence-exempt

RSS(s). Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interfer-

ence.

2. This device must accept any inter-

ference, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the de-

vice.

Radiofrequency radiation exposure in-

formation:

This equipment complies with radiation

exposure limits set forth for an uncon-

trolled environment. This equipment

should be installed and operated with

minimum distance of 20 cm between

the radiator and your body.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use of the

RCTA system could result in serious

injury or death.

. The RCTA system is not a replace-

ment for proper driving proce-

dures and is not designed to

prevent contact with vehicles or

objects. When backing out of a

parking space, always use the

side and rear mirrors and turn

and look in the direction your

vehicle will move. Never rely so-

lely on the RCTA system.

The RCTA system will assist you when

backing out from a parking space. When

the vehicle is in reverse, the system is

designed to detect other vehicles ap-

proaching from the right or left of the

vehicle. If the system detects cross traffic,

it will alert you.

REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (RCTA)

JVS0953X

Side indicator light

Vehicle information display

Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left

side)

RCTA SYSTEM OPERATION

The RCTA system can help alert the driver

of an approaching vehicle when the

driver is backing out of a parking space.

When the shift position is in R (Reverse)

and the vehicle speed is less than ap-

proximately 5 MPH (8 km/h), the RCTA

system is operational.

If the radar detects an approaching

vehicle from either side, the system

chimes (once) and the side indicator light

flashes on the side the vehicle is ap-

proaching from.

Starting and driving 5-55

5-56 Starting and driving

JVS0173X

JVS0649X

The RCTA system uses radar sensors

installed on both sides near the rear

bumper to detect an approaching vehicle.

The radar sensors

can detect an

approaching vehicle from up to approxi-

mately 66 ft (20 m) away.

JVS0942X

Vehicle information display

Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left

side)

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE

RCTA SYSTEM

Perform the following steps to enable or

disable the RCTA system.

1. Press the

button until “Set-

tings” appears in the vehicle informa-

tion display and then press “OK”

button. Use the

button to select

“Driver Assistance”. Then press the

“OK” button.

2. Use the button to select “Parking Aids”

then press the OK button.

3. Select “Cross Traffic” and press the

“OK” button.

4. Use the “OK” button to enable or

disable the system.

NOTE:

The system setting will be retained

even if the engine is restarted.

Starting and driving 5-57

5-58 Starting and driving

JVS0479X

RCTA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limita-

tions for the RCTA system. Failure to

operate the vehicle in accordance

with these system limitations could

result in serious injury or death.

. Always check surroundings and

turn to check what is behind you

before backing up. The radar

sensors detect approaching

(moving) vehicles. The radar sen-

sors cannot detect every object

such as:

— Pedestrians, bicycles, motor-

cycles, animals or child-oper-

ated toy vehicles

— A vehicle that is passing at

speeds greater than approxi-

mately 19 MPH (30 km/h)

— A vehicle that is passing at

speeds lower than approxi-

mately 5 MPH (8 km/h)

. The radar sensors may not detect

approaching vehicles in certain

situations:

— Illustration : When a vehicle

parked next to you obstructs

the beam of the radar sensor.

— Illustration

: When the vehi-

cle is parked in an angled

parking space.

— Illustration

: When the vehi-

cle is parked on inclined

ground.

— Illustration

: When an ap-

proaching vehicle turns into

your vehicle’s parking lot aisle.

— Illustration

: When the angle

formed by your vehicle and

approaching vehicle is small

. The following conditions may re-

duce the ability of the radar to

detect other vehicles:

— Severe weather

— Road spray

— Ice/frost/dirt build-up on the

vehicle

. Do not attach stickers (including

transparent material), install ac-

cessories or apply additional

paint near the radar sensors.

These conditions may reduce the

ability of the radar to detect other

vehicles

. Excessive noise (e.g. audio sys-

tem volume, open vehicle win-

dow) will interfere with the

chime sound, and it may not be

heard.

JVS0172X

Illustration 1

JVS0173X

Illustration 2

Starting and driving 5-59

5-60 Starting and driving

NOTE:

In the case of several vehicles ap-

proaching in a row (Illustration 1) or in

the opposite direction (Illustration 2), a

chime may not be sounded by the RCTA

system after the first vehicle passes the

sensors.

JVS1090X

Vehicle information display

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAIL-

ABLE

When radar blockage is detected, the

system will be deactivated automatically.

The “Unavailable: Side Radar Obstruction”

warning message will appear in the

vehicle information display.

The system is not available until the

conditions no longer exist.

The radar sensors may be blocked by

temporary ambient conditions such as

splashing water, mist or fog.

The blocked condition may also be

caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt

obstructing the radar sensors.

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, the

RCTA system will also stop working.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer

exist, the system will resume automati-

cally.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

When the RCTA system malfunctions, it

will turn off automatically. The system

malfunction warning message will appear

in the vehicle information display.

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, the

RCTA system will also stop working.

Action to take:

Stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn

the engine off and restart the engine. If

the message continues to appear, have

the system checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

JVS0649X

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The two radar sensors

for the RCTA

system are located near the rear bumper.

Always keep the area near the radar

sensors clean.

The radar sensors may be blocked by

temporary ambient conditions such as

splashing water, mist or fog.

The blocked condition may also be

caused by objects such as ice, frost or

dirt obstructing the radar sensors.

Check for and remove objects obstruct-

ing the area around the radar sensors.

Do not attach stickers (including trans-

parent material), install accessories or

apply additional paint near the radar

sensors.

Do not strike or damage the area around

the radar sensors. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area

around the radar sensors is damaged

due to a collision.

Radio frequency statement

For USA

FCC : OAYSRR3B

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, in-

cluding interference that may cause

undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment

For Canada

This device complies with Industry Ca-

nada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following

two conditions: (1) this device may not

cause interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference, including

Starting and driving 5-61

5-62 Starting and driving

interference that may cause undesired

operation of the device.

Frequency bands: 24.05 – 24.25 Ghz

The field strength of SRR3-B is below

250 millivolts/m measured at 3 metres

with an average detector.

This device contains licence-exempt

transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply

with Innovation, Science and Economic

Development Canada’s licence-exempt

RSS(s). Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interfer-

ence.

2. This device must accept any inter-

ference, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the de-

vice.

Radiofrequency radiation exposure in-

formation:

This equipment complies with radiation

exposure limits set forth for an uncon-

trolled environment. This equipment

should be installed and operated with

minimum distance of 20 cm between

the radiator and your body.

JVS1005X

1. RES/+ switch

2. CANCEL switch

3. SET/- switch

4. Cruise ON/OFF switch

WARNING

. Always observe the posted speed

limits and do not set the speed

over them.

. Do not use the cruise control

when driving under the following

conditions. Doing so could cause

a loss of vehicle control and result

in an accident.

— When it is not possible to keep

the vehicle at a constant

speed

— When driving in heavy traffic

— When driving in traffic that

varies speed

— When driving in windy areas

— When driving on winding or

hilly roads

— When driving on slippery (rain,

snow, ice, etc.) roads

CAUTION

On Manual Transmission (MT) model,

do not shift to the N (Neutral) posi-

tion without depressing the clutch

pedal when the cruise control is

operated. Should this occur, depress

the clutch pedal and turn the Cruise

ON/OFF switch off immediately. Fail-

ure to do so may cause engine

damage.

CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CON-

TROL

. If the cruise control system malfunc-

tions, it will cancel automatically. The

CRUISE indicator in the vehicle infor-

mation display will then blink to warn

the driver.

. If the CRUISE indicator blinks, turn the

Cruise ON/OFF switch off and have

the system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

. The CRUISE indicator may blink when

the Cruise ON/OFF switch is turned

ON while pushing the RES/+, SET/-, or

CANCEL switch. To properly set the

cruise control system, perform the

following procedures.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at

speeds above 25 MPH (40 km/h) without

keeping your foot on the accelerator

pedal.

The cruise control will automatically be

canceled if the vehicle slows down more

than approximately 8 MPH (13 km/h)

below the set speed.

Moving the shift lever to the N (Neutral)

position will cancel the cruise control.

Turning on cruise control

Push the Cruise ON/OFF switch. The

CRUISE indicator in the vehicle informa-

tion display will appear.

Setting cruising speed

1. Accelerate to the desired speed.

2. Push the SET/- switch and release it.

3. Take your foot off the accelerator

pedal.

The vehicle will maintain the set speed.

Passing another vehicle:

Depress the accelerator pedal to accel-

erate. After releasing the accelerator

pedal, the vehicle will return to the pre-

viously set speed.

The vehicle may not maintain the set

speed when going up or down steep hills.

In such cases, drive without the cruise

control.

Resetting to slower speed:

Use any one of the following methods to

reset to a slower speed.

. Lightly tap the foot brake pedal. When

the vehicle reaches the desired speed,

push and release the SET/- switch.

. Push and hold the SET/- switch. When

the vehicle reaches the desired speed,

release the SET- switch.

. Quickly push and release the SET/-

switch. This will reduce the vehicle

speed by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

Resetting to faster speed:

Use any one of the following methods to

reset to a faster speed.

. Depress the accelerator pedal. When

the vehicle reaches the desired speed,

push and release the SET/- switch.

. Push and hold the RES/+switch. When

the vehicle reaches the desired speed,

release the RES/+ switch.

. Quickly push and release the RES/+

switch. This will increase the vehicle

speed by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

Resuming at preset speed:

Push and release the RES/+ switch.

The vehicle will resume the last set

cruising speed when the vehicle speed is

over 25 MPH (40 km/h).

Cancelling cruising speed

Use any one of the following methods to

cancel the set speed.

. Push the CANCEL switch.

. Tap the foot brake pedal.

. Push the Cruise ON/OFF switch. The

CRUISE indicator will turn off.

Starting and driving 5-63

5-64 Starting and driving

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use of the

ProPILOT assist system could result

in serious injury or death.

. ProPILOT assist is not a self-driv-

ing system. Within the limits of its

capabilities, as described in this

manual, it helps the driver with

certain driving activities.

. The ProPILOT assist system is not

a replacement for proper driving

procedures and is not designed

to correct careless, inattentive or

absentminded driving. ProPILOT

assist will not always steer the

vehicle to keep it in the lane. The

ProPILOT assist system is not

designed to prevent loss of con-

trol. It is the driver’s responsibility

to stay alert, drive safely, keep

the vehicle in the traveling lane,

and be in control of the vehicle at

all times.

. There are limitations to the Pro-

PILOT assist system capability.

The ProPILOT assist system does

not function in all driving, traffic,

weather, and road conditions. It is

the driver’s responsibility to stay

alert, drive safely, keep the vehi-

cle in the traveling lane, and be in

control of the vehicle at all times.

. The ProPILOT assist system is

only an aid to assist the driver

and is not a collision warning or

avoidance device.

. The ProPILOT assist system is for

highway use only and is not

intended for city driving. Failure

to apply the brakes or steer the

vehicle when necessary may re-

sult in a serious accident.

. Always observe posted speed

limits and do not set the speed

over them.

. Never take your hands off the

steering wheel when driving. Al-

ways keep your hands on the

steering wheel and drive your

vehicle safely.

. Never unfasten your safety belt

when using ProPILOT assist.

Doing so automatically cancels

the ProPILOT assist system.

. The ProPILOT assist system does

not react to stationary and slow

moving vehicles.

. Always drive carefully and atten-

tively when using the ProPILOT

assist system. Read and under-

stand the Owner’s Manual thor-

oughly before using the ProPILOT

assist system. To avoid serious

injury or death, do not rely on the

system to prevent accidents or to

control the vehicle’s speed in

emergency situations. Do not

use the ProPILOT assist system

except in appropriate road and

traffic conditions.

PROPILOT ASSIST (if so equipped)

WAF0286X

The ProPILOT assist system is intended to

enhance the operation of the vehicle

when following a vehicle traveling in the

same lane and direction.

The ProPILOT assist system uses a multi-

sensing front camera

installed behind

the windshield and a radar sensor located

on the front of the vehicle

to measure

the distance to the vehicle ahead in the

same lane and to monitor the lane

markers. If the vehicle detects a slower

moving vehicle ahead, the system will

reduce the vehicle speed so that your

vehicle follows the vehicle in front at the

selected distance. The system will also

help keep the vehicle centered in the

traveling lane when clear lane markings

are detected.

Starting and driving 5-65

5-66 Starting and driving

WAF0046X

Steering-wheel-mounted control (left)

Vehicle information display

Steering-wheel-mounted control (right)

ProPILOT assist switch

Steering assist switch

PROPILOT ASSIST SYSTEM OPERA-

TION

The ProPILOT assist system has the

following two functions:

1. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

The ICC system can be set to one of two

cruise control modes:

. Conventional (fixed speed) cruise con-

trol mode:

For cruising at a preset speed

NOTE:

Steering Assist is not available in the

conventional (fixed speed) cruise con-

trol mode.

. Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode:

The ICC system maintains a selected

distance from the vehicle in front of

you within the speed range of 0 to 90

MPH (0 to 144 km/h) up to the set

speed. The set speed can be selected

by the driver between 20 to 90 MPH

(32 to 144 km/h). When the vehicle

ahead slows to a stop, your vehicle

gradually decelerates to a standstill.

When the vehicle is stopped, the ICC

system maintains braking force to

keep your vehicle stopped.

NOTE:

When your vehicle is stopped for less

than 3 seconds and the vehicle ahead

begins to move, your vehicle will start

moving again automatically.

. When your vehicle is at a standstill for

more than 3 seconds and the vehicle

ahead begins to accelerate, push the

RES+ switch or lightly depress the

accelerator pedal. The ICC system

starts to follow the vehicle ahead.

. When no vehicle is detected ahead

within the driver selected distance, the

vehicle travels at the speed set by the

driver. The speed must be above 20

MPH (32 km/h) to use this function.

NOTE:

Even if the Automatic Emergency Brak-

ing (AEB) setting is turned off by the

driver using the “Settings” menu in the

vehicle information display, AEB will be

automatically turned on when ICC is

used.

2. Steering assist

The steering assist function controls the

steering system to help keep your vehicle

within the traveling lane.

When there is no vehicle ahead, steering

assist is not available at speeds under 37

MPH (60 km/h).

WAF0047X

PROPILOT ASSIST SWITCHES

1. DISTANCE switch:

Long

Middle

Short

2. RES+ switch:

Resumes set speed or increases speed

incrementally

3. CANCEL switch:

Deactivates the ProPILOT assist sys-

tem

4. ProPILOT assist switch:

Turns the ProPILOT assist system on

or off

5. SET- switch:

Sets desired cruise speed or reduces

speed incrementally

6. Steering assist switch:

Turns the steering assist function on

or off

Starting and driving 5-67

5-68 Starting and driving

WAF0049X

PROPILOT ASSIST SYSTEM DISPLAY

AND INDICATORS

1. Lane marker indicator

Indicates whether the system detects

lane markers

No lane markers displayed: Steering

assist is turned off

Lane marker indicator (gray): No

lane markers detected

— Lane marker indicator (green): Lane

markers detected

— Lane marker indicator (yellow):

Lane departure is detected

2. Set distance indicator

Displays the selected distance

3. Vehicle ahead detection indicator

Indicates whether the system detects

a vehicle in front of you

4. Steering assist indicator

Indicates the status of the Steering

assist function by the color of the

indicator

Steering assist indicator (gray):

Steering assist standby

Steering assist indicator (green):

Steering assist active

Steering assist indicator (orange):

Steering assist malfunction

5. ProPILOT assist activation

Displays once the ProPILOT assist

system is activated

6. Steering assist status indicator/warn-

ing

Displays the status of the Steering

assist by the color of the indicator/

warning

No Steering assist status indicator

displayed: Steering assist is turned

off

Steering assist status indicator

(gray): Steering assist standby

— Steering assist status indicator

(green): Steering assist active

— Steering assist status indicator (or-

ange): Steering assist malfunction

7. Speed control status indicator/warn-

ing

Displays the status of speed control by

the color and shape of the indicator/

warning

Speed control status indicator/

warning (gray): ICC standby

Speed control status indicator/

warning (solid green

): ICC (dis-

tance control mode) is active (ve-

hicle detected ahead). Your vehicle

matches the speed of the vehicle

ahead.

Speed control status indicator/

warning (green outline

): ICC

(maintain speed control mode) is

active (no vehicle detected ahead).

Your vehicle maintains the driver-

selected set speed.

Speed control status indicator/

warning (orange): Indicates an ICC

malfunction

8. Set vehicle speed indicator

Indicates the set vehicle speed

9. ProPILOT assist status indicator

Indicates the status of the ProPILOT

assist system by the color of the

indicator

ProPILOT assist status indicator

(white): ProPILOT assist is on but

in standby.

ProPILOT assist status indicator

(blue): ProPILOT assist active

TURNING THE CONVENTIONAL

(fixed speed) CRUISE CONTROL

MODE ON

NOTE:

ProPILOT assist provides no approach

warnings, automatic braking, or steer-

ing assist in the conventional (fixed

speed) cruise control mode.

To choose the conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode, push and hold the

ProPILOT assist switch for longer than

approximately 1.5 seconds. For additional

information, see “Conventional (fixed

speed) cruise control mode” (P.5-91).

WAF0050X

OPERATING PROPILOT ASSIST

1. Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)

with pedestrian detection

2. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) when

shaded and Intelligent Lane Interven-

tion (I-LI) when solid

3. Blind Spot Warning (BSW)

Starting and driving 5-69

5-70 Starting and driving

WAF0051X

1. Push the ProPILOT assist switch .

This turns on the ProPILOT assist

system.

2. A screen is displayed for a period of

time that indicates the status of the

Driving Aid functions.

AEB, LDW, and BSW are enabled

when the specified Driving Aid is

shaded.

I-LI is enabled when the Driving Aid

is solid.

To change the status of the Driving

Aids, use the

or to navigate the

settings screen. For additional in-

formation, see “How to use the

vehicle information display” (P.2-

20).

3. The status of the ProPILOT assist

system is displayed in the vehicle

information display

4. Accelerate or decelerate your vehicle

to the desired speed.

5. Push the SET- switch

. The ProPILOT

assist system begins to automatically

maintain the set speed. The ProPILOT

assist activation indicator

and Pro-

PILOT assist status indicator

illumi-

nate (blue). When a vehicle ahead is

traveling at a speed of 20 MPH (32

km/h) or below and the SET- switch is

pushed, the set speed of your vehicle

is 20 MPH (32 km/h).

NOTE:

When “Prevention (LDP)” is selected in

the settings menu, turning the ProPILOT

assist system on will activate the I-LI

system at the same time. For additional

information, see “Intelligent Lane Inter-

vention (I-LI)” (P.5-40).

WAF0052X

When the SET- switch is pushed under the

following conditions, the ProPILOT assist

system cannot be set and the set vehicle

speed indicator

blinks for approxi-

mately 2 seconds:

. When traveling below 20 MPH (32

km/h) and the vehicle ahead is not

detected

. When the shift lever is not in the D

(Drive) position or manual shift mode

. When the parking brake is applied

. When the brakes are operated by the

driver

. When the VDC system is off. For

additional information, see “Vehicle

Dynamic Control (VDC) system” (P.5-

131).

. When the VDC system (including the

traction control system) is operating

. When a wheel is slipping

. When any door is open

. When the driver’s seat belt is not

fastened

How to change the set vehicle

speed

The set vehicle speed can be adjusted.

To change to a faster cruising speed:

. Push and hold the RES+ switch. The

set vehicle speed increases by ap-

proximately 5 MPH (5 km/h).

. Push, then quickly release, the RES+

switch. Each time you do this, the set

speed increases by approximately 1

MPH (1 km/h).

To change to a slower cruising speed:

. Push and hold the SET- switch. The

set vehicle speed decreases by ap-

proximately 5 MPH (5 km/h).

. Push, then quickly release, the SET

switch. Each time you do this, the set

speed decreases by approximately 1

MPH (1 km/h).

How to momentarily accelerate or

decelerate

. Depress the accelerator pedal when

acceleration is required. Release the

accelerator pedal to resume the pre-

viously set vehicle speed.

. Depress the brake pedal when decel-

eration is required. Control by the

ProPILOT Assist system is canceled.

Push the RES+ switch to resume the

previously set vehicle speed.

WARNING

When the accelerator pedal is de-

pressed and you are approaching

the vehicle ahead, the ICC system

will neither control the brake nor

warn the driver with the chime and

display. The driver must manually

control the vehicle speed to maintain

a safe distance to the vehicle ahead.

Failure to do so could result in severe

personal injury or death.

NOTE:

When you accelerate by depressing the

accelerator pedal or decelerate by

pushing the SET- switch and the vehicle

travels faster than the speed set by the

driver, the set speed vehicle indicator

Starting and driving 5-71

5-72 Starting and driving

will blink.

WAF0053X

How to change the set distance to

the vehicle ahead

The distance to the vehicle ahead can be

selected at any time.

Each time the DISTANCE switch

pushed, the set distance will change to

“long”, “middle”, “short” and back to “long”

again in that sequence.

WAF0054X

. The distance to the vehicle ahead

changes automatically according to

the vehicle speed. The higher the

vehicle speed, the longer the distance.

. The distance setting will remain at the

current setting even if the engine is

restarted.

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE

STEERING ASSIST

Use the following methods to enable or

disable the steering assist.

Starting and driving 5-73

5-74 Starting and driving

WAF0055X

1. Steering-wheel-mounted control (left)

2. Vehicle information display

3. Steering assist switch

NOTE:

. When the steering assist switch is

used to turn the system on or off,

the system remembers the setting

even if the ignition switch is cycled.

The switch must be pushed again to

change the setting to on or off.

. The steering assist switch changes

the status of the “Steering Assist”

selection made in the “Settings”

screen in the vehicle information

display.

Steering assist switch:

To turn the steering assist on or off, push

the steering assist switch

on the

instrument panel.

Setting in the vehicle information dis-

play:

1. Press the

button on the

steering wheel

until “Settings” ap-

pears in the vehicle information dis-

play

and then press “OK” button.

2. Use the

button to select “Driver

Assistance.” Then press the “OK” but-

ton

3. Use the

button to select “Driving

Aids.” Then press the “OK” button

4. Select “Steering Assist” and press the

“OK” button

NOTE:

. When the Cruise screen is displayed

on the vehicle information display,

press the “OK” button on the steer-

ing wheel to call up the “Driving Aids”

setting display.

. When enabling/disabling the system

through the vehicle information dis-

play, the system retains the current

settings even if the engine is re-

started.

HOW TO CANCEL THE PROPILOT

ASSIST SYSTEM

To cancel the ProPILOT assist system, use

one of the following methods:

. Push the CANCEL switch.

. Tap the brake pedal (except at a

standstill).

. Push the ProPILOT assist switch to

turn the system off. The ProPILOT

assist status indicator will turn off.

When the ProPILOT assist system is

canceled while the vehicle is stopped,

the electronic parking brake is automati-

cally activated.

WARNING

To prevent the vehicle from moving

or rolling unexpectedly, which could

result in serious personal injury or

property damage, before exiting the

vehicle make sure to push the Pro-

PILOT assist switch to turn the sys-

tem off, place the shift lever in the P

(Park) position, and turn the engine

off.

INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL

(ICC)

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use of the ICC

system could result in serious injury

or death.

. The ICC system is only an aid to

assist the driver and is not a

collision warning or avoidance

device. It is recommended for

highway use only and it is not

intended for city driving. It is the

driver’s responsibility to stay

alert, drive safely, and be in con-

trol of the vehicle at all times.

. There are limitations to the ICC

system capability. The ICC system

does not function in all driving,

traffic, weather, and road condi-

tions. It is the driver’s responsi-

bility to stay alert, drive safely,

keep the vehicle in the traveling

lane, and be in control of the

vehicle at all times.

. Always observe posted speed

limits and do not set the speed

over them.

. The ICC system does not react to

stationary and slow moving vehi-

cles.

. Always drive carefully and atten-

tively when using the ICC system.

Read and understand the Owner’s

Manual thoroughly before using

the ICC system. To avoid serious

injury or death, do not rely on the

system to prevent accidents or to

control the vehicle’s speed in

emergency situations. Do not

use the ICC system except in

appropriate road and traffic con-

ditions.

ICC system operation

The ICC system is designed to maintain a

selected distance from the vehicle in front

of you and can reduce the speed to

match a slower vehicle ahead. The sys-

tem decelerates the vehicle as necessary

and if the vehicle ahead comes to a stop,

the vehicle decelerates to a standstill.

However, the ICC system can only apply

up to 40% of the vehicle’s total braking

power. This system should only be used

when traffic conditions allow vehicle

speeds to remain fairly constant or when

vehicle speeds change gradually. If a

vehicle moves into the traveling lane

Starting and driving 5-75

5-76 Starting and driving

ahead or if a vehicle traveling ahead

rapidly decelerates, the distance between

vehicles may become closer because the

ICC system cannot decelerate the vehicle

quickly enough. If this occurs, the ICC

system sounds a warning chime and

blinks the system display to notify the

driver to take necessary action.

The ICC system cancels and a warning

chime sounds if the speed is below

approximately 15 MPH (24 km/h) and a

vehicle is not detected ahead.

The ICC system operates as follows:

. When there are no vehicles traveling

ahead, the ICC system maintains the

speed set by the driver. The set speed

range is between approximately 20

and 90 MPH (32 and 144 km/h).

. When there is a vehicle traveling

ahead, the ICC system adjusts the

speed to maintain the distance, se-

lected by the driver, from the vehicle

ahead. If the vehicle ahead comes to a

stop, the vehicle decelerates to a

standstill. Once your vehicle stops,

the ICC system keeps the vehicle

stopped.

. When your vehicle is stopped for less

than 3 seconds and the vehicle ahead

begins to move, your vehicle will start

moving again automatically.

. When your vehicle is at a standstill for

more than 3 seconds and the vehicle

ahead begins to accelerate, push the

RES+ switch or lightly depress the

accelerator pedal. The ICC system

starts to follow the vehicle ahead.

. When the vehicle traveling ahead

moves to a different traveling lane,

the ICC system accelerates and main-

tains vehicle speed up to the set

speed.

The ICC system does not control vehicle

speed or warn you when you approach

stationary and slow moving vehicles. You

must pay attention to vehicle operation

to maintain proper distance from vehicles

ahead when approaching toll gates or

traffic congestion.

SSD0254

When driving on the freeway at a set

speed and approaching a slower traveling

vehicle ahead, the ICC system adjusts the

speed to maintain the distance, selected

by the driver, from the vehicle ahead. If

the vehicle ahead changes lanes or exits

the freeway, the ICC system accelerates

and maintains the speed up to the set

speed. Pay attention to the driving opera-

tion to maintain control of the vehicle as

it accelerates to the set speed.

The vehicle may not maintain the set

speed on winding or hilly roads. If this

occurs, you will have to manually control

the vehicle speed.

Normally when controlling the distance to

a vehicle ahead, the system automatically

accelerates or decelerates your vehicle

according to the speed of the vehicle

ahead.

Depress the accelerator to properly ac-

celerate your vehicle when acceleration is

required for a lane change. Depress the

brake pedal when deceleration is required

to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle

ahead due to sudden braking or if a

vehicle cuts in. Always stay alert when

using the ICC system.

WAF0057X

System set display with no vehicle detected ahead

No vehicle detected ahead:

The driver sets the desired vehicle speed

based on the road conditions. The ICC

system maintains the set vehicle speed,

similar to standard cruise control, as long

as no vehicle is detected in the lane

ahead. The ICC system displays the set

speed.

WAF0058X

System set display with vehicle ahead

Vehicle detected ahead:

When a vehicle is detected in the lane

ahead, the ICC system decelerates the

vehicle by controlling the throttle and

applying the brakes to match the speed

of a slower vehicle ahead. The ICC system

then controls the vehicle speed based on

the speed of the vehicle ahead to main-

tain the driver selected distance.

NOTE:

. The stop lights of the vehicle come

on when braking is performed by

the ICC system.

. When the brake is applied by the

system, a noise may be heard. This is

not a malfunction.

Starting and driving 5-77

5-78 Starting and driving

When the ICC system detects a vehicle

ahead, the vehicle ahead detection indi-

cator and the speed control status in-

dicator (distance control mode)

illuminates (solid green

Vehicle ahead stops:

When the vehicle ahead decelerates to

stop, your vehicle decelerates to a stand-

still. Once your vehicle stops, the ICC

system automatically applies the brakes

to keep the vehicle stopped. When your

vehicle is at a standstill, the “(RES+) Press

to start” message is displayed on the

vehicle information display.

NOTE:

When your vehicle stops for less than 3

seconds, your vehicle will automatically

follow the vehicle as it accelerates from

a stop.

Vehicle ahead accelerates:

When your vehicle is stopped and the

vehicle ahead begins to accelerate, push

the RES+ switch or lightly depress the

accelerator pedal. The ICC system starts

to follow the vehicle ahead.

Vehicle ahead not detected:

When a vehicle is no longer detected

ahead, the ICC system gradually acceler-

ates your vehicle to resume the pre-

viously set vehicle speed. The ICC

system then maintains the set speed.

When a vehicle is no longer detected, the

vehicle ahead detection indicator turns

off and speed control status indicator

(maintain speed control mode) illumi-

nates (green outline

The ICC system gradually accelerates to

the set speed, but you can depress the

accelerator pedal to quickly accelerate.

When a vehicle is no longer detected and

your vehicle is traveling under approxi-

mately 15 MPH (24 km/h), the ICC system

automatically cancels.

WAF0059X

When passing another vehicle, the set

speed indicator

flashes when the

vehicle speed exceeds the set speed.

The vehicle ahead detection indicator

turns off when the area ahead of the

vehicle is open. When the pedal is re-

leased, the vehicle returns to the pre-

viously set speed. Even though your

vehicle speed is set in the ICC system,

you can depress the accelerator pedal

when it is necessary to accelerate your

vehicle rapidly.

Cut-in detection

If a vehicle moves into your traveling lane

near your vehicle, the ICC system may

inform the driver by flashing the vehicle

ahead detection indicator.

Approach warning

If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle

ahead due to rapid deceleration of that

vehicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the

system warns the driver with the chime

and ICC system display. Decelerate by

depressing the brake pedal to maintain a

safe vehicle distance if:

. The chime sounds.

. The vehicle ahead detection indicator

and set distance indicator blink.

. You judge it necessary to maintain a

safe distance.

The warning chime may not sound in

some cases when there is a short dis-

tance between vehicles. Some examples

are:

. When the vehicles are traveling at the

same speed and the distance be-

tween vehicles is not changing.

. When the vehicle ahead is traveling

faster and the distance between ve-

hicles is increasing.

. When a vehicle cuts in near your

vehicle.

The warning chime will not sound when:

. Your vehicle approaches other vehi-

cles that are parked or moving slowly.

. The accelerator pedal is depressed,

overriding the system.

NOTE:

The approach warning chime may

sound and the system display may

flash when the radar sensor detects

objects on the side of the vehicle or on

the side of the road. This may cause the

ICC system to decelerate or accelerate

the vehicle. The radar sensor may de-

tect these objects when the vehicle is

driven on winding, narrow, or hilly roads

or when the vehicle is entering or

exiting a curve. In these cases, you will

have to manually control the proper

distance ahead of your vehicle.

Also, the sensor sensitivity can be af-

fected by vehicle operation (steering

maneuver or driving position in the

lane) or traffic or vehicle conditions

(for example, if a vehicle is being driven

with some damage).

Acceleration when passing

When the ICC system is engaged above

44 mph (70 km/h) and following a slower

vehicle (below ICC set speed), and the

turn signal is activated to the left, the ICC

system will automatically start to accel-

erate the vehicle to help initiate passing

on the left and will begin to reduce the

distance to vehicle directly ahead. Only

the left side turn signal operates this

feature. As the driver steers the vehicle

and moves into the passing lane, if no

vehicle is detected ahead the ICC system

will continue to accelerate to the ICC

system set speed. If another vehicle is

detected ahead, then the vehicle will

accelerate up to the following speed of

that vehicle. If the vehicle is not steered

into the left lane to pass, the acceleration

will stop after a short time and regain the

set following distance. Acceleration can

be stopped at any point by depressing

the brake pedal or the CANCEL switch on

the steering wheel.

ICC system limitations

WARNING

Listed below are the system limita-

tions for the ICC system. Failure to

operate the vehicle in accordance

Starting and driving 5-79

5-80 Starting and driving

with these system limitations could

result in serious injury or death:

. The ICC system is primarily in-

tended for use on straight, dry,

open roads with light traffic. It is

not advisable to use the ICC

system in city traffic or congested

areas.

. The ICC system will not adapt

automatically to road conditions.

This system should be used in

evenly flowing traffic. Do not use

the system on roads with sharp

curves or on icy roads, in heavy

rain or in fog.

. As there is a performance limit to

the distance control function,

never rely solely on the ICC sys-

tem. This system does not correct

careless, inattentive or absent-

minded driving or overcome poor

visibility in rain, fog, or other bad

weather. Decelerate the vehicle

speed by depressing the brake

pedal, depending on the distance

to the vehicle ahead and the

surrounding circumstances in or-

der to maintain a safe distance

between vehicles.

. When the ICC system automati-

cally brings the vehicle to a stop,

your vehicle can automatically

accelerate if the vehicle is

stopped for less than approxi-

mately 3 seconds. Be prepared

to stop your vehicle if necessary.

. Always pay attention to the op-

eration of the vehicle and be

ready to manually control the

proper following distance. The

ICC system may not be able to

maintain the selected distance

between vehicles (following dis-

tance) or selected vehicle speed

under some circumstances.

. The system may not detect the

vehicle in front of you in certain

road or weather conditions. To

avoid accidents, never use the ICC

system under the following con-

ditions:

— On roads with heavy, high-

speed traffic or sharp curves

— On slippery road surfaces

such as on ice or snow, etc.

— During bad weather (rain, fog,

snow, etc.)

— When rain, snow or dirt adhere

to the bumper around the

distance sensor

— On steep downhill roads (the

vehicle may go beyond the set

vehicle speed and frequent

braking may result in over-

heating the brakes)

— On repeated uphill and down-

hill roads

— When traffic conditions make

it difficult to keep a proper

distance between vehicles be-

cause of frequent accelera-

tion or deceleration

— Interference by other radar

sources.

. In some road or traffic conditions,

a vehicle or object can unexpect-

edly come into the sensor detec-

tion zone and cause automatic

braking. Always stay alert and

avoid using the ICC system where

not recommended in this warn-

ing section.

The ICC system will not detect the

following objects:

. Stationary or slow moving vehicles

. Pedestrians or objects in the roadway

. Oncoming vehicles in the same lane

. Motorcycles traveling offset in the

travel lane

The following are some conditions in

which the radar sensor cannot properly

detect a vehicle ahead and the system

may not operate properly:

. When the sensor detection is reduced

(conditions such as rain, snow, fog,

dust storms, sandstorms, and road

spray from other vehicles)

. Driving on a steep downhill slope or

roads with sharp curves

. Driving on a bumpy road surface, such

as an uneven dirt road

. If dirt, ice, snow or other material is

covering the radar sensor area

. A complicated-shaped vehicle such as

a car carrier trailer or flatbed truck/

trailer is near the vehicle ahead.

. Interference by other radar sources

. When excessively heavy baggage is

loaded in the rear seat or cargo area

of your vehicle.

The ICC system is designed to automati-

cally check the radar sensor’s operation

within the limitations of the system

The detection zone of the radar sensor is

limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the

detection zone for the ICC system to

maintain the selected distance from the

vehicle ahead. A vehicle ahead may move

outside of the detection zone due to its

position within the same lane of travel.

Motorcycles may not be detected in the

same lane ahead if they are traveling

offset from the center line of the lane. A

vehicle that is entering the lane ahead

may not be detected until the vehicle has

completely moved into the lane.

If this occurs, the ICC system may warn

you by blinking the system indicator and

sounding the chime. The driver may have

to manually control the proper distance

away from the vehicle traveling ahead.

The ICC system (with ProPILOT assist)

uses a multi-sensing front camera. The

following are some conditions in which

the camera may not properly detect a

vehicle and detection of a vehicle ahead

may be delayed:

. Poor visibility (conditions such as rain,

snow, fog, dust storms, sandstorms,

and road spray from other vehicles)

. The camera area of the windshield is

fogged up or covered with dirt, water

drops, ice, snow, etc.

. Strong light (for example, sunlight or

high beams from oncoming vehicles)

enters the front camera

. A sudden change in brightness occurs

(for example, when the vehicle enters

or exits a tunnel or shaded area or

lightning flashes)

Starting and driving 5-81

5-82 Starting and driving

SSD0252

SSD0253

When driving on some roads, such as

winding, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or

roads which are under construction, the

radar sensor may detect vehicles in a

different lane, or may temporarily not

detect a vehicle traveling ahead. This

may cause the ICC system to decelerate

or accelerate the vehicle.

The detection of vehicles may also be

affected by vehicle operation (steering

maneuver or traveling position in the

lane, etc.) or vehicle condition.

If this occurs, the ICC system may warn

you by blinking the system indicator and

sounding the chime unexpectedly. You

will have to manually control the proper

distance away from the vehicle traveling

ahead.

Automatic cancellation

The following are conditions in which the

ICC system may be temporarily unavail-

able. In these instances, the ICC system

may not cancel and may not be able to

maintain the selected following distance

from the vehicle ahead.

Condition A:

Under the following conditions, the ICC

system is automatically canceled. A chime

will sound and the system will not be able

to be set:

. Any door is open.

. The driver’s seat belt is not fastened.

. The vehicle ahead is not detected and

your vehicle is traveling below the

speed of 15 MPH (24 km/h).

. Your vehicle has been stopped by the

ICC system for approximately 3 min-

utes or longer.

. The shift lever is not in the D (Drive)

position or manual shift mode.

. The electronic parking brake is ap-

plied.

. The VDC system is turned off.

. The AEB applies harder braking

. VDC (including the traction control

system) operates.

. A wheel slips.

. When distance measurement be-

comes impaired due to adhesion of

dirt or obstruction to the sensor.

. When the radar signal is temporarily

interrupted.

Action to take:

When the conditions listed above are no

longer present, turn the system off using

the ProPILOT Assist switch. Turn the

ProPILOT Assist system back on to use

the system.

NOTE:

When the ICC system is canceled under

the following conditions at a standstill,

the electronic parking brake is automa-

tically activated:

. Any door is open.

. The driver’s seat belt is not fastened.

. Your vehicle has been stopped by

the ICC system for approximately 3

minutes or longer.

. The shift lever is not in the D (Drive)

position or manual shift mode.

. The VDC system is turned off.

. When distance measurement be-

comes impaired due to adhesion of

dirt or obstruction to the sensor.

. When the radar signal is temporarily

interrupted.

Condition B:

When the radar sensor of the front

bumper is covered with dirt or is ob-

structed, the ICC system will automati-

cally be canceled.

The chime will sound and the “Forward

Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front

Sensor Blocked” or “Unavailable: Front

Radar Obstruction” warning message will

appear in the vehicle information display.

Action to take:

If the warning message appears, stop the

vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever

in the P (Park) position, and turn the

engine off. When the radar signal is

temporarily interrupted, clean the sensor

area of the front bumper and restart the

engine. If the “Forward Driving Aids Tem-

porarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked” or

“Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction”

warning message continues to be dis-

played, have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Condition C:

When driving on roads with limited road

structures or buildings (for example, long

bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next

to long walls), the system may illuminate

the system warning light and display the

“Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Dis-

abled Front Sensor Blocked” or “Unavail-

able: Front Radar Obstruction” warning

message.

Action to take:

When the above driving conditions no

longer exist, turn the system back on.

Starting and driving 5-83

5-84 Starting and driving

ICC system malfunction

If the ICC system malfunctions, it will be

turned off automatically, a chime will

sound, and the speed control status

warning (orange) will illuminate.

Action to take:

If the warning illuminates, stop the vehicle

in a safe place. Turn the engine off, restart

the engine and set the ICC system again.

If it is not possible to set the ICC system or

the warning stays on, it may be a

malfunction. Although the normal driving

can be continued, the ICC system should

be inspected. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

ICC sensor maintenance

The radar sensor is located on the front of

the vehicle.

To keep the ICC system operating prop-

erly, be sure to observe the following:

. Always keep the sensor area clean.

. Do not strike or damage the areas

around the sensor.

. Do not attach a sticker (including

transparent material) or install an

accessory near the sensor. This could

cause failure or malfunction.

. Do not attach metallic objects near

the sensor area (brush guard, etc.).

This could cause failure or malfunc-

tion.

. Do not alter, remove, or paint the front

bumper.

Before customizing or restoring the front

bumper, it is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN dealer.

The camera sensor is located above the

inside mirror.

To keep the proper operation of the

systems and prevent a system malfunc-

tion, be sure to observe the following:

. Always keep the windshield clean.

. Do not attach a sticker (including

transparent material) or install an

accessory near the camera unit.

. Do not place reflective materials, such

as white paper or a mirror, on the

instrument panel. The reflection of

sunlight may adversely affect the

camera unit’s capability of detecting

the lane markers.

. Do not strike or damage the areas

around the camera unit. Do not touch

the camera lens or remove the screw

located on the camera unit.

If the camera unit is damaged due to an

accident, it is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN dealer.

STEERING ASSIST

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use of the

steering assist could result in serious

injury or death.

. The steering assist is not a repla-

cement for proper driving proce-

dures and is not designed to

correct careless, inattentive or

absent-minded driving. The

steering assist will not always

steer the vehicle to keep it in the

lane. It is not designed to prevent

loss of control. It is the driver’s

responsibility to stay alert, drive

safely, keep the vehicle in the

traveling lane, and be in control

of the vehicle at all times.

. As there is a performance limit to

the steering assist’s capability,

never rely solely on the system.

The steering assist does not func-

tion in all driving, traffic, weather,

and road conditions. Always drive

safely, pay attention to the op-

eration of the vehicle, and manu-

ally control your vehicle

appropriately.

. The steering assist is intended for

use on well-developed freeways

or highways with gentle (moder-

ate) curves. To avoid risk of an

accident,do not use this system

on local or non-highway roads.

. The steering assist only steers

the vehicle to maintain its posi-

tion in the center of a lane. The

vehicle will not steer to avoid

objects in the road in front of

the vehicle or to avoid a vehicle

moving into your lane.

. It is the driver’s responsibility to

stay alert, drive safely, keep the

vehicle in the traveling lane, and

be in control of the vehicle at all

times. Never take your hands off

the steering wheel when driving.

Always keep your hands on the

steering wheel and drive your

vehicle safely.

. Always drive carefully and atten-

tively when using the steering

assist. Read and understand the

Owner’s Manual thoroughly be-

fore using the steering assist. To

avoid serious injury or death, do

not rely on the system to prevent

accidents or to control the vehi-

cle’s speed in emergency situa-

tions. Do not use the steering

assist except in appropriate road

and traffic conditions.

Steering assist operation

The steering assist controls the steering

system to help keep your vehicle near the

center of the lane when driving. The

steering assist is combined with the

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system.

For additional information, see “Intelligent

Cruise Control (ICC)” (P.5-75).

The steering assist can be activated when

the following conditions are met:

. The ICC system is activated.

. Lane markers on both sides are clearly

detected.

. A vehicle ahead is detected (when the

vehicle is driven at speeds under 37

MPH (60 km/h)).

. The driver grips the steering wheel.

. The vehicle is driven at the center of

the lane.

. The turn signals are not operated.

. The windshield wiper is not operated

in the high speed operation (the

steering assist function is disabled

after the wiper operates for approxi-

mately 10 seconds).

WAF0062X

Steering assist display and indica-

tors

1. Steering assist status indicator/ warn-

ing

Displays the status of the steering

assist by the color of the indicator/

warning

Steering assist status indicator

(gray): Steering assist standby

Steering assist status indicator

(green): Steering assist active

Steering assist status indicator (or-

ange): Steering assist malfunction

2. Steering assist indicator

Indicates the status of the steering

Starting and driving 5-85

5-86 Starting and driving

assist by the color of the indicator

Steering assist indicator (gray):

Steering assist standby

Steering assist indicator (green):

Steering assist active

Steering assist indicator (orange):

Steering assist malfunction

3. Lane marker indicator

Indicates whether the system detects

the lane marker

Lane marker indicator (gray): Lane

markers not detected

Lane marker indicator (green): Lane

markers detected

Lane marker indicator (orange):

Lane departure is detected

When the steering assist is in operation,

the steering assist status indicator

, the

steering assist indicator

, and the lane

marker indicator

on the vehicle infor-

mation display turn green. A chime

sounds when the steering assist initially

activates.

When the steering assist deactivates, the

steering assist status indicator

, the

steering assist indicator

, and the lane

marker indicator

on the vehicle infor-

mation display turn gray and a chime

sounds twice.

Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)

When a curve or strong cross wind

exceeds the capabilities of the Steering

Assist and your vehicle approaches either

the left or the right side of the traveling

lane, a warning chime sounds and the I-LI

indicator light (orange) on the instrument

panel flashes to alert the driver. Then, the

I-LI system automatically applies the

brakes for a short period of time to help

assist the driver to return the vehicle to

the center of the traveling lane. This

action is in addition to any Steering Assist

actions. For more information, see “Intel-

ligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)” (P.5-40).

WAO0002X

Hands on detection

When the Steering assist is activated, it

monitors the driver’s steering wheel op-

eration.

If the steering wheel is not operated or

the driver takes his/her hands off the

steering wheel for a period of time, the

warning (1) appears in the vehicle infor-

mation display.

If the driver does not operate the steering

wheel after the warning has been dis-

played, an audible alert sounds and the

warning flashes in the vehicle information

display, followed by a quick brake appli-

cation to request the driver to take

control of the vehicle again.

If the driver still does not respond, the

ProPILOT assist turns on the hazard

flasher and slows the vehicle to a com-

plete stop.

The driver can cancel the deceleration at

any time by steering, braking, accelerat-

ing, or operating the ProPILOT assist

switch.

WARNING

Steering assist is not a system for a

hands-free driving. Always keep your

hands on the steering wheel and

drive your vehicle safely. Failure to

do so could cause a collision result-

ing in serious personal injury or

death.

NOTE:

If the driver lightly touches (instead of

firmly grips) the steering wheel, the

steering torque sensor may not detect

the driver’s hand(s) on the steering

wheel and a sequence of warnings

may occur. When the driver holds and

operates the steering wheel again, the

warnings turn off.

Starting and driving 5-87

5-88 Starting and driving

Steering assist limitations

WARNING

. In the following situations, the

camera may not detect lane mar-

kers correctly or may detect lane

markers incorrectly and the

steering assist may not operate

properly:

— When driving on roads where

there are multiple parallel

lane markers, lane markers

that are faded or not painted

clearly, non-standard lane

markers, or lane markers cov-

ered with water, dirt, snow,

etc.

— When driving on roads with

discontinued lane markers

— When driving on roads with a

widening or narrowing lane

width

— When driving on roads where

there are multiple lanes or

unclear lane markers due to

road construction

— When driving on roads where

there are sharply contrasting

objects, such as shadows,

snow, water, wheel ruts,

seams, or lines remaining

after road repairs (the steer-

ing assist could detect these

items as lane markers)

— When driving on roads where

the traveling lane merges or

separates

. Do not use the steering assist

under the following conditions

because the system may not

properly detect lane markers.

Doing so could cause a loss of

vehicle control and result in an

accident.

— During bad weather (rain, fog,

snow, dust, etc.)

— When rain, snow, sand, etc., is

thrown up by the wheels of

other vehicles

— When dirt, oil, ice, snow, water,

or another object adheres to

the camera unit

— When the lens of the camera

unit is foggy

— When strong light (for exam-

ple, sunlight or high beams

from oncoming vehicles)

shines on the camera

— When the headlights are not

bright due to dirt on the lens

or the headlights are off in

tunnels or darkness

— When a sudden change in

brightness occurs (for exam-

ple, when the vehicle enters or

exits a tunnel or is under a

bridge)

— When driving on roads where

the traveling lane merges or

separates or where there are

temporary lane markers be-

cause of road construction

— When there is a lane closure

due to road repairs

— When driving on a bumpy road

surface, such as an uneven

dirt road

— When driving on sharp curves

or winding roads

— When driving on repeated up-

hill and downhill roads

. Do not use the steering assist

under the following conditions

because the system will not op-

erate properly:

— When driving with a tire that is

not within normal tire condi-

tions (for example, tire wear,

abnormal tire pressure, instal-

lation of a spare tire (if so

equipped), tire chains, non-

standard wheels)

— When the vehicle is equipped

with non-original brake or

suspension parts

— When an object such as a

sticker or cargo obstructs the

camera

— When excessively heavy bag-

gage is loaded in the rear seat

or luggage area of your vehi-

cle

— When the vehicle load capa-

city is exceeded

. Excessive noise will interfere with

the warning chime sound, and

the beep may not be heard.

. For the ProPILOT assist system to

operate properly, the windshield

in front of the camera must be

clean. Replace worn wiper blades.

The correct size wiper blades

must be used to help make sure

the windshield is kept clean. Only

use Genuine NISSAN wiper blades,

or equivalent wiper blades, that

are specifically designed for use

on your vehicle model and model

year. It is recommended that you

visit your NISSAN dealer for the

correct parts for your vehicle.

Steering Assist temporary standby

Automatic standby due to driving op-

eration:

When the driver activates the turn signal,

the Steering Assist is temporarily placed

in a standby mode. (The Steering Assist

restarts automatically when the operat-

ing conditions are met again.)

Automatic standby:

In the following cases, a warning mes-

sage is displayed along with the chime,

and the Steering Assist is placed in a

temporary standby mode. (The Steering

Assist restarts automatically when the

operating conditions are met again.)

. When lane markers on both sides are

no longer detected

. When a vehicle ahead is no longer

detected under approximately 37 MPH

(60 km/h)

Steering assist cancel

Under the following conditions, the steer-

ing assist cancels, and the steering assist

status indicator and the steering assist

indicator turn off:

. When unusual lane markers appear in

the traveling lane or when the lane

marker cannot be correctly detected

for some time due to certain condi-

tions (for example, a snow rut, the

reflection of light on a rainy day, the

presence of several unclear lane mar-

kers)

. When the windshield wiper operates

in the high speed operation (the

steering assist is disabled when the

wiper operates for more than approxi-

mately 10 seconds)

Action to take:

Turn the ICC system off using the CANCEL

switch. When the conditions listed above

are no longer present, turn the ICC

system on again.

Steering assist malfunction

When the system malfunctions, it turns

off automatically. The steering assist

status warning (orange) illuminates. A

chime may sound depending on the

situation.

Starting and driving 5-89

5-90 Starting and driving

Action to take:

Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place

the shift lever in the P (Park) position, turn

the engine off, restart the engine, resume

driving, and set the ICC system again. If

the warning (orange) continues to illumi-

nate, the steering assist is malfunctioning.

Although the vehicle is still drivable under

normal conditions, have the system

checked. It is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Steering assist maintenance

The camera is located above the inside

mirror.

To keep the proper operation of the

system and prevent a system malfunc-

tion, be sure to observe the following:

. Always keep the windshield clean.

. Do not attach a sticker (including

transparent material) or install an

accessory near the camera unit.

. Do not place reflective materials, such

as white paper or a mirror, on the

instrument panel. The reflection of

sunlight may adversely affect the

camera unit’s capability of detecting

the lane markers.

. Do not strike or damage the areas

around the camera unit. Do not touch

the camera lens or remove the screw

located on the camera unit.

If the camera unit is damaged due to an

accident, it is recommendedthat you visit

a NISSAN dealer.

Radio frequency statement:

For USA

FCC ID OAYARS4B

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment.

For Canada

Model: ARS4–B

IC: 4135A-ARS4B

FCC ID: OAYARS4B

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-

tion is subject to the following two con-

ditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR

d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appa-

reils radio exempts de licence. L’exploita-

tion est autorisee aux deux conditions

suivantes:

1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de

brouillage, et

2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter

tout brouillage radioelectrique subi,

meme si le brouillage est susceptible

d’en compromettre le fonctionne-

ment.

Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure In-

formation:

This equipment complies with FCC radia-

tion exposure limits set forth for an

uncontrolled environment.

This equipment should be installed and

operated with minimum distance of 30

cm between the radiator and your body.

The transmitter must not be co-located

or operating in conjunction with any

other antenna or transmitter.

Cet equipement est conforme aux limites

d’exposition aux rayonnements IC eta-

blies pour un environnement non con-

trole. Cet equipement doit etre installe et

utilise avec un minimum de 30 cm de

distance entre la source de rayonnement

et votre corps.

FCC Notice

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment.

CONVENTIONAL (fixed speed)

CRUISE CONTROL MODE

NOTE:

ProPILOT assist provides no approach

warnings, automatic braking, or steer-

ing assist in the conventional (fixed

speed) cruise control mode.

This mode allows driving at a speed

between 25 to 90 MPH (40 to 144 km/h)

without keeping your foot on the accel-

erator pedal.

WARNING

. In the conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode, a warning

chime does not sound to warn

you if you are too close to the

vehicle ahead, as neither the pre-

sence of the vehicle ahead nor

the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is

detected.

. Pay special attention to the dis-

tance between your vehicle and

the vehicle a head of you or a

collision could occur.

. Always confirm the setting in the

ICC system display.

. Do not use the conventional

(fixed speed) cruise control mode

when driving under the following

conditions:

— When it is not possible to keep

the vehicle at a set speed

— In heavy traffic or in traffic

that varies in speed

— On winding or hilly roads

— On slippery roads (rain, snow,

ice, etc.)

— In very windy areas

. Doing so could cause a loss of

vehicle control and result in an

accident.

WAF0063X

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control switches

1. RES+ switch:

Resumes set speed or increases speed

incrementally

2. CANCEL switch:

Deactivates the system without eras-

ing the set speed

3. ProPILOT Assist switch:

Turns the ProPILOT Assist system on

or off

4. SET- switch:

Sets desired cruise speed or reduces

speed incrementally

Starting and driving 5-91

5-92 Starting and driving

WAF0064X

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control mode display and indica-

tors

The display is located in the vehicle

information display.

1. Cruise indicator:

This indicator indicates the condition

of the ICC system depending on a

color.

Cruise control ON indicator (gray):

Indicates that the ProPILOT Assist

switch is on

Cruise control SET indicator (green):

Indicates that the cruising speed is

set

Cruise control warning (yellow): In-

dicates that there is a malfunction

in the ICC system

2. Set vehicle speed indicator:

This indicator indicates the set vehicle

speed.

WAF0065X

Operating conventional (fixed

speed) cruise control mode

To turn on the conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode, push and hold the

ProPILOT assist switch

for longer than

about 1.5 seconds.

When pushing the ProPILOT assist switch

on, the conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control mode display and indicators

are

displayed in the vehicle information dis-

play. After you hold the ProPILOT assist

switch on for longer than about 1.5

seconds, the ICC system display turns

off. The cruise indicator appears. You can

now set your desired cruising speed.

Pushing the ProPILOT assist switch again

will turn the system completely off. When

the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position, the system is also automatically

turned off.

To use the ICC system again, quickly push

and release the ProPILOT assist switch

(vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode) or push and hold it (conventional

cruise control mode) again to turn it on.

WARNING

To avoid accidentally engaging

cruise control, make sure to turn

the ProPILOT assist switch off when

not using the ICC system.

WAF0066X

To set cruising speed, accelerate your

vehicle to the desired speed, push the SET

—

switch and release it. (The color of

the cruise indicator changes to green and

set vehicle speed indicator comes on.)

Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

Your vehicle will maintain the set speed.

. To pass another vehicle, depress the

accelerator pedal. When you release

the pedal, the vehicle will return to the

previously set speed.

. The vehicle may not maintain the set

speed when going up or down steep

hills. If this happens, manually main-

tain vehicle speed.

To cancel the preset speed, use any of the

following methods:

1. Push the CANCEL switch. The vehicle

speed indicator will turn off.

2. Tap the brake pedal. The vehicle

speed indicator will turn off.

3. Turn the ProPILOT assist switch off.

Both the cruise indicator and vehicle

speed indicator will turn off.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use

one of the following three methods:

1. Depress the accelerator pedal. When

the vehicle attains the desired speed,

push and release the SET- switch.

2. Push and hold the RES+ switch. When

the vehicle attains the desired speed,

release the switch.

3. Push, then quickly release the RES+

switch. Each time you do this, the set

speed will increase by about 1 MPH (1.6

km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use

one of the following three methods:

1. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed,

push the SET— switch and release it.

2. Push and hold the SET- switch. Re-

lease the switch when the vehicle

slows down to the desired speed.

Starting and driving 5-93

5-94 Starting and driving

3. Push, then quickly release the SET—

switch. Each time you do this, the set

speed will decrease by about 1 MPH

(1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and

release the RES+ switch. The vehicle will

resume the last set cruising speed when

the vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40

km/h).

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use of the

Intelligent Driver Alertness system

could result in serious injury or

death.

. The I-DA system is only a warning

to inform the driver of a potential

lack of driver attention or drowsi-

ness. It will not steer the vehicle

or prevent loss of control.

. The I-DA system does not detect

and provide an alert of the dri-

ver’s lack of attention or fatigue

in every situation.

. It is the driver’s responsibility to:

— stay alert,

— drive safely,

— keep the vehicle in the travel-

ing lane,

— be in control of the vehicle at

all times,

— avoid driving when tired,

— avoid distractions (texting,

etc).

The I-DA system helps alert the driver if

the system detects a lack of attention or

driving fatigue.

The system monitors driving style and

steering behavior over a period of time,

and it detects changes from the normal

pattern. If the system detects that driver

attention is decreasing over a period of

time, the system uses audible and visual

warnings to suggest that the driver take a

break.

INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS

(I-DA) (if so equipped)

WAC0212X

INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS (I-

DA) SYSTEM OPERATION

If the system detects driver fatigue or that

driver attention is decreasing, the mes-

sage “Take a break?” appears in the

vehicle information display and a chime

sounds when the vehicle is driven at

speeds above 37 MPH (60 km/h).

The system continuously monitors driver

attention and can provide multiple warn-

ings per trip. The system resets and starts

reassessing driving style and steering

behavior when the ignition switch is

cycled from the ON to the OFF position

and back to the ON position.

WAC0213X

ATTENTION LEVEL INDICATOR

When the “Driver Attention” display is

selected, you can view your attention

level as detected by the system.

For more information see “Settings” (P.2-

21).

NOTE:

The attention level indicator consists of

eight levels.

When stopping the engine, the system

is reset.

Starting and driving 5-95

5-96 Starting and driving

WAF0512X

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE IN-

TELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS (I-

DA) SYSTEM

Perform the following steps to enable or

disable the I-DA system.

1. Press the

button until “Set-

tings” displays in the vehicle informa-

tion display and then press “OK”

button. Use the

button to select

“Driver Assistance”. Then press the

“OK” button.

2. Use the

button to select “Driver

Attention” and press the “OK” button

to turn on or off the Intelligent Driver

Alertness system.

NOTE:

The setting will be retained even if the

engine is restarted.

INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS (I-

DA) SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limita-

tions for the I-DA system. Failure to

operate the vehicle in accordance

with these system limitations could

result in serious injury or death.

. The I-DA system may not operate

properly and may not provide an

alert in the following conditions:

— Poor road conditions such as

an uneven road surface or pot

holes.

— Strong side wind.

— If you have adopted a sporty

driving style with higher cor-

nering speeds or higher rates

of acceleration.

— Frequent lane changes or

changes to vehicle speed.

. The I-DA system may not provide

an alert in the following condi-

tions:

— Vehicle speeds lower than 37

MPH (60 km/h).

— Short lapses of attention.

— Instantaneous distractions

such as dropping an object.

WAF0643X

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

If the I-DA system malfunctions, the

warning message will appear in the

vehicle information display and the func-

tion will be stopped automatically.

Action to take:

Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place

the vehicle in P (Park) position, turn the

engine off and restart the engine. If the

system warning message continues to

appear, have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

*: if so equipped

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use of the

AEB with pedestrian detection sys-

tem could result in serious injury or

death.

. The AEB with pedestrian detec-

tion system is a supplemental aid

to the driver. It is not a replace-

ment for the driver’s attention to

traffic conditions or responsibility

to drive safely. It cannot prevent

accidents due to carelessness or

dangerous driving techniques.

. The AEB with pedestrian detec-

tion system does not function in

all driving, traffic, weather and

road conditions.

The AEB with pedestrian detection sys-

tem can assist the driver when there is a

risk of a forward collision with the vehicle

ahead in the traveling lane or with a

pedestrian.

Starting and driving 5-97

AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING (AEB)

WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM*

5-98 Starting and driving

WAF0286X

The AEB with pedestrian detection sys-

tem uses a radar sensor

located on the

front of the vehicle to measure the

distance to the vehicle ahead in the same

lane.

For pedestrians, the AEB system uses a

camera

installed behind the windshield

in addition to the radar sensor.

JVS1117X

AEB emergency warning indicator

Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left

side)

AEB system warning light (on the meter

panel)

AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION

SYSTEM OPERATION

The AEB with pedestrian detection sys-

tem will function when your vehicle is

driven at speeds above approximately 3

MPH (5 km/h).

For the pedestrian detection function, the

AEB with pedestrian detection system

operates at speeds between 6 – 37 MPH

(10 – 60 km/h).

If a risk of a forward collision is detected,

the AEB with pedestrian detection system

will firstly provide the warning to the

driver by flashing the warning (yellow) in

the vehicle information display and pro-

viding an audible alert.

If the driver applies the brakes quickly and

forcefully after the warning, and the AEB

with pedestrian detection system detects

that there is still the possibility of a

forward collision, the system will auto-

matically increase the braking force.

If the driver does not take action, the AEB

with pedestrian detection system issues

the second visual (flashing) (red) and

audible warning. If the driver releases

the accelerator pedal, then the system

applies partial braking.

If the risk of a collision becomes immi-

nent, the AEB with pedestrian detection

system applies harder braking automati-

cally.

While the AEB with pedestrian detection

system is operating, you may hear the

sound of brake operation. This is normal

and indicates that the AEB with pedes-

trian detection system is operating prop-

erly.

NOTE:

The vehicle’s stop lights come on when

braking is performed by the AEB with

pedestrian detection system.

Depending on vehicle speed and distance

to the vehicle or pedestrian ahead, as well

as driving and roadway conditions, the

system may help the driver avoid a

forward collision or may help mitigate

the consequences of a collision should

one be unavoidable.

If the driver is handling the steering

wheel, accelerating or braking, the AEB

with pedestrian detection system will

function later or will not function.

The automatic braking will cease under

the following conditions:

. When the steering wheel is turned as

far as necessary to avoid a collision.

. When the accelerator pedal is de-

pressed.

. When there is no longer a vehicle or

pedestrian detected ahead.

If the AEB with pedestrian detection

system has stopped the vehicle, the

vehicle will remain at a standstill for

approximately 2 seconds before the

brakes are released.

Starting and driving 5-99

5-100 Starting and driving

JVS0971X

AEB system warning light (on the meter

panel)

Vehicle information display

Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left

side)

TURNING THE AEB WITH PEDES-

TRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM ON/OFF

Perform the following steps to turn the

AEB with pedestrian detection system on

or off.

1. Press the

button until “Set-

tings” appears in the vehicle informa-

tion display and then press “OK”

button. Use the

button to select

“Driver Assistance.” Then press the

“OK” button.

2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the “OK”

button.

3. Select “Emergency Brake” and press

the OK button.

4. Select “Front” and use the OK button

to turn the system on or off.

When the AEB with pedestrian detection

system is turned off, the AEB with pedes-

trian detection system warning light illu-

minates

NOTE:

. The AEB with pedestrian detection

system will be automatically turned

ON when the engine is restarted.

. The Intelligent Forward Collision

Warning (I-FCW) system is inte-

grated into the AEB system. There

is not a separate selection in the

display for the I-FCW system. When

the I-FCW system is also turned off.

AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION

SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limita-

tions for the AEB with pedestrian

detection system. Failure to operate

the vehicle in accordance with these

system limitations could result in

serious injury or death.

. The AEB with pedestrian detec-

tion system cannot detect all

vehicles or pedestrians under all

conditions.

. The AEB with pedestrian detec-

tion system does not detect the

following objects:

— Small pedestrians (including

small children), animals and

cyclists.

— Pedestrians in wheelchairs or

using mobile transport such

as scooters, child-operated

toys, or skateboards.

— Pedestrians who are seated or

otherwise not in a full upright

standing or walking position.

— Obstacles on the roadway

— Oncoming vehicles

— Crossing vehicles

— Obstacles on the roadside

. The AEB with pedestrian detec-

tion system has some perfor-

mance limitations.

— If a stationary vehicle is in the

vehicle’s path, the AEB with

pedestrian detection system

will not function when the

vehicle is driven at speeds

over approximately 50 MPH

(80 km/h).

— For pedestrian detection, the

AEB with pedestrian detection

system will not function when

the vehicle is driven at speeds

over approximately 37 MPH

(60 km/h) or below approxi-

mately 6 MPH (10 km/h).

. The AEB with pedestrian detec-

tion system may not function for

pedestrians in darkness or in

tunnels, even if there is street

lighting in the area.

. For pedestrians, the AEB with

pedestrian detection system will

not issue the first warning.

. The AEB with pedestrian detec-

tion system may not function if

the vehicle ahead is narrow (for

example a motorcycle).

. The AEB with pedestrian detec-

tion system may not function if

speed difference between the

two vehicles is too small.

. The radar sensor may not func-

tion properly or detect a vehicle

ahead in the following conditions:

— Poor visibility (conditions such

as rain, snow, fog, dust

storms, sandstorms, and road

spray from other vehicles)

— Driving on a steep downhill

slope or roads with sharp

curves.

— Driving on a bumpy road sur-

face, such as an uneven dirt

road.

— If dirt, ice, snow or other ma-

terial is covering the radar

sensor area.

— Interference by other radar

sources.

. The camera may not function

properly or detect a vehicle

ahead in the following conditions:

Starting and driving 5-101

5-102 Starting and driving

— The camera area of wind-

shield is fogged up, or covered

with dirt, water drops, ice,

snow, etc.

— Strong light (for example, sun-

light or high beams from on-

coming vehicles) enters the

front camera. Strong light

causes the area around the

pedestrian to be cast in a

shadow, making it difficult to

see.

— A sudden change in bright-

ness occurs. (For example,

when the vehicle enters or

exits a tunnel or a shaded

area or lightning flashes.)

— The poor contrast of a person

to the background, such as

having clothing color or pat-

tern which is similar to the

background.

— The pedestrian’s profile is par-

tially obscured or unidentifi-

able due to the pedestrian

transporting cargo, wearing

bulky or very loose-fitting

clothing or accessories.

. The system performance may

degrade in the following condi-

tions:

— The vehicle is driven on a

slippery road.

— The vehicle is driven on a

slope.

— Excessively heavy baggage is

loaded in the rear seat or the

cargo area of your vehicle.

. The system is designed to auto-

matically check the sensor (radar

and camera)’s functionality, with-

in certain limitations. The system

may not detect blockage of sen-

sor areas covered by ice, snow or

stickers, for example. In these

cases, the system may not be

able to warn the driver properly.

Be sure that you check, clean and

clear sensor areas regularly.

. In some road and traffic condi-

tions, the AEB with pedestrian

detection system may unexpect-

edly apply partial braking. When

acceleration is necessary, de-

press the accelerator pedal to

override the system.

. The AEB with pedestrian detec-

tion system may operate when

the following are similar to the

outlines of vehicles or pedes-

trians, or if they are the same size

and position as a vehicle’s tail

lights.

— Paint or a pattern on the road

or a wall (including faded and

unusual road markings).

— A shape formed by road struc-

tures ahead (such as tunnels,

viaducts, traffic signs, reflec-

tors installed on the side of

vehicles, reflection sheets,

and guardrails).

. The AEB with pedestrian detec-

tion system may react to:

— Obstacles on the roadside

(traffic sign, guardrail, pedes-

trian, vehicle, etc.)

— Obstacles above road (low

bridge, traffic sign, etc.)

— Obstacles on the road surface

(railroad track, grate, steel

plate, etc.)

— Obstacles in the parking gar-

age (beam, etc.)

— Pedestrians approaching the

traveling lane

— Vehicles, pedestrians or ob-

jects in adjacent lane or close

to the vehicle

— Oncoming pedestrians

. Braking distances increase on

slippery surfaces.

. Excessive noise will interfere with

the warning chime sound, and

the chime may not be heard.

Starting and driving 5-103

5-104 Starting and driving

SSD0253

When driving on some roads, such as

winding, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or

roads which are under construction, the

sensor may detect vehicles in a different

lane, or may temporarily not detect a

vehicle traveling ahead. This may cause

the system to work inappropriately.

The detection of vehicles may also be

affected by vehicle operation (steering

maneuver or traveling position in the

lane, etc.) or vehicle condition. If this

occurs, the system may warn you by

blinking the system indicator and

sounding the chime unexpectedly. You

will have to manually control the proper

distance away from the vehicle travel-

ing ahead.

JVS0972X

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAIL-

ABLE

Condition A

In the following conditions, the warning

light will blink and the system will be

turned off automatically.

. The radar sensor picks up interference

from another radar source.

. The camera area of windshield is

misted or frozen.

. Strong light is shining from the front.

. The cabin temperature is over ap-

proximately 104°F (40°C) in direct sun-

light.

. The camera area of windshield glass is

continuously covered with dirt, etc.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer

exist, the AEB with pedestrian detection

system will resume automatically.

NOTE:

When the inside of the windshield on

camera area is misted or frozen, it will

take a period of time to remove it after

air conditioner turns on. If dirt appears

on this area, it is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer.

Condition B

In the following condition, the “Forward

Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front

Sensor Blocked” or “Unavailable: Front

Radar Obstruction” warning message will

appear in the vehicle information display.

. The sensor area of the front of the

vehicle is covered with dirt or is

obstructed

Action to take:

If the message appears, stop the vehicle

in a safe place and turn the engine off.

Clean the radar cover on the front of the

vehicle with a soft cloth, and restart the

engine. If the warning message continues

to illuminate, have the AEB with pedes-

trian detection system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

. When driving on roads with limited

road structures or buildings (for ex-

ample, long bridges, deserts, snow

fields, driving next to long walls).

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer

exist, the AEB with pedestrian detection

system will resume automatically.

Condition C

When VDC system is OFF, the AEB brake

will not operate. In this case only visible

and audible warning operates. The AEB

system warning light (orange) will illumi-

nate.

Action to take:

When VDC system is ON, the AEB with

pedestrian detection system will resume

automatically.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

If the AEB with pedestrian detection

system malfunctions, it will be turned off

automatically, a chime will sound, the AEB

system warning light will (orange) will

illuminate and the warning message

“Malfunction” will appear in the vehicle

information display.

Action to take:

If the warning light (orange) comes on,

stop the vehicle in a safe location. Turn

the engine off and restart the engine. If

the warning light continues to illuminate,

have the AEB with pedestrian detection

system checked. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Starting and driving 5-105

5-106 Starting and driving

WAF0286X

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The radar sensor is located on the front

of the vehicle. The camera

is located on

the upper side of the windshield.

To keep the AEB with pedestrian detec-

tion system operating properly, be sure to

observe the following:

. Always keep the sensor area on the

front of the vehicle and windshield

clean.

. Do not strike or damage the areas

around the sensors (ex. bumper, wind-

shield).

. Do not cover or attach stickers or

similar objects on the front of the

vehicle near the sensor area. This

could cause failure or malfunction.

. Do not attach metallic objects near

the radar sensor area (brush guard,

etc.). This could cause failure or mal-

function.

. Do not place reflective materials, such

as white paper or a mirror, on the

instrument panel. The reflection of

sunlight may adversely affect the

camera unit’s detection capability.

. Do not alter, remove or paint the front

of the vehicle near the sensor area.

Before customizing or restoring the

sensor area, it is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer.

Radio frequency statement

For USA

FCC ID OAYARS4B

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment.

For Canada

Model: ARS4–B

IC: 4135A-ARS4B

FCC ID: OAYARS4B

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-

tion is subject to the following two con-

ditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR

d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appa-

reils radio exempts de licence. L’exploita-

tion est autorisee aux deux conditions

suivantes:

1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de

brouillage, et

2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter

tout brouillage radioelectrique subi,

meme si le brouillage est susceptible

d’en compromettre le fonctionne-

ment.

Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure In-

formation:

This equipment complies with FCC radia-

tion exposure limits set forth for an

uncontrolled environment.

This equipment should be installed and

operated with minimum distance of 30

cm between the radiator and your body.

The transmitter must not be co-located

or operating in conjunction with any

other antenna or transmitter.

Cet equipement est conforme aux limites

d’exposition aux rayonnements IC eta-

blies pour un environnement non con-

trole. Cet equipement doit etre installe et

utilise avec un minimum de 30 cm de

distance entre la source de rayonnement

et votre corps.

FCC Notice

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use of the I-

FCW system could result in serious

injury or death.

. The I-FCW system helps warn the

driver before a collision but will

not avoid a collision. It is the

driver’s responsibility to stay

alert, drive safely and be in con-

trol of the vehicle at all times.

The I-FCW system can help alert the driver

when there is a sudden braking of a

second vehicle traveling in front of the

vehicle ahead in the same lane.

WAF0285X

The I-FCW system uses a radar sensor

located on the front of the vehicle to

measure the distance to a second vehicle

ahead in the same lane.

Starting and driving 5-107

INTELLIGENT FORWARD COLLISION

WARNING (I-FCW)

5-108 Starting and driving

WAF0349X

Vehicle ahead detection indicator (on the

vehicle information display)

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) sys-

tem warning light (on the meter panel)

JVS0294X

I-FCW SYSTEM OPERATION

The I-FCW system operates at speeds

above approximately 3 MPH (5 km/h).

If there is a potential risk of a forward

collision, the I-FCW system will warn the

driver by blinking the vehicle ahead

detection indicator, and sounding an

audible alert.

Starting and driving 5-109

5-110 Starting and driving

JVS0971X

AEB system warning light (on the meter

panel)

Vehicle information display

Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left

side)

TURNING THE I-FCW SYSTEM ON/

OFF

Perform the following steps to turn the I-

FCW system on or off.

1. Press the

button until “Set-

tings” appears in the vehicle informa-

tion display and then press “OK”

button. Use the

button to select

“Driver Assistance.” Then press the

“OK” button.

2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the “OK”

button.

3. Select “Emergency Brake” and press

the OK button.

4. Select “Front” and use the OK button

to turn the system on or off.

When the I-FCW system is turned off, the

AEB system warning light (orange)

illuminates.

NOTE:

. The I-FCW system will be automati-

cally turned on when the engine is

restarted.

. The I-FCW system is integrated into

the AEB system. There is not a

separate selection in the display for

the I-FCW system. When the AEB

system is turned off, the I-FCW

system is also turned off.

JVS0295X

Illustration A

JVS0296X

Illustration B

JVS0297X

Illustration C

Starting and driving 5-111

5-112 Starting and driving

JVS0298X

Illustration D

I-FCW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limita-

tions for the I-FCW system. Failure to

operate the vehicle in accordance

with these system limitations could

result in serious injury or death.

. The I-FCW system cannot detect

all vehicles under all conditions.

. The radar sensor does not detect

the following objects:

— Pedestrians, animals or obsta-

cles in the roadway

— Oncoming vehicles

— Crossing vehicles

. (Illustration A) The I-FCW system

does not function when a vehicle

ahead is a narrow vehicle, such as

a motorcycle.

. The radar sensor may not detect

a vehicle ahead in the following

conditions:

— Snow or heavy rain

— Dirt, ice, snow or other materi-

al covering the radar sensor

— Interference by other radar

sources

— Snow or road spray from tra-

velling vehicles.

— Driving in a tunnel

. (Illustration B) When the vehicle

ahead is being towed.

. (Illustration C) When the distance

to the vehicle ahead is too close,

the beam of the radar sensor is

obstructed.

. (Illustration D) When driving on a

steep downhill slope or roads

with sharp curves.

. The system is designed to auto-

matically check the sensor’s func-

tionality, within certain

limitations. The system may not

detect some forms of obstruction

of the sensor area such as ice,

snow, stickers, for example. In

these cases, the system may not

be able to warn the driver prop-

erly. Be sure that you check, clean

and clear the sensor area regu-

larly.

. Excessive noise will interfere with

the warning chime sound, and

the chime may not be heard.

SSD0253

When driving on some roads, such as

winding, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or

roads which are under construction, the

radar sensor may detect vehicles in a

different lane, or may temporarily not

detect a vehicle traveling ahead. This

may cause the I-FCW system to work

inappropriately.

The detection of vehicles may also be

affected by vehicle operation (steering

maneuver or traveling position in the

lane, etc.) or vehicle condition. If this

occurs, the system may warn you by

blinking the vehicle ahead detection

indicator and sounding the chime un-

expectedly. You will have to manually

control the proper distance away from

the vehicle traveling ahead.

Starting and driving 5-113

5-114 Starting and driving

JVS0972X

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAIL-

ABLE

Condition A

When the radar sensor picks up interfer-

ence from another radar source, making

it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead,

the I-FCW system is automatically turned

off. The AEB system warning light (or-

ange) will illuminate.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer

exist, the I-FCW system will resume auto-

matically.

Condition B

Under the following conditions, making it

impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the

I-FCW system is automatically turned off.

The AEB system warning light (orange)

will illuminate and the “Forward Driving

Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor

Blocked” or “Unavailable: Front Radar

Obstruction” warning message will ap-

pear in the vehicle information display.

. When the sensor area of the front

bumper is covered with dirt or is

obstructed

Action to take:

If the AEB system warning light (orange)

comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe place,

place the shift lever in the P (Park)

position and turn the engine off. Clean

the radar cover below the front bumper

with a soft cloth, and restart the engine. If

the warning light continues to illuminate,

have the I-FCW system checked. It is

recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

. When driving on roads with limited

road structures or buildings (for ex-

ample, long bridges, deserts, snow

fields, driving next to long walls)

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer

exist, the I-FCW system will resume auto-

matically.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

If the I-FCW system malfunctions, it will be

turned off automatically, a chime will

sound, the AEB system warning light

(orange) will illuminate and the warning

message "Malfunction" will appear in the

vehicle information display.

Action to take:

If the warning light (orange) illuminates,

stop the vehicle in a safe location. Turn

the engine off and restart the engine. If

the warning light continues to illuminate,

have the I-FCW system checked. It is

recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

WAF0285X

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The sensor is located on the front of

the vehicle.

To keep the system operating properly,

be sure to observe the following:

. Always keep the sensor area of the

front bumper clean.

. Do not strike or damage the areas

around the sensor.

. Do not cover or attach stickers or

similar objects on the front bumper

near the sensor area. This could cause

failure or malfunction.

. Do not attach metallic objects near

the sensor area (brush guard, etc.).

This could cause failure or malfunc-

tion.

. Do not alter, remove or paint the front

bumper. It is recommended you con-

tact a NISSAN dealer before customiz-

ing or restoring the front bumper.

Radio frequency statement

For USA

FCC ID OAYARS4B

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment.

For Canada

Model: ARS4–B

IC: 4135A-ARS4B

FCC ID: OAYARS4B

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-

tion is subject to the following two con-

ditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR

d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appa-

reils radio exempts de licence. L’exploita-

tion est autorisee aux deux conditions

suivantes:

1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de

brouillage, et

2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter

tout brouillage radioelectrique subi,

meme si le brouillage est susceptible

d’en compromettre le fonctionne-

ment.

Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure In-

formation:

This equipment complies with FCC radia-

tion exposure limits set forth for an

uncontrolled environment.

This equipment should be installed and

operated with minimum distance of 30

cm between the radiator and your body.

The transmitter must not be co-located

or operating in conjunction with any

other antenna or transmitter.

Starting and driving 5-115

5-116 Starting and driving

Cet equipement est conforme aux limites

d’exposition aux rayonnements IC eta-

blies pour un environnement non con-

trole. Cet equipement doit etre installe et

utilise avec un minimum de 30 cm de

distance entre la source de rayonnement

et votre corps.

FCC Notice

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use of the

RAB system could result in serious

injury or death.

. The RAB system is a supplemen-

tal aid to the driver. It is not a

replacement for proper driving

procedures. Always use the side

and rear mirrors and turn and

look in the direction you will

move before and while backing

up. Never rely solely on the RAB

system. It is the driver’s respon-

sibility to stay alert, drive safely,

and be in control of the vehicle at

all times.

. There is a limitation to the RAB

system capability. The RAB sys-

tem is not effective in all situa-

tions.

The RAB system can assist the driver

when the vehicle is backing up and

approaching objects directly behind the

vehicle.

WAF0077X

The RAB system detects obstacles behind

the vehicle using the rear sonar

located

on the rear bumper.

NOTE:

You can temporarily cancel the sonar

function in the vehicle, but the RAB

system will continue to operate. For

additional information, see “Rear Sonar

System (RSS)” (P.5-136).

REAR AUTOMATIC BRAKING (RAB)

WAF0068X

RAB system warning light and RAB sys-

tem warning indicator

Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left

side)

Center display (if so equipped)

RAB SYSTEM OPERATION

When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)

position and the vehicle speed is less than

approximately 9 MPH (15 km/h), the RAB

system operates.

If a risk of a collision with an obstacle is

detected when your vehicle is backing up,

the RAB system warning indicator will

flash in the vehicle information display, a

red frame will appear in the center display

(models with the Intelligent Around

View

Monitor system), and the system

will chime three times. The system will

then automatically apply the brakes. After

the automatic brake application, the dri-

ver must depress the brake pedal to

maintain brake pressure.

NOTE:

. The stop lights of the vehicle come

on when braking is performed by

the RAB system.

. When the brakes operate, a noise

may be heard. This is not a malfunc-

tion.

TURNING THE RAB SYSTEM ON/OFF

Perform the following steps to turn the

RAB system ON or OFF.

Starting and driving 5-117

5-118 Starting and driving

WAF0069X

1. Press the button until “Set-

tings” appears in the vehicle informa-

tion display and then press OK button.

Use the

button to select “Driver

Assistance.” Then press the OK button.

2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the OK

button.

3. Select “Emergency Brake” and press

the OK button.

4. To set the RAB system to on or off, use

the OK button to check the box for

“Rear.”

When the RAB system is turned off, the

RAB system warning light illuminates.

NOTE:

The RAB system will be automatically

turned on when the engine is restarted.

RAB SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limita-

tions for the RAB system. Failure to

follow the warnings and instructions

for proper use of the RAB system

could result in serious injury or

death.

. When the vehicle approaches an

obstacle while the accelerator or

brake pedal is depressed, the

function may not operate or the

start of the operation may be

delayed. The RAB system may

not operate or may not perform

sufficiently due to vehicle condi-

tions, driving conditions, the traf-

fic environment, the weather,

road surface conditions, etc. Do

not wait for the system to oper-

ate. Operate the brake pedal by

yourself as soon as necessary.

. If it is necessary to override RAB

operation, strongly press the ac-

celerator pedal.

. Always check your surroundings

and turn to check what is behind

you before and while backing up.

The RAB system detects station-

ary objects behind the vehicle.

The RAB system does not detect

the following objects:

— Moving objects

— Low objects

— Narrow objects

— Wedge-shaped objects

— Objects close to the bumper

(less than approximately 1 ft

[30 cm])

— Objects that suddenly appear

— Thin objects such as rope,

wire, chain, etc.

. The RAB system may not operate

for the following obstacles:

— Obstacles located high off the

ground

— Obstacles in a position offset

from your vehicle

— Obstacles, such as spongy

materials or snow, that have

soft outer surfaces and can

easily absorb a sound wave

. The RAB system may not operate

in the following conditions:

— There is rain, snow, ice, dirt,

etc., attached to the sonar

sensors.

— A loud sound is heard in the

area around the vehicle.

— The surface of the obstacle is

diagonal to the rear of the

vehicle.

. The RAB system may uninten-

tionally operate in the following

conditions:

— There is overgrown grass in

the area around the vehicle.

— There is a structure (e.g., a

wall, toll gate equipment, a

narrow tunnel, a parking lot

gate) near the side of the

vehicle.

— There are bumps, protrusions,

or manhole covers on the

road surface.

— The vehicle drives through a

draped flag or a curtain.

— There is an accumulation of

snow or ice behind the vehi-

cle.

— An ultrasonic wave source,

such as another vehicle’s so-

nar, is near the vehicle.

Starting and driving 5-119

5-120 Starting and driving

. Once the automatic brake control

operates, it does not operate

again if the vehicle approaches

the same obstacle.

. The automatic brake control can

only operate for a short period of

time. Therefore, the driver must

depress the brake pedal.

. In the following situations, the

RAB system may not operate

properly or may not function

sufficiently:

— The vehicle is driven in bad

weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).

— The vehicle is driven on a

steep hill.

— The vehicle’s posture is chan-

ged (e.g., when driving over a

bump).

— The vehicle is driven on a

slippery road.

— The vehicle is turned sharply

by turning the steering wheel

fully.

— Snow chains are used.

— Wheels or tires other than

NISSAN recommended are

used.

— The brakes are cold at low

ambient temperatures or im-

mediately after driving has

started.

— The braking force becomes

poor due to wet brakes after

driving through a puddle or

washing the vehicle.

. Turn the RAB system off in the

following conditions to prevent

the occurrence of an unexpected

accident resulting from sudden

system operation:

— The vehicle is towed.

— The vehicle is carried on a

flatbed truck.

— The vehicle is on the chassis

dynamometer.

— The vehicle drives on an un-

even road surface.

— Suspension parts other than

those designated as genuine

parts are used. (If the vehicle

height or the vehicle body

inclination is changed, the

system may not detect an

obstacle correctly.)

. Excessive noise (e.g., audio sys-

tem volume, an open vehicle win-

dow) will interfere with the chime

sound, and it may not be heard.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

If the RAB system malfunctions, it will be

turned off automatically, the RAB system

warning light will illuminate, and the

“Malfunction” warning message will ap-

pear in the vehicle information display.

Action to take

If the warning light illuminates, park the

vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine

off, and restart the engine. If the warning

light continues to illuminate, have the

RAB system checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

NOTE:

If the RAB system cannot be operated

temporarily, the RAB system warning

light blinks.

WAF0077X

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

Observe the following items to ensure

proper operation of the system:

. Always keep the rear sonar

clean.

. If the rear sonar are dirty, wipe them

off with a soft cloth while being careful

to not damage them.

. Do not subject the area around the

rear sonar

to strong impact. Also, do

not remove or disassemble the rear

sonar. If the rear sonar and peripheral

areas are deformed in an accident,

etc., have the sensors checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

. Do not install any stickers (including

transparent stickers) or accessories

on the rear sonar

and their sur-

rounding areas. This may cause a

malfunction or improper operation.

Starting and driving 5-121

5-122 Starting and driving

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000

km), follow these recommendations

to obtain maximum engine perfor-

mance and ensure the future relia-

bility and economy of your new

vehicle. Failure to follow these re-

commendations may result in shor-

tened engine life and reduced engine

performance.

. Avoid driving for long periods at con-

stant speed, either fast or slow. Do not

run the engine over 4,000 rpm.

. Do not accelerate at full throttle in any

gear.

. Avoid quick starts.

. Avoid hard braking as much as possi-

ble.

Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient

Driving Tips to help you achieve the most

fuel economy from your vehicle.

1. Use smooth accelerator and brake

pedal application.

Avoid rapid starts and stops.

Use smooth, gentle accelerator and

brake application whenever possi-

ble.

Maintain constant speed while

commuting and coast whenever

possible.

2. Maintain constant speed.

Look ahead to try and anticipate

and minimize stops.

Synchronizing your speed with traf-

fic lights allows you to reduce your

number of stops.

Maintaining a steady speed can

minimize red light stops and im-

prove fuel efficiency.

3. Use air conditioning (A/C) at higher

vehicle speeds.

Below 40 MPH (64 km/h), it is more

efficient to open windows to cool

the vehicle due to reduced engine

load.

Above 40 MPH (64 km/h), it is more

efficient to use A/C to cool the

vehicle due to increased aerody-

namic drag.

Recirculating the cool air in the

cabin when the A/C is on reduces

cooling load.

4. Drive at economical speeds and dis-

tances.

Observing the speed limit and not

exceeding 60 MPH (97 km/h)

(where legally allowed) can improve

fuel efficiency due to reduced aero-

dynamic drag.

Maintaining a safe following dis-

tance behind other vehicles re-

duces unnecessary braking.

Safely monitoring traffic to antici-

pate changes in speed permits

reduced braking and smooth accel-

eration changes.

Select a gear range suitable to road

conditions.

5. Use cruise control.

Using cruise control during highway

driving helps maintain a steady

speed.

Cruise control is particularly effec-

tive in providing fuel savings when

driving on flat terrains.

6. Plan for the shortest route.

Utilize a map or navigation system

to determine the best route to save

time.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS

7. Avoid idling.

Shutting off your engine when safe

for stops exceeding 30-60 seconds

saves fuel and reduces emissions.

8. Buy an automated pass for toll roads.

Automated passes permit drivers to

use special lanes to maintain cruis-

ing speed through the toll and

avoid stopping and starting.

9. Winter warm up.

Limit idling time to minimize impact

to fuel economy.

Vehicles typically need no more

than 30 seconds of idling at start-

up to effectively circulate the en-

gine oil before driving.

Your vehicle will reach its ideal

operating temperature more

quickly while driving versus idling.

10. Keeping your vehicle cool.

Park your vehicle in a covered

parking area or in the shade when-

ever possible.

When entering a hot vehicle, open-

ing the windows will help to reduce

the inside temperature faster, re-

sulting in reduced demand on your

A/C system.

. Keep your engine tuned up.

. Follow the recommended scheduled

maintenance.

. Keep the tires inflated to the correct

pressure. Low tire pressure increases

tire wear and lowers fuel economy.

. Keep the wheels in correct alignment.

Improper alignment increases tire

wear and lowers fuel economy.

. Use the recommended viscosity en-

gine oil. (See “Engine oil and oil filter

recommendation” (P.10-5).)

If any malfunction occurs in the Intelligent

4x4 system while the engine is running,

warning messages appear in the vehicle

information display.

Starting and driving 5-123

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY INTELLIGENT 4X4 (if so equipped)

5-124 Starting and driving

JVS1120X

If the “AWD Error” warning appears,

there may be a malfunction in the In-

telligent 4x4 system. Reduce vehicle

speed and have your vehicle checked by

a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

The “AWD High Temp. Stop vehicle” (high

temperature) warning

may appear

while trying to free a stuck vehicle due

to increased oil temperature. The driving

mode may change to Two-Wheel Drive

(2WD). If this warning is displayed, stop

the vehicle with the engine idling, as soon

as it is safe to do so. Then if the warning

turns off, you can continue driving.

The “Tire Size Incorrect” warning

may

appear if there is a large difference

between the diameters of front and rear

wheels. Pull off the road in a safe area,

with the engine idling. Check that all tire

sizes are the same, that the tire pressure

is correct and that the tires are not

excessively worn. Turn off the Intelligent

4x4 LOCK switch and do not drive fast.

If any warning message continues to be

displayed, have your vehicle checked by a

NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

WARNING

. For AWD equipped vehicles, do

not attempt to raise two wheels

off the ground and shift the

transmission to any drive or re-

verse position with the engine

running. Doing so may result in

drivetrain damage or unexpected

vehicle movement which could

result in serious vehicle damage

or personal injury.

. Do not attempt to test an AWD

equipped vehicle on a 2–wheel

dynamometer (such as the dy-

namometers used by some

states for emissions testing) or

similar equipment even if the

other two wheels are raised off

the ground. Make sure that you

inform the test facility personnel

that your vehicle is equipped with

AWD before it is placed on a

dynamometer. Using the wrong

test equipment may result in

drive train damage or unex-

pected vehicle movement which

could result in serious vehicle

damage or personal injury.

CAUTION

. Do not operate the engine on a

free roller when any of the wheels

raised.

. The power train may be damaged

if you continue driving with the

“AWD Error” warning on.

. If the warning message remains

on after the above operation,

have your vehicle checked as

soon as possible. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

. If the “AWD Error” warning ap-

pears while driving, there may be

a malfunction in the AWD system.

Reduce the vehicle speed and

have your vehicle checked as

soon as possible. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

. Never drive on dry, hard surface

roads in the LOCK mode, as this

will overload the powertrain and

may cause a serious malfunction.

JVS1024X

INTELLIGENT 4X4 LOCK SWITCH

OPERATIONS

The Intelligent 4x4 LOCK switch is located

on the lower side of the instrument panel.

This switch is used to select the AUTO or

LOCK mode depending on the driving

conditions.

LOCK mode:

The AWD LOCK indicator light will illumi-

nate.

AUTO mode:

The AWD LOCK indicator light will turn off.

Each time you push the switch, the AWD

mode will switch: AUTO ? LOCK ? AUTO.

Starting and driving 5-125

5-126 Starting and driving

AWD mode Wheels driven AWD LOCK indicator light

Use conditions

AUTO

Distribution of torque to

the front and rear wheels

changes automatically,

depending on road condi-

tions encountered [ratio;

100 : 0 /? 50 : 50]. This

results in improved driving

stability.*1

For driving on paved

or slippery roads

LOCK All-Wheel Drive (AWD) *2*3*

For driving on rough

roads

*1: When the rotation difference between the

front and rear wheels is large, the AWD

mode may change from AUTO to LOCK

for a while, however, this is not a mal-

function.

*2: The LOCK mode will change to the AUTO

mode automatically when the vehicle has

been driven at a high speed. The AWD

LOCK indicator light turns off.

*3: The LOCK mode will automatically be

cancelled when the ignition switch is

placed in the OFF position.

. The AWD torque distribution between

the front and rear wheels can be

displayed in the vehicle information

display. See “Vehicle information dis-

play” (P.2-19).

. If the Intelligent 4x4 LOCK switch is

operated while accelerating or decel-

erating, or if the ignition switch is

turned off, you may feel a jolt. This is

normal.

. The oil temperature of the powertrain

parts will increase if the vehicle is

continuously operated under condi-

tions where the difference in rotation

between the front and rear wheels is

large (wheel slip), such as when driving

the vehicle on rough roads, through

sand or mud, or freeing a stuck

vehicle. In these cases, the master

warning light illuminates and the

AWD mode changes to 2WD to protect

the powertrain parts. Stop driving

with the engine idling and wait until

the warning light turns off and the

AWD returns to the AUTO mode. If the

warning light remains on, have your

vehicle checked as soon as possible. It

is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING

. When driving straight, shift the

Intelligent 4x4 LOCK switch to

AUTO. Do not operate the Intelli-

gent 4x4 LOCK switch when mak-

ing a turn or backing up.

. Do not operate the Intelligent 4x4

LOCK switch with the front wheel

spinning.

. Engine idling speed is high while

warming up the engine. Be espe-

cially careful when starting or

driving on slippery surfaces.

. When turning the vehicle in LOCK

mode on paved roads, you may

feel a braking effect. This is a

normal condition of the AWD

model.

SSD0488

WARNING

. Do not stop or park the vehicle

over flammable materials such as

dry grass, waste paper or rags.

They may ignite and cause a fire.

. Never leave the engine running

while the vehicle is unattended.

. Do not leave children unattended

inside the vehicle. They could

unknowingly activate switches

or controls. Unattended children

could become involved in serious

accidents.

. To help avoid risk of injury or

death through unintended opera-

tion of the vehicle and/or its

systems, do not leave children,

people who require the assis-

tance of others or pets unat-

tended in your vehicle.

Additionally, the temperature in-

side a closed vehicle on a warm

day can quickly become high

enough to cause a significant risk

of injury or death to people and

pets.

. Safe parking procedures require

that both the parking brake be

applied and the transmission

placed into P (Park) for Continu-

ously Variable Transmission (CVT)

model or in an appropriate gear

for Manual Transmission (MT)

model. Failure to do so could

cause the vehicle to move unex-

pectedly or roll away and result in

an accident.

. Make sure the CVT shift lever has

been pushed as far forward as it

can go and cannot be moved

without depressing the foot

brake pedal.

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) models:

Move the shift lever to the P (Park)

position.

Manual Transmission (MT) models:

Move the shift lever to the R (Reverse)

gear. When parking on an uphill grade,

place the shift lever in the 1st gear.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from roll-

ing into the street when parked on a

sloping drive way, it is a good practice

to turn the wheels as illustrated.

HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB:

Turn the wheels into the curb and

move the vehicle forward until the

curb side wheel gently touches the

Starting and driving 5-127

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

5-128 Starting and driving

curb.

HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB:

Turn the wheels away from the

curb and move the vehicle back

until the curb side wheel gently

touches the curb.

HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO

CURB:

Turn the wheels toward the side of

the road so the vehicle will move

away from the center of the road if

it moves.

4. Models with Intelligent Key system:

Place the ignition switch in the OFF

position.

Models without Intelligent Key sys-

tem:

Place the ignition switch in the LOCK

position and remove the key.

WARNING

. If the engine is not running or is

turned off while driving, the

power assist for the steering will

not work. Steering will be harder

to operate.

. When the electric power steering

warning light illuminates with the

engine running, the power assist

for the steering will cease opera-

tion. You will still have control of

the vehicle but the steering will

be harder to operate.

The electric power steering is designed to

provide power assist while driving to

operate the steering wheel with light

force.

When the steering wheel is operated

repeatedly or continuously while parking

or driving at a very low speed, the power

assist for the steering wheel will be

reduced. This is to prevent overheating

of the electric power steering and protect

it from getting damaged. While the power

assist is reduced, steering wheel opera-

tion will become heavy. When the tem-

perature of the electric power steering

goes down, the power assist level will

return to normal. Avoid repeating such

steering wheel operations that could

cause the electric power steering to over-

heat.

You may hear a noise when the steering

wheel is operated quickly. However, this is

not a malfunction.

If the electric power steering warning

light

illuminates while the engine is

running, it may indicate the electric

power steering is not functioning prop-

erly and may need servicing. Have the

electric power steering checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service. (See “Electric power

steering warning light” (P.2-14).)

When the electric power steering warning

light illuminates with the engine running,

the power assist for the steering will

cease operation. You will still have control

of the vehicle. However, greater steering

effort is needed, especially in sharp turns

and at low speeds.

The mode of the Power Steering can be

changed to:

. NORMAL

. SPORT

For more information, see “Vehicle infor-

mation display” (P.2-19).

ELECTRIC POWER STEERING

BRAKING PRECAUTIONS

The brake system has two separate

hydraulic circuits. If one circuit malfunc-

tions, you will still have braking at two

wheels.

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using

engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you

can stop the vehicle by depressing the

brake pedal. However, greater foot pres-

sure on the brake pedal will be required to

stop the vehicle and the stopping dis-

tance will be longer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake

pedal while driving. This will cause over-

heating of the brakes, wearing out the

brake pads faster and reduce gas mile-

age.

To help reduce brake wear and to prevent

the brakes from overheating, reduce

speed and downshift to a lower gear

before going down a slope or long grade.

Overheated brakes may reduce braking

performance and could result in loss of

vehicle control.

WARNING

. While driving on a slippery sur-

face, be careful when braking,

accelerating or downshifting.

Abrupt braking or accelerating

could cause the wheels to skid

and result in an accident.

. If the engine is not running or is

turned off while driving, the

power assist for the brakes will

not work. Braking will be harder.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven

through water, the brakes may get wet.

As a result, your braking distance will be

longer and the vehicle may pull to one

side during braking.

To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe

speed while lightly tapping the brake

pedal to heat-up the brakes. Do this until

the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving

the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes

function correctly.

Parking brake break-in

Break in the parking brake shoes when-

ever the stopping effect of the parking

brake is weakened or whenever the

parking brake shoes and/or drums/ro-

tors are replaced, in order to assure the

best braking performance.

This procedure is described in the vehicle

service manual. It is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Starting and driving 5-129

BRAKE SYSTEM

5-130 Starting and driving

BRAKE ASSIST

When the force applied to the brake pedal

exceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist is

activated generating greater braking

force than a conventional brake booster

even with light pedal force.

WARNING

The Brake Assist is only an aid to

assist braking operation and is not a

collision warning or avoidance de-

vice. It is the driver’s responsibility to

stay alert, drive safely and be in

control of the vehicle at all times.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)

WARNING

. The Anti-lock Braking System

(ABS) is a sophisticated device,

but it cannot prevent accidents

resulting from careless or dan-

gerous driving techniques. It can

help maintain vehicle control dur-

ing braking on slippery surfaces.

Remember that stopping dis-

tances on slippery surfaces will

be longer than on normal sur-

faces even with ABS. Stopping

distances may also be longer on

rough, gravel or snow covered

roads, or if you are using tire

chains. Always maintain a safe

distance from the vehicle in front

of you. Ultimately, the driver is

responsible for safety.

. Tire type and condition may also

affect braking effectiveness.

— When replacing tires, install

the specified size of tires on

all four wheels.

— When installing a spare tire (if

so equipped), make sure that

it is the proper size and type

as specified on the Tire and

Loading Information label.

See “Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label” (P.10-10) of this

manual.

— For detailed information, see

“Wheels and tires” (P.8-29) of

this manual.

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) con-

trols the brakes so the wheels do not lock

during hard braking or when braking on

slippery surfaces. The system detects the

rotation speed at each wheel and varies

the brake fluid pressure to prevent each

wheel from locking and sliding. By pre-

venting each wheel from locking, the

system helps the driver maintain steering

control and helps to minimize swerving

and spinning on slippery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.

Depress the brake pedal with firm steady

pressure, but do not pump the brakes.

The ABS will operate to prevent the

wheels from locking up. Steer the vehicle

to avoid obstacles.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing

so may result in increased stopping

distances.

Self-test feature

The ABS includes electronic sensors, elec-

tric pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a

computer. The computer has a built-in

diagnostic feature that tests the system

each time you start the engine and move

the vehicle at a low speed in forward or

reverse. When the self-test occurs, you

may hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel a

pulsation in the brake pedal. This is

normal and does not indicate a malfunc-

BRAKE ASSIST

tion. If the computer senses a malfunc-

tion, it switches the ABS off and illumi-

nates the ABS warning light on the

instrument panel. The brake system then

operates normally, but without anti-lock

assistance.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during

the self-test or while driving, have the

vehicle checked. It is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Normal operation

The ABS operates at speeds above 3 to 6

MPH (5 to 10 km/h). The speed varies

according to road conditions.

When the ABS senses that one or more

wheels are close to locking up, the

actuator rapidly applies and releases

hydraulic pressure. This action is similar

to pumping the brakes very quickly. You

may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal

and hear a noise from under the hood or

feel a vibration from the actuator when it

is operating. This is normal and indicates

that the ABS is operating properly. How-

ever, the pulsation may indicate that road

conditions are hazardous and extra care

is required while driving.

The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) sys-

tem uses various sensors to monitor

driver inputs and vehicle motion. Under

certain driving conditions, the VDC sys-

tem helps to perform the following func-

tions.

. Controls brake pressure to reduce

wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel

so power is transferred to a non

slipping drive wheel on the same axle.

. Controls brake pressure and engine

output to reduce drive wheel slip

based on vehicle speed (traction con-

trol function).

. Controls brake pressure at individual

wheels and engine output to help the

driver maintain control of the vehicle

in the following conditions:

— understeer (vehicle tends to not

follow the steered path despite

increased steering input)

— oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due

to certain road or driving condi-

tions).

The VDC system can help the driver to

maintain control of the vehicle, but it

cannot prevent loss of vehicle control in

all driving situations.

When the VDC system operates, the VDC

warning light

in the instrument panel

flashes so note the following:

. The road may be slippery or the

system may determine some action

is required to help keep the vehicle on

the steered path.

. You may feel a pulsation in the brake

pedal and hear a noise or vibration

from under the hood. This is normal

and indicates that the VDC system is

working properly.

. Adjust your speed and driving to the

road conditions.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the

VDC warning light

illuminates in the

instrument panel. The VDC system auto-

matically turns off.

The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the

VDC system. The VDC off indicator

illuminates to indicate the VDC system is

off. When the VDC switch is used to turn

off the system, the VDC system still

operates to prevent one drive wheel from

slipping by transferring power to a non

slipping drive wheel. The VDC warning

light

flashes if this occurs. All other

VDC functions are off, and the VDC

warning light

will not flash. The VDC

system is automatically reset to on when

the ignition switch is placed in the off

position then back to the on position.

See “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warn-

ing light” (P.2-17) and “Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) off indicator light” (P.2-17).

Starting and driving 5-131

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM

5-132 Starting and driving

The computer has a built-in diagnostic

feature that tests the system each time

you start the engine and move the vehicle

forward or in reverse at a slow speed.

When the self-test occurs, you may hear a

“clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the

brake pedal. This is normal and is not an

indication of a malfunction.

WARNING

. The VDC system is designed to

help improve driving stability but

does not prevent accidents due

to abrupt steering operation at

high speeds or by careless or

dangerous driving techniques.

Reduce vehicle speed and be

especially careful when driving

and cornering on slippery sur-

faces and always drive carefully.

. Do not modify the vehicle’s sus-

pension. If suspension parts such

as shock absorbers, struts,

springs, stabilizer bars, bushings

and wheels are not NISSAN re-

commended for your vehicle or

are extremely deteriorated, the

VDC system may not operate

properly. This could adversely

affect vehicle handling perfor-

mance, and the VDC warning light

may illuminate.

. If brake related parts such as

brake pads, rotors and calipers

are not NISSAN recommended or

are extremely deteriorated, the

VDC system may not operate

properly and the VDC warning

light

may illuminate.

. If engine control related parts are

not NISSAN recommended or are

extremely deteriorated, the VDC

warning light

may illuminate.

. When driving on extremely in-

clined surfaces such as higher

banked corners, the VDC system

may not operate properly and the

VDC warning light

may illumi-

nate. Do not drive on these types

of roads.

. When driving on an unstable sur-

face such as a turntable, ferry,

elevator or ramp, the VDC warn-

ing light

may illuminate. This

is not a malfunction. Restart the

engine after driving onto a stable

surface.

. If wheels or tires other than the

NISSAN recommended ones are

used, the VDC system may not

operate properly and the VDC

warning light

may illuminate.

. The VDC system is not a substi-

tute for winter tires or tire chains

on a snow covered road.

The chassis control is an electric control

module that includes the following func-

tions:

. Intelligent Trace Control

. Intelligent Engine Brake

. Active Ride Control

INTELLIGENT TRACE CONTROL

This system senses driving based on the

driver’s steering and acceleration/braking

patterns, and controls brake pressure at

individual wheels to aid tracing at corners

and help smooth vehicle response.

Intelligent Trace Control can be set to ON

(enabled) or OFF (disabled) through the

Vehicle Information Display “Settings”

page. See “Vehicle information display”

(P.2-19) for more information.

When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC

system, the Intelligent Trace Control is

also turned off.

JVS0403X

When the Intelligent Trace Control is

operated and the “Chassis Control” mode

is selected in the trip computer, the

Intelligent Trace Control graphics are

shown in the vehicle information display.

(See “Trip computer” (P.2-40).)

If the chassis control warning message

appears in the vehicle information dis-

play, it may indicate that the Intelligent

Trace Control is not functioning properly.

Have the system checked as soon as

possible. It is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service. (See

“Vehicle information display warnings

and indicators” (P.2-31).)

WARNING

The Intelligent Trace Control may not

be effective depending on the driv-

ing condition. Always drive carefully

and attentively.

When the Intelligent Trace Control is

operating, you may feel a pulsation in

the brake pedal and hear a noise. This is

normal and indicates that the Intelligent

Trace Control is operating properly.

Even if the Intelligent Trace Control is set

to OFF, some functions will remain on to

assist the driver (for example, avoidance

Starting and driving 5-133

CHASSIS CONTROL

5-134 Starting and driving

scenes).

INTELLIGENT ENGINE BRAKE (Con-

tinuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) models)

The Intelligent Engine Brake function

adds subtle deceleration by controlling

CVT gear ratio, depending on the corner-

ing condition calculated from driver’s

steering input and plural sensors. This

benefit to easier traceability and less

workload of adjusting speed with braking

at corners.

The Intelligent Engine Brake also adds

subtle deceleration with gear ratio con-

trol according to driver’s brake pedal

operation.

The Intelligent Engine Brake can be set to

ON (enabled) or OFF (disabled) through

the Vehicle Information Display “Settings”

page. See “Vehicle information display”

(P.2-19) for more information.

JVS0403X

When the Intelligent Engine Brake is

operated at corners and the “Chassis

Control” mode is selected in the trip

computer, the Intelligent Engine Brake

graphics are shown in the vehicle infor-

mation display. See “Trip computer” (P.2-

40) for more information.

If the chassis control warning message

appears in the vehicle information dis-

play, it may indicate that the Intelligent

Engine Brake is not functioning properly.

Have the system checked as soon as

possible. It is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING

The Intelligent Engine Brake may not

be effective depending on the driv-

ing condition. Always drive carefully

and attentively.

When the Intelligent Engine Brake is

operating, the needle of the tachometer

will rise up and you may hear an engine

noise. This is normal and indicates that

the Intelligent Engine Brake is operating

properly.

ACTIVE RIDE CONTROL

This system senses upper body motion

based on wheel speed information and

controls engine torque and four wheel

brake pressure to enhance ride comfort

in effort to restrain uncomfortable upper

body movement. This system come into

effect above 25 MPH (40 km/h). When the

VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the

VDC system, the Active Ride Control is

also turned off.

JVS0398X

When the brake control of the Active Ride

Control is operated and the “Chassis

Control” mode is selected in the trip

computer, the Active Ride Control gra-

phics are shown in the vehicle informa-

tion display. See “Trip computer” (P.2-40)

for more information.

If the chassis control warning message

appears in the vehicle information dis-

play, it may indicate that the Active Ride

Control is not functioning properly. Have

the system checked as soon as possible.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

When the Active Ride Control is operating,

you may hear noise and sense slight

deceleration. This is normal and indicates

that the Active Ride Control is operating

properly.

Starting and driving 5-135

5-136 Starting and driving

WARNING

. Never rely solely on the hill start

assist system to prevent the ve-

hicle from moving backward on a

hill. Always drive carefully and

attentively. Depress the brake

pedal when the vehicle is stopped

on a steep hill. Be especially care-

ful when stopped on a hill on

frozen or muddy roads. Failure

to prevent the vehicle from rolling

backwards may result in a loss of

control of the vehicle and possi-

ble serious injury or death.

. The hill start assist system is not

designed to hold the vehicle at a

standstill on a hill. Depress the

brake pedal when the vehicle is

stopped on a steep hill. Failure to

do so may cause the vehicle to

roll backwards and may result in

a collision or serious personal

injury.

. The hill start assist system may

not prevent the vehicle from roll-

ing backwards on a hill under all

load or road conditions. Always

be prepared to depress the brake

pedal to prevent the vehicle from

rolling backwards. Failure to do

so may result in a collision or

serious personal injury.

The hill start assist system automatically

keeps the brakes applied to help prevent

the vehicle from rolling backwards in the

time it takes the driver to release the

brake pedal and apply the accelerator

when the vehicle is stopped on a hill.

The hill start assist system will operate

automatically under the following condi-

tions:

. The transmission is shifted to a for-

ward or reverse gear.

. The vehicle is stopped completely on a

hill by applying the brake.

The maximum holding time is 2 seconds.

After 2 seconds the vehicle will begin to

roll back and the hill start assist system

will stop operating completely.

The hill start assist system will not

operate when the transmission is shifted

to the N (Neutral) or P (Park) position (CVT

models) or on a flat and level road.

When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

warning light illuminates in the meter, the

hill start assist system will not operate.

(See “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

warning light” (P.2-17).)

WAF0072X

The RSS sounds a tone to inform the

driver of obstacles near the rear bumper.

When the “Display” key is on, the sonar

view will automatically appear in the

touchscreen display. An additional view

of the sonar status will appear in the

vehicle information display for reference.

WARNING

. The RSS is a convenience but it is

not a substitute for proper park-

ing.

. The driver is always responsible

for safety during parking and

HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM REAR SONAR SYSTEM (RSS)

other maneuvers. Always look

around and check that it is safe

to do so before parking.

. Read and understand the limita-

tions of the RSS as contained in

this section. The colors of the

sonar indicator and the distance

guide lines in the rear view in-

dicate different distances to the

object.

. Inclement weather or ultrasonic

sources such as an automatic car

wash, a truck’s compressed-air

brakes or a pneumatic drill may

affect the function of the system;

this may include reduced perfor-

mance or a false activation.

. The RSS is designed as an aid to

the driver in detecting large sta-

tionary objects to help avoid da-

maging the vehicle.

. The RSS is not designed to pre-

vent contact with small or mov-

ing objects. Always move slowly.

The system will not detect small

objects below the bumper, and

may not detect objects close to

the bumper or on the ground.

. The RSS may not detect the

following objects: fluffy objects

such as snow, cloth, cotton, glass,

wool, etc.; thin objects such as

rope, wire and chain, etc.; or

wedge-shaped objects.

If your vehicle sustains damage to the

bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or

bent, the sensing zone may be altered

causing inaccurate measurement of ob-

stacles or false alarms.

CAUTION

. Excessive noise (such as audio

system volume or an open vehi-

cle window) will interfere with the

tone and it may not be heard.

. Keep the sonar sensors (located

on the rear bumper fascia) free

from snow, ice and large accu-

mulations of dirt. Do not clean the

sensors with sharp objects. If the

sensors are covered, the accuracy

of the sonar function will be

diminished.

SYSTEM OPERATION

The system informs with a visual and

audible alert of rear obstacles when the

shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.

Range Rear sonar

Sound Display

P (Park) B C

R (Reverse) O O

N (Neutral) B C

D (Drive) B C

O = Display / Beep when detect

C = Display on camera view

B = No display and beep

The system is deactivated at speeds

above 6 MPH (10 km/h). It is reactivated

at lower speeds.

The intermittent tone will stop after 3

seconds when an obstacle is detected by

only the corner sensor and the distance

does not change. The tone will stop when

the obstacle gets away from the vehicle.

When the object is detected, the indicator

(green) appears and blinks and the tone

sounds intermittently. When the vehicle

moves closer to the object, the color of

the indicator turns yellow and the rate of

the blinking increases. When the vehicle is

very close to the object, the indicator

stops blinking and turns red, and the tone

Starting and driving 5-137

5-138 Starting and driving

sounds continuously.

WAF0074X

Example

When the corner of the vehicle moves

closer to an object, the corner sonar

indicator

appears. When the center of

the vehicle moves close to an object, the

center sonar indicator

appears.

WAF0075X

Example

The system indicators will appear when

the vehicle moves closer to an object (if

so equipped).

WAF0076X

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE RSS

The system is automatically activated

when the ignition switch is in the ON

position and the shift lever is in the R

(Reverse) position.

Perform the following steps to enable or

disable the RSS:

1. Press the

button until “Set-

tings” appears in the vehicle informa-

tion display and then press OK button.

Use the

button to select “Driver

Assistance.” Then press the OK button.

2. Select “Parking Aids” and press the OK

button

3. Select “Rear Sensor” and press the OK

button to turn the system on or off.

Select “Display” to display the rear

sensor in the vehicle information

display when the RSS activates.

Select “Range” to change the RSS

distance to “Far,” “Mid,” or “Near.”

Starting and driving 5-139

5-140 Starting and driving

RSS LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the RSS limitations

for the sonar system. Failure to

operate the vehicle in accordance

with these system limitations could

result in serious injury or death.

. Read and understand the limita-

tions of the RSS as contained in

this section. Inclement weather

may affect the function of the

RSS; this may include reduced

performance or a false activation.

. The system is deactivated at

speeds above 6 MPH (10 km/h).

It is reactivated at lower speeds.

. Inclement weather or ultrasonic

sources such as an automatic car

wash, a truck’s compressed-air

brakes or a pneumatic drill may

affect the function of the RSS;

this may include reduced perfor-

mance or a false activation.

. The RSS is not designed to pre-

vent contact with small or mov-

ing objects. Always move slowly.

The system will not detect small

objects below the bumper or on

the ground.

. The RSS may not detect the

following objects: fluffy objects

such as snow, cloth, cotton,

glass-wool, etc.; thin objects such

as rope, wire and chain, etc.; or

wedge-shaped objects.

. The RSS may not detect objects

at speed above 3 MPH (5 km/h)

and may not detect certain angu-

lar or moving objects.

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAIL-

ABLE

When sonar blockage is detected, the

system will be deactivated automatically.

The system is not available until the

conditions no longer exist.

The sonar sensors may be blocked by

temporary ambient conditions such as

splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked

condition may also be caused by objects

such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the

sonar sensors.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer

exist, the system will resume automati-

cally.

WAF0077X

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The sonar sensors are located on the

rear bumper. Always keep the area near

the sonar sensors clean.

The sonar sensors may be blocked by

temporary ambient conditions such as

splashing water, mist or fog.

The blocked condition may also be

caused by objects such as ice, frost or

dirt obstructing the sonar sensors.

Check for and remove objects obstruct-

ing the area around the sonar sensors.

Do not attach stickers (including trans-

parent material), install accessories or

apply additional paint near the sonar

sensors.

Do not strike or damage the area around

the sonar sensors. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area

around the sonar sensors is damaged

due to a collision.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing,

apply deicer through the key hole. If the

lock becomes frozen, heat the key before

inserting it into the key hole, or use the

Intelligent Key system or the remote

keyless entry key fob.

ANTI-FREEZE

In the winter when it is anticipated that

the outside temperature will drop below

32°F (0°C), check the anti-freeze to assure

proper winter protection. For additional

information, see “Engine cooling system”

(P.8-4).

BATTERY

If the battery is not fully charged during

extremely cold weather conditions, the

battery fluid may freeze and damage the

battery. To maintain maximum efficiency,

the battery should be checked regularly.

For additional information, see “Battery”

(P.8-11).

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without

anti-freeze, drain the cooling system,

including the engine block. Refill before

operating the vehicle. For details, see

“Engine cooling system” (P.8-4).

TIRE EQUIPMENT

SUMMER tires have a tread designed to

provide superior performance on dry

pavement. However, the performance of

these tires will be substantially reduced in

snowy and icy conditions. If you operate

your vehicle on snowy or icy roads,

NISSAN recommends the use of MUD &

SNOW or ALL SEASON tires on all four

wheels. It is recommended you consult a

NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size, speed

rating and availability information.

For additional traction on icy roads,

studded tires may be used. However,

some U.S. states and Canadian provinces

prohibit their use. Check local, state and

provincial laws before installing studded

tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of

studded snow tires, on wet or dry

surfaces, may be poorer than that of

non-studded snow tires.

Tire chains may be used. For details, see

“Tire chains” (P.8-36) of this manual.

Starting and driving 5-141

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

5-142 Starting and driving

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) model

If you install snow tires, they must also be

the same size, brand, construction and

tread pattern on all four wheels.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following

items be carried in the vehicle during

winter:

. A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to

remove ice and snow from the win-

dows and wiper blades.

. A sturdy, flat board to be placed under

the jack to give it firm support.

. A shovel to dig the vehicle out of

snow-drifts.

. Extra window washer fluid to refill the

reservoir tank.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

. Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing

rain), very cold snow or ice can be

slick and very hard to drive on.

The vehicle will have much less

traction or “grip” under these

conditions. Try to avoid driving

on wet ice until the road is salted

or sanded.

. Whatever the condition, drive

with caution. Accelerate and slow

down with care. If accelerating or

downshifting too fast, the drive

wheels will lose even more trac-

tion.

. Allow more stopping distance

under these conditions. Braking

should be started sooner than on

dry pavement.

. Allow greater following distances

on slippery roads.

. Watch for slippery spots (glare

ice). These may appear on an

otherwise clear road in shaded

areas. If a patch of ice is seen

ahead, brake before reaching it.

Try not to brake while on the ice,

and avoid any sudden steering

maneuvers.

. Do not use cruise control on

slippery roads.

. Snow can trap dangerous ex-

haust gases under your vehicle.

Keep snow clear of the exhaust

pipe and from around your vehi-

cle.

6 In case of emergency
Hazard warning flasher switch ......................................... 6-2
Roadside assistance program ........................................... 6-2
Emergency engine shut off (models with
push-button ignition switch) .............................................. 6-3
Flat tire .................................................................................................. 6-3
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ........... 6-3
Changing a flat tire (models with
spare tire) ..................................................................................... 6-4
Repairing a flat tire (models with emergency
tire puncture repair kit) .................................................. 6-9
Jump starting .............................................................................. 6-14
Push starting ................................................................................ 6-16
If your vehicle overheats .................................................... 6-16
Towing your vehicle ............................................................... 6-18
Towing recommended by NISSAN ..................... 6-19
Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) ...... 6-21

6-2 In case of emergency

SIC2574

Push the switch on to warn other drivers

when you must stop or park under

emergency conditions. All turn signal

lights will flash.

WARNING

. If stopping for an emergency, be

sure to move the vehicle well off

the road.

. Do not use the hazard warning

flashers while moving on the

highway unless unusual circum-

stances force you to drive so

slowly that your vehicle might

become a hazard to other traffic.

. Turn signals do not work when

the hazard warning flasher lights

are on.

The flasher can be actuated with the

ignition switch in any position.

Some state laws may prohibit the use of

the hazard warning flasher switch while

driving.

In the event of a roadside emergency,

Roadside Assistance Service is available

to you. Please refer to your Warranty

Information Booklet (U.S.) or Warranty &

Roadside Assistance Information Booklet

(Canada) for details.

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH

ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE PROGRAM

To shut off the engine in an emergency

situation while driving, perform the fol-

lowing procedure:

. Rapidly push the push-button ignition

switch 3 consecutive times in less

than 1.5 seconds, or

. Push and hold the push-button igni-

tion switch for more than 2 seconds.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS-

TEM (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It

monitors tire pressure of all tires except

the spare (if so equipped). When the low

tire pressure warning light is lit, and the

“Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning

message is displayed in the vehicle in-

formation display, one or more of your

tires is significantly under-inflated. If the

vehicle is being driven with low tire

pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn

you of it by the low tire pressure warning

light. This system will activate only when

the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16

MPH (25 km/h). For more details, see

“Warning lights, indicator lights and audi-

ble reminders” (P.2-10) and “Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P.5-5).

WARNING

. If the low tire pressure warning

light illuminates while driving,

avoid sudden steering maneu-

vers or abrupt braking, reduce

vehicle speed, pull off the road

to a safe location and stop the

vehicle as soon as possible. Driv-

ing with under-inflated tires may

permanently damage the tires

and increase the likelihood of tire

failure. Serious vehicle damage

could occur and may lead to an

accident and could result in ser-

ious personal injury. Check the

tire pressure for all four tires.

Adjust the tire pressure to the

recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading

Information label to turn the low

tire pressure warning light OFF. If

the light still illuminates while

driving after adjusting the tire

pressure, a tire may be flat. If

you have a flat tire, replace it with

a spare tire (if so equipped) or

repair it using the emergency tire

puncture repair kit (if so

equipped) as soon as possible.

. Since the spare tire (if so

equipped) is not equipped with

the TPMS, when a spare tire is

mounted or a wheel is replaced,

the TPMS will not function and

the low tire pressure warning

light will flash for approximately

1 minute. The light will remain on

after 1 minute. Have your tires

replaced and/or TPMS system

reset as soon as possible. It is

recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for these services.

In case of emergency 6-3

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF (models

with push-button ignition switch)

FLAT TIRE

6-4 In case of emergency

. Replacing tires with those not

originally specified by NISSAN

could affect the proper operation

of the TPMS.

. Do not inject any tire liquid or

aerosol tire sealant into the tires,

as this may cause a malfunction

of the tire pressure sensors

(models without emergency tire

puncture repair kit).

. NISSAN recommends using only

Genuine NISSAN Emergency Tire

Sealant provided with your vehi-

cle. Other tire sealants may da-

mage the valve stem seal which

can cause the tire to lose air

pressure. Visit a NISSAN dealer

as soon as possible after using

tire repair sealant (models with

emergency tire puncture repair

kit).

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE (models

with spare tire)

If you have a flat tire, follow the instruc-

tions below.

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road

and away from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the

parking brake.

4. Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) models:

Move the shift lever to the P (Park)

position.

Manual Transmission (MT) models:

Move the shift lever to the R (Reverse)

position.

5. Turn off the engine.

6. Raise the hood to warn other traffic,

and to signal professional road assis-

tance personnel that you need assis-

tance.

7. Have all passengers get out of the

vehicle and stand in a safe place, away

from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING

. Make sure the parking brake is

securely applied and the Manual

Transmission is shifted into R

(Reverse), or the CVT into P (Park).

. Never change tires when the ve-

hicle is on a slope, ice or slippery

areas. This is hazardous.

. Never change tires if oncoming

traffic is close to your vehicle.

Wait for professional road assis-

tance.

MCE0001A

Blocking wheels

Place suitable blocks at both the front

and back of the wheel diagonally oppo-

site the flat tire to prevent the vehicle

from moving when it is jacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the

vehicle may move and result in

personal injury.

JVE0270X

Getting the spare tire and tools

Remove the jack, necessary tools and the

spare tire from the storage area.

The spare tire, jack and tools are located

under the flexible luggage boards (if so

equipped) and cover.

JVE0402X

Pull up the flexible luggage boards (if so

equipped) and cover.

Remove the jack and tools from the

storage area.

In case of emergency 6-5

6-6 In case of emergency

SCE0913

Remove the clamp holding the spare tire.

SCE0630

Removing wheel cover (if so

equipped)

WARNING

Never use your hands to remove the

wheel cover. This may cause perso-

nal injury.

To remove the wheel cover, use the jack

rod

as illustrated.

Apply cloth

between the wheel and jack

rod to prevent damaging the wheel and

wheel cover.

Jacking up the vehicle and remov-

ing the damaged tire

WARNING

. Never get under the vehicle while

it is supported only by the jack. If

it is necessary to work under the

vehicle, support it with safety

stands.

. Use only the jack provided with

your vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do

not use the jack provided with

your vehicle on other vehicles.

The jack is designed for lifting

only your vehicle during a tire

change.

. Use the correct jack-up points.

Never use any other part of the

vehicle for jack support.

. Never jack up the vehicle more

than necessary.

. Never use blocks on or under the

jack.

. Do not start or run the engine

while vehicle is on the jack, as it

may cause the vehicle to move.

. Do not allow passengers to stay

in the vehicle while it is on the

jack.

Carefully read the caution label at-

tached to the jack body and the follow-

ing instructions.

JVE0165X

Jack-up point

1. Place the jack directly under the jack-

up point as illustrated so the top of

the jack contacts the vehicle at the

jack-up point. Align the jack head

between the two notches in the front

or the rear as shown. Also fit the

groove of the jack head between the

notches as shown.

The jack should be used on level firm

ground.

In case of emergency 6-7

6-8 In case of emergency

SCE0504

2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two

turns by turning it counterclockwise

with the wheel nut wrench. Do not

remove the wheel nuts until the tire

is off the ground.

3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the

jack lever and rod with both hands as

shown above. Carefully raise the ve-

hicle until the tire clears the ground.

Remove the wheel nuts, and then

remove the tire.

SCE0933

Installing the spare tire

The spare tire is designed for emer-

gency use. (See specific instructions

under the heading “Wheels and tires”

(P.8-29).)

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the sur-

face between the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and

tighten the wheel nuts finger tight.

Check that all the wheel nuts contact

the wheel surface horizontally.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten

wheel nuts alternately and evenly in

the sequence illustrated (

, , , , ),

more than 2 times, until they are tight.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire

touches the ground. Then, with the

wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel

nuts securely in the sequence illu-

strated. Lower the vehicle completely.

WARNING

. Incorrect wheel nuts or impro-

perly tightened wheel nuts can

cause the wheel to become loose

or come off. This could cause an

accident.

. Do not use oil or grease on the

wheel studs or nuts. This could

cause the nuts to become loose.

. Retighten the wheel nuts when

the vehicle has been driven for

600 miles (1,000 km) (also in

cases of a flat tire, etc.).

As soon as possible, tighten the

wheel nuts to the specified torque

with a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

80 ft-lb (108 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tigh-

tened to specifications at all times. It

is recommended that the wheel nuts

be tightened to specifications at

each lubrication interval.

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD

pressure.

COLD pressure:

After the vehicle has been parked for

3 hours or more or driven less than 1

mile (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on

the Tire and Loading Information

label affixed to the driver side center

pillar.

Stowing the damaged tire and the

tools

1. Securely store the jack, tools and the

damaged tire in the storage area.

2. Replace the flexible luggage boards (if

so equipped) and cover.

3. Close the liftgate.

WARNING

. Always make sure that the spare

tire and jacking equipment are

properly secured after use. Such

items can become dangerous

projectiles in an accident or sud-

den stop.

. The spare tire is designed for

emergency use. See specific in-

structions under the heading

“Wheels and tires” (P.8-29).

REPAIRING A FLAT TIRE (models

with emergency tire puncture re-

pair kit)

The emergency tire puncture repair kit is

supplied with the vehicle instead of a

spare tire. This repair kit must be used for

temporarily fixing a minor tire puncture.

After using the repair kit, it is recom-

mended that visit a NISSAN dealer as

soon as possible for tire inspection and

repair/replacement.

CAUTION

. NISSAN recommends using only

Genuine NISSAN Emergency Tire

Sealant provided with your vehi-

cle. Other tire sealants may da-

mage the valve stem seal which

can cause the tire to lose air

pressure.

. Do not use the emergency tire

puncture repair kit provided with

your vehicle on other vehicles.

In case of emergency 6-9

6-10 In case of emergency

. Do not use the emergency tire

puncture repair kit for a purpose

other than to inflate and check

the tire pressure for the vehicle.

. Use the emergency tire puncture

repair kit only on DC12V.

. Keep water and dust off the

emergency tire puncture repair

kit.

. Do not disassemble or modify the

emergency tire puncture repair

kit.

. Do not drop the kit or allow hard

impacts to the kit.

. Do not use the emergency tire

puncture repair kit under the

following conditions. It is recom-

mended that contact a NISSAN

dealer or professional road assis-

tance.

— when the sealant has passed

its expiration date (shown on

the label attached to the bot-

tle)

— when the cut or the puncture

is approximately 0.2 in (5 mm)

or longer

— when the side of the tire is

damaged

— when the vehicle has been

driven with a considerable

loss of air from the tire

— when the tire is completely

displaced inside or outside

the rim

— when the tire rim is damaged

— when two or more tires are

flat

WAG0040X

Getting emergency tire puncture

repair kit

Take out the emergency tire puncture

repair kit located under the cargo room.

The repair kit consists of the following

items:

Air compressor* and Speed restriction

sticker

Tire sealant bottle

*: The compressor shape may differ

depending on the models.

NOTE:

A spare tire, jack and rod are not

equipped as standard. These parts are

dealer options. It is recommended that

contact a NISSAN dealer about obtain-

ing these parts. See “Changing a flat tire

(models with spare tire)” (P.6-4) for

usage of jacking tools and tire replace-

ment.

Before using emergency tire punc-

ture repair kit

. If any foreign object (for example, a

screw or nail) is embedded in the tire,

do not remove it.

. Check the expiration date of the

sealant (shown on the label attached

to the bottle). Never use a sealant

whose expiration date has passed.

Repairing tire

WARNING

Observe the following precautions

when using the emergency tire

puncture repair kit.

. Swallowing the compound is

dangerous. Immediately drink as

much water as possible and seek

prompt medical assistance.

. Rinse well with lots of water if the

compound comes into contact

with skin or eyes. If irritation

persists, seek prompt medical

attention.

. Keep the repair compound out of

the reach of children.

JVE0014X

1. Take out the speed restriction sticker

from the air compressor*, then put it

in a location where the driver can see

it while driving.

*: The compressor shape may differ

depending on the models.

CAUTION

Do not put the speed restriction label

on the steering wheel pad, the

speedometer or the warning light

locations.

In case of emergency 6-11

6-12 In case of emergency

SCE0868

2. Take the hose and the power plug

out of the air compressor. Remove the

cap of the bottle holder from the air

compressor.

SCE0869

3. Remove the cap of the tire sealant

bottle, and screw the bottle clockwise

onto the bottle holder. (Leave the

bottle seal intact. Screwing the bottle

onto the bottle holder will pierce the

seal of the bottle.)

4. Remove the cap of the tire valve on

the flat tire.

SCE0870

5. Remove the protective cap of the

hose and screw the hose securely

onto the tire valve. Make sure that

the pressure release valve

is se-

curely tightened. Make sure that the

air compressor switch is in the OFF

(*) position, and then insert its power

plug into the power outlet in the

vehicle.

SCE0871

6. Place the ignition switch in the ON

position. Then turn the compressor

switch to the ON (−) position and

inflate the tire up to the pressure that

is specified on the tire placard affixed

to the driver’s side center pillar if

possible, or to the minimum of 26 psi

(180 kPa). Turn the air compressor off

briefly in order to check the tire

pressure with the pressure gauge.

If the tire is inflated to higher than the

specified pressure, adjust the tire

pressure by releasing air with the

pressure release valve. The cold tire

pressures are shown on the tire pla-

card affixed to the driver’s side center

pillar.

CAUTION

. An incomplete connection be-

tween the hose and tire valve

causes air leakage or sealant

scatter.

. Do not stand directly beside the

damaged tire while it is being

inflated because of the risk of

the rupture. If there are any

cracks or bumps, turn the com-

pressor off immediately.

. There is a possibility that the

pressure reaches 87 psi (600

kPa) while the tire is being in-

flated, but it is normal condition.

Usually the pressure will drop in

about 30 seconds.

. Do not operate the compressor

for more than 10 minutes.

If the tire pressure does not increase

to 26 psi (180 kPa) within 10 minutes,

the tire may be seriously damaged

and the tire cannot be repaired with

this tire puncture repair kit. It is

recommended that contact a NISSAN

dealer.

7. When the tire pressure is reaching the

specified pressure or is at the mini-

mum of 26 psi (180 kPa), turn the air

compressor off. Remove the power

plug from the power outlet and

quickly remove the hose from the tire

valve. Attach the protective cap and

valve cap.

CAUTION

Leave the tire sealant bottle on the

bottle holder in order to prevent

sealant from spilling out.

8. Immediately drive the vehicle for 10

minutes or 2 miles (3 km) at a speed of

50 MPH (80 km/h) or less.

9. After driving, make sure that the air

compressor switch is in the OFF (*)

position, then screw the hose securely

onto the tire valve. Check the tire

pressure with the pressure gauge.

If the tire pressure drops under 19 psi

(130 kPa ):

The tire cannot be repaired with this tire

puncture repair kit. It is recommended

that contact a NISSAN dealer.

In case of emergency 6-13

6-14 In case of emergency

If the tire pressure is 19 psi (130 kPa) or

more but less than the specified pres-

sure:

Turn the compressor switch to the ON (−)

position and inflate the tire up to the

specified pressure. Then repeat the steps

from 8.

If the pressure drops again, the tire

cannot be repaired with this tire punc-

ture repair kit. It is recommended that

contact a NISSAN dealer.

When the tire pressure is the specified

pressure:

The temporary repair is completed.

It is recommended that visit a NISSAN

dealer for tire repair/replacement as soon

as possible.

CAUTION

Do not reuse the tire sealant bottle

or the hose.

For a new tire sealant bottle and

hose, it is recommended that con-

tact a NISSAN dealer.

To start your engine with a booster

battery, the instructions and precautions

below must be followed.

WARNING

. If done incorrectly, jump starting

can lead to a battery explosion,

resulting in severe injury or

death. It could also damage your

vehicle.

. Explosive hydrogen gas is always

present in the vicinity of the

battery. Keep all sparks and

flames away from the battery.

. Do not allow battery fluid to come

into contact with eyes, skin,

clothing or painted surfaces. Bat-

tery fluid is a corrosive sulfuric

acid solution which can cause

severe burns. If the fluid should

come into contact with anything,

immediately flush the contacted

area with water.

. Keep the battery out of the reach

of children.

. The booster battery must be

rated at 12 volts. Use of an im-

properly rated battery can da-

mage your vehicle.

. Whenever working on or near a

battery, always wear suitable eye

protectors (for example, goggles

or industrial safety spectacles)

and remove rings, metal bands,

or any other jewelry. Do not lean

over the battery when jump start-

ing.

. Do not attempt to jump start a

frozen battery. It could explode

and cause serious injury.

. Your vehicle has an automatic

engine cooling fan. It could come

on at any time. Keep hands and

other objects away from it.

JUMP STARTING

JVE0279X

WARNING

Always follow the instructions below.

Failure to do so could result in

damage to the charging system and

cause personal injury.

1. If the booster battery is in another

vehicle

, position the two vehicles (

and ) to bring their batteries into

close proximity to each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to

touch.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) models:

Move the shift lever to the P (Park)

position.

Manual Transmission (MT) models:

Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)

position.

4. Switch off all unnecessary electrical

systems (headlights, heater, air condi-

tioner, etc.).

5. Remove the vent caps on the battery

(if so equipped). Cover the battery with

a firmly wrung out moist cloth to

reduce explosion hazard.

6. Connect jumper cables in the se-

quence as illustrated (

? ? ?

CAUTION

. Always connect positive (+) to

positive (+) and negative (−) to

body ground (for example, as

illustrated), not to the battery.

. Make sure the jumper cables do

not touch moving parts in the

engine compartment and that

the cable clamps do not contact

In case of emergency 6-15

6-16 In case of emergency

any other metal.

7. Start the engine of the booster vehicle

and let it run for a few minutes.

8. Keep the engine speed of the booster

vehicle

at about 2,000 rpm, and

start the engine of the vehicle

being

jump started.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor en-

gaged for more than 10 seconds. If

the engine does not start right away,

place the ignition switch in the OFF

position and wait 10 seconds before

trying again.

9. After starting your engine, carefully

disconnect the negative cable and

then the positive cable (

? ?

? ).

10. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped).

Be sure to dispose of the cloth used to

cover the vent holes as it may be

contaminated with corrosive acid.

Do not attempt to start the engine by

pushing.

CAUTION

. Continuously Variable Transmis-

sion (CVT) models cannot be

push-started or tow-started. At-

tempting to do so may cause

transmission damage.

. Three-way catalyst equipped

models should not be started by

pushing since the three way cat-

alyst may be damaged.

. Never try to start the vehicle by

towing it; when the engine starts,

the forward surge could cause

the vehicle to collide with the

tow vehicle.

WARNING

. Never continue driving if your

vehicle overheats. Doing so could

cause a vehicle fire.

. Never open the hood if steam is

coming out.

. Never remove the radiator or

coolant reservoir cap while the

engine is hot. If the radiator or

coolant reservoir cap is removed

when the engine is hot, pressur-

ized hot water will spurt out and

possibly cause burning, scalding

or serious injury.

. If steam or coolant is coming

from the engine, stand clear of

the vehicle to prevent getting

burned.

. The engine cooling fan will start

at anytime when the coolant

temperature exceeds preset de-

grees.

. Be careful not to allow your

hands, hair, jewelry or clothing

to come into contact with, or to

get caught in the cooling fan or

drive belts.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

an extremely high temperature gauge

reading), or if you feel a lack of engine

power, detect abnormal noise, etc., take

the following steps:

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road

and apply the parking brake.

2. Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) models:

Move the shift lever to the P (Park)

position.

Manual Transmission (MT) models:

Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)

position.

Do not stop the engine.

3. Turn off the air conditioner (if so

equipped). Open all the windows,

move the heater or air conditioner

temperature control to maximum hot

and fan control to high speed.

4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen

for steam or coolant escaping from

the radiator before opening the hood.

(If steam or coolant is escaping, turn

off the engine.) Do not open the hood

further until no steam or coolant can

be seen.

5. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the

engine, stand clear to prevent get-

ting burned.

6. Visually check the drive belt for da-

mage or looseness. Also check if the

cooling fan is running. The radiator

hoses and radiator should not leak

water. If coolant is leaking or the

cooling fan does not run, stop the

engine.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands,

hair, jewelry or clothing to come into

contact with, or get caught in, engine

belts or the engine cooling fan. The

engine cooling fan can start at any

time.

7. After the engine cools down, check

the coolant level in the reservoir with

the engine running. Add coolant to

the reservoir if necessary. Have your

vehicle repaired. It is recommended

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

In case of emergency 6-17

6-18 In case of emergency

When towing your vehicle, all jurisdic-

tional and local regulations for towing

must be followed. Incorrect towing equip-

ment could damage your vehicle. Towing

instructions are available from a NISSAN

dealer. Local service operators are gen-

erally familiar with the applicable laws

and procedures for towing. To assure

proper towing and to prevent accidental

damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recom-

mends that you have a service operator

tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have

the service operator carefully read the

following precautions.

WARNING

. Never ride in a vehicle that is

being towed.

. Never get under your vehicle after

it has been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

. When towing, make sure that the

transmission, axles, steering sys-

tem and powertrain are in work-

ing condition. If any of these

conditions apply, dollies or a

flatbed tow truck must be used.

. Always attach safety chains be-

fore towing.

For information about towing your vehi-

cle behind a recreational vehicle (RV), see

“Flat towing” (P.10-16) of this manual.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

SCE0952

All-wheel drive models

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY

NISSAN

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models

NISSAN recommends that towing dollies

be used when towing your vehicle or the

vehicle be placed on a flat bed truck as

illustrated.

CAUTION

Never tow AWD models with any of

the wheels on the ground as this

may cause serious and expensive

damage to the powertrain.

In case of emergency 6-19

6-20 In case of emergency

SCE0950

Two-wheel drive models

Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be

towed with the driving (front) wheels off

the ground or place the vehicle on a flat

bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

. Never tow CVT models with the

front wheels on the ground or

four wheels on the ground (for-

ward or backward), as this may

cause serious and expensive da-

mage to the transmission. If it is

necessary to tow the vehicle with

the rear wheels raised, always

use towing dollies under the front

wheels.

. When towing CVT models with

the front wheels on towing dol-

lies: Place the ignition switch in

the OFF position, and secure the

steering wheel in a straight-

ahead position with a rope or

similar device. Move the shift

lever to the N (Neutral) position.

. When towing a CVT model with

the rear wheels on the ground (if

you do not use towing dollies):

Always release the parking brake.

. When towing MT models with the

front wheels on the ground: Place

the ignition switch in the OFF

position, and secure the steering

wheel in a straight-ahead posi-

tion with a rope or similar device.

Move the shift lever to the N

(Neutral) position.

. When towing MT models with the

rear wheels on the ground (if you

do not use towing dollies): Always

release the parking brake.

Front wheels on the ground:

NISSAN recommends that towing dollies

be used under the front wheels when

towing your vehicle or the vehicle be

placed on a flatbed tow truck as illu-

strated.

CAUTION

Never tow Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) model with the

front wheels on the ground. Doing so

will cause serious and expensive

damage to the drivetrain.

Manual Transmission (MT) model:

1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF

position.

2. Secure the steering wheel in a

straight-ahead position with rope or

a similar device.

3. Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)

position.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Attach the safety chains whenever

towing.

Rear wheels on the ground:

1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF

position.

2. Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)

position.

3. Release the parking brake.

4. Attach safety chains whenever tow-

ing.

All four wheels on the ground:

NISSAN recommends that the vehicle be

placed on a flatbed tow truck as illu-

strated.

CAUTION

Never tow CVT model with all four

wheels on the ground. Doing so will

cause serious and expensive da-

mage to the drivetrain.

Manual Transmission (MT) model:

1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF

position.

2. Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)

position.

3. Release the parking brake.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck

vehicle)

WARNING

To avoid vehicle damage, serious

personal injury or death when reco-

vering a stuck vehicle:

. Contact a professional towing

service to recover the vehicle if

you have any questions regard-

ing the recovery procedure.

. Tow chains or cables must be

attached only to main structural

members of the vehicle.

. Do not use the vehicle tie-downs

to tow or free a stuck vehicle.

. Only use devices specifically de-

signed for vehicle recovery and

follow the manufacturer’s in-

structions.

. Always pull the recovery device

straight out from the front of the

vehicle. Never pull at an angle.

. Route recovery devices so they

do not touch any part of the

vehicle except the attachment

point.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,

etc., use a tow strap or other device

designed specifically for vehicle recovery.

Always follow the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for the recovery device.

Rocking a stuck vehicle

WARNING

. Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

. Do not spin your tires at high

speed. This could cause them to

explode and result in serious in-

jury. Parts of your vehicle could

also overheat and be damaged.

In case of emergency 6-21

6-22 In case of emergency

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,

etc., use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) system.

2. Make sure the area in front and

behind the vehicle is clear of obstruc-

tions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left

to clear an area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and

backward.

Shift back and forth between R

(Reverse) and D (Drive) (Continu-

ously Variable Transmission (CVT)

models) or 1st and R (Reverse)

(Manual Transmission (MT) models).

Apply the accelerator as little as

possible to maintain the rocking

motion.

Release the accelerator pedal be-

fore shifting between R and D (CVT

models) or 1st and R (MT models).

Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH

(55 km/h).

5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a

few tries, contact a professional tow-

ing service to remove the vehicle.

WARNING

. Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

. Do not spin your tires at high

speed. This could cause them to

explode and result in serious in-

jury. Parts of your vehicle could

also overheat and be damaged.

7 Appearance and care
Cleaning exterior ........................................................................... 7-2
Washing ......................................................................................... 7-2
Waxing ............................................................................................ 7-2
Removing spots ...................................................................... 7-3
Underbody ................................................................................... 7-3
Glass ................................................................................................. 7-3
Wheels ............................................................................................. 7-3
Aluminum alloy wheels ..................................................... 7-3
Chrome parts ............................................................................ 7-4
Tire dressing .............................................................................. 7-4
Cleaning interior ........................................................................... 7-4
Air fresheners ......................................................................... 7-5
Floor mats ................................................................................. 7-5
Seat belts ................................................................................... 7-6
Cleaning the seat tracks ............................................... 7-6
Corrosion protection ................................................................ 7-7
Most common factors contributing to
vehicle corrosion.................................................................. 7-7
Environmental factors influence the rate
of corrosion.............................................................................. 7-7
To protect your vehicle from corrosion ............ 7-7

7-2 Appearance and care

In order to maintain the appearance of

your vehicle, it is important to take proper

care of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, wash your

vehicle as soon as you can:

. after a rainfall to prevent possible

damage from acid rain

. after driving on coastal roads

. when contaminants such as soot, bird

droppings, tree sap, metal particles or

bugs get on the paint surface

. when dust or mud builds up on the

surface

Whenever possible, store or park your

vehicle inside a garage or in a covered

area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park

in a shady area or protect the vehicle with

a body cover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint

surface when putting on or removing

the body cover.

WASHING

Wash dirt off the vehicle with a wet

sponge and plenty of water. Clean the

vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap, a

special vehicle soap or general purpose

dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lu-

kewarm (never hot) water.

CAUTION

. Do not use car washes that use

acid in the detergent. Some car

washes, especially brushless

ones, use some acid for cleaning.

The acid may react with some

plastic vehicle components, caus-

ing them to crack. This could

affect their appearance, and also

could cause them not to function

properly. Always check with your

car wash to confirm that acid is

not used.

. Do not wash the vehicle with

strong household soap, strong

chemical detergents, gasoline or

solvents.

. Do not wash the vehicle in direct

sunlight or while the vehicle body

is hot, as the surface may become

water-spotted.

. Avoid using tight-napped or

rough cloths, such as washing

mitts. Care must be taken when

removing caked-on dirt or other

foreign substances so the paint

surface is not scratched or da-

maged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty

of clean water.

Inside flanges, seams and folds on the

doors, hatches and hood are particularly

vulnerable to the effects of road salt.

Therefore, these areas must be regularly

cleaned. Make sure that the drain holes in

the lower edge of the door are open.

Spray water under the body and in the

wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash

away road salt.

Avoid leaving water spots on the paint

surface by using a damp chamois to dry

the vehicle.

WAXING

Regular waxing protects the paint surface

and helps retain new vehicle appearance.

Polishing is recommended to remove

built-up wax residue and to avoid a

weathered appearance before reapplying

wax.

A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choos-

ing the proper product.

. Wax your vehicle only after a thorough

washing. Follow the instructions sup-

plied with the wax.

. Do not use a wax containing any

abrasives, cutting compounds or clea-

ners that may damage the vehicle

finish.

Machine compound or aggressive polish-

CLEANING EXTERIOR

ing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish

may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,

insects, and tree sap as quickly as possi-

ble from the paint surface to avoid lasting

damage or staining. Special cleaning

products are available at a NISSAN dealer

or any automotive accessory stores. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for these products.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used in winter,

the underbody must be cleaned regularly.

This will prevent dirt and salt from build-

ing up and causing the acceleration of

corrosion on the underbody and suspen-

sion. Before the winter period and again

in the spring, the underseal must be

checked and, if necessary, re-treated.

GLASS

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and

dust film from the glass surfaces. It is

normal for glass to become coated with a

film after the vehicle is parked in the hot

sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will

easily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the

windows, do not use sharp-edged

tools, abrasive cleaners or chlorine-

based disinfectant cleaners. They

could damage the electrical conduc-

tors, radio antenna elements or rear

window defroster elements.

WHEELS

Wash the wheels when washing the

vehicle to maintain their appearance.

. Clean the inner side of the wheels

when the wheel is changed or the

underside of the vehicle is washed.

. Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents

or corrosion. Such damage may cause

loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire

bead.

. NISSAN recommends that the road

wheels be waxed to protect against

road salt in areas where it is used

during winter.

CAUTION

Do not use abrasive cleaners when

washing the wheels.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS

Wash regularly with a sponge dampened

in a mild soap solution, especially during

winter months in areas where road salt is

used. Salt could discolor the wheels if not

removed.

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoid

staining or discoloring the wheels:

. Do not use a cleaner that uses

strong acid or alkali contents to

clean the wheels.

. Do not apply wheel cleaners to

the wheels when they are hot.

The wheel temperature should be

the same as ambient tempera-

ture.

. Rinse the wheel to completely

remove the cleaner within 15

minutes after the cleaner is ap-

plied.

Appearance and care 7-3

7-4 Appearance and care

CHROME PARTS

Clean chrome parts regularly with a non-

abrasive chrome polish to maintain the

finish.

TIRE DRESSING

NISSAN does not recommend the use of

tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a

coating to the tires to help reduce dis-

coloration of the rubber. If a tire dressing

is applied to the tires, it may react with

the coating and form a compound. This

compound may come off the tire while

driving and stain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take

the following precautions:

. Use a water-based tire dressing. The

coating on the tire dissolves more

easily with an oil-based tire dressing.

. Apply a light coat of tire dressing to

help prevent it from entering the tire

tread/grooves (where it would be

difficult to remove).

. Wipe off excess tire dressing using a

dry towel. Make sure the tire dressing

is completely removed from the tire

tread/grooves.

. Allow the tire dressing to dry as

recommended by tire dressing manu-

facturer.

Occasionally remove loose dust from the

interior trim, plastic parts and seats using

a vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush.

Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a

clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap

solution, then wipe clean with a dry soft

cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in

order to maintain the appearance of the

leather.

Before using any fabric protector, read

the manufacturer’s recommendations.

Some fabric protectors contain chemicals

that may stain or bleach the seat materi-

al.

Use a cloth dampened only with water, to

clean the meter and gauge lens.

WARNING

Do not use water or acidic cleaners

(hot steam cleaners) on the seat. This

can damage the seat or occupant

classification sensors. This can also

affect the operation of the air bag

system and result in serious perso-

nal injury.

CAUTION

. Never use benzine, thinner, or any

similar material.

. For cleaning, use a soft cloth,

dampened with water. Never use

a rough cloth, alcohol, benzine,

thinner or any kind of solvent or

paper towel with a chemical

cleaning agent. They will scratch

or cause discoloration to the lens.

. Do not spray any liquid such as

water on the meter lens. Spraying

liquid may cause the system to

malfunction.

. Small dirt particles can be abra-

sive and damaging to the leather

surfaces and should be removed

promptly. Do not use saddle soap,

car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning

fluids, solvents, detergents or

ammonia-based cleaners as they

may damage the leather’s natural

finish.

. Never use fabric protectors un-

less recommended by the manu-

facturer.

. Do not use glass or plastic cleaner

on meter or gauge lens covers. It

CLEANING INTERIOR

may damage the lens cover.

AIR FRESHENERS

Most air fresheners use a solvent that

could affect the vehicle interior. If you use

an air freshener, take the following pre-

cautions:

. Hanging-type air fresheners can

cause permanent discoloration when

they contact vehicle interior surfaces.

Place the air freshener in a location

that allows it to hang free and not

contact an interior surface.

. Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip

on the vents. These products can

cause immediate damage and disco-

loration when spilled on interior sur-

faces.

Carefully read and follow the manufac-

turer’s instructions before using air fresh-

eners.

FLOOR MATS

WARNING

To avoid potential pedal interference

that may result in a collision, injury

or death:

. NEVER place a floor mat on top of

another floor mat in the driver

front position or install them up-

side down or backwards.

. It is recommended that you use

only genuine NISSAN floor mats

specifically designed for use in

your vehicle model and model

year.

. Properly position the mats in the

floorwell using the floor mat po-

sitioning hooks. See “Floor mat

installation” (P.7-5).

. Make sure the floor mat does not

interfere with pedal operation.

. Periodically check the floor mats

to make sure they are properly

installed.

. After cleaning the vehicle interior,

check the floor mats to make

sure they are properly installed.

The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can

extend the life of your vehicle carpet and

make it easier to clean the interior. Mats

should be maintained with regular clean-

ing and replaced if they become exces-

sively worn.

JVA0018X

Floor mat installation

Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat

positioning hook(s). The number and

shape of the floor mat positioning hook

(s) for each seating position varies de-

pending on the vehicle.

When installing genuine NISSAN floor

mats, follow the installation instructions

provided with the floor mat and the

following:

1. Position the floor mat in the floorwell

so that the floor mat grommet holes

are aligned with the hook(s).

2. Secure the grommet holes into the

hook(s) and ensure that the floor mat

Appearance and care 7-5

7-6 Appearance and care

is properly positioned.

3. Make sure the floor mat does not

interfere with pedal operation. With

the ignition in the OFF position and

the shift lever in the P (Park) position

(Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) models) or the shift lever in the

N (Neutral) position (Manual Transmis-

sion (MT) models), fully apply and

release all pedals. The floor mat must

not interfere with pedal operation or

prevent the pedal from returning to its

normal position. It is recommended

you see a NISSAN dealer for details

about installing the floor mats in your

vehicle.

JVA0031X

Positioning hook(s)

The illustration shows the location of the

floor mat positioning hook(s).

SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping

them with a sponge dampened in a mild

soap solution. Allow the belts to dry

completely in the shade before using

them.

See “Seat belts” (P.1-12).

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up

in the retractor. NEVER use bleach,

dye, or chemical solvents to clean

the seat belts, since these materials

may severely weaken the seat belt

webbing.

CLEANING THE SEAT TRACKS

CAUTION

Periodically clean the seat tracks to

prevent reduction of ability to move

the seats.

Clean periodically with a high-powered

vacuum cleaner. Dirt and debris may

reduce the ability to adjust the seat. A

wet cleansing agent may be used if

necessary.

MOST COMMON FACTORS CON-

TRIBUTING TO VEHICLE CORRO-

SION

. The accumulation of moisture-retain-

ing dirt and debris in body panel

sections, cavities, and other areas.

. Damage to paint and other protective

coatings caused by gravel and stone

chips or minor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLU-

ENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on

the vehicle body underside can acceler-

ate corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not

dry completely inside the vehicle, and

should be removed for drying to avoid

floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of

high relative humidity, especially those

areas where the temperatures stay above

freezing where atmospheric pollution ex-

ists, or where road salt is used.

Temperature

A temperature increase will accelerate

the rate of corrosion to those parts which

are not well ventilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in

the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt

use will accelerate the corrosion process.

Road salt will also accelerate the disin-

tegration of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM

CORROSION

. Wash and wax your vehicle often to

keep the vehicle clean.

. Always check for minor damage to the

paint and repair it as soon as possible.

. Keep drain holes at the bottom of the

doors open to avoid water accumula-

tion.

. Check the underbody for accumula-

tion of sand, dirt or salt. If present,

wash with water as soon as possible.

CAUTION

. NEVER remove dirt, sand or other

debris from the passenger com-

partment by washing it out with a

hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum

cleaner.

. Never allow water or other liquids

to come in contact with electronic

components inside the vehicle as

this may damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface deicing

are extremely corrosive. They accelerate

corrosion and deterioration of underbody

components such as the exhaust system,

fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor

pan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be

cleaned periodically.

For additional protection against rust and

corrosion, which may be required in some

areas, it is recommended you consult a

NISSAN dealer.

Appearance and care 7-7

CORROSION PROTECTION

7-8 Appearance and care

MEMO

8 Do-it-yourself
Maintenance precautions ...................................................... 8-2
Engine compartment check locations ........................ 8-3
MR20DD engine model ..................................................... 8-4
Engine cooling system ............................................................. 8-4
Checking engine coolant level .................................... 8-5
Changing engine coolant ................................................ 8-6
Engine oil ............................................................................................. 8-6
Checking engine oil level ................................................. 8-6
Changing engine oil and filter ..................................... 8-6
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) fluid ............................................................................................ 8-9
Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid ....................... 8-9
Window washer fluid .............................................................. 8-10
Battery ................................................................................................ 8-11
Jump starting......................................................................... 8-12
Variable voltage control system ................................... 8-13
Drive belt .......................................................................................... 8-13
Spark plugs..................................................................................... 8-14
Replacing spark plugs ..................................................... 8-14
Air cleaner ....................................................................................... 8-15
Air duct removal .................................................................. 8-15
Air cleaner filter replacement ................................... 8-15
Windshield wiper blades ..................................................... 8-16
Cleaning ................................................................................... 8-16
Replacing ................................................................................ 8-16
Rear window wiper blade .................................................. 8-17
Brakes ................................................................................................ 8-17
Self-adjusting brakes ..................................................... 8-17
Brake pad wear warning............................................ 8-17
Fuses ................................................................................................... 8-18
Engine compartment .................................................... 8-18
Passenger compartment ........................................... 8-20
Key fob battery replacement .......................................... 8-21
Intelligent Key battery replacement .......................... 8-23
Lights .................................................................................................. 8-25
Headlights .............................................................................. 8-25
Exterior and interior lights ........................................ 8-27
Wheels and tires ........................................................................ 8-29
Tire pressure ........................................................................ 8-29
Tire labeling .......................................................................... 8-33
Types of tires ....................................................................... 8-35
Tire chains.............................................................................. 8-36
Changing wheels and tires ...................................... 8-37

8-2 Do-it-yourself

When performing any inspection or main-

tenance work on your vehicle, always

take care to prevent serious accidental

injury to yourself or damage to the

vehicle. The following are general precau-

tions which should be closely observed.

WARNING

. Park the vehicle on a level sur-

face, apply the parking brake

securely and block the wheels to

prevent the vehicle from moving.

Move the shift lever to the P

(Park) position (CVT model) or

the shift lever to the N (Neutral)

position (MT model).

. Be sure the ignition switch is in

the OFF or LOCK position when

performing any parts replace-

ment or repairs.

. If you must work with the engine

running, keep your hands, cloth-

ing, hair and tools away from

moving fans, belts and any other

moving parts.

. It is advisable to secure or re-

move any loose clothing and

remove any jewelry, such as

rings, watches, etc. before work-

ing on your vehicle.

. Always wear eye protection

whenever you work on your ve-

hicle.

. If you must run the engine in an

enclosed space such as a garage,

be sure there is proper ventilation

for exhaust gases to escape.

. Never get under the vehicle while

it is supported only by a jack. If it

is necessary to work under the

vehicle, support it with safety

stands.

. Because the fuel lines are under

high pressure even when the

engine is off, it is recommended

you visit a NISSAN dealer for

service of the fuel filter or fuel

lines.

. Do not work under the hood while

the engine is hot. Always turn off

the engine and wait until it cools

down.

. If you must work with the engine

running, keep your hands, cloth-

ing, hair and tools away from

moving fans, belts and any other

moving parts.

. Keep smoking materials, flame

and sparks away from fuel and

the battery.

. On gasoline engine models with

the Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI)

system, the fuel filter and fuel

lines should be serviced because

the fuel lines are under high

pressure even when the engine

is turned off. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

. Your vehicle is equipped with an

automatic engine cooling fan. It

may come on at any time without

warning, even if the ignition

switch is in the OFF position and

the engine is not running. To

avoid injury, always disconnect

the negative battery cable before

working near the fan.

. Avoid direct contact with used

engine oil and coolant. Impro-

perly disposed engine oil, engine

coolant, and/or other vehicle

fluids can hurt the environment.

Always conform to local regula-

tions for disposal of vehicle fluids.

CAUTION

. Do not work under the hood while

the engine is hot. Turn the engine

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

off and wait until it cools down.

. Avoid direct contact with used

engine oil and coolant. Impro-

perly disposed engine oil, and

engine coolant and/or other ve-

hicle fluids can damage the en-

vironment. Always conform to

local regulations for disposal of

vehicle fluid.

. Never leave the engine or the CVT

related component harnesses

disconnected while the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

. Never connect or disconnect the

battery or any transistorized

component while the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

. Your vehicle is equipped with an

automatic engine cooling fan. It

may come on at any time without

warning, even if the ignition key is

in the OFF position and the en-

gine is not running. To avoid

injury, always disconnect the ne-

gative battery cable before work-

ing near the fan.

This “8. Do-it-yourself” section gives in-

structions regarding only those items

which are relatively easy for an owner to

perform.

A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is also

available. (See “Owner’s manual/service

manual order information” (P.10-21).)

You should be aware that incomplete or

improper servicing may result in operat-

ing difficulties or excessive emissions, and

could affect your warranty coverage. If in

doubt about any servicing, it is recom-

mended you have it done by a NISSAN

dealer.

WAA0212X

Remove the air duct if necessary.

To remove the air duct

1. Remove the clips

with a suitable

tool.

2. Loosen the bolt

with a suitable tool.

3. Pull the air duct upward and then

sideways.

To install the air duct, perform the in-

stallation procedure in reverse order.

Do-it-yourself 8-3

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS

8-4 Do-it-yourself

WAA0211X

MR20DD ENGINE MODEL

1. Engine coolant reservoir

2. Engine oil filler cap

3. Brake and clutch* fluid reservoir

4. Air cleaner

5. Window washer fluid reservoir

6. Drive belt

7. Engine oil dipstick

8. Battery

9. Fuse/fusible link box

*: For Manual Transmission (MT) Model

The engine cooling system is filled at the

factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50%

Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/

Coolant (blue) and 50% water to provide

year-round anti-freeze and coolant pro-

tection. The anti-freeze solution contains

rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional

engine cooling system additives are not

necessary.

WARNING

. Never remove the radiator or

coolant reservoir cap when the

engine is hot. Wait until the en-

gine and radiator cool down.

Serious burns could be caused

by high pressure fluid escaping

from the radiator. See precau-

tions in “If your vehicle overheats”

(P.6-16) of this manual.

. The radiator is equipped with a

pressure type radiator cap. To

prevent engine damage, use only

a genuine NISSAN radiator cap.

. If the engine was stopped soon

when the engine is hot, the cool-

ing fan may operate for approxi-

mately 10 minutes after the

engine was stopped to cool the

components in the engine com-

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

partment. When the cooling fan is

operating, be sure that hands or

other items do not get caught in

it.

CAUTION

. Never use any cooling system

additives such as radiator sealer.

Additives may clog the cooling

system and cause damage to

the engine, transmission and/or

cooling system.

. When adding or replacing cool-

ant, be sure to use only Genuine

NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/

Coolant (blue) or equivalent. Gen-

uine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/

Coolant (blue) is pre-diluted to

provide antifreeze protection to

-34°F(-37°C). If additional freeze

protection is needed due to

weather where you operate your

vehicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)

concentrate following the direc-

tions on the container. If an

equivalent coolant other than

Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-

freeze/Coolant (blue) is used, fol-

low the coolant manufacture’s

instructions to maintain mini-

mum antifreeze protection to

-34°F (-37°C). The use of other

types of coolant solutions other

than Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or

equivalent may damage the en-

gine cooling system.

. The life expectancy of the fac-

tory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles

(168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing

any other type of coolant other

than Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) (or

equivalent coolant), including

Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-

freeze/Coolant (green), or the use

of non-distilled water will reduce

the life expectancy of the factory-

fill coolant. Refer to the “9. Main-

tenance and schedules” section

of this manual for more details.

JVM0438X

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir

when the engine is cold. If the coolant

level is below the MIN level

, open the

reservoir cap and add coolant up to the

MAX level

. If the reservoir is empty,

check the coolant level in the radiator

when the engine is cold. If there is

insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the

radiator with coolant up to the filler

opening and also add it to the reservoir

up to the MAX level

Tighten the cap securely after adding

engine coolant.

If the cooling system frequently re-

quires coolant, have it checked. It is

Do-it-yourself 8-5

8-6 Do-it-yourself

recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

A NISSAN dealer can change the engine

coolant. The service procedure can be

found in the NISSAN Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in re-

duced heater performance and engine

overheating.

WARNING

. To avoid being scalded, never

change the coolant when the

engine is hot.

. Never remove the radiator or

coolant reservoir cap when the

engine is hot. Serious burns could

be caused by high pressure fluid

escaping from the radiator.

. Avoid direct skin contact with

used coolant. If skin contact is

made, wash thoroughly with soap

or hand cleaner as soon as pos-

sible.

. Keep coolant out of the reach of

children and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of

properly. Check your local regulations.

SDI1993

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Run the engine until it reaches oper-

ating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than

10 minutes for the oil to drain back

into the oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.

Reinsert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check

the oil level. It should be within the

range

. If the oil level is below ,

remove the oil filler cap and pour

recommended oil through the open-

ing. Do not overfill

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oil

maintenance intervals or during the

break-in period, depending on the se-

verity of operating conditions.

CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly.

Operating the engine with an insuffi-

cient amount of oil can damage the

engine, and such damage is not

covered by the warranty.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

WARNING

. Used oil must be disposed of

properly. Never pour or dump oil

into the ground, canals, rivers,

etc. It should be disposed of at

proper waste facilities. NISSAN

recommends having your oil

changed by a NISSAN dealer.

. Be careful not to burn yourself, as

the engine oil may be hot.

ENGINE OIL

. Prolonged and repeated contact

with used engine oil may cause

skin cancer.

. Avoid direct skin contact with

used oil. If contacted, wash thor-

oughly with soap or hand cleaner

and plenty of water as soon as

possible.

. Store used engine oil in marked

containers out of the reach of

children.

Vehicle set-up

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Run the engine until it reaches the

operating temperature.

3. Turn the engine off and wait more

than 10 minutes.

4. Raise and support the vehicle using a

suitable floor jack and safety jack

stands.

Place the safety jack stands under

the vehicle jack-up points.

A suitable adapter should be at-

tached to the jack stand saddle.

CAUTION

Make sure the correct lifting and

support points are used to avoid

vehicle damage.

JVM0414X

Do-it-yourself 8-7

8-8 Do-it-yourself

JVM0421X

1. Oil filler cap

2. Oil drain plug

3. Oil filter

Engine oil and filter

1. Place a large drain pan under the

drain plug.

2. Remove the oil filler cap.

3. Remove the drain plug with a wrench

and completely drain the oil.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself, as

the engine oil is hot.

Waste oil must be disposed of

properly.

Check your local regulations.

(Perform steps 4 to 7 only when the

engine oil filter change is needed.)

4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter

wrench. Remove the oil filter by turn-

ing it by hand.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting

surface with a clean rag.

CAUTION

Be sure to remove any old gasket

material remaining on the mounting

surface of the engine. Failure to do

so could lead to engine damage.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with

clean engine oil.

7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a

slight resistance is felt, then tighten

additionally more than 2/3 turn.

Oil filter tightening torque:

11 to 15 ft-lb

(14.7 to 20.5 N·m)

8. Clean and re-install the drain plug

with a new washer. Securely tighten

the drain plug with a wrench.

Drain plug tightening torque:

22 to 29 ft-lb

(29 to 39 N·m)

Do not use excessive force.

9. Refill the engine with the recom-

mended oil through the oil filler open-

ing, and install the oil filler cap

securely.

See “Capacities and recommended

fluids/lubricants” (P.10-2) for drain

and refill capacity. The drain and refill

capacity depends on the oil tempera-

ture and drain time. Use these speci-

fications for reference only. Always

use the dipstick to determine the

proper amount of oil in the engine.

10. Start the engine and check for leak-

age around the drain plug and the oil

filter. Correct as required.

11. Turn the engine off and wait more

than 10 minutes. Check the oil level

with the dipstick. Add engine oil if

necessary.

After the operation

1. Lower the vehicle carefully to the

ground.

2. Dispose of waste oil and filter properly.

WARNING

. Prolonged and repeated contact

with used engine oil may cause

skin cancer.

. Try to avoid direct skin contact

with used oil. If skin contact is

made, wash thoroughly with soap

or hand cleaner as soon as pos-

sible.

. Keep used engine oil out of reach

of children.

When checking or replacement is re-

quired, we recommend a NISSAN dealer

for servicing.

CAUTION

. NISSAN recommends using Gen-

uine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or

equivalent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs.

Do not mix with other fluids.

. Do not use Automatic transmis-

sion fluid (ATF) or Manual Trans-

mission fluid in a NISSAN CVT, as

it may damage the CVT. Damage

caused by the use of fluids other

than as recommended is not

covered by the NISSAN’s New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

. Using fluids that are not equiva-

lent to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid

NS-3 may also damage the CVT.

Damage caused by the use of

fluids other than as recom-

mended is not covered by the

NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

For additional brake and clutch fluid

information, see “Capacities and recom-

mended fluids/lubricants” (P.10-2) of this

manual.

WARNING

. Use only new fluid from a sealed

container. Old, inferior or con-

taminated fluid may damage the

brake and clutch systems. The

use of improper fluids can da-

mage the brake and clutch sys-

tems, and affect the vehicle’s

stopping ability.

. Clean the filler cap before remov-

ing.

. Brake and clutch fluid is poiso-

nous and should be stored care-

fully in marked containers out of

the reach of children.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted

surfaces. This will damage the paint.

If fluid is spilled, immediately wash

the surface with water.

Do-it-yourself 8-9

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE

TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID

BRAKE AND CLUTCH (if so equipped) FLUID

8-10 Do-it-yourself

JVM0789X

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the

fluid is below the MIN line

or the brake

warning light comes on, add Genuine

NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or

equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line

. If fluid must be added frequently, the

system should be checked. It is recom-

mended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

JVM0788X

Type A

JVM0380X

Type B

Type A: Check the fluid level in the

window washer reservoir. If the fluid level

is low, add window washer fluid.

Type B: To check the fluid level, use your

finger to plug the center hole

of the

cap/tube assembly, then remove it from

the reservoir. If there is no fluid in the

tube, add fluid.

Add a washer solvent to the washer for

better cleaning. In the winter season, add

a windshield washer antifreeze. Follow

the manufacturer’s instructions for the

mixture ratio.

Fill the window washer fluid reservoir

periodically.

Add fluid when the low washer fluid

warning appears (if so equipped).

Refill the reservoir more frequently when

driving conditions require an increased

amount of window washer fluid.

Recommended fluid:

Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Con-

centrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equiva-

lent

CAUTION

. Do not substitute engine anti-

freeze coolant for window

washer solution. This may result

WINDOW WASHER FLUID

in damage to the paint.

. Do not fill the window washer

reservoir tank with washer fluid

concentrates at full strength.

Some methyl alcohol based

washer fluid concentrates may

permanently stain the grille if

spilled while filling the window

washer reservoir tank.

. Pre-mix washer fluid concen-

trates with water to the manu-

facturer’s recommended levels

before pouring the fluid into the

window washer reservoir tank. Do

not use the window washer re-

servoir tank to mix the washer

fluid concentrate and water.

. Keep the battery surface clean and

dry. Clean the battery with a solution

of baking soda and water.

. Make certain the terminal connec-

tions are clean and securely tightened.

. If the vehicle is not to be used for 30

days or longer, disconnect the nega-

tive 7 battery terminal cable to pre-

vent discharging it.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery dis-

charge and potential no-start condi-

tions such as:

1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume

battery power when the engine is

not running (Phone chargers, GPS,

DVD players, etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/

or only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to

be charged to maintain battery health.

WARNING

. Do not expose the battery to

flames or electrical sparks. Hy-

drogen gas generated by the

battery is explosive. Do not allow

battery fluid to contact your skin,

eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces.

After touching a battery or bat-

tery cap, do not touch or rub your

eyes. Thoroughly wash your

hands. If the acid contacts your

eyes, skin or clothing, immedi-

ately flush with water for at least

15 minutes and seek medical

attention.

. Do not operate the vehicle if the

fluid in the battery is low. Low

battery fluid can cause a higher

load on the battery which can

generate heat, reduce battery life,

and in some cases lead to an

explosion.

. When working on or near a bat-

tery, always wear suitable eye

protection and remove all jew-

elry.

. Battery posts, terminals and re-

lated accessories contain lead

and lead compounds. Wash

hands after handling.

. Keep the battery out of the reach

of children.

Do-it-yourself 8-11

BATTERY

8-12 Do-it-yourself

DI0137MA

Check the fluid level in each cell. It should

be between the UPPER LEVEL

and

LOWER LEVEL

lines.

If it is necessary to add fluid, add only

distilled water to bring the level to the

indicator in each filler opening. Do not

overfill.

SDI1480C

1. Remove the cell plugs .

2. Add distilled water up to the UPPER

LEVEL

line.

If the side of the battery is not clear,

check the distilled water level by

looking directly above the cell; the

condition

indicates OK and the

condition

needs more to be added.

3. Tighten cell plugs

Vehicles operated in high temperatures

or under severe conditions require fre-

quent checks of the battery fluid level.

JUMP STARTING

If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump

starting” (P.6-14). If the engine does not

start by jump starting, the battery may

have to be replaced. It is recommended

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

CAUTION

. Do not ground accessories di-

rectly to the battery terminal.

Doing so will bypass the variable

voltage control system and the

vehicle battery may not charge

completely.

. Use electrical accessories with

the engine running to avoid dis-

charging the vehicle battery.

The variable voltage control system mea-

sures the amount of electrical discharge

from the battery and controls voltage

generated by the generator.

SDI1881

1. Alternator

2. Drive belt auto-tensioner

3. Crankshaft pulley

4. Air conditioner compressor

5. Water pump

WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is in the

OFF or LOCK position before servi-

cing drive belts. The engine could

rotate unexpectedly.

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of

unusual wear, cuts, fraying or loosen-

ess. If the belt is in poor condition or

loose, have it replaced or adjusted. It is

recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

2. Have the belt condition checked reg-

ularly.

Do-it-yourself 8-13

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM

DRIVE BELT

8-14 Do-it-yourself

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition

switch are off and that the parking

brake is applied.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to

remove the spark plugs. An incorrect

socket can damage the spark plugs.

SDI2670

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

If replacement is required, it is recom-

mended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

Iridium platinum-tipped spark

plugs

It is not necessary to replace the iridium

platinum-tipped spark plugs as frequently

as the conventional type spark plugs

since they will last much longer. Follow

the maintenance schedule shown in the

“9. Maintenance and schedules” section.

Do not reuse the iridium platinum-tipped

spark plugs by cleaning or regapping.

Always replace spark plugs with recom-

mended or equivalent ones.

SPARK PLUGS

WAI0158X

AIR DUCT REMOVAL

1. Remove the clip with a suitable tool.

2. While pulling off the lock

, pull out the

clip

and pull up the air duct .

WAI0159X

1. Remove the clips and open the air

cleaner filter cover

2. Pull up the air cleaner filter

AIR CLEANER FILTER REPLACEMENT

WARNING

. Operating the engine with the air

cleaner filter off can cause you or

others to be burned. The air

cleaner filter not only cleans the

intake air, it also stops flame if

the engine backfires. If the air

cleaner filter is not installed and

the engine backfires, you could

be burned. Never drive with the

air cleaner filter off. Be cautious

working on the engine when the

air cleaner filter is off.

. Never pour fuel into the throttle

body or attempt to start the

engine with the air cleaner re-

moved. Doing so could result in

serious injury.

Do-it-yourself 8-15

AIR CLEANER

8-16 Do-it-yourself

CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after using

the windshield washer or if a wiper blade

chatters when running, wax or other

material may be on the blade or wind-

shield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a

washer solution or a mild detergent. Your

windshield is clean if beads do not form

when rinsing with clear water.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth

soaked in a washer solution or a mild

detergent. Then rinse the blade with clear

water. If your windshield is still not clear

after cleaning the blades and using the

wiper, replace the blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades can

damage the windshield and impair

driver vision.

SDI2359

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

1. Lift the wiper arm away from the

windshield.

2. Push and hold the release tab

, and

move the wiper blade down the wiper

arm

3. Insert the new wiper blade onto the

wiper arm until a click sounds.

4. Rotate the wiper blade so that the

dimple is in the groove.

CAUTION

. After wiper blade replacement,

return the wiper arm to its origi-

nal position; otherwise it may be

damaged when the hood is

opened.

. Make sure the wiper blades con-

tact the glass; otherwise the arm

may be damaged from wind

pressure.

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

SDI2693

Be careful not to clog the washer nozzle

. This may cause improper windshield

washer operation. If the nozzle is clogged,

remove any objects with a needle or small

. Be careful not to damage the

nozzle.

It is recommended you contact a NISSAN

dealer if checking or replacement is

required.

If the brakes do not operate properly, it is

recommended you have the brakes

checked by a NISSAN dealer.

SELF-ADJUSTING BRAKES

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjust-

ing brakes.

The disc-type brakes self-adjust every

time the brake pedal is applied.

WARNING

Have your brake system checked if

the brake pedal height does not

return to normal. It is recommended

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING

The disc brake pads have audible wear

warnings. When a brake pad requires

replacement, it will make a high pitched

scraping sound when the vehicle is in

motion. This scraping sound will first

occur only when the brake pedal is

depressed. After more wear of the brake

pad, the sound will always be heard even

if the brake pedal is not depressed. Have

the brakes checked as soon as possible if

the wear warning sound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions,

Do-it-yourself 8-17

REAR WINDOW WIPER BLADE BRAKES

8-18 Do-it-yourself

occasional brake squeak, squeal or other

noise may be heard. Occasional brake

noise during light to moderate stops is

normal and does not affect the function

or performance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals

should be followed. For additional infor-

mation, see the maintenance schedule

shown in the “9. Maintenance and sche-

dules” section.

JVM0386X

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

WARNING

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower

amperage rating than that specified

on the fuse box cover. This could

damage the electrical system or

electronic control units or cause a

fire.

If any electrical equipment does not

operate, check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch is turned

off, and the headlight switch is in the

OFF position (if so equipped) or the

AUTO position and the headlights are

OFF.

2. Open the engine hood.

3. Remove the fuse/fusible link box cov-

er by using a suitable tool and pushing

the tab.

4. Locate the fuse that needs to be

replaced.

5. Remove the fuse using the fuse puller

located in the passenger compart-

ment fuse box.

FUSES

SDI1753

Type A

SDI1754

Type B

6. If the fuse is open , replace it with a

new fuse

7. If a new fuse also opens, have the

electrical system checked and re-

paired. It is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

JVM0444X

The holder also contains the fuses.

It is recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for checking and/or replacing.

Fusible links

If any electrical equipment does not

operate and the fuses are in good condi-

tion, check the fusible links. If any of these

fusible links are melted, replace only with

genuine NISSAN parts.

For checking and replacing the fusible

links, it is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer.

Do-it-yourself 8-19

8-20 Do-it-yourself

JVM0387X

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

WARNING

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower

amperage rating than that specified

on the fuse box cover. This could

damage the electrical system or

electronic control units or cause a

fire.

If any electrical equipment does not

operate, check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch is turned

off, and the headlight switch is in the

OFF position (if so equipped) or the

AUTO position and the headlights are

OFF.

2. Remove the fuse box cover.

3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller

SDI1754

4. If the fuse is open , replace it with a

new fuse

5. If a new fuse also opens, have the

electrical system checked and re-

paired. It is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

JVM0415X

Extended storage fuse switch (if so

equipped)

To reduce battery drain, the extended

storage fuse switch comes from the

factory switched off. Prior to delivery of

your vehicle, the switch is pushed in

(switched on) and should always remain

on.

If the extended storage fuse switch is not

pushed in (switched on), the meter may

display a warning message. See “21. Ship-

ping Mode On Push Storage Fuse warn-

ing” (P.2-33).

If any electrical equipment does not

operate, remove the extended storage

fuse switch and check for an open fuse.

NOTE:

If the extended storage fuse switch

malfunctions or if the fuse is open, it is

not necessary to replace the switch. In

this case, remove the extended storage

fuse switch and replace it with a new

fuse of the same rating.

How to remove the extended storage

fuse switch:

1. To remove the extended storage fuse

switch, be sure the ignition switch is in

the OFF or LOCK position.

2. Be sure the headlights are off. (See

“Headlight switch” (P.2-52) or “Intelli-

gent Auto Headlight system” (P.2-52).)

3. Remove the fuse box cover.

4. Pinch the locking tabs

found on

each side of the extended storage

fuse switch.

5. Pull the extended storage fuse switch

straight out from the fuse box

CAUTION

. Be careful not to allow children to

swallow the battery and removed

parts.

. An improperly disposed battery

can harm the environment. Al-

ways confirm local regulations

for battery disposal.

. When changing batteries, do not

let dust or oil get on the compo-

nents.

. There is danger of explosion if the

lithium battery is incorrectly re-

placed. Replace only with the

same or equivalent type.

Do-it-yourself 8-21

KEY FOB BATTERY REPLACEMENT

8-22 Do-it-yourself

JVM0381X

To replace the battery:

1. Insert a small screwdriver into the slit

to open the lid. Use a cloth to

protect the casing.

2. Replace the battery with a new one.

Recommended battery: CR2032 or

equivalent

Do not touch the internal circuit

and electric terminals as doing so

could cause a malfunction.

Hold the battery by the edges.

Holding the battery across the

contact points will seriously deplete

the storage capacity.

Make sure that the + side faces the

bottom of the case

3. Close the lid securely.

4. Operate the buttons to check its

operation.

See a NISSAN dealer if you need assis-

tance for replacement.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference,

and (2) this device must accept any

interference received, including inter-

ference that may cause undesired op-

eration.

Note: Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Ca-

nada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following

two conditions: (1) this device may not

cause interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation of the device.

CAUTION

. Be careful not to allow children to

swallow the battery and removed

parts.

. An improperly disposed battery

can harm the environment. Al-

ways confirm local regulations

for battery disposal.

. When changing batteries, do not

let dust or oil get on the compo-

nents.

. There is danger of explosion if the

lithium battery is incorrectly re-

placed. Replace only with the

same or equivalent type.

SDI2451

Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key

as follows:

1. Remove the mechanical key from the

Intelligent Key.

2. Insert a small screwdriver into the slit

of the corner and twist it to separate

the upper part from the lower part.

Use a cloth to protect the casing.

3. Replace the battery with a new one.

Recommended battery:

CR2032 or equivalent

Do not touch the internal circuit

and electric terminals as doing so

could cause a malfunction.

Hold the battery by the edges.

Holding the battery across the

contact points will seriously deplete

the storage capacity.

Make sure that the + side faces the

bottom of the case.

Do-it-yourself 8-23

INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT

8-24 Do-it-yourself

SDI2452

4. Align the tips of the upper and lower

parts

, and then push them together

until it is securely closed.

5. Operate the buttons to check its

operation.

If you need any assistance for replace-

ment, it is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference,

and (2) this device must accept any

interference received, including inter-

ference that may cause undesired op-

eration.

Note: Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Ca-

nada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following

two conditions: (1) this device may not

cause interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation of the device.

WAI0093X

1. Front parking light/Daytime running

light/Front turn signal light (LED type)

2. Front turn signal light (bulb type)

3. Headlight (high-beam)

4. Headlight (low-beam)

5. Front side marker light

6. Map light and front room light

7. Room light

8. Side turn signal light (if so equipped)

9. Front fog light (if so equipped)

10. Cargo light

11. High-mounted stop light

12. Rear combination light (tail light, stop

light, rear turn signal light)

13. Rear side marker light

14. License plate light

15. Reverse light/Tail light

HEADLIGHTS

Fog may temporarily form inside the lens

of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car

wash. A temperature difference between

the inside and the outside of the lens

causes the fog. This is not a malfunction.

If large drops of water collect inside the

lens, it is recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for servicing.

Do-it-yourself 8-25

LIGHTS

8-26 Do-it-yourself

Replacing

LED headlight model:

If LED headlight replacement is required,

it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Halogen headlight model:

The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type

which uses a replaceable headlight (halo-

gen) bulb.

CAUTION

. Do not leave the bulb out of the

headlight reflector for a long

period of time. Dust, moisture,

smoke, etc. entering the head-

light body may affect bulb per-

formance.

. High pressure halogen gas is

sealed inside the halogen bulb.

The bulb may break if the glass

envelope is scratched or the bulb

is dropped.

. Only touch the base when hand-

ling the bulb. Never touch the

glass envelope. Touching the

glass envelope could significantly

affect bulb life and/or headlight

performance.

. Aiming is not necessary after

replacing the bulb. When aiming

adjustment is necessary, it is

recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Use the same number and wattage as

originally installed as shown in the chart.

WAI0094X

Low-beam/High-beam:

1. Disconnect the battery negative cable.

2. Disconnect the electrical connector

from the rear end of the bulb.

3. Remove the headlight bulb

by turning it

counterclockwise. Do not shake or rotate

the bulb when removing it.

4. Install the new bulb in the reverse order of

removal.

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.

Headlight high beam (bulb type)

Headlight low beam (bulb type)

H11

Headlight high/low beams (LED type)*

LED

Front turn signal light* 21 or LED WY21W or -

Front parking light* LED -

Front side marker light* LED -

Front fog light (if so equipped)* 35 H8

Side turn signal light (if so equipped)* LED -

Daytime running light* LED -

Rear combination light*

Turn signal light 21 W21W

Stop/tail light LED —

Back-up 16 W16W

Rear side marker light* LED -

License plate light* 5 W5W

Map light* LED -

Vanity mirror light (if so equipped)* 1.8 -

High-mounted stop light* LED -

Room light 8 -

Cargo light 5 -

Glove box light* 1.4 -

*: It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for replacement.

NOTE: It is recommended that you check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the

latest information about parts.

Do-it-yourself 8-27

8-28 Do-it-yourself

SDI2306

Replacement procedures

: REMOVE

: INSTALL

All other lights are either type A, B, C, D or

E. When replacing a bulb, first remove the

lens and/or cover.

SDI1499A

Room light

SDI2653

Cargo light

If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” (P.6-

3).

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It

monitors tire pressure of all tires except

the spare (if so equipped). When the low

tire pressure warning light is lit, and the

“Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning

message is displayed in the vehicle in-

formation display, one or more of your

tires is significantly under-inflated.

The TPMS will activate only when the

vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH

(25 km/h). Also, this system may not

detect a sudden drop in tire pressure

(for example a flat tire while driving).

For more details, see “Low tire pressure

warning light” (P.2-14), “Tire Pressure Mon-

itoring System (TPMS)” (P.5-5) and “Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P.6-

3).

Tire inflation pressure

Check the pressure of the tires

(including the spare (if so

equipped)) often and always prior

to long distance trips. The recom-

mended tire pressure specifica-

tions are shown on the Tire and

Loading Information label under

the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading.

The Tire and Loading Information

label is affixed to the driver side

center pillar. Tire pressures should

be checked regularly because:

. Most tires naturally lose air over

time.

. Tires can lose air suddenly when

driven over potholes or other

objects or if the vehicle strikes

a curb while parking.

The tire pressures should be

checked when the tires are cold.

The tires are considered COLD after

the vehicle has been parked for 3 or

more hours, or driven less than 1

mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds.

TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert pro-

vides visual and audible signals

outside the vehicle for inflating the

tires to the recommended COLD

tire pressure. (See “TPMS with Easy

Fill Tire Alert” (P.5-8).)

Incorrect tire pressure, including

under inflation, may adversely

affect tire life and vehicle hand-

ling.

WARNING

. Improperly inflated tires can

fail suddenly and cause an

accident.

. The Gross Vehicle Weight

rating (GVWR) is located on

the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. cer-

tification label. The vehicle

weight capacity is indicated

on the Tire and Loading In-

formation label. Do not load

your vehicle beyond this ca-

pacity. Overloading your ve-

hicle may result in reduced

tire life, unsafe operating

conditions due to premature

tire failure, or unfavorable

Do-it-yourself 8-29

WHEELS AND TIRES

8-30 Do-it-yourself

handling characteristics and

could also lead to a serious

accident. Loading beyond

the specified capacity may

also result in failure of other

vehicle components.

. Before taking a long trip, or

whenever you heavily load

your vehicle, use a tire pres-

sure gauge to ensure that

the tire pressures are at the

specified level.

. For additional information

regarding tires, refer to “Im-

portant Tire Safety Informa-

tion” (US) or “Tire Safety

Information” (Canada) in the

Warranty Information Book-

let.

SDI2503

Tire and Loading Information label

Seating capacity: The max-

imum number of occu-

pants that can be seated

in the vehicle.

Vehicle load limit: See “Ve-

hicle loading information”

(P.10-12).

Original size: The size of

the tires originally installed

on the vehicle at the fac-

tory.

Cold tire pressure: Inflate

the tires to this pressure

when the tires are cold.

Tires are considered COLD

after the vehicle has been

parked for 3 or more hours,

or driven less than 1 mile

(1.6 km) at moderate

speeds. The recommended

cold tire inflation is set by

the manufacturer to pro-

vide the best balance of

tire wear, vehicle handling,

driveability, tire noise, etc.,

up to the vehicle’s GVWR.

Tire size — see “Tire label-

ing” (P.8-33).

Spare tire size or compact

spare tire size (if so

equipped)

Do-it-yourself 8-31

8-32 Do-it-yourself

SDI1949

Checking the tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from

the tire.

Press the pressure gauge

squarely onto the valve stem.

Do not press too hard or force

the valve stem sideways, or air

will escape. If the hissing sound

of air escaping from the tire is

heard while checking the pres-

sure, reposition the gauge to

eliminate this leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the

gauge stem and compare it to

the specification shown on the

Tire and Loading Information

label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If

too much air is added, press the

core of the valve stem briefly

with the tip of the gauge stem to

release pressure. Recheck the

pressure and add or release air

as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other

tires, including the spare (if so

equipped).

SIZE

COLD TIRE INFLATION

PRESSURE

FRONT ORIGINAL

TIRE

215/65 R16 98H

230 kPa, 33 PSI

215/60 R17 96H

230 kPa, 33 PSI

225/45 R19 92W

240 kPa, 35 PSI

REAR ORIGINAL TIRE

215/65 R16 98H

230 kPa, 33 PSI

215/60 R17 96H

230 kPa, 33 PSI

225/45 R19 92W

240 kPa, 35 PSI

SPARE TIRE (if so

equipped)

T145/90 D16 106M

T135/90 D16 102M

420 kPa, 60 PSI

SDI1575

Example

TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufac-

turers to place standardized infor-

mation on the sidewall of all tires.

This information identifies and de-

scribes the fundamental character-

istics of the tire and also provides

the tire identification number (TIN)

for safety standard certification.

The TIN can be used to identify

the tire in case of a recall.

Do-it-yourself 8-33

8-34 Do-it-yourself

SDI1606

Example

Tire size (example: P215/60R16

94H)

1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is

designed for passenger vehicles.

(Not all tires have this informa-

tion.)

2. Three-digit number (215): This

number gives the width in milli-

meters of the tire from sidewall

edge to sidewall edge.

3. Two-digit number (60): This

number, known as the aspect

ratio, gives the tire’s ratio of

height to width.

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number (16): This

number is the wheel or rim

diameter in inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number (94):

This number is the tire’s load

index. It is a measurement of

how much weight each tire can

support. You may not find this

information on all tires because

it is not required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should

not drive the vehicle faster than

the tire speed rating.

JVM0694X

Example

TIN (Tire Identification Number)

for a new tire (example: DOT XX XX

XXX XXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “De-

partment of Transportation”.

The symbol can be placed

above, below or to the left or

right of the Tire Identification

Number.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s

identification mark

3. Two-digit code: Tire size

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code

(Optional)

5. Four numbers represent the

week and year the tire was built.

For example, the numbers 3103

means the 31st week of 2003. If

these numbers are missing, then

look on the other sidewall of the

tire.

Tire ply composition and materi-

The number of layers or plies of

rubber-coated fabric in the tire.

Tire manufacturers also must in-

dicate the materials in the tire,

which include steel, nylon, polye-

ster, and others.

Maximum permissible inflation

pressure

This number is the greatest

amount of air pressure that should

be put in the tire. Do not exceed the

maximum permissible inflation

pressure.

Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maxi-

mum load in kilograms and pounds

that can be carried by the tire.

When replacing the tires on the

vehicle, always use a tire that has

the same load rating as the factory

installed tire.

Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires

an inner tube (“tube type”) or not

(“tubeless”).

The word “radial”

The word “radial” is shown, if the

tire has radial structure.

Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is

shown.

Other tire-related terminology:

In addition to the many terms that

are defined throughout this sec-

tion, Intended Outboard Sidewall is

(1) the sidewall that contains a

whitewall, bears white lettering or

bears manufacturer, brand and/or

model name molding that is higher

or deeper than the same molding

on the other sidewall of the tire, or

(2) the outward facing sidewall of

an asymmetrical tire that has a

particular side that must always

face outward when mounted on a

vehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

. When changing or replacing tires,

be sure all four tires are of the

same type (Example: Summer, All

Season or Snow) and construc-

tion. A NISSAN dealer may be able

to help you with information

about tire type, size, speed rating

and availability.

. Replacement tires may have a

lower speed rating than the fac-

tory equipped tires, and may not

match the potential maximum

vehicle speed. Never exceed the

maximum speed rating of the

tire.

. Replacing tires with those not

originally specified by NISSAN

could affect the proper operation

of the TPMS.

Do-it-yourself 8-35

8-36 Do-it-yourself

. For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Important

Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information” (Cana-

da) in the Warranty Information

Booklet.

. Always use tires of the same type,

size, brand, construction and

tread pattern on all four wheels.

Failure to do so may result in a

circumference difference be-

tween tires on the front and rear

axles which can cause the Vehicle

Dynamic Control (VDC) system to

malfunction resulting in personal

injury or death, excessive tire

wear and may damage the trans-

mission, transfer case and differ-

ential gears.

All season tires

NISSAN specifies all season tires on some

models to provide good performance all

year, including snowy and icy road con-

ditions. All Season tires are identified by

ALL SEASON and/or M&S (Mud and Snow)

on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have

better snow traction than All Season tires

and may be more appropriate in some

areas.

Summer tires

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some

models to provide superior performance

on dry roads. Summer tire performance is

substantially reduced in snow and ice.

Summer tires do not have the tire trac-

tion rating M&S on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in

snowy or icy conditions, NISSAN recom-

mends the use of SNOW tires or ALL

SEASON tires on all four wheels.

Snow tires

If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to

select tires equivalent in size and load

rating to the original equipment tires. If

you do not, it can adversely affect the

safety and handling of your vehicle.

Generally, snow tires will have lower

speed ratings than factory equipped tires

and may not match the potential max-

imum vehicle speed. Never exceed the

maximum speed rating of the tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be the

same size, brand, construction and tread

pattern on all four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads,

studded tires may be used. However,

some U.S. states and Canadian provinces

prohibit their use. Check local, state and

provincial laws before installing studded

tires. Skid and traction capabilities of

studded snow tires, on wet or dry sur-

faces, may be poorer than that of non-

studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINS

Use of tire chains may be prohibited

according to location. Check the local

laws before installing tire chains. When

installing tire chains, make sure they are

the proper size for the tires on your

vehicle and are installed according to

the chain manufacturer’s suggestions.

Use only SAE Class S chains. Class “S”

chains are used on vehicles with re-

stricted tire to vehicle clearance. Vehicles

that can use Class “S” chains are designed

to meet the SAE standard minimum

clearances between the tire and the

closest vehicle suspension or body com-

ponent required to accommodate the

use of a winter traction device (tire chains

or cables). The minimum clearances are

determined using the factory equipped

tire size. Other types may damage your

vehicle. Use chain tensioners when re-

commended by the tire chain manufac-

turer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links

of the tire chain must be secured or

removed to prevent the possibility of

whipping action damage to the fenders

or underbody. If possible, avoid fully load-

ing your vehicle when using tire chains. In

addition, drive at a reduced speed. Other-

wise, your vehicle may be damaged and/

or vehicle handling and performance may

be adversely affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on

the front wheels and not on the rear

wheels.

Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY

USE ONLY spare tire (if so equipped).

Do not use tire chains on dry roads.

Driving with tire chains in such conditions

can cause damage to the various me-

chanisms of the vehicle due to some

overstress.

SDI1662

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends rotating the

tires at the specified interval shown

in the maintenance schedule. (See

the "9. Maintenance and sche-

dules" section. For tire replacing

procedure, see “Flat tire” (P.6-3).)

As soon as possible, tighten the

wheel nuts to the specified torque

with a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

80 ft-lb (108 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept

tightened to the specification at

all times. It is recommended that

wheel nuts be tightened to the

specification at each tire rotation

interval.

WARNING

. After rotating the tires,

check and adjust the tire

pressure.

. Retighten the wheel nuts

when the vehicle has been

driven for 600 miles (1,000

km) (also in cases of a flat

tire, etc.).

. Do not include the spare tire

(if so equipped) in the tire

rotation.

. For additional information

regarding tires, refer to “Im-

portant Tire Safety Informa-

tion” (US) or “Tire Safety

Information” (Canada) in the

Warranty Information Book-

let.

Do-it-yourself 8-37

8-38 Do-it-yourself

SDI1663

1. Wear indicator

2. Wear indicator location mark

Tire wear and damage

WARNING

. Tires should be periodically

inspected for wear, cracking,

bulging or objects caught in

the tread. If excessive wear,

cracks, bulging or deep cuts

are found, the tire(s) should

be replaced.

. The original tires have built-

in tread wear indicators.

When wear indicators are

visible, the tire(s) should be

replaced.

. Tires degrade with age and

use. Have tires, including the

spare (if so equipped), over 6

years old checked by a qua-

lified technician, because

some tire damage may not

be obvious. Replace the tires

as necessary to prevent tire

failure and possible perso-

nal injury.

. Improper service of the

spare tire (if so equipped)

may result in serious perso-

nal injury. If it is necessary to

repair the spare tire, it is

recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this ser-

vice.

. For additional information

regarding tires, refer to “Im-

portant Tire Safety Informa-

tion” (US) or “Tire Safety

Information” (Canada) in the

Warranty Information Book-

let.

Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size,

tread design, speed rating and load

carrying capacity as originally equipped.

(See “Specifications” (P.10-7) for recom-

mended types and sizes of tires and

wheels.)

WARNING

. The use of tires other than those

recommended or the mixed use

of tires of different brands, con-

struction (bias, bias-belted or ra-

dial), or tread patterns can

adversely affect the ride, braking,

handling, VDC system, ground

clearance, body-to-tire clearance,

tire chain clearance, speed-

ometer calibration, headlight

aim and bumper height. Some of

these effects may lead to acci-

dents and could result in serious

personal injury.

. For Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) mod-

els, if your vehicle was originally

equipped with 4 tires that were

the same size and you are only

replacing 2 of the 4 tires, install

the new tires on the rear axle.

Placing new tires on the front

axle may cause loss of vehicle

control in some driving condi-

tions and cause an accident and

personal injury.

. If the wheels are changed for any

reason, always replace with

wheels which have the same off-

set dimension. Wheels of a differ-

ent off-set could cause prema-

ture tire wear, degrade vehicle

handling characteristics and/or

interference with the brake

discs/drums. Such interference

can lead to decreased braking

efficiency and/or early brake

pad/shoe wear. See “Wheels and

tires” (P.10-7) of this manual for

wheel off-set dimensions.

. Since the spare tire (if so

equipped) is not equipped with

the TPMS, when a spare tire is

mounted or a wheel is replaced,

the TPMS will not function and

the low tire pressure warning

light will flash for approximately

1 minute. The light will remain on

after 1 minute. Have your tires

replaced and/or TPMS system

reset as soon as possible. It is

recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for these services.

. Replacing tires with those not

originally specified by NISSAN

could affect the proper operation

of the TPMS.

. The TPMS sensor may be da-

maged if it is not handled cor-

rectly. Be careful when handling

the TPMS sensor.

. When replacing the TPMS sensor,

the ID registration may be re-

quired. It is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer for ID regis-

tration.

. Do not use a valve stem cap that

is not specified by NISSAN. The

valve stem cap may become

stuck.

. Be sure that the valve stem caps

are correctly fitted. Otherwise the

valve may be clogged up with dirt

and cause a malfunction or loss

of pressure.

. Do not install a damaged or

deformed wheel or tire even if it

has been repaired. Such wheels

or tires could have structural

damage and could fail without

warning.

. The use of retread tire is not

recommended.

. For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Important

Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information” (Cana-

da) in the Warranty Information

Booklet.

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models

CAUTION

. Always use tires of the same size,

brand, construction (bias, bias-

belted or radial), and tread pat-

tern on all four wheels. Failure to

do so may result in a circumfer-

ence difference between tires on

the front and rear axles which will

cause excessive tire wear and

may damage the transmission,

transfer case and rear differential

gears.

. Only use spare tires (if so

equipped) specified for each

AWD model.

Do-it-yourself 8-39

8-40 Do-it-yourself

If excessive tire wear is found, it is

recommended that all four tires be re-

placed with tires of the same size, brand,

construction and tread pattern. The tire

pressure and wheel alignment should

also be checked and corrected as neces-

sary. It is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle

handling and tire life. Even with regular

use, wheels can get out of balance.

Therefore, they should be balanced as

required.

Wheel balance service should be per-

formed with the wheels off the vehicle.

Spin balancing the wheels on the vehi-

cle could lead to mechanical damage.

For additional information regarding tires,

refer to “Important Tire Safety Informa-

tion” (US) or “Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Information

Booklet.

Care of wheels

See “Cleaning exterior” (P.7-2) for details

about care of the wheels.

Spare tire (if so equipped)

Since the spare tire is not equipped with

the TPMS, when a spare tire is mounted

(TEMPORARY USE ONLY), the TPMS will

not function.

Observe the following precautions if the

TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be

used, otherwise your vehicle could be

damaged or involved in an accident.

WARNING

. The TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare

tire should be used for emer-

gency use. It should be replaced

with the standard tire at the first

opportunity to avoid possible tire

or differential damage.

. Drive carefully while the TEMPOR-

ARY USE ONLY spare tire is in-

stalled. Avoid sharp turns and

abrupt braking while driving.

. Periodically check spare tire in-

flation pressure. Always keep the

pressure of the TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire at 60 psi (420

kPa, 4.2 bar).

. With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY

spare tire installed, do not drive

your vehicle at speeds faster than

50 MPH (80 km/h).

. When driving on roads covered

with snow or ice, the TEMPORARY

USE ONLY spare tire should be

used on the rear wheels and

original tire used on the front

wheels (drive wheels). Use tire

chains only on the front (original)

tires.

. Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire will wear at a

faster rate than the standard tire.

Replace the spare tire as soon as

the tread wear indicators appear.

. Do not use the spare tire on other

vehicles.

. Do not use more than one spare

tire at the same time.

CAUTION

. Do not use tire chains on a

TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire.

Tire chains will not fit properly

and may cause damage to the

vehicle.

. Because the TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire is smaller than

the original tire, ground clearance

is reduced. To avoid damage to

the vehicle, do not drive over

obstacles. Also do not drive the

vehicle through an automatic car

wash since it may get caught.

Emergency tire puncture repair kit

(if so equipped)

The emergency tire puncture repair kit is

supplied to the vehicle instead of a spare

tire. The kit must be used for temporarily

fixing a minor tire puncture. After using

the repair kit, it is recommended that visit

a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for

tire inspection and repair/replacement.

See “Flat tire” (P.6-3) for more details.

Do-it-yourself 8-41

8-42 Do-it-yourself

MEMO

9 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance requirement ..................................................... 9-2

General maintenance ......................................................... 9-2

Scheduled maintenance .................................................. 9-2

Where to go for service .................................................... 9-2

General maintenance ................................................................ 9-2

Explanation of general maintenance items...... 9-2

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ...... 9-5

Emission control system maintenance ............. 9-5

Chassis and body maintenance .............................. 9-6

Maintenance schedules .......................................................... 9-7

Additional maintenance items for severe

operating conditions ........................................................ 9-7

Standard maintenance ........................................................... 9-8

9-2 Maintenance and schedules

Some day-to-day and regular mainte-

nance is essential to maintain your vehi-

cle good mechanical condition, as well as

its emission and engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make

sure that the scheduled maintenance, as

well as general maintenance, is per-

formed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one

who can ensure that your vehicle receives

the proper maintenance care. You are a

vital link in the maintenance chain.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

General maintenance includes those

items which should be checked during

normal day-to-day operation. They are

essential for proper vehicle operation. It is

your responsibility to perform these pro-

cedures regularly as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checks

requires minimal mechanical skill and

only a few general automotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done

by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you

prefer, a NISSAN dealer.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

The maintenance items listed in this

section are required to be serviced at

regular intervals. However, under severe

driving conditions, additional or more

frequent maintenance will be required.

WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE

If maintenance service is required or your

vehicle appears to malfunction, have the

systems checked and serviced. It is re-

commended you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained spe-

cialists and are kept up-to-date with the

latest service information through tech-

nical bulletins, service tips, and training

programs. They are completely qualified

to work on NISSAN vehicles before work

begins.

If your vehicle is involved in a collision, it is

recommended that you ask your NISSAN

dealer where the nearest NISSAN Certified

Collision Center is located, or go to http://

collision.nissanusa.com.

You can be confident that a NISSAN

dealer’s service department performs

the best job to meet the maintenance

requirements on your vehicle.

During the normal day-to-day operation

of the vehicle, general maintenance

should be performed regularly as pre-

scribed in this section. If you detect any

unusual sounds, vibrations or smells, be

sure to check for the cause or have it

checked promptly. In addition, it is re-

commended that you visit a NISSAN deal-

er if you think that repairs are required.

When performing any checks or mainte-

nance work, see “Maintenance precau-

tions” (P.8-2).

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL MAIN-

TENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the following

items with “*” is found in the “8. Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should

be performed from time to time, unless

otherwise specified.

Doors and engine hood: Check that all

doors and the engine hood operate

properly. Also ensure that all latches lock

securely. Lubricate hinges, latches, latch

pins, rollers and links if necessary. Make

sure that the secondary latch keeps the

hood from opening when the primary

latch is released.

When driving in areas using road salt or

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENT GENERAL MAINTENANCE

other corrosive materials, check lubrica-

tion frequently.

Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular

basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop

lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and

other lights are all operating properly and

installed securely. Also check headlight

aim.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When

checking the tires, make sure no wheel

nuts are missing, and check for any loose

wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary.

Tire rotation*: Rotate tires at the speci-

fied interval shown in the maintenance

schedule.

Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge

often and always prior to long distance

trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in

all tires, including the spare (if so

equipped), to the pressure specified.

Check carefully for damage, cuts or

excessive wear.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

transmitter components: Replace the

TPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve

core and cap when the tires are replaced

due to wear or age.

Wheel alignment and balance: If the

vehicle should pull to either side while

driving on a straight and level road, or if

you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear,

there may be a need for wheel alignment.

If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at

normal highway speeds, wheel balancing

may be needed.

For additional information regarding tires,

refer to “Important Tire Safety Informa-

tion” (US) or “Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the NISSAN Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

Windshield: Clean the windshield on a

regular basis. Check the windshield at

least every six months for cracks or other

damage. Have a damaged windshield

repaired by a qualified repair facility.

It is recommended that you have a

damaged windshield repaired by a

NISSAN dealer, or a NISSAN Certified

Collision Center. To locate a collision

center in your area, refer to http://colli-

sion.nissanusa.com.

Windshield wiper blades*: Check for

cracks or wear if they do not wipe

properly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should

be checked on a regular basis, such as

when performing scheduled mainte-

nance, cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for

smooth operation and make sure the

pedal does not catch or require uneven

effort. Keep the floor mat away from the

pedal.

Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth

operation. If the brake pedal suddenly

goes down further than normal, the pedal

feels spongy or the vehicle seems to take

longer to stop, have your vehicle checked

immediately. It is recommended you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service. Keep the

floor mat away from the pedal.

Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull

the vehicle to one side when applied.

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) P (Park) mechanism: On a fairly

steep hill, check that the vehicle is held

securely with the shift lever in the P (Park)

position without applying any brakes.

Parking brake: Check the parking brake

operation regularly. The vehicle should be

securely held on a fairly steep hill with

only the parking brake applied. If the

parking brake needs adjusted, it is re-

commended you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat

belt system (for example, buckles, an-

chors, adjusters and retractors) operate

properly and smoothly, and are installed

securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts,

fraying, wear or damage.

Maintenance and schedules 9-3

9-4 Maintenance and schedules

Seats: Check seat position controls such

as seat adjusters, seatback recliners, etc.

to ensure they operate smoothly and that

all latches lock securely in every position.

Check that the head restraints move up

and down smoothly and that the locks (if

so equipped) hold securely in all latched

positions.

Steering wheel: Check for changes in the

steering conditions, such as excessive

free play, hard steering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes: Make sure

that all warning lights and chimes are

operating properly.

Windshield defroster: Check that the air

comes out of the defroster outlets prop-

erly and in sufficient quantity when oper-

ating the heater or air conditioner.

Windshield wiper and washer*: Check

that the wipers and washers operate

properly and that the wipers do not

streak.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should

be checked periodically (for example,

each time you check the engine oil or

refuel).

Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell.

It should be between the MAX and MIN

lines. Vehicles operated in high tempera-

tures or under severe condition require

frequent checks of the battery fluid level.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery dis-

charge and potential no-start condi-

tions such as:

1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume

battery power when the engine is

not running (Phone chargers, GPS,

DVD players, etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/

or only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to

be charged to maintain battery health.

Brake and clutch fluid level*: Make sure

that the brake and clutch fluid level is

between the MAX and MIN lines on the

reservoir.

Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant

level when the engine is cold.

Engine drive belt*: Make sure that the

drive belt is not frayed, worn, cracked or

oily.

Engine oil level*: Check the level after

parking the vehicle on a level surface and

turning off the engine. Wait more than 10

minutes for the oil to drain back into the

oil pan.

Exhaust system: Make sure there are no

loose supports, cracks or holes. If the

sound of the exhaust seems unusual or

there is a smell of exhaust fumes, im-

mediately have the exhaust system in-

spected. It is recommended you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service. (See “Pre-

cautions when starting and driving” (P.5-

4) for exhaust gas (carbon monoxide).)

Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for

fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the

vehicle has been parked for a while. Water

dripping from the air conditioner after use

is normal. If you should notice any leaks

or if gasoline fumes are evident, check for

the cause and have it corrected immedi-

ately.

Radiator and hoses: Check the front of

the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects,

leaves, etc., that may have accumulated.

Make sure the hoses have no cracks,

deformation, rot or loose connections.

Underbody: The underbody is frequently

exposed to corrosive substances such as

those used on icy roads or to control

dust. It is very important to remove these

substances, otherwise rust will form on

the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around

the exhaust system. At the end of winter,

the underbody should be thoroughly

flushed with plain water, being careful to

clean those areas where mud and dirt

may accumulate. For additional informa-

tion, see “Cleaning exterior” (P.7-2).

Windshield washer fluid*: Check that

there is adequate fluid in the reservoir.

The following descriptions are provided

to give you a better understanding of the

scheduled maintenance items that

should be regularly checked or replaced.

The maintenance schedule indicates at

which mileage/time intervals each item

requires service.

In addition to scheduled maintenance,

your vehicle requires that some items be

checked during normal day-to-day op-

eration. Refer to “General maintenance”

(P.9-2).

Items marked with “*” are recommended

by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation.

You are not required to perform main-

tenance on these items in order to

maintain the warranties which come with

your vehicle. Other maintenance items

and intervals are required.

When applicable, additional information

can be found in the “8. Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual.

NOTE:

NISSAN does not advocate the use of

non-OEM approved aftermarket flush-

ing systems and strongly advises

against performing these services on a

NISSAN product. Many of the aftermar-

ket flushing systems use non-OEM ap-

proved chemicals or solvents, the use of

which has not been validated by

NISSAN.

For recommended fuel, lubricants,

fluids, grease, and refrigerant, refer to

“Capacities and recommended fluids/

lubricants” (P.10-2) of this manual.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAIN-

TENANCE

Drive belt*:

Check engine drive belt for wear, fraying

or cracking and for proper tension. Re-

place any damaged drive belt.

Engine air filter:

Replace at specified intervals. When driv-

ing for prolonged periods in dusty condi-

tions, check/replace the filter more

frequently.

Engine coolant*:

Replace coolant at the specified interval.

When adding or replacing coolant, be

sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equiva-

lent with the proper mixture. (Refer to

“Engine cooling system” (P.8-4) to deter-

mine the proper mixture for your area.)

NOTE:

Mixing any other type of coolant or the

use of non-distilled water may reduce

the recommended service interval of

the coolant.

Maintenance and schedules 9-5

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED

MAINTENANCE ITEMS

9-6 Maintenance and schedules

Engine oil and oil filter:

Replace engine oil and oil filter at the

specified intervals. For recommended oil

grade and viscosity refer to “Capacities

and recommended fluids/lubricants”

(P.10-2).

Engine valve clearance*:

Inspect only if valve noise increases.

Adjust valve clearance if necessary.

Evaporative emissions control vapor

lines*:

Check vapor lines for leaks or looseness.

Tighten connections or replace parts as

necessary.

Fuel filter

Periodic maintenance is not required (in-

tank type filter).

Fuel lines*:

Check the fuel hoses, piping and connec-

tions for leaks, looseness, or deterioration.

Tighten connections or replace parts as

necessary.

Spark plugs:

Replace at specified intervals. Install new

plugs of the type as originally equipped.

CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE

Brake lines and cables:

Visually inspect for proper installation.

Check for chafing, cracks, deterioration,

and signs of leaking. Replace any deterio-

rated or damaged parts immediately.

Brake pads and rotors:

Check for wear, deterioration and fluid

leaks. Replace any deteriorated or da-

maged parts immediately.

Exhaust system:

Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler

and hangers for leaks, cracks, deteriora-

tion, and damage. Tighten connections or

replace parts as necessary.

In-cabin microfilter:

Replace at specified intervals. When driv-

ing for prolonged periods in dusty condi-

tions, replace the filter more frequently.

Propeller shaft(s):

Check for damage, looseness, and grease

leakage. (AWD)

Steering gear and linkage, axle and

suspension parts, drive shaft boots:

Check for damage, looseness, and leak-

age of oil or grease. Under severe driving

conditions, inspect more frequently.

Tire rotation:

Rotate tires at the specified interval. When

rotating tires, check for damage and

uneven wear. Replace if necessary.

Transmission fluid/oil, differential oil

and transfer case oil:

Visually inspect for signs of leakage at

specified intervals.

If using a car-top carrier, or driving on

rough or muddy roads:

. Replace the Manual Transmission

gear oil every 20,000 miles (32,000

km) or 24 months.

. Replace the CVT fluid every 60,000

miles (96,000 km) or request the deal-

er to inspect the fluid deterioration

data using a CONSULT. If the dete-

rioration data is more than 210,000,

replace the CVT fluid.

To help ensure smooth, safe and eco-

nomical driving, NISSAN provides two

maintenance schedules that may be

used, depending upon the conditions in

which you usually drive. These schedules

contain both distance and time intervals,

up to 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/96

months. For most people, the odometer

reading will indicate when service is

needed. However, if you drive very little,

your vehicle should be serviced at the

regular time intervals shown in the sche-

dule.

After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/96

months, continue maintenance at the

same mileage/time intervals.

ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS

FOR SEVERE OPERATING CONDI-

TIONS

Additional maintenance items for se-

vere operating conditions; should be

performed on vehicles that are driven

under especially demanding conditions.

Additional maintenance items should be

performed if you primarily operate your

vehicle under the following conditions:

. Repeated short trips of less than 5

miles (8 km).

. Repeated short trips of less than 10

miles (16 km) with outside tempera-

tures remaining below freezing.

. Operating in hot weather in stop-and-

go “rush hour” traffic.

. Extensive idling and/or low speed

driving for long distances, such as

police, taxi or door-to-door delivery

use.

. Driving in dusty conditions.

. Driving on rough, muddy or salt

spread roads.

. Using a car-top carrier.

If your vehicle is mainly operated under

the severe conditions, follow the severe

maintenance intervals shown in the

maintenance schedule.

Maintenance and schedules 9-7

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

9-8 Maintenance and schedules

The following shows the maintenance schedule.

Choose the maintenance schedule needed based on your vehicle driving conditions.

After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/96 months, continue maintenance at the same mileage/time interval.

5,000 Miles/6 Months/8,000 Km

Standard maintenance:

Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

Severe maintenance:

Inspect brake pads and rotors

Inspect steering gear and linkage

Inspect axle and suspension parts

Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)

Inspect drive shaft boots (AWD models)

Inspect exhaust system

Replace engine oil and filter

7,500 Miles/6 Months/12,000 Km

Standard maintenance:

Replace engine oil and filter

Perform tire rotation

Severe maintenance:

Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

10,000 Miles/12 Months/16,000 Km

Standard maintenance:

Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

Severe maintenance:

Inspect brake pads and rotors

Inspect steering gear and linkage

Inspect axle and suspension parts

Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)

Inspect drive shaft boots (AWD models)

Inspect exhaust system

Replace engine oil and filter

Replace brake fluid

STANDARD MAINTENANCE

15,000 Miles/12 Months/24,000 Km

Standard maintenance:

Inspect brake lines and cables

Inspect brake pads and rotors

Inspect differential gear oil

Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)

Inspect transfer case oil (AWD models)

Inspect drive shaft boots (AWD models)

Inspect CVT fluid

Inspect manual transaxle gear oil

Replace engine oil and filter

Replace in-cabin microfilter

Perform tire rotation

Severe maintenance:

Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

15,000 Miles/18 Months/24,000

Standard maintenance:

Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

Severe maintenance:

Inspect brake pads and rotors

Inspect steering gear and linkage

Inspect axle and suspension parts

Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)

Inspect drive shaft boots (AWD models)

Inspect exhaust system

Replace engine oil and filter

20,000 Miles/24 Months/32,000

Standard maintenance:

Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

Severe maintenance:

Inspect brake pads and rotors

Inspect steering gear and linkage

Inspect axle and suspension parts

Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)

Inspect drive shaft boots (AWD models)

Inspect exhaust system

Replace engine oil and filter

Replace brake fluid

Replace differential gear oil

Replace transfer case oil (AWD models)

Maintenance and schedules 9-9

9-10 Maintenance and schedules

22,500 Miles/18 Months/36,000

Standard maintenance:

Inspect Intelligent Key battery

Replace engine oil and filter

Perform tire rotation

Severe maintenance:

Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

25,000 Miles/30 Months/40,000

Standard maintenance:

Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

Severe maintenance:

Inspect brake pads and rotors

Inspect steering gear and linkage

Inspect axle and suspension parts

Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)

Inspect drive shaft boots (AWD models)

Inspect exhaust system

Replace engine oil and filter

30,000 Miles/24 Months/48,000

Standard maintenance:

Inspect brake lines and cables

Inspect brake pads and rotors

Inspect fuel tank vapor vent system hoses

Inspect fuel lines/connections

Inspect exhaust system

Inspect steering gear and linkage

Inspect axle and suspension parts

Inspect differential gear oil

Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)

Inspect transfer case oil (AWD models)

Inspect drive shaft boots (AWD models)

Inspect CVT fluid

Inspect manual transaxle gear oil

Replace engine oil and filter

Replace engine air filter (1)

Replace brake fluid

Replace in-cabin microfilter

Perform tire rotation

Severe maintenance:

Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

(1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more

frequent maintenance may be required.

30,000 Miles/36 Months/48,000

Standard maintenance:

Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

Severe maintenance:

Inspect brake pads and rotors

Inspect steering gear and linkage

Inspect axle and suspension parts

Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)

Inspect drive shaft boots (AWD models)

Inspect exhaust system

Replace engine oil and filter

Replace brake fluid

35,000 Miles/42 Months/56,000

Standard maintenance:

Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

Severe maintenance:

Inspect brake pads and rotors

Inspect steering gear and linkage

Inspect axle and suspension parts

Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)

Inspect drive shaft boots (AWD models)

Inspect exhaust system

Replace engine oil and filter

Maintenance and schedules 9-11

9-12 Maintenance and schedules

37,500 Miles/30 Months/60,000

Standard maintenance:

Replace engine oil and filter

Perform tire rotation

Severe maintenance:

Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

40,000 Miles/48 Months/64,000

Standard maintenance:

Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

Severe maintenance:

Inspect brake pads and rotors

Inspect steering gear and linkage

Inspect axle and suspension parts

Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)

Inspect drive shaft boots (AWD models)

Inspect exhaust system

Replace engine oil and filter

Replace brake fluid

Replace differential gear oil

Replace transfer case oil (AWD models)

45,000 Miles/36 Months/72,000

Standard maintenance:

Inspect brake lines and cables

Inspect brake pads and rotors

Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)

Inspect differential gear oil

Inspect transfer case oil (AWD models)

Inspect drive shaft boots (AWD models)

Inspect CVT fluid

Inspect manual transaxle gear oil

Replace engine oil and filter

Replace in-cabin microfilter

Replace Intelligent Key battery

Perform tire rotation

Severe maintenance:

Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

45,000 Miles/54 Months/72,000

Standard maintenance:

Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

Severe maintenance:

Inspect brake pads and rotors

Inspect steering gear and linkage

Inspect axle and suspension parts

Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)

Inspect drive shaft boots (AWD models)

Inspect exhaust system

Replace engine oil and filter

50,000 Miles/60 Months/80,000

Standard maintenance:

Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

Severe maintenance:

Inspect brake pads and rotors

Inspect steering gear and linkage

Inspect axle and suspension parts

Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)

Inspect drive shaft boots (AWD models)

Inspect exhaust system

Replace engine oil and filter

Replace brake fluid

52,500 Miles/42 Months/84,000

Standard maintenance:

Replace engine oil and filter

Perform tire rotation

Severe maintenance:

Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

Maintenance and schedules 9-13

9-14 Maintenance and schedules

55,000 Miles/66 Months/88,000

Standard maintenance:

Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

Severe maintenance:

Inspect brake pads and rotors

Inspect steering gear and linkage

Inspect axle and suspension parts

Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)

Inspect drive shaft boots (AWD models)

Inspect exhaust system

Replace engine oil and filter

60,000 Miles/48 Months/96,000

Standard maintenance:

Inspect brake lines and cables

Inspect brake pads and rotors

Inspect engine drive belts

Inspect fuel tank vapor vent system hoses

Inspect fuel lines/connections

Inspect exhaust system

Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)

Inspect axle and suspension parts

Inspect steering gear and linkage

Inspect differential gear oil

Inspect drive shaft boots (AWD models)

Inspect transfer case oil (AWD models)

Inspect CVT fluid

Inspect manual transaxle gear oil

Replace engine air filter (1)

Replace brake fluid

Replace engine oil and filter

Replace in-cabin microfilter

Perform tire rotation

Severe maintenance:

Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

(1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more

frequent maintenance may be required.

60,000 Miles/72 Months/96,000

Standard maintenance:

Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

Severe maintenance:

Inspect brake pads and rotors

Inspect steering gear and linkage

Inspect axle and suspension parts

Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)

Inspect drive shaft boots (AWD models)

Inspect exhaust system

Replace engine oil and filter

Replace brake fluid

Replace differential gear oil

Replace transfer case oil (AWD models)

65,000 Miles/78 Months/104,000

Standard maintenance:

Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

Severe maintenance:

Inspect brake pads and rotors

Inspect steering gear and linkage

Inspect axle and suspension parts

Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)

Inspect drive shaft boots (AWD models)

Inspect exhaust system

Replace engine oil and filter

67,500 Miles/54 Months/108,000

Standard maintenance:

Replace engine oil and filter

Replace Intelligent Key battery

Perform tire rotation

Severe maintenance:

Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

Maintenance and schedules 9-15

9-16 Maintenance and schedules

70,000 Miles/84 Months/112,000

Standard maintenance:

Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

Severe maintenance:

Inspect brake pads and rotors

Inspect steering gear and linkage

Inspect axle and suspension parts

Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)

Inspect drive shaft boots (AWD models)

Inspect exhaust system

Replace engine oil and filter

Replace brake fluid

75,000 Miles/60 Months/120,000

Standard maintenance:

Inspect brake lines and cables

Inspect brake pads and rotors

Inspect engine drive belts

Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)

Inspect differential gear oil

Inspect drive shaft boots (AWD models)

Inspect transfer case oil (AWD models)

Inspect CVT fluid

Inspect manual transaxle gear oil

Replace engine oil and filter

Replace in-cabin microfilter

Perform tire rotation

Severe maintenance:

Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

75,000 Miles/90 Months/120,000

Standard maintenance:

Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

Severe maintenance:

Inspect brake pads and rotors

Inspect steering gear and linkage

Inspect axle and suspension parts

Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)

Inspect drive shaft boots (AWD models)

Inspect exhaust system

Replace engine oil and filter

80,000 Miles/96 Months/128,000

Standard maintenance:

Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

Severe maintenance:

Inspect brake pads and rotors

Inspect steering gear and linkage

Inspect axle and suspension parts

Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)

Inspect drive shaft boots (AWD models)

Inspect exhaust system

Replace engine oil and filter

Replace brake fluid

Replace differential gear oil

Replace transfer case oil (AWD models)

82,500 Miles/66 Months/132,000

Standard maintenance:

Replace engine oil and filter

Perform tire rotation

Severe maintenance:

Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

85,000 Miles/102 Months/136,000

Standard maintenance:

Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

Severe maintenance:

Inspect brake pads and rotors

Inspect steering gear and linkage

Inspect axle and suspension parts

Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)

Inspect drive shaft boots (AWD models)

Inspect exhaust system

Replace engine oil and filter

Maintenance and schedules 9-17

9-18 Maintenance and schedules

90,000 Miles/72 Months/144,000

Standard maintenance:

Inspect brake lines and cables

Inspect brake pads and rotors

Inspect engine drive belts

Inspect fuel tank vapor vent system hoses

Inspect fuel lines/connections

Inspect exhaust system

Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)

Inspect steering gear and linkage

Inspect axle and suspension parts

Inspect differential gear oil

Inspect transfer case oil (AWD models)

Inspect drive shaft boots (AWD models)

Inspect CVT fluid

Inspect manual transaxle gear oil

Replace engine air filter (1)

Replace brake fluid

Replace engine oil and filter

Replace in-cabin microfilter

Replace Intelligent Key battery

Perform tire rotation

Severe maintenance:

Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

(1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more

frequent maintenance may be required.

90,000 Miles/108 Months/144,000

Standard maintenance:

Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

Severe maintenance:

Inspect brake pads and rotors

Inspect steering gear and linkage

Inspect axle and suspension parts

Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)

Inspect drive shaft boots (AWD models)

Inspect exhaust system

Replace engine oil and filter

Replace brake fluid

95,000 Miles/114 Months/152,000

Standard maintenance:

Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

Severe maintenance:

Inspect brake pads and rotors

Inspect steering gear and linkage

Inspect axle and suspension parts

Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)

Inspect drive shaft boots (AWD models)

Inspect exhaust system

Replace engine oil and filter

97,500 Miles/78 Months/156,000

Standard maintenance:

Replace engine oil and filter

Perform tire rotation

Severe maintenance:

Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

100,000 Miles/120 Months/160,000

Standard maintenance:

Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

Severe maintenance:

Inspect brake pads and rotors

Inspect steering gear and linkage

Inspect axle and suspension parts

Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)

Inspect drive shaft boots (AWD models)

Inspect exhaust system

Replace engine oil and filter

Replace brake fluid

Replace differential gear oil

Replace transfer case oil (AWD models)

Maintenance and schedules 9-19

9-20 Maintenance and schedules

105,000 Miles/84 Months/168,000

Standard maintenance:

Inspect brake lines and cables

Inspect brake pads and rotors

Inspect engine drive belts

Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)

Inspect differential gear oil

Inspect transfer case oil (AWD models)

Inspect drive shaft boots (AWD models)

Inspect CVT fluid

Inspect manual transaxle gear oil

Replace engine coolant (1)

Replace engine oil and filter

Replace in-cabin microfilter

Replace spark plugs (2)

Perform tire rotation

Severe maintenance:

Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

(1) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles

(168,000 km) or 84 months. After first repla-

cement, replace every 75,000 miles (120,000

km) or 60 months.

(2) Replace spark plug when the plug gap

exceeds 0.053 in (1.35 mm) even if within

specified replacement mileage.

105,000 Miles/126 Months/168,000

Standard maintenance:

Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

Severe maintenance:

Inspect brake pads and rotors

Inspect steering gear and linkage

Inspect axle and suspension parts

Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)

Inspect drive shaft boots (AWD models)

Inspect exhaust system

Replace engine oil and filter

110,000 Miles/132 Months/176,000

Standard maintenance:

Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

Severe maintenance:

Inspect brake pads and rotors

Inspect steering gear and linkage

Inspect axle and suspension parts

Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)

Inspect drive shaft boots (AWD models)

Inspect exhaust system

Replace engine oil and filter

Replace brake fluid

112,500 Miles/90 Months/180,000

Standard maintenance:

Replace engine oil and filter

Replace Intelligent Key battery

Perform tire rotation

Severe maintenance:

Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

115,000 Miles/138 Months/184,000

Standard maintenance:

Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

Severe maintenance:

Inspect brake pads and rotors

Inspect steering gear and linkage

Inspect axle and suspension parts

Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)

Inspect drive shaft boots (AWD models)

Inspect exhaust system

Replace engine oil and filter

120,000 Miles/96 Months/192,000

Standard maintenance:

Inspect brake lines and cables

Inspect brake pads and rotors

Inspect engine drive belts

Inspect fuel tank vapor vent system hoses

Inspect fuel lines/connections

Inspect exhaust system

Inspect propeller shaft (AWD models)

Inspect steering gear and linkage

Inspect axle and suspension parts

Inspect differential gear oil

Inspect transfer case oil (AWD models)

Inspect drive shaft boots (AWD models)

Inspect CVT fluid

Inspect manual transaxle gear oil

Replace engine air filter (1)

Replace brake fluid

Replace engine oil and filter

Replace in-cabin microfilter

Perform tire rotation

Maintenance and schedules 9-21

9-22 Maintenance and schedules

Severe maintenance:

Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

(1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more

frequent maintenance may be required.

10 Technical and consumer information
Capacities and
recommended fluids/lubricants .................................... 10-2
Fuel information .................................................................. 10-3
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation ........ 10-5
Air conditioning system refrigerant and
oil recommendations....................................................... 10-6
Specifications ................................................................................ 10-7
Engine .......................................................................................... 10-7
Wheels and tires .................................................................. 10-7
Dimensions and weights .............................................. 10-8
When traveling or registering in
another country ......................................................................... 10-8
Vehicle identification .............................................................. 10-8
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) plate ....... 10-8
Vehicle identification number
(chassis number) ................................................................. 10-9
Engine serial number ....................................................... 10-9
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ................. 10-9
Emission control information label .................. 10-10
Tire and Loading Information label ................. 10-10
Air conditioner specification label ..................... 10-10
Installing front license plate ......................................... 10-12
Vehicle loading information .......................................... 10-12
Terms........................................................................................ 10-12
Vehicle load capacity ................................................ 10-13
Securing the load ......................................................... 10-14
Loading tips ...................................................................... 10-14
Measurement of weights ....................................... 10-15
Towing a trailer ...................................................................... 10-15
Flat towing ................................................................................. 10-16
Flat towing for All–Wheel Drive vehicle
(if so equipped)............................................................... 10-16
Flat towing for Front-Wheel Drive vehicle
(if so equipped)............................................................... 10-16
Uniform tire quality grading ........................................ 10-17
Treadwear .......................................................................... 10-17
Traction AA, A, B and C ........................................... 10-17
Temperature A, B and C ......................................... 10-17
Emission control system warranty ......................... 10-18
Reporting safety defects ................................................ 10-18
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance
(I/M) test ....................................................................................... 10-19
Event Data Recorders (EDR) ......................................... 10-20
Additional data recording (on vehicles
equipped with optional
ProPILOT assist) ............................................................. 10-20
Owner’s manual/service manual
order information ................................................................. 10-21

10-2 Technical and consumer information

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the

procedure instructed in the “8. Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Fluid type

Capacity (approximate)

Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

Metric

Measure

Imperial

Measure

Fuel 55 L 14-1/2 gal 12-1/8 gal ā See “Fuel information” (P.10-3).

Engine oil

With oil filter change 3.8 L 4 qt 3-3/8 qt ā Genuine “NISSAN Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” (or equivalent) is recommended.

ā If the above motor oil (or engine oil) is not available, a synthetic 0W-20 GF-5 SN

motor oil (or engine oil) may be used. Damage caused by the use of motor oil (or

engine oil) other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN’s New

Vehicle Limited Warranty. For additional information, see “Engine oil and oil filter

recommendation” (P.10-5).

Drain and refill

: For additional

information, see

“Changing engine

oil and filter” (P.8-

6).

Without oil filter change 3.6 L 3-7/8 qt 3-1/8 qt

Engine coolant With reservoir CVT model 8.7 L 9-1/4 qt 7-5/8 qt ā Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent

MT model 8.5 L 8-3/8 qt 7 qt

Reservoir 0.6 L 5/8 qt 1/2 qt

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid — — — ā Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3

ā NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equivalent) ONLY

in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other fluids. Using fluids that are not equivalent

to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the

use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN’s New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Manual Transmission (MT) gear oil — — — ā Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) TRANSELF NFJ 75W-80 or equivalent

ā If Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) TRANSELF NFJ is not available, API GL-4,

Viscosity SAE 75W-80 may be used as a temporary replacement. However, use

Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) TRANSELF NFJ as soon as it is available.

Differential gear oil — — — ā Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or equivalent

conventional (non-synthetic) oil

Transfer fluid — — —

Brake and clutch fluid Refill to the proper oil level ac-

cording to the instructions in the

“8. Do-it-yourself” section.

ā Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid

or equivalent DOT 3

: Available in mainland U.S.A. through a NISSAN dealer.

Multi-purpose grease — — — ā NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)

Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — ā See “Vehicle identification” (P.10-8) for air conditioner specification label.

ā HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf)

Air conditioning system oil — — — ā See “Vehicle identification” (P.10-8) for air conditioner specification label.

ā A/C System Oil ND-OIL12 (PAG) or equivalent

Window washer fluid 4.5 L 1-1/4 gal 1 gal ā Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or

equivalent

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED

FLUIDS/LUBRICANTS

FUEL INFORMATION

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an

octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-

Knock Index) number (Research octane

number 91).

CAUTION

. Using a fuel other than that spe-

cified could adversely affect the

emission control system, and

may also affect warranty cover-

age.

. Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because

this will damage the three-way

catalyst.

. Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in

your vehicle. Your vehicle is not

designed to run on E-15 or E-85

fuel. Using E-15 or E-85 fuel in a

vehicle not specifically designed

for E-15 or E-85 fuel can adversely

affect the emission control de-

vices and systems of the vehicle.

Damage caused by such fuel is

not covered by the NISSAN new

vehicle limited warranty.

. Do not use fuel that contains the

octane booster methylcyclopen-

tadienyl manganese tricarbonyl

(MMT). Using fuel containing

MMT may adversely affect vehicle

performance and vehicle emis-

sions. Not all fuel dispensers are

labeled to indicate MMT content,

so you may have to consult your

gasoline retailer for more details.

Note that Federal and California

laws prohibit the use of MMT in

reformulated gasoline.

. U.S. government regulations re-

quire ethanol dispensing pumps

to be identified by a small,

square, orange and black label

with the common abbreviation or

the appropriate percentage for

that region.

Gasoline specifications

NISSAN recommends using gasoline that

meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter

(WWFC) specifications where it is avail-

able. Many of the automobile manufac-

turers developed this specification to

improve emission control system and

vehicle performance. Ask your service

station manager if the gasoline meets

the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing

reformulated gasolines. These gasolines

are specially designed to reduce vehicle

emissions. NISSAN supports efforts to-

wards cleaner air and suggests that you

use reformulated gasoline when avail-

able.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline contain-

ing oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE

and methanol with or without advertising

their presence. NISSAN does not recom-

mend the use of fuels of which the

oxygenate content and the fuel compat-

ibility for your vehicle cannot be readily

determined. If in doubt, ask your service

station manager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline,

please take the following precautions as

the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle

performance problems and/or fuel sys-

tem damage.

. The fuel should be unleaded and

have an octane rating no lower than

that recommended for unleaded

gasoline.

. If an oxygenate-blend, other than

methanol blend is used, it should

contain no more than 10% oxyge-

nate. (MTBE may, however, be added

Technical and consumer information 10-3

10-4 Technical and consumer information

up to 15%.)

. E-15 fuel contains more than 10%

oxygenate. E-15 fuel will adversely

affect the emission control devices

and systems of the vehicle and

should not be used. Damage caused

by such fuel is not covered by the

NISSAN new vehicle limited war-

ranty.

. If a methanol blend is used, it should

contain no more than 5% methanol

(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It

should also contain a suitable

amount of appropriate cosolvents

and corrosion inhibitors. If not prop-

erly formulated with appropriate

cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors,

such methanol blends may cause

fuel system damage and/or vehicle

performance problems. At this time,

sufficient data is not available to

ensure that all methanol blends are

suitable for use in NISSAN vehicles.

If any driveability problems such as en-

gine stalling and difficult hot-starting are

experienced after using oxygenate-blend

fuels, immediately change to a non-oxy-

genate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of

MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during

refueling. Gasoline containing oxyge-

nates can cause paint damage.

E-15 fuel

E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately

15% fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gaso-

line. E-15 can only be used in vehicles

designed to run on E- 15 fuel. Do not use

E-15 in your vehicle. U.S. government

regulations require fuel ethanol dispen-

sing pumps to be identified with small,

square, orange and black label with the

common abbreviation or the appropriate

percentage for that region.

E-85 fuel

E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately

85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gaso-

line. E-85 can only be used in a Flexible

Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 fuel in

your vehicle. U.S. government regulations

require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to

be identified by a small, square, orange

and black label with the common abbre-

viation or the appropriate percentage for

that region.

Fuel containing MMT

MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manga-

nese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting

additive. NISSAN does not recommend

the use of fuel containing MMT. Such fuel

may adversely affect vehicle perfor-

mance, including the emissions control

system. Note that while some fuel pumps

label MMT content, not all do, so you may

have to consult your gasoline retailer for

more details.

Aftermarket fuel additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of

any aftermarket fuel additives (for exam-

ple, fuel injector cleaner, octane booster,

intake valve deposit removers, etc.) which

are sold commercially. Many of these

additives intended for gum, varnish or

deposit removal may contain active sol-

vent or similar ingredients that can be

harmful to the fuel system and engine.

Octane rating tips

Using unleaded gasoline with an octane

rating lower than recommended can

cause persistent, heavy “spark knock”.

(Spark knock is a metallic rapping

noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine

damage. If you detect a persistent

heavy spark knock even when using

gasoline of the stated octane rating, or

if you hear steady spark knock while

holding a steady speed on level roads, it

is recommended you have a NISSAN

dealer correct the condition. Failure to

correct the condition is misuse of the

vehicle, for which NISSAN is not respon-

sible.

Incorrect ignition timing will result in

spark knock, after-run and/or overheat-

ing, which may cause excessive fuel

consumption or engine damage. If any

of the above symptoms are encountered,

have your vehicle checked. It is recom-

mended you visit a NISSAN dealer for

servicing.

However, now and then you may notice

light spark knock for a short time while

accelerating or driving up hills. This is

not a cause for concern, because you

get the greatest fuel benefit when there

is light spark knock for a short time

under heavy engine load.

JVT0351X

API certification mark

API service symbol

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RE-

COMMENDATION

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade,

quality, and viscosity engine oil to ensure

satisfactory engine life and performance,

see “Capacities and recommended fluids/

lubricants” (P.10-2). NISSAN recommends

the use of an energy conserving oil in

order to improve fuel economy.

Select only engine oils that meet the

American Petroleum Institute (API) certifi-

cation or International Lubricant Standar-

dization and Approval Committee (ILSAC)

certification and SAE viscosity standard.

These oils have the API certification mark

on the front of the container. Oils which

do not have the specified quality label

should not be used as they could cause

engine damage.

Oil additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of

oil additives. The use of an oil additive is

not necessary when the proper oil type is

used and maintenance intervals are fol-

lowed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or

has been previously used should not be

used.

Technical and consumer information 10-5

10-6 Technical and consumer information

Oil viscosity

The engine oil viscosity or thickness

changes with temperature. Because of

this, it is important to select the engine oil

viscosity based on the temperatures at

which the vehicle will be operated before

the next oil change. Choosing an oil

viscosity other than that recommended

could cause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with

a high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter.

When replacing, use a genuine NISSAN oil

filter or its equivalent for the reason

described in “Change intervals”.

Change intervals

The oil and oil filter change intervals for

your engine are based on the use of the

specified quality oils and filters. Using an

engine oil and filter other than the

specified quality, or exceeding recom-

mended oil and filter change intervals

could reduce engine life. Damage to the

engine caused by improper maintenance

or use of incorrect oil and filter quality

and/or viscosity is not covered by the

NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.

Your engine was filled with a high quality

engine oil when it was built. You do not

have to change the oil before the first

recommended change interval.

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM RE-

FRIGERANT AND OIL RECOMMEN-

DATIONS

The air conditioner system in your

NISSAN vehicle must be charged with

the refrigerant HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf)

and A/C System Oil ND-OIL12 (PAG) or

the exact equivalents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or oil

will cause severe damage to the air

conditioning system and will require

the replacement of all air conditioner

system components.

The refrigerant HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) in

your NISSAN vehicle does not harm the

earth’s ozone layer. Although this refrig-

erant does not affect the earth’s atmo-

sphere, certain government regulations

require the recovery and recycling of any

refrigerant during automotive air condi-

tioner system service. Air conditioner

system should only be serviced by trained

and certified technicians to ensure proper

and safe operation (SAE J2845). A NISSAN

dealer has the trained technicians and

equipment needed to recover and recycle

your air conditioner system refrigerant.

Only new and SAEJ2842 certified eva-

porator(s) shall be used as replacement

parts.

A damaged or leaking air conditioning

evaporator shall never be repaired or

replaced with one removed from a used

or salvaged vehicle. To replace a da-

maged or leaking evaporator, use only

new and SAE J2842 certified evaporator

(s). It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer when servicing your air

conditioner system.

ENGINE

Model MR20DD

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC

Cylinder arrangement

4-cylinder, in-line

Bore × Stroke in (mm)

3.307 × 3.547 (84.0 × 90.1)

Displacement cu in (cm

) 121.86 (1,997)

Firing order 1-3-4-2

Idle speed rpm

No adjustment is necessary.

Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.) degree/rpm

Spark plug

Standard

DILKAR7D11H

Spark plug gap (Normal)

in (mm)

0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain

This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

WHEELS AND TIRES

Road wheel

Type Size Offset in

(mm)

Conven-

tional

16 × 6.5JJ 1.57 (40)

17 × 7J 1.38 (35)

19 × 7J 1.57 (40)

Spare (if

equipped)

16 × 4T 1.18 (30)

Tire

Type Size

Pressure

PSI (kPa)

[Cold]

Conven-

tional

215/65R16

98H

33 (230)

215/60R17

96H

33 (230)

225/45R19

92W

35 (240)

Spare (if

equipped)

T145/90

D16 106M

T135/90

D16 102M

60 (420)

Depending on the models, the emergency

tire puncture repair kit is supplied.

Technical and consumer information 10-7

SPECIFICATIONS

10-8 Technical and consumer information

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Overall length in

(mm)

172.8 (4,388)

Overall width in

(mm)

72.3 (1,838)

Overall height in

(mm)

62.5 (1,587)

63.3 (1,607)*1

Front tread in

(mm)

62.4 (1,585)

62.8 (1,595)*2

Rear tread in

(mm)

62.3 (1,583)

62.7 (1,593)*2

Wheelbase in

(mm)

104.2 (2,646)

Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating

(GVWR)

lb (kg)

See the F.M.V.S.S. or

C.M.V.S.S. certifica-

tion label on the

driver’s side center

pillar.

Gross Axle

Weight Rating

(GAWR)

Front lb (kg)

Rear lb (kg)

*1: Roof rack equipped model

*2: Models with 17 inch wheels

When planning to travel in another

country, you should first find out if the

fuel available is suitable for your vehicle’s

engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is

too low may cause engine damage. All

gasoline vehicles must be operated with

unleaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid tak-

ing your vehicle to areas where appro-

priate fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of

your vehicle to another country, state,

province or district, it may be necessary

to modify the vehicle to meet local laws

and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor

vehicle emission control and safety stan-

dards vary according to the country,

state, province or district; therefore, vehi-

cle specifications may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into

another country, state, province or dis-

trict and registered, its modifications,

transportation, and registration are the

responsibility of the user. NISSAN is not

responsible for any inconvenience that

may result.

JVT0352X

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(VIN) PLATE

The vehicle identification number plate is

attached as shown. This number is the

identification for your vehicle and is used

in the vehicle registration.

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING

IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

JVT0286X

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(chassis number)

The vehicle identification number is lo-

cated as shown.

Remove the cover to access the number.

STI0785

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine as

shown.

STI0448

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION

LABEL

The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.)

certification label is affixed as shown. This

label contains valuable vehicle informa-

tion, such as: Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-

ings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR), month and year of manufacture,

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc.

Review it carefully.

Technical and consumer information 10-9

10-10 Technical and consumer information

JVT0406X

EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION

LABEL

The emission control information label is

attached to the underside of the hood as

shown.

STI0494

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION

LABEL

The cold tire pressure is shown on the

Tire and Loading Information label affixed

to the pillar as shown.

STI0739

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION

LABEL

The air conditioner specification label is

affixed to the underside of the hood as

shown.

Air conditioner specification label symbols:

Symbol Name Reference Graphic

Caution ISO 7000 0434

Air Conditioning System

(MAC)

ISO 2575 D01

MAC System Lubricant Type

(PAG–POE)

Requires Registered Techni-

cian to Service MAC System

Flammable Refrigerant

Technical and consumer information 10-11

10-12 Technical and consumer information

WAJ0068X

To mount the front license plate , attach

the licence plate to the location marks

(small dimples)

of the bumper using the

two screws

provided.

WARNING

. It is extremely dangerous to

ride in a cargo area inside

the vehicle. In a collision,

people riding in these areas

are more likely to be ser-

iously injured or killed.

. Do not allow people to ride

in any area of your vehicle

that is not equipped with

seats and seat belts.

. Be sure everyone in your

vehicle is in a seat and using

a seat belt properly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize your-

self with the following terms before

loading your vehicle:

. Curb Weight (actual weight of

your vehicle) - vehicle weight

including: standard and optional

equipment, fluids, emergency

tools, and spare tire assembly.

This weight does not include

passengers and cargo.

. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) -

curb weight plus the combined

weight of passengers and cargo.

. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-

ing) - maximum total combined

weight of the unloaded vehicle,

passengers, luggage, hitch, trai-

ler tongue load and any other

optional equipment. This infor-

mation is located on the F.M.V.S.

S./C.M.V.S.S. label.

. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)

- maximum weight (load) limit

specified for the front or rear

axle. This information is located

on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label.

. GCWR (Gross Combined Weight

Rating) - The maximum total

weight rating of the vehicle,

passengers, cargo, and trailer.

. Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load

limit, Total load capacity - max-

imum total weight limit specified

of the load (passengers and

cargo) for the vehicle. This is

the maximum combined weight

of occupants and cargo that can

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

be loaded into the vehicle. If the

vehicle is used to tow a trailer,

the trailer tongue weight must

be included as part of the cargo

load. This information is located

on the Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label.

. Cargo capacity - permissible

weight of cargo, the subtracted

weight of occupants from the

load limit.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Do not exceed the load limit of your

vehicle shown as “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo” on

the Tire and Loading Information

label. Do not exceed the number of

occupants shown as “Seating Ca-

pacity” on the Tire and Loading

Information label.

To get “the combined weight of

occupants and cargo”, add the

weight of all occupants, then add

the total luggage weight. Examples

are shown in the following illustra-

tion.

STI0447

Steps for determining correct load

limit

1. Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX

kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s

placard.

2. Determine the combined weight

of the driver and passengers

that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight

of the driver and passengers

from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

Technical and consumer information 10-13

10-14 Technical and consumer information

4. The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and

luggage load capacity. For ex-

ample, if the XXX amount equals

1400 lbs. and there will be five

150 lb. passengers in your vehi-

cle, the amount of available

cargo and luggage load capacity

is 650 lbs. (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) =

650 lbs) or (640 − 340 (5 x 70) =

300 kg.)

5. Determine the combined weight

of luggage and cargo being

loaded on the vehicle. That

weight may not safely exceed

the available cargo and luggage

load capacity calculated in Step

Before driving a loaded vehicle,

confirm that you do not exceed

the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight

Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle. (See

“Measurement of weights” (P.10-15).)

Also check tires for proper inflation

pressures. See the Tire and Loading

Information label.

JVI1686X

SECURING THE LOAD

There are luggage hooks located in the

cargo area as shown. The hooks can be

used to secure cargo with ropes or other

types of straps.

Do not apply a total load of more than

22 lbs. (10 kg) to a single metal floor

hook when securing cargo.

WARNING

. Properly secure all cargo with

ropes or straps to help prevent it

from sliding or shifting. Do not

place cargo higher than the seat-

backs. In a sudden stop or colli-

sion, unsecured cargo could

cause personal injury.

. The child restraint top tether

strap may be damaged by con-

tact with items in the cargo area.

Secure any items in the cargo

area. Your child could be seriously

injured or killed in a collision if the

top tether strap is damaged.

. Do not load your vehicle any

heavier than the GVWR or the

maximum front and rear GAWRs.

If you do, parts of your vehicle

can break, tire damage could

occur, or it can change the way

your vehicle handles. This could

result in loss of control and cause

personal injury.

LOADING TIPS

. The GVW must not exceed GVWR

or GAWR as specified on the F.M.

V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification la-

bel.

. Do not load the front and rear

axle to the GAWR. Doing so will

exceed the GVWR.

WARNING

. Properly secure all cargo

with ropes or straps to help

prevent it from sliding or

shifting. Do not place cargo

higher than the seatbacks.

In a sudden stop or collision,

unsecured cargo could

cause personal injury.

. Do not load your vehicle any

heavier than the GVWR or

the maximum front and rear

GAWRs. If you do, parts of

your vehicle can break, tire

damage could occur, or it

can change the way your

vehicle handles. This could

result in loss of control and

cause personal injury.

. Overloading not only can

shorten the life of your ve-

hicle and the tire, but can

cause unsafe vehicle hand-

ling and longer braking dis-

tances. This may cause a

premature tire failure, which

could result in a serious

accident and personal in-

jury. Failures caused by

overloading are not covered

by the vehicle’s warranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent

weight shifts that could affect the

balance of your vehicle. When the

vehicle is loaded, drive to a scale

and weigh the front and the rear

wheels separately to determine

axle loads. Individual axle loads

should not exceed either of the

Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR).

The total of the axle loads should

not exceed the Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR). These rat-

ings are given on the vehicle certi-

fication label. If weight ratings are

exceeded, move or remove items to

bring all weights below the ratings.

Do not tow a trailer with your

vehicle.

Technical and consumer information 10-15

TOWING A TRAILER

10-16 Technical and consumer information

FLAT TOWING FOR ALL–WHEEL

DRIVE VEHICLE (if so equipped)

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels

on the ground is sometimes called flat

towing. This method is sometimes used

when towing a vehicle behind a recrea-

tional vehicle, such as a motor home.

CAUTION

. Failure to follow these guidelines

can result in severe transmission

damage.

. Never flat tow your All-Wheel

Drive (AWD) vehicle.

. DO NOT tow your All-Wheel Drive

(AWD) vehicle with any wheels on

the ground. Doing so may cause

serious and expensive damage to

the powertrain.

. For emergency towing proce-

dures refer to “Towing recom-

mended by NISSAN” (P.6-19).

FLAT TOWING FOR FRONT-WHEEL

DRIVE VEHICLE (if so equipped)

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels

on the ground is sometimes called flat

towing. This method is sometimes used

when towing a vehicle behind a recrea-

tional vehicle, such as a motor home.

CAUTION

. Failure to follow these guidelines

can result in severe transmission

damage.

. Whenever flat towing your vehi-

cle, always tow forward, never

backward.

. Never tow your front wheel drive

vehicle with the front tires on the

ground. Doing so may cause ser-

ious and expensive damage to

the powertrain.

. DO NOT tow your front wheel

drive Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) vehicle with

all four wheels on the ground (flat

towing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE

internal transmission parts due

to lack of transmission lubrica-

tion.

. For emergency towing proce-

dures refer to “Towing recom-

mended by NISSAN” in the “In

case of emergency” section of

this manual.

Continuously Variable Transmis-

sion (CVT)

To tow a vehicle equipped with a CVT, an

appropriate vehicle dolly MUST be placed

under the towed vehicle’s drive wheels.

Always follow the dolly manufacturer’s

recommendations when using their pro-

duct.

Manual Transmission (MT)

. Always tow with the Manual Trans-

mission in Neutral.

. Your vehicle speed should never ex-

ceed 70 MPH (112 km/h) when flat

towing your vehicle.

. After towing 500 miles, start and idle

the engine with the transmission in

Neutral for two minutes. Failure to idle

the engine after every 500 miles of

towing may cause damage to the

transmission’s internal parts.

FLAT TOWING

DOT (Department Of Transportation)

Quality Grades: All passenger car tires

must conform to federal safety require-

ments in addition to these grades.

Quality grades can be found where ap-

plicable on the tire sidewall between

tread shoulder and maximum section

width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tempera-

ture A

TREADWEAR

The treadwear grade is a comparative

rating based on the wear rate of the tire

when tested under controlled conditions

on a specified government test course.

For example, a tire graded 150 would

wear one and one-half

(1 1/2) times as well on the government

course as a tire graded 100. The relative

performance of tires depends upon ac-

tual conditions of their use, however, and

may depart significantly from the norm

due to variations in driving habits, service

practices and differences in road charac-

teristics and climate.

TRACTION AA, A, B AND C

The traction grades, from highest to low-

est, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades

represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet

pavement as measured under controlled

conditions on specified government test

surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire

marked C may have poor traction perfor-

mance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this

tire is based on straight-ahead brak-

ing traction tests, and does not

include acceleration, cornering, hy-

droplaning, or peak traction charac-

teristics.

TEMPERATURE A, B AND C

The temperature grades A (the highest),

B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance

to the generation of heat and its ability to

dissipate heat when tested under con-

trolled conditions on a specified indoor

laboratory test wheel. Sustained high

temperature can cause the material of

the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life,

and excessive temperature can lead to

sudden tire failure. The grade C corre-

sponds to a level of performance which

all passenger car tires must meet under

the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dard No. 109. Grades B and A represent

higher levels of performance on the

laboratory test wheel than the minimum

required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is

established for a tire that is properly

inflated and not overloaded. Exces-

sive speed, under-inflation, or exces-

sive loading, either separately or in

combination, can cause heat build-

up and possible tire failure.

Technical and consumer information 10-17

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

10-18 Technical and consumer information

Your vehicle is covered by the following

emission warranties.

For USA:

. Emission Defects Warranty

. Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found

with other vehicle warranties in your

Warranty Information Booklet which

comes with your vehicle. If you did not

receive a Warranty Information Booklet,

or it has become lost, you may obtain a

replacement by writing to:

. Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canada:

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found

with other vehicle warranties in your

Warranty Information Booklet which

comes with your vehicle. If you did not

receive a Warranty Information Booklet,

or it has become lost, you may obtain a

replacement by writing to:

. Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario,

L4W 4Z5

For USA

If you believe that your vehicle has

a defect which could cause a crash

or could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform the Na-

tional Highway Traffic Safety Ad-

ministration (NHTSA) in addition to

notifying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar com-

plaints, it may open an investiga-

tion, and if it finds that a safety

defect exists in a group of vehicles,

it may order a recall and remedy

campaign. However, NHTSA cannot

become involved in individual pro-

blems between you, your dealer, or

NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the

Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-

888- 327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-

9153); go to http://www.safercar.

gov; or write to: Administrator,

NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,

Washington, D.C. 20590. You can

also obtain other information

about motor vehicle safety from

http://www.safercar.gov.

You may notify NISSAN by contact-

ing our Consumer Affairs Depart-

ment, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1.

For Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has

a defect which could cause a crash

or could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform Trans-

port Canada in addition to notifying

NISSAN.

If Transport Canada receives com-

plaints, it may open an investiga-

tion, and if it finds that a safety

defect exists in a group of vehicles,

it may request that NISSAN con-

duct a recall campaign. However,

Transport Canada cannot become

involved in individual problems be-

tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

You may contact Transport Cana-

da’s Defect Investigations and Re-

calls Division toll free at 1-800-333-

0510. You may also report safety

defects online at: https://

wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/

PCDB-BDPP/fc-cp.aspx?lang=eng

(English speakers) or https://

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/

PCDB-BDPP/fc-cp.aspx?lang=fra

(French speakers).

Additional information concerning

motor vehicle safety may be ob-

tained from Transport Canada’s

Road Safety Information Centre at

1-800-333-0371 or online at www.

tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English speak-

ers) or www.tc.gc.ca/securiterou-

tiere (French speakers).

To notify NISSAN of any safety

concerns please contact our Con-

sumer Information Centre toll free

at 1-800-387-0122.

WARNING

A vehicle equipped with All-Wheel

Drive (AWD) should never be tested

using a two wheel dynamometer

(such as the dynamometers used by

some states for emissions testing),

or similar equipment. Make sure you

inform test facility personnel that

your vehicle is equipped with AWD

before it is placed on a dynam-

ometer. Using the wrong test equip-

ment may result in transmission

damage or unexpected vehicle

movement which could result in

serious vehicle damage or personal

injury.

Due to legal requirements in some states/

areas or provinces, your vehicle may be

required to be in what is called the “ready

condition” for an Inspection/Maintenance

(I/M) test of the emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition”

when it is driven through certain driving

patterns. Usually, the “ready condition”

can be obtained by ordinary usage of

the vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is

repaired or the battery is disconnected,

the vehicle may be reset to a “not ready

condition”. Before taking the I/M test,

check the vehicle’s inspection/mainte-

nance test readiness condition. Place the

ignition switch in the ON position without

starting the engine. If the Malfunction

Indicator Light (MIL) comes on steady for

20 seconds and then blinks for 10 sec-

onds, the I/M test condition is “not ready”.

If the MIL does not blink after 20 seconds,

the I/M test condition is “ready”.

It is recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer to set “ready condition” or to

prepare the vehicle for testing.

Technical and consumer information 10-19

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/

MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

10-20 Technical and consumer information

This vehicle is equipped with an Event

Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of

an EDR is to record, in certain crash or

near crash-like situations, such as an air

bag deployment or hitting a road obsta-

cle, data that will assist in understanding

how a vehicle’s systems performed. The

EDR is designed to record data related to

vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a

short period of time, typically 30 seconds

or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed

to record such data as:

. How various systems in your vehicle

were operating;

. Whether or not the driver and passen-

ger safety belts were buckled/fas-

tened;

. How far (if at all) the driver was

depressing the accelerator and/or

brake pedal; and,

. How fast the vehicle was traveling.

. Sounds are not recorded.

These data can help provide a better

understanding of the circumstances in

which crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your

vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation

occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR

under normal driving conditions and no

personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and

crash location) are recorded. However,

other parties, such as law enforcement,

could combine the EDR data with the type

of personally identifying data routinely

acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special

equipment is required and access to the

vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition

to the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN

dealer, other parties, such as law enforce-

ment, that have the special equipment,

can read the information if they have

access to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data

will only be accessed with the consent of

the vehicle owner or lessee or as other-

wise required or permitted by law.

ADDITIONAL DATA RECORDING (on

vehicles equipped with optional

ProPILOT assist)

If your vehicle is equipped with the

optional ProPILOT assist, it will also be

equipped with supplemental data record-

ing function intended to assist in under-

standing how ProPILOT assist performs in

certain nontrivial crash or near-crash

scenarios. Specifically, supplemental re-

cording is designed to capture the follow-

ing:

. Driver operational status of the accel-

erator, brakes, steering, etc.

. Detection status of a vehicle ahead

and lane markers

. Vehicle information including distance

to vehicle ahead and lateral position

. Information on the operation of the

ProPILOT assist and other crash

avoidance features

. ProPILOT assist malfunction diagnosis

information

. External images from the multi-sen-

sing front camera (Available only

when the SRS air bag or AEB with

pedestrian detection system is acti-

vated)

The ProPILOT assist does not record

conversations, sounds or images of the

inside of the vehicle.

To read this supplemental data, special

equipment is required and access to the

vehicle or the recording unit is needed.

This supplemental data will only be ac-

cessed with the consent of the vehicle

owner or lessee or as otherwise required

or permitted by law. If downloaded,

NISSAN and third parties entrusted by

NISSAN may use the data recorded for the

purpose of improving NISSAN’s vehicle

safety performance.

NISSAN and third parties entrusted by

NISSAN will not disclose/provide the re-

corded data to a third party except:

. With the consent of the vehicle owner

or with the consent of the lessee

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)

. In response to an official request from

law enforcement, court order, govern-

mental agency, or other legally en-

forceable request

. For research purposes after the data

is modified such that it is no longer

tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle

owner (anonymized)

Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this

model year and prior can be purchased. A

genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the

best source of service and repair informa-

tion for your vehicle. This manual is the

same one used by the factory trained

technicians working at a NISSAN dealer.

Genuine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can

also be purchased.

In the USA:

For current pricing and availability of

genuine NISSAN Service Manuals con-

tact:

www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of

genuine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals con-

tact:

1-800-247-5321

In Canada:

To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN

Service Manual or Owner’s Manual for this

model year and prior please contact a

NISSAN dealer. For the phone number

and location of a NISSAN dealer in your

area call the NISSAN Information Center

at 1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN

representative will assist you.

Technical and consumer information 10-21

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE

MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

10-22 Technical and consumer information

MEMO

Technical and consumer information 10-23

10-24 Technical and consumer information

MEMO

11 Index

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) .................... 5-130

Active Ride Control ................................................. 5-135

Advanced air bag system..................................... 1-48

Air bag system

Advanced air bag system.............................. 1-48

Front and rear seat —mounted s

ide-impact supplemental air

bag system................................................................ 1-59

Front passenger air bag and

status light................................................................. 1-50

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

supplemental air bag system..................... 1-59

Air bag warning labels ............................................ 1-61

Air bag warning light................................. 1-62, 2-13

Air cleaner filter replacement............................ 8-15

Air cleaner housing filter ....................................... 8-15

Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation............................... 4-26

Air conditioner service...................................... 4-33

Air conditioner specification label....... 10-10

Air conditioning system refrigerant

and oil recommendations.............. 4-33, 10-6

Air duct removal........................................................... 8-15

Alarm, How to stop alarm (see vehicle

security system)............................................................ 2-47

Alcohol, drugs and driving ................................... 5-10

Android Auto....................................................................... 4-2

Antenna............................................................................... 4-34

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) .................... 5-130

Anti-lock braking system (ABS)

warning light................................................................... 2-13

Appearance care

Exterior appearance care ................................. 7-2

Interior appearance care................................... 7-4

Apple CarPlay®................................................................... 4-2

Armrest.................................................................................... 1-8

Audible reminders....................................................... 2-18

Audio.......................................................................................... 4-2

Automatic

Door locks...................................................................... 3-7

Automatic air conditioner .................................... 4-31

Automatic brake hold.............................................. 5-29

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)

system warning light................................................ 2-14

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with

pedestrian detection system............................. 5-97

Average speed............................................................... 2-40

Avoiding collision and rollover.............................. 5-8

Battery.................................................................................. 8-11

Battery replacement, Intelligent Key..... 8-23

Battery replacement, Key fob..................... 8-21

Battery saver system......................................... 2-57

Variable voltage control system .............. 8-13

Before starting the engine................................... 5-17

Blind Spot Warning (BSW)..................................... 5-46

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System ......... 4-2

Booster seats.................................................................. 1-38

Brake

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ............ 5-130

Brake and clutch fluid ......................................... 8-9

Brake system ....................................................... 5-129

Electronic parking brake

warning light............................................................ 2-14

Parking brake .......................................................... 5-27

Warning light............................................................ 2-11

Break-in schedule .................................................... 5-122

Brightness control

Instrument panel ..................................................... 2-9

Bulb check/instrument panel............................ 2-11

Bulb replacement........................................................ 8-25

Capacities and

recommended fluids/lubricants...................... 10-2

Car phone or CB radio............................................ 4-35

Card holder....................................................................... 2-72

Cargo area........................................................................ 2-70

Catalytic converter, Three way catalyst ....... 5-4

Chassis control............................................ 2-42, 5-133

Child restraints .............................................................. 1-21

Booster seats........................................................... 1-38

LATCH system......................................................... 1-24

Precautions on child restraints................. 1-22

Child safety....................................................................... 1-19

Child safety rear door lock ...................................... 3-7

Chimes

Seat belt warning light

and chime.................................................... 1-14, 2-12

Chimes, Audible reminders.................................. 2-18

Circuit breaker, Fusible link ................................. 8-19

Cleaning exterior and interior................... 7-2, 7-4

Clock...................................................................................... 2-42

Clutch fluid............................................................................ 8-9

Cockpit..................................................................................... 2-3

Cold weather driving............................................. 5-141

Console box ..................................................................... 2-71

Console light ................................................................... 2-81

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) fluid............................................................................... 8-9

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

position indicator ............................................................ 2-9

11-2

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control mode .................................................................. 5-91

Coolant

Capacities and

recommended fluids/lubricants............... 10-2

Changing engine coolant ................................. 8-6

Checking engine coolant level...................... 8-5

Corrosion protection .................................................... 7-7

Cruise control................................................................. 5-62

Cup holders...................................................................... 2-69

CVT, Driving with CVT (Continuously

Variable Transmission)............................. 5-13, 5-20

Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system....... 2-57

Defroster switch, Rear window and

outside mirror defroster switch....................... 2-51

Dimensions and weights....................................... 10-8

Display

Vehicle information display.......................... 2-19

Drive belt ............................................................................ 8-13

Driver and front passenger supplemental

knee air bag..................................................................... 1-57

Driving

Cold weather driving..................................... 5-141

Driving with CVT (Continuously

Variable Transmission)..................................... 5-20

Driving with manual transmission.......... 5-25

Intelligent 4x4 ..................................................... 5-123

On-pavement and off-road driving .......... 5-9

Precautions when starting

and driving.................................................................... 5-4

Safety precautions .............................................. 5-10

Dynamic driver assistance switch

(models without ProPILOT assist).................. 2-61

ECO mode switch........................................................ 2-64

ECO mode system...................................................... 5-32

Ambient ECO............................................................ 5-34

ECO Drive Report.................................................. 5-34

ECO Pedal Guide function............................. 5-33

Economy, Fuel............................................................. 5-123

Elapsed time.................................................................... 2-40

Elapsed time and trip odometer..................... 2-40

Electric power steering........................................ 5-128

Electric power steering warning light ........ 2-14

Emergency Call (SOS) button ............................ 2-67

Emergency tire puncture repair kit (if

so equipped).................................................................... 8-41

Emission control information label............ 10-10

Emission control system warranty ............ 10-18

Engine

Before starting the engine............................ 5-17

Break-in schedule ............................................ 5-122

Capacities and

recommended fluids/lubricants............... 10-2

Changing engine coolant ................................. 8-6

Changing engine oil and filter ...................... 8-6

Checking engine coolant level...................... 8-5

Checking engine oil level................................... 8-6

Coolant temperature gauge .......................... 2-7

Emergency engine shut off.............. 5-16, 6-3

Engine compartment

check locations ......................................................... 8-3

Engine cooling system........................................ 8-4

Engine oil........................................................................ 8-6

Engine oil and oil

filter recommendation ..................................... 10-5

Engine oil viscosity.............................................. 10-6

Engine serial number ........................................ 10-9

Engine specifications......................................... 10-7

Engine start operation indicator

(for Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) models) ........................ 2-31

Engine start operation indicator

(for Manual Transmission

(MT) models) ............................................................. 2-31

If your vehicle overheats................................ 6-16

Starting the engine.............................. 5-18, 5-19

Event Data Recorders (EDR)............................. 10-20

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ......................... 5-4

Explanation of scheduled

maintenance items........................................................ 9-5

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ......... 10-9

Filter

Air cleaner housing filter ................................ 8-15

Changing engine oil and filter ...................... 8-6

Flashers (See hazard warning

flasher switch).................................................................... 6-2

Flat tire..................................................................................... 6-3

Flat towing..................................................................... 10-16

Floor mat cleaning ......................................................... 7-5

Fluid

Brake and clutch fluid ......................................... 8-9

Capacities and

recommended fluids/lubricants............... 10-2

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) fluid....................................................................... 8-9

Engine coolant........................................................... 8-4

Engine oil........................................................................ 8-6

Window washer fluid ......................................... 8-10

Fog light switch............................................................ 2-59

Front manual seat adjustment............................ 1-4

Front passenger air bag and

status light........................................................................ 1-50

Front seat, Front seat adjustment .................... 1-4

Fuel

Capacities and

recommended fluids/lubricants............... 10-2

Fuel economy...................................................... 5-123

Fuel information.................................................... 10-3

Fuel octane rating ............................................... 10-3

Fuel-filler cap............................................................ 3-28

Fuel-filler door......................................................... 3-28

Gauge................................................................................ 2-8

Fuel Efficient Driving Tips................................... 5-122

Fuses...................................................................................... 8-18

Fusible links...................................................................... 8-19

Garage door opener

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver........... 2-83

Gas cap................................................................................ 3-28

Gauge........................................................................................ 2-5

Engine coolant temperature gauge......... 2-7

Fuel gauge .................................................................... 2-8

Odometer....................................................................... 2-6

Speedometer .............................................................. 2-6

Tachometer.................................................................. 2-7

General maintenance................................................... 9-2

Glove box ........................................................................... 2-71

Hazard warning flasher switch ............................ 6-2

Head restraints/headrests....................................... 1-8

Headlights

Bulb replacement................................................. 8-25

Headlight switch ................................................... 2-52

Heated seats ................................................................... 2-60

Heated steering wheel............................................ 2-59

Heater

Heater and air

conditioner operation....................................... 4-26

High beam assist ......................................................... 2-55

Hill start assist system ......................................... 5-136

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver.................. 2-83

Hood release ................................................................... 3-25

Hook

Luggage hook......................................................... 2-73

Horn........................................................................................ 2-59

How to enable/disable the

steering assist................................................................ 5-73

Ignition switch ............................................................... 5-14

Ignition switch (model without Intelligent

Key system)...................................................................... 5-12

Ignition switch positions ....................................... 5-15

Immobilizer system.................................................... 2-47

Indicator

Vehicle information display.......................... 2-19

indicator light

Electronic parking brake

indicator light .......................................................... 2-12

Inside mirror .................................................................... 3-32

Inspection/maintenance (I/M) test ............ 10-19

Instrument brightness control ............................. 2-9

Instrument panel ............................................................. 2-4

Intelligent 4x4 ............................................................. 5-123

Intelligent Around View® Monitor................... 4-10

Intelligent Auto Headlight system ................. 2-52

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) ......................... 5-75

Intelligent Cruise Control

(ICC) indicator................................................................. 2-34

Intelligent Driver Alertness................................... 5-94

Intelligent Engine Brake...................................... 5-134

Intelligent Forward Collision

Warning (I-FCW).......................................................... 5-107

Intelligent Key system ............................................. 3-11

Key operating range.......................................... 3-13

Key operation .......................................................... 3-14

Remote keyless operation ............................ 3-19

Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) .................. 5-40

Intelligent Trace Control..................................... 5-133

Interior light replacement..................................... 8-27

Interior light switch.................................................... 2-81

Interior lights................................................................... 2-80

ISOFIX child restraint ................................................ 1-24

Jump starting ................................................................. 6-14

Key

Ignition switch (model without

Intelligent Key system)..................................... 5-12

Ignition switch positions ................................ 5-15

Key positions................................................................... 5-14

Keyless entry

(See remote keyless entry system)........... 3-7

With Intelligent Key system

(See Intelligent Key system)......................... 3-19

Keys............................................................................................ 3-2

For Intelligent Key system............................. 3-11

Labels

Air bag warning labels ..................................... 1-61

Air conditioner specification label....... 10-10

Emission control information label .... 10-10

11-3

11-4

Engine serial number ........................................ 10-9

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

certification label .................................................. 10-9

Tire and Loading

information label................................ 8-31, 10-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN)........ 10-8

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)........................ 5-35

LATCH system................................................................ 1-24

License plate, Installing front

license plate.................................................................. 10-12

Liftgate

Liftgate release lever ......................................... 3-27

Operating manual liftgate............................. 3-26

Light

Air bag warning light......................................... 1-62

Bulb replacement................................................. 8-25

Fog light switch..................................................... 2-59

Headlight switch ................................................... 2-52

Headlights bulb replacement ..................... 8-25

Interior lights............................................................ 2-80

Map lights................................................................... 2-81

Replacement ............................................................ 8-25

Room light.................................................................. 2-82

Vanity mirror lights ............................................. 2-82

Warning/indicator lights and

audible reminders................................................ 2-10

Lights, Exterior and interior

light replacement........................................................ 8-27

Loading information (See vehicle

loading information) .............................................. 10-12

Lock

Automatic door locks........................................... 3-7

Door locks...................................................................... 3-5

Power door lock ....................................................... 3-5

Loose fuel cap warning.......................................... 3-30

Low tire pressure warning................................... 2-32

Low tire pressure warning (Low

tire pressure)................................................................... 2-32

Low tire pressure warning light ...................... 2-14

Low tire pressure warning system

(See Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS)).................................................................. 5-5

Luggage hooks ............................................................. 2-73

Maintenance

Battery........................................................................... 8-11

General maintenance........................................... 9-2

Inside the vehicle..................................................... 9-3

Maintenance precautions................................. 8-2

Maintenance requirements ............................. 9-2

Maintenance schedules...................................... 9-7

Outside the vehicle ................................................ 9-2

Seat belt maintenance..................................... 1-18

Standard maintenance....................................... 9-8

Maintenance schedules.............................................. 9-7

Malfunction indicator light (MIL)...................... 2-16

Manual air conditioner and heater............... 4-27

Manual front seat adjustment.............................. 1-4

Manual Transmission (MT) ................................... 5-13

Map lights.......................................................................... 2-81

Master warning light.................................. 2-12, 2-16

Mechanical key (Intelligent Key system)....... 3-4

Mechanical key (NISSAN Vehicle

Immobilizer System)...................................................... 3-3

Memory Seat................................................................... 3-34

Meters and gauges........................................................ 2-5

Instrument brightness control ..................... 2-9

Mirror

Inside mirror ............................................................. 3-32

Outside mirrors...................................................... 3-33

Vanity mirror ............................................................ 3-34

Moonroof............................................................................ 2-78

Moving Object Detection (MOD) ...................... 4-21

MR20DD engine model............................................... 8-4

New vehicle break-in............................................. 5-122

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ............ 2-47

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System key ...... 3-2

Odometer............................................................................... 2-6

Off-road recovery............................................................ 5-9

Oil

Capacities and

recommended fluids/lubricants............... 10-2

Changing engine oil and filter ...................... 8-6

Checking engine oil level................................... 8-6

Engine oil........................................................................ 8-6

Engine oil viscosity.............................................. 10-6

Operating ProPILOT assist................................... 5-69

Outside air temperature........................................ 2-43

Outside mirrors............................................................. 3-33

Overheat, If your vehicle overheats .............. 6-16

Owner’s Manual/Service Manual

order information..................................................... 10-21

Panic alarm............................................................ 3-9, 3-21

Parcel shelf ....................................................................... 2-73

Parking

Brake break-in .................................................... 5-129

Parking brake .......................................................... 5-27

Parking on hills................................................... 5-127

Parking brake

Electronic parking brake

indicator light .......................................................... 2-12

Phone

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone ..................... 4-2

Car phone or CB radio..................................... 4-35

Power

Electric power steering................................ 5-128

Power door lock ....................................................... 3-5

Power outlet............................................................. 2-65

Power windows ..................................................... 2-76

Power moonroof.......................................................... 2-78

Precautions

Braking precautions....................................... 5-129

Child restraints ....................................................... 1-22

Cruise control.......................................................... 5-63

Driving safety........................................................... 5-10

Maintenance................................................................ 8-2

On-pavement and off-road driving .......... 5-9

Seat belt usage ...................................................... 1-12

SRS ................................................................................... 1-42

When starting and driving................................ 5-4

ProPILOT assist ............................................................. 5-64

ProPILOT assist switches ...................................... 5-67

ProPILOT assist system display

and indicators ................................................................ 5-68

ProPILOT assist system operation ................ 5-66

Push starting................................................................... 6-16

Push-button ignition switch............................... 5-14

RAB system limitations........................................ 5-119

RAB system operation.......................................... 5-117

Radio

Car phone or CB radio..................................... 4-35

Rapid air pressure loss................................................ 5-9

Readiness for inspection/maintenance

(I/M) test........................................................................... 10-19

Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)....................... 5-116

Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system

warning light................................................................... 2-17

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)......................... 5-54

Rear door alert .............................................................. 2-63

Rear door lock, Child safety rear

door lock ................................................................................ 3-7

Rear seats.............................................................................. 1-7

Rear sonar system (RSS)..................................... 5-136

Rear window and outside mirror

defroster switch ........................................................... 2-51

Rear window wiper and washer switch .... 2-50

RearView Monitor............................................................ 4-2

Recorders, Event data .......................................... 10-20

Registering in another country........................ 10-8

Remote engine start................................................. 3-23

Remote keyless entry function, For

Intelligent Key system ............................................. 3-19

Remote keyless entry system ............................... 3-7

Repairing a flat tire (models with

emergency tire puncture repair kit)................. 6-9

Reporting safety defects.................................... 10-18

Roadside assistance program .............................. 6-2

Rollover.................................................................................... 5-8

Roof

Moonroof..................................................................... 2-79

Roof rack............................................................................ 2-75

Room light......................................................................... 2-82

Safety

Child seat belts....................................................... 1-19

Reporting safety defects............................ 10-18

Seat adjustment

Front manual seat adjustment.................... 1-4

Front seats.................................................................... 1-4

Seat belt(s)

Child safety................................................................ 1-19

Infants............................................................................ 1-19

Injured persons ...................................................... 1-15

Larger children ....................................................... 1-20

Precautions on seat belt usage................ 1-12

Pregnant women .................................................. 1-15

Seat belt cleaning ................................................... 7-6

Seat belt extenders............................................. 1-18

Seat belt maintenance..................................... 1-18

Seat belt warning light

and chime.................................................... 1-14, 2-12

Seat belts .................................................................... 1-12

Seat belts with pretensioners.................... 1-60

Shoulder belt height adjustment ............ 1-17

Small children.......................................................... 1-20

Three-point type with retractor............... 1-15

Seat(s)

Heated seats ............................................................ 2-60

Seats.................................................................................. 1-3

Security system (NISSAN Vehicle

Immobilizer System), Engine start................. 2-47

Security system, Vehicle

security system............................................................. 2-45

Servicing air conditioner........................................ 4-33

Shift lever

Shift lock release................................................... 5-24

Shift lock release

Transmission............................................................ 5-24

Shifting

CVT (Continuously

Variable Transmission)..................................... 5-20

Manual transmission ......................................... 5-25

11-5

11-6

Shoulder belt height adjustment, For

front seats......................................................................... 1-17

Soft bottle holders...................................................... 2-70

Spare tire............................................................. 8-40, 10-7

Spark plugs....................................................................... 8-14

Speedometer ...................................................................... 2-6

SPORT mode switch.................................................. 5-32

SRS

Precautions on SRS ............................................ 1-42

Standard maintenance............................................... 9-8

Starting

Before starting the engine............................ 5-17

Jump starting .......................................................... 6-14

Precautions when starting

and driving.................................................................... 5-4

Push starting............................................................ 6-16

Starting the engine.............................. 5-18, 5-19

Status light, Front passenger air bag......... 1-50

Steering

Electric power steering................................ 5-128

Heated steering wheel..................................... 2-59

Tilt/telescopic steering .................................... 3-30

Steering assist................................................................ 5-84

Steering assist switch (models with

ProPILOT assist)............................................................ 2-62

Storage ................................................................................ 2-69

Sun visors .......................................................................... 3-31

Sunglasses holder....................................................... 2-72

Supplemental air bag warning labels......... 1-61

Supplemental air bag

warning light.................................................... 1-62, 2-13

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)........ 1-42

Switch

Fog light switch..................................................... 2-59

Hazard warning flasher switch .................... 6-2

Headlight switch ................................................... 2-52

Ignition switch ........................................................ 5-12

Intelligent 4x4 LOCK switch ........................ 2-63

Intelligent Auto Headlight switch............ 2-52

Power door lock switch ..................................... 3-6

Rear window and outside mirror

defroster switch .................................................... 2-51

Turn signal switch ............................................... 2-58

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC)

off switch .................................................................... 2-62

System maintenance............................................. 5-121

System malfunction ............................................... 5-121

Tachometer.......................................................................... 2-7

Temperature gauge, Engine coolant

temperature gauge ....................................................... 2-7

Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer

System), Engine start ............................................... 2-47

Three-way catalyst......................................................... 5-4

Tilt/telescopic steering ........................................... 3-30

Tire pressure, Low tire pressure

warning light................................................................... 2-14

Tires

Flat tire............................................................................. 6-3

Low tire pressure warning system ........... 5-5

Tire and Loading

information label................................ 8-31, 10-10

Tire chains.................................................................. 8-36

Tire dressing................................................................ 7-4

Tire pressure ............................................................ 8-29

Tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS)................................................. 5-5, 6-3

Tire rotation.............................................................. 8-37

Types of tires ........................................................... 8-35

Uniform tire quality grading.................... 10-17

Wheel/tire size ........................................................ 10-7

Wheels and tires.................................................... 8-29

Towing

Tow truck towing................................................. 6-18

Towing a trailer.................................................. 10-15

TPMS, Tire pressure monitoring system....... 5-5

TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert......................... 5-8

TPMS, Tire pressure warning system.............. 6-3

Traffic Sign Recognition......................................... 2-43

Trailer towing .............................................................. 10-15

Transceiver

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver........... 2-83

Transmission

Continuously Variable Transmission..... 5-13

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) fluid....................................................................... 8-9

Driving with CVT (Continuously

Variable Transmission)..................................... 5-20

Driving with manual transmission.......... 5-25

Transmission shift lever lock release..... 5-24

Transmitter (See remote keyless

entry system)...................................................................... 3-7

Transmitter, With Intelligent Key system

(See Intelligent Key system)................................ 3-19

Traveling or registering in

another country ........................................................... 10-8

Trip computer ................................................................ 2-40

Trip odometer................................................................ 2-40

Turn signal switch ...................................................... 2-58

Turning the conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode ON......................................... 5-69

Turning the RAB system ON/OFF............... 5-117

Underbody cleaning...................................................... 7-3

Uniform tire quality grading............................ 10-17

USB (Universal Serial Bus)

charging connector................................................... 2-66

Vanity mirror ................................................................... 3-34

Vanity mirror lights .................................................... 2-82

Variable voltage control system ..................... 8-13

Vehicle

Dimensions and weights................................ 10-8

Identification number (VIN)........................... 10-8

Loading information ...................................... 10-12

Recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle).......... 6-21

Security system...................................................... 2-45

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC)

off switch .................................................................... 2-62

Vehicle dynamic control

(VDC) system........................................................ 5-131

Vehicle information display................................. 2-19

How to use the vehicle

information display............................................. 2-20

Settings......................................................................... 2-21

Startup display ....................................................... 2-20

Vehicle information display warnings

and indicators ......................................................... 2-31

Ventilators......................................................................... 4-25

Warning

Hazard warning flasher switch .................... 6-2

Intelligent Forward Collision

Warning (I-FCW).................................................. 5-107

Low tire pressure warning............................ 2-32

Tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS)................................................. 5-5, 6-3

Vehicle information display.......................... 2-19

Warning lights, indicator lights and

audible reminders................................................ 2-10

Warning labels, Air bag warning labels...... 1-61

Warning light

Air bag warning light.......................... 1-62, 2-13

Anti-lock braking system (ABS)

warning light............................................................ 2-13

Brake warning light ............................................ 2-11

Electric power steering

warning light............................................................ 2-14

Electronic parking brake

warning light............................................................ 2-14

Low tire pressure warning light ............... 2-14

Seat belt warning light

and chime.................................................... 1-14, 2-12

Warranty, Emission control

system warranty....................................................... 10-18

Washer switch

Rear window wiper and

washer switch......................................................... 2-50

Wiper and washer switch .............................. 2-48

Washing................................................................................... 7-2

Waxing...................................................................................... 7-2

Weights (See dimensions and weights)..... 10-8

Wheel/tire size ............................................................... 10-7

Wheels and tires........................................................... 8-29

Care of wheels........................................................... 7-3

Cleaning aluminum alloy wheels................ 7-3

Window washer fluid ................................................ 8-10

Window(s)

Cleaning.......................................................................... 7-3

Power windows ..................................................... 2-76

Wiper

Rear window wiper and

washer switch......................................................... 2-50

Rear window wiper blade.............................. 8-17

Wiper and washer switch .............................. 2-48

Wiper blades ............................................................. 8-16

Wiper and washer switch ..................................... 2-48

11-7

MEMO

FUEL INFORMATION:

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an

octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-

Knock Index) number (Research octane

number 91).

CAUTION

. Using a fuel other than that spe-

cified could adversely affect the

emission control system, and

may also affect warranty cover-

age.

. Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because

this will damage the three-way

catalyst.

. Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in

your vehicle. Your vehicle is not

designed to run on E-15 or E-85

fuel. Using E-15 or E-85 fuel in a

vehicle not specifically designed

for E-15 or E-85 fuel can adversely

affect the emission control de-

vices and systems of the vehicle.

Damage caused by such fuel is

not covered by the NISSAN new

vehicle limited warranty.

. Do not use fuel that contains the

octane booster methylcyclopen-

tadienyl manganese tricarbonyl

(MMT). Using fuel containing

MMT may adversely affect vehicle

performance and vehicle emis-

sions. Not all fuel dispensers are

labeled to indicate MMT content,

so you may have to consult your

gasoline retailer for more details.

Note that Federal and California

laws prohibit the use of MMT in

reformulated gasoline.

. U.S. government regulations re-

quire ethanol dispensing pumps

to be identified by a small,

square, orange and black label

with the common abbreviation or

the appropriate percentage for

that region.

For additional information, see “Capaci-

ties and recommended fluids/lubricants”

(P.10-2).

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:

See “Capacities and recommended fluids/

lubricants” (P.10-2) for engine oil and oil

filter recommendation.

COLD TIRE PRESSURES:

The label is typically located on the driver

side center pillar. For additional informa-

tion, see “Wheels and tires” (P.8-29).

NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCE-

DURES RECOMMENDATION:

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of

vehicle use, follow the recommendations

outlined in the “Break-in schedule” (P.5-

122) of this Owner’s Manual. Follow these

recommendations for the future reliability

and economy of your new vehicle.

GAS STATION INFORMATION

J11-D

Printing : July 2021

Publication No.:

Printed in the U.S.A.

OM21E0 0J11U2

Nissan 2021 ROGUE SPORT SL FWD XTRONIC CVT®

Product's Documents

User Manual

Specifications

Nissan 2021 ROGUE SPORT SL FWD XTRONIC CVT Questions and Answers

Related Products

‎CCS1-1KV-BLACK NACS to CCS Adapter, Tesla Supercharger Adapter 500A/1000V DC Fast Charging, Fit for V3/V4 Tesla Chargers, Compatible with Ford Rivian GM Nissan Volvo CCS1 EVs

Vevor DQ9003H3 Ignition Coil Pack and Spark Plugs Set for Nissan Infiniti EX35 High Performance and Reliability

Vevor DQ9003B Ignition Coil Pack and Spark Plugs Set of 6 Compatible with Nissan Infiniti

Vevor Ignition Coil Pack and Spark Plugs Set of 4 for Nissan Altima Versa Reliable Performance and Compatibility

DK2 86625 Custom Mount Kit Nissan Titan '04-'15, Armada '04-'15

DK2 Mount Kit for Nissan Frontier Pickup 05-18, Xterra 05-14, Pathfinder 05-15 - Custom Fit and Easy Installation